WM Quartis User Manual PDF

User Manual
WM | Quartis R2018-2
Metrosoft QUARTIS ® R2018-2 User Manual
© 2018 WENZEL Metromec AG
All rights, including those of reprinting, replication of parts of this manual and its translation are reserved by
WENZEL Metromec AG.
No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form or copied with the aid of electronic replication systems
without the written approval of WENZEL Metromec AG.
Subject to technical revisions during the course of further development.
August 2018
WENZEL Metromec AG
Rheinfelsstrasse 1
7007 Chur
Switzerland
Tel. +41 81 257 07 00

Fax +41 81 257 07 01
www.wenzel-metromec.ch
metromec@wenzel-metromec.ch
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
1 Fluent User Interface 20

1.1 Live preview .......................................................................................................................................... 21
2 Quartis button 22
2.1 New .......................................................................................................................................... 25
2.1.1 Create
..........................................................................................................................................................................
new measurement database 25
2.1.2 Create
..........................................................................................................................................................................
new work piece 26
2.1.3 Create
..........................................................................................................................................................................
new measurement 28
2.1.4 Create
..........................................................................................................................................................................
new program 30
2.1.5 Create
..........................................................................................................................................................................
new report, new template or new report paper 33
2.1.6 Create
..........................................................................................................................................................................
new quick selection table 35
2.2 Open .......................................................................................................................................... 37
2.2.1 Open
..........................................................................................................................................................................
measurement database 37
2.2.2 Open
..........................................................................................................................................................................
work piece 38
2.2.3 Open
..........................................................................................................................................................................
measurement 38
2.2.4 Open
..........................................................................................................................................................................
program 39
2.2.5 Open
..........................................................................................................................................................................
report, template or report paper 40
2.2.6 Open
..........................................................................................................................................................................
quick selection table 42
2.3 Save .......................................................................................................................................... 43
2.3.1 Save
..........................................................................................................................................................................
CAD model under a new name 43
2.3.2 Save
..........................................................................................................................................................................
active program 44
2.3.3 Save
..........................................................................................................................................................................
2.3.4 Save
..........................................................................................................................................................................
settings 47
2.4 Print .......................................................................................................................................... 47
2.4.1 Print
..........................................................................................................................................................................
2.5 Import .......................................................................................................................................... 49
2.5.1 Import
..........................................................................................................................................................................
(convert) CAD models 49
Options for loading CAD files 52
Converter options for CAD files 53
2.5.2 Import
..........................................................................................................................................................................
or link programs 56
2.5.3 Import
..........................................................................................................................................................................
elements or points from VDA file 60
2.5.4 Import
..........................................................................................................................................................................
probe systems from file 62
2.6 Export .......................................................................................................................................... 64
2.6.1 Export
..........................................................................................................................................................................
programs 64
2.6.2 Export
..........................................................................................................................................................................
difference of coordinate systems 66
2.6.3 Export
..........................................................................................................................................................................
features in Q-DAS format 68
WM | Quartis ® R2018-2 Table of Contents 3

Table of Contents
Q-DAS field configuration 70

2.6.4 Export
..........................................................................................................................................................................
feature and statistical data 72
Template file for feature and statistical data export 75
Worksheets within the template file 75
Output of user defined properties 76
Output of statistical data 78
Output of feature data - on one worksheet 78
Output of feature data - one worksheet per feature 80
Additional field definitions 81
2.6.5 Export
..........................................................................................................................................................................
element data into BMWIpp format 82
Meta data with BMWIpp data export 87
2.6.6 Export
..........................................................................................................................................................................
elements into CAD file 88
2.6.7 Export
..........................................................................................................................................................................
probe systems in CM system database 91
2.7 Work window .......................................................................................................................................... 94
2.7.1 Display
..........................................................................................................................................................................
and edit database 94
2.7.2 Display,
..........................................................................................................................................................................
edit and execute programs 95
2.7.3 Display
..........................................................................................................................................................................
and edit report 96
2.7.4 Show
..........................................................................................................................................................................
quick access for program start 97
2.7.5 Display
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Feature Data 98
2.7.6 Statistical
..........................................................................................................................................................................
evaluation of features 98
2.8 Extras .......................................................................................................................................... 100
2.8.1 Configure
..........................................................................................................................................................................
external programs 100
2.8.2 Start
..........................................................................................................................................................................
remote support with support partner 103
2.9 Quartis Options .......................................................................................................................................... 104
2.9.1 Change
..........................................................................................................................................................................
personal settings 104
2.9.2 Adjust
..........................................................................................................................................................................
the quick access toolbar 105
2.9.3 Adjust
..........................................................................................................................................................................
machine settings 107
Collision control settings 110
Execute programs with machine synchronization 112
2.9.4 Adjust
..........................................................................................................................................................................
measurement settings 113
2.9.5 Adjust
..........................................................................................................................................................................
evaluation settings 114
2.9.6 Adjust
..........................................................................................................................................................................
graphics settings 117
2.9.7 Adjust
..........................................................................................................................................................................
database settings 119
2.9.8 Adjust
..........................................................................................................................................................................
statistics settings 121
2.9.9 Adjust
..........................................................................................................................................................................
report settings 123
2.9.10 Adjust
..........................................................................................................................................................................
system settings 124
2.9.11 Display
..........................................................................................................................................................................
general information about WM | Quartis 127
3 Quick Access Toolbar 129

4 Ribbon 130
4.1 Groups .......................................................................................................................................... 130

Table of Contents
4.2 Contextual tabs .......................................................................................................................................... 131
5 Element window 133

5.1 Display previous element
.......................................................................................................................................... 134
5.2 Display next element.......................................................................................................................................... 134
5.3 Load element in element
..........................................................................................................................................
window (via list) 134
5.4 Load element in element
..........................................................................................................................................
window (via mouse tool) 135
5.5 Exchange contents of
..........................................................................................................................................
element window 136
5.6 Lock element in right..........................................................................................................................................
element window 136
5.7 Edit element .......................................................................................................................................... 138
6 Workspace 140
6.1 Customize workspace
.......................................................................................................................................... 140
7 Status window 142

7.1 Machine mode display
.......................................................................................................................................... 142
7.2 Display of machine identification
..........................................................................................................................................
and status of collision control 143
7.3 Display of currently loaded
..........................................................................................................................................
work piece 143
..........................................................................................................................................
measurement 144
7.5 Program information.......................................................................................................................................... 144
..........................................................................................................................................
reference sphere 145
7.7 Display of current probe
..........................................................................................................................................
head position 145
..........................................................................................................................................
probe system 145
..........................................................................................................................................
stylus and probe mode 145
7.10 Display of current coordinate
..........................................................................................................................................
system 146
7.11 Average machine/work
..........................................................................................................................................
piece temperature display 146
7.12 Virtual joystick, click..........................................................................................................................................
probe point on CAD model and simulation speed 147
7.13 Current coordinates display
.......................................................................................................................................... 148
7.14 Display of active measurement
..........................................................................................................................................
units 149
8 Database 150
8.1 Information about the
..........................................................................................................................................
database 150
8.2 Create new measurement
..........................................................................................................................................
database 150
8.3 Open measurement database
.......................................................................................................................................... 152
8.4 Display and edit database
.......................................................................................................................................... 153

Table of Contents
8.5 Adjust database settings

.......................................................................................................................................... 154
8.6 Create user defined properties
.......................................................................................................................................... 155
8.7 Edit database .......................................................................................................................................... 157
8.7.1 Copy
..........................................................................................................................................................................
data 157
8.7.2 Paste
..........................................................................................................................................................................
data 158
8.7.3 Delete
..........................................................................................................................................................................
data 161
8.7.4 Edit
..........................................................................................................................................................................
data 162
8.7.5 Search
..........................................................................................................................................................................
data 163
8.8 Customize View .......................................................................................................................................... 165
8.8.1 Print
..........................................................................................................................................................................
data 165
8.8.2 Split
..........................................................................................................................................................................
database view 165
8.8.3 Close
..........................................................................................................................................................................
database window 166
8.9 Display data details .......................................................................................................................................... 168
9 CAD Model 169

9.1 Import (convert) CAD..........................................................................................................................................
models 169
9.1.1 Edit
..........................................................................................................................................................................
CAD coordinate system 172
9.2 Save CAD model under
..........................................................................................................................................
a new name 173
9.3 Change CAD model .......................................................................................................................................... 174
9.4 Delete CAD model .......................................................................................................................................... 176
9.5 Options for loading CAD
..........................................................................................................................................
files 177
9.6 Converter options for
..........................................................................................................................................
CAD files 178
9.7 Converter .......................................................................................................................................... 181
9.7.1 ACIS
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Converter 181
9.7.2 CATIA
..........................................................................................................................................................................
V4 Converter 182
9.7.3 CATIA
..........................................................................................................................................................................
V5 Converter 183
9.7.4 DXF
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Converter 184
9.7.5 IGES
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Converter 185
9.7.6 INS
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Converter 186
9.7.7 Inventor
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Converter 186
9.7.8 Parasolid
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Converter 187
9.7.9 ProEngineer
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Converter 188
9.7.10 Siemens
..........................................................................................................................................................................
NX Converter 189
9.7.11 Solid
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Edge converter 190
9.7.12 SolidWorks
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Converter 191
9.7.13 STEP
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Converter 192
9.7.14 VDA
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Converter 193
9.7.15 User
..........................................................................................................................................................................
format Converter 194
Table of Contents
10 Program 198
..........................................................................................................................................
program 198
10.2 Program settings .......................................................................................................................................... 199
10.3 Create new program.......................................................................................................................................... 201
10.4 Program from list with
..........................................................................................................................................
elements and features 204
10.4.1 Structure
..........................................................................................................................................................................
of a file in BMW Format 207
10.4.2 Structure
..........................................................................................................................................................................
of a file in Daimler/Audi Format 208
10.5 Mirror program .......................................................................................................................................... 210
10.6 Open program .......................................................................................................................................... 212
10.7 Save active program.......................................................................................................................................... 212
10.8 Import or link programs
.......................................................................................................................................... 214
10.9 Export programs .......................................................................................................................................... 218
10.10 Display, edit and execute
..........................................................................................................................................
programs 220
10.11 Execute program .......................................................................................................................................... 221
10.11.1 Check
..........................................................................................................................................................................
program 221
10.11.2 Execute
..........................................................................................................................................................................
program in new measurement 223
10.11.3 Execute
..........................................................................................................................................................................
program with parameter or selective parameter modification 223
10.11.4 Execute
..........................................................................................................................................................................
program in current measurement 225
10.11.5 Execute
..........................................................................................................................................................................
program in single step mode 225
10.11.6 Pause
..........................................................................................................................................................................
program 226
10.11.7 Stop
..........................................................................................................................................................................
program 227
10.11.8 Execute
..........................................................................................................................................................................
selection 228
10.11.9 Execute
..........................................................................................................................................................................
from cursor 229
10.11.10 Execute
..........................................................................................................................................................................
to cursor 230
10.11.11 Set
..........................................................................................................................................................................
execution position 231
10.12 DMIS Results Export .......................................................................................................................................... 231
10.12.1 Information
..........................................................................................................................................................................
about the DMIS results output 231
10.12.2 DMIS
..........................................................................................................................................................................
results output when executing Quartis program sentences 232
10.12.3 Behavior
..........................................................................................................................................................................
of DMIS results output in connection with program interruptions 236
10.13 Record program .......................................................................................................................................... 237
10.13.1 Delete
..........................................................................................................................................................................
backwards 239
10.13.2 Set
..........................................................................................................................................................................
insertion point 239
10.14 Edit program .......................................................................................................................................... 240
10.14.1 Activate
..........................................................................................................................................................................
edit mode 242
10.14.2 Simultaneously
..........................................................................................................................................................................
edit multiple program sentences 244
Simultaneously edit multiple program sentences - Features automatically created during
measurement 247

Table of Contents
Simultaneously edit multiple program sentences - Projection onto CAD 249

Simultaneously edit multiple program sentences - Replace probe systems 251
10.14.3 Deactivate/Activate
..........................................................................................................................................................................
program sentences 253
10.15 Use program functions
.......................................................................................................................................... 254
10.15.1 CNC
..........................................................................................................................................................................
mode on/off 254
10.15.2 Insert
..........................................................................................................................................................................
intermediate point 255
10.15.3 Insert
..........................................................................................................................................................................
dialog 256
10.15.4 Insert
..........................................................................................................................................................................
image, sound or video 257
10.15.5 Insert
..........................................................................................................................................................................
comment 259
10.15.6 Insert
..........................................................................................................................................................................
marker 261
10.15.7 Call
..........................................................................................................................................................................
subprogram 262
10.15.8 Insert
..........................................................................................................................................................................
program loop 263
10.15.9 Insert
..........................................................................................................................................................................
branch 264
10.15.10 Insert
..........................................................................................................................................................................
jump to marker 267
10.15.11 Increase
..........................................................................................................................................................................
/ Decrease current measurement number 267
10.15.12 Edit
..........................................................................................................................................................................
measurement properties 268
10.15.13 Start
..........................................................................................................................................................................
/ Finish DMIS results output 269
10.16 Change and print view
.......................................................................................................................................... 271
10.16.1 Activate/Deactivate
..........................................................................................................................................................................
split program view 271
10.16.2 Print
..........................................................................................................................................................................
program 272
10.16.3 Close
..........................................................................................................................................................................
program window 272
10.17 Display program sentence
..........................................................................................................................................
details 273
10.18 Set/Delete breakpoint
.......................................................................................................................................... 274
11 Multiple machine network 275

11.1 Information about multiple
..........................................................................................................................................
machine mode / multiple machine network 275
11.2 Synchronize multiple..........................................................................................................................................
machine network 276
11.3 Send elements / PCS.......................................................................................................................................... 277
11.4 Receive elements / PCS
.......................................................................................................................................... 278
12 Machine 280
..........................................................................................................................................
machine 280
12.2 Adjust machine settings
.......................................................................................................................................... 280
12.2.1 Change
..........................................................................................................................................................................
measuring-/search-/retraction distance 280
12.2.2 Change
..........................................................................................................................................................................
positioning speed and acceleration 282
12.2.3 Change
..........................................................................................................................................................................
measuring speed and acceleration 283
12.2.4 Change
..........................................................................................................................................................................
articulating probing system settings 284
12.2.5 Change
..........................................................................................................................................................................
scanning settings 287
12.3 Change joystick direction
.......................................................................................................................................... 288
Table of Contents
12.4 Move machine to origin

.......................................................................................................................................... 289
12.5 Activate/Deactivate ..........................................................................................................................................
axis drives 291
12.6 Position machine .......................................................................................................................................... 293
12.7 Adjust temperature compensation
..........................................................................................................................................
settings 294
12.8 Couple machine .......................................................................................................................................... 299
13 Rotary table 301

..........................................................................................................................................
rotary table 301
13.2 Rotary table settings.......................................................................................................................................... 301
13.3 Calibrate rotary table.......................................................................................................................................... 302
13.4 Position rotary table.......................................................................................................................................... 304
14 Probe system 306

..........................................................................................................................................
probe system 306
14.2 Adjust probe system..........................................................................................................................................
settings 306
14.3 Switch probing mode
.......................................................................................................................................... 308
14.4 Calibrate probe system
.......................................................................................................................................... 309
14.4.1 Calibrate
..........................................................................................................................................................................
probe system manually or semi-automatically 309
14.4.2 Calibrate
..........................................................................................................................................................................
probe system automatically 311
Create calibration list via matrix 313
Create calibration list via program 315
Create calibration list for PH10-iQ 317
14.4.3 Calibrate
..........................................................................................................................................................................
probe system for PHS 318
14.5 Set up probe system .......................................................................................................................................... 319
14.6 Load probe system .......................................................................................................................................... 324
14.7 Save probe system .......................................................................................................................................... 326
14.8 Create PH10-iQ probe
..........................................................................................................................................
system 327
14.9 Adjust probe system.......................................................................................................................................... 328
14.10 Optimize probe system
.......................................................................................................................................... 330
14.11 Determine volumetric
..........................................................................................................................................
probing deviation 332
14.12 Define stylus form .......................................................................................................................................... 333
14.13 Enter stylus offset .......................................................................................................................................... 335
15 Reference sphere 337

..........................................................................................................................................
reference sphere 337
15.2 Adjust reference sphere
..........................................................................................................................................
settings 337

Table of Contents
15.3 Load reference sphere

.......................................................................................................................................... 338
15.4 Calibrate reference sphere
.......................................................................................................................................... 339
16 Articulating probing system 342

..........................................................................................................................................
articulating probing system 342
16.2 Change articulating probing
..........................................................................................................................................
system settings 342
16.3 Swivel and rotate articulating
..........................................................................................................................................
probing system 343
16.4 Calibrate articulating..........................................................................................................................................
probing system PH10 345
probing system PH10-iQ 348
probing system PHS 350
17 Stylus changing system 353

17.1 Information about stylus
..........................................................................................................................................
changing system 353
17.2 Deposit probe and retrieve
..........................................................................................................................................
from a slot 353
17.3 Define a probe system
..........................................................................................................................................
component (slot content) 355
17.4 Calibrate stylus changing
..........................................................................................................................................
system 357
18 Measure 362
18.1 Information about measuring
.......................................................................................................................................... 362
18.2 Adjust measuring settings
.......................................................................................................................................... 364
18.3 Measure element .......................................................................................................................................... 366
18.3.1 Actions
.......................................................................................................................................................................... 371
18.3.2 Contextual
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Tab Geometry 371
Define/Edit nominal values 371
Element description 374
Measure circle on cone/sphere 376
Projection onto CAD 379
Manually pre-probe element 379
Measuring with measuring aid 381
Select/Edit reference 382
Select/Change relative reference 384
Define/Edit material thickness 387
Select calculation method 388
Calculation options 389
Standard 390
X-, Y-, X-axis 392
Move to nominal point 392
Least squares (Gauss) 393
Chebyshev 394
Minimum circumscribed 395
Maximum inscribed 396

Table of Contents
Tangential outside 397

Tangential inside 397
Perpendicular 398
Rounded 399
Planar, direct / Planar, transformed / Axial, direct 400
Spline 402
Eliminate outliers 404
Filter elements 405
18.3.3 Contextual
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Tab Distribution 408
Define/Edit distribution method and parameter 408
Triggered probe mode 409
Scanning probe mode 413
Pecking probe mode 417
Centering probe mode 418
Distribution method Mesh type 420
Define limitation 421
Thin out points 423
Define/Edit safety plane 423
18.3.4 Contextual
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Tab Edit 425
18.3.5 Contextual
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Tab Features 426
18.3.6 Contextual
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Tab Repeat 427
18.3.7 Contextual
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Tab Progress 430
Edit measuring sequence 430
View measurement progress 430
Increase/Decrease number of points 430
18.3.8 Contextual
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Tab Head orientation 431
Critical angles 432
Fixed angles 433
Focal point 433
18.4 Determine roughness
.......................................................................................................................................... 434
18.4.1 Output
..........................................................................................................................................................................
of roughness parameter and roughness profile 438
19 Construct 439
19.1 Information about constructing
..........................................................................................................................................
elements 439
19.2 Create element with ..........................................................................................................................................
input 439
19.2.1 Create
..........................................................................................................................................................................
surfaces using CAD data 441
19.2.2 Calculate
..........................................................................................................................................................................
theoretical element 442
19.3 Create element out of
..........................................................................................................................................
existing elements 442
19.3.1 Create
..........................................................................................................................................................................
intersection element out of two elements 442
19.3.2 Create
..........................................................................................................................................................................
symmetry element out of two elements 444
19.3.3 Create
..........................................................................................................................................................................
connection element out of two elements 446
19.3.4 Create
..........................................................................................................................................................................
a construction element of several elements 447
Construct surfaces using curves 450
19.3.5 Create
..........................................................................................................................................................................
top of cone 451
Table of Contents
19.3.6 Create
..........................................................................................................................................................................
extract element out of curve 451
19.3.7 Create
..........................................................................................................................................................................
min/max element 453
19.3.8 Create
..........................................................................................................................................................................
offset point 454
19.3.9 Create
..........................................................................................................................................................................
offset line 456
19.3.10 Create
..........................................................................................................................................................................
offset plane 457
19.3.11 Create
..........................................................................................................................................................................
parallel element 462
19.3.12 Create
..........................................................................................................................................................................
perpendicular element 463
19.3.13 Create
..........................................................................................................................................................................
projection element 465
19.3.14 Create
..........................................................................................................................................................................
tangent element 467
19.3.15 Construction
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Tables 470
Intersection 470
Symmetry 472
Connection 474
Min/Max element 475
Offset Line 477
Parallel 478
Perpendicular 479
Projection 480
20 Align/Coordinate system 482

..........................................................................................................................................
coordinate system 482
20.2 Switch between PCS/PLCS/RCS
.......................................................................................................................................... 482
20.3 Load coordinate system
.......................................................................................................................................... 483
20.4 Save coordinate system
.......................................................................................................................................... 484
20.5 Delete coordinate system
.......................................................................................................................................... 485
20.6 Create a coordinate system with primary direction, secondary direction
and origin .......................................................................................................................................... 486
20.6.1 Define
..........................................................................................................................................................................
primary direction 486
20.6.2 Define
..........................................................................................................................................................................
secondary direction 487
20.6.3 Define
..........................................................................................................................................................................
origin 488
20.7 Define coordinate system
..........................................................................................................................................
using reference point systems (RPS) 489
20.8 Define coordinate system
..........................................................................................................................................
using Bestfit 491
20.9 Relocate coordinate ..........................................................................................................................................
system 494
20.10 Rotate coordinate system
.......................................................................................................................................... 495
20.11 Synchronize coordinate
..........................................................................................................................................
system and CAD model coordinate system 497
20.12 Export difference of ..........................................................................................................................................
coordinate systems 498
21 Features 501
..........................................................................................................................................
evaluation 501

Table of Contents
21.2 Static and dynamic features

.......................................................................................................................................... 501
21.3 Reference system according
..........................................................................................................................................
to ASME (Dialog) 503
..........................................................................................................................................
to ASME (Ribbon) 529
..........................................................................................................................................
to ISO GPS 558
21.6 Coordinate planes and
..........................................................................................................................................
coordinate axes 571
21.7 Edit defaults .......................................................................................................................................... 572
21.7.1 Edit
..........................................................................................................................................................................
default fix tolerances 572
21.7.2 Edit
..........................................................................................................................................................................
general ISO and DIN tolerances 575
Adjust ISO 2768 tolerances 575
Adjust DIN 1688 tolerances 576
21.7.3 Load
..........................................................................................................................................................................
company specific tolerances 579
21.7.4 Overview
..........................................................................................................................................................................
of default tolerances in WM | Quartis 580
21.7.5 Select
..........................................................................................................................................................................
default tolerances 591
21.7.6 Select
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Cartesian/polar output for evaluation 591
21.7.7 Select
..........................................................................................................................................................................
evaluation (ISO GPS or ASME Y14.5) 592
21.8 Evaluate standard features
.......................................................................................................................................... 593
21.8.1 Evaluate
..........................................................................................................................................................................
form deviation of an element 593
21.8.2 Evaluate
..........................................................................................................................................................................
size of an element 594
21.8.3 Evaluate
..........................................................................................................................................................................
half size of an element 595
21.8.4 Evaluate
..........................................................................................................................................................................
position of an element 597
21.8.5 Evaluate
..........................................................................................................................................................................
distance between elements 599
Contemplation for the distance evaluation of elements 600
21.8.6 Evaluate
..........................................................................................................................................................................
projection angle between elements 602
21.8.7 Evaluate
..........................................................................................................................................................................
3D angle between elements 603
21.8.8 Evaluate
..........................................................................................................................................................................
turning point of an element 604
21.8.9 Evaluate
..........................................................................................................................................................................
position deviation dAB of an element 606
21.8.10 Enter
..........................................................................................................................................................................
user specific feature 607
Calculate user specific feature 610
21.9 Calculation method —
..........................................................................................................................................
Features 611
21.9.1 Element
.......................................................................................................................................................................... 611
21.9.2 Two-point
..........................................................................................................................................................................
size 612
21.9.3 Envelope
..........................................................................................................................................................................
requirement 613
21.10 Evaluate form features
.......................................................................................................................................... 613
21.10.1 Evaluate
..........................................................................................................................................................................
straightness tolerance 613
21.10.2 Evaluate
..........................................................................................................................................................................
flatness tolerance 615
21.10.3 Evaluate
..........................................................................................................................................................................
roundness tolerance 616
21.10.4 Evaluate
..........................................................................................................................................................................
cylindricity tolerance 617

Table of Contents
21.10.5 Evaluate
..........................................................................................................................................................................
profile tolerance of any line 618
21.10.6 Evaluate
..........................................................................................................................................................................
profile tolerance of any surface 620
21.10.7 Select
..........................................................................................................................................................................
tolerance zone 622
21.11 Evaluate position features
.......................................................................................................................................... 626
21.11.1 Evaluate
..........................................................................................................................................................................
position tolerance (Dialog) 626
21.11.2 Evaluate
..........................................................................................................................................................................
position tolerance (Ribbon) 630
21.11.3 Evaluate
..........................................................................................................................................................................
concentricity and coaxiality tolerance 634
21.11.4 Evaluate
..........................................................................................................................................................................
symmetry tolerance 638
21.11.5 Evaluate
..........................................................................................................................................................................
angularity tolerance 639
21.11.6 Evaluate
..........................................................................................................................................................................
parallelism tolerance 642
21.11.7 Evaluate
..........................................................................................................................................................................
perpendicularity tolerance 644
21.11.8 Evaluate
..........................................................................................................................................................................
circular and planar run-out tolerance 646
21.11.9 Evaluate
..........................................................................................................................................................................
total circular and planar run-out tolerance 648
22 Report 650
..........................................................................................................................................
report 650
22.2 Open report, template
..........................................................................................................................................
or report paper 650
22.2.1 Create
..........................................................................................................................................................................
new report, new template or new report paper 651
22.3 Save report, template
..........................................................................................................................................
or report paper 653
22.4 Print report, template
..........................................................................................................................................
or report paper 655
22.5 Display and edit report
.......................................................................................................................................... 656
22.6 Close report work window
.......................................................................................................................................... 657
22.7 Change default settings
.......................................................................................................................................... 657
22.7.1 Adjust
..........................................................................................................................................................................
report settings 657
22.7.2 Filter
..........................................................................................................................................................................
features for report 659
22.7.3 Create
..........................................................................................................................................................................
or edit layout for tables, data or statistics labels 662
Layout editor 663
22.7.4 Set
..........................................................................................................................................................................
object properties as standard 665
22.8 Insert report objects .......................................................................................................................................... 666
22.8.1 Insert
..........................................................................................................................................................................
graphics view 666
22.8.2 Select
..........................................................................................................................................................................
features using element selection 672
22.8.3 Information
..........................................................................................................................................................................
about data labels 673
22.8.4 Insert
..........................................................................................................................................................................
table 674
22.9 Insert drawing objects
.......................................................................................................................................... 678
22.9.1 Insert
..........................................................................................................................................................................
new page 678
22.9.2 Delete
..........................................................................................................................................................................
selected pages 679
22.9.3 Insert
..........................................................................................................................................................................
text field 679
22.9.4 Insert
..........................................................................................................................................................................
line/arrow 680

Table of Contents
22.9.5 Insert
..........................................................................................................................................................................
rectangle 682
22.9.6 Insert
..........................................................................................................................................................................
ellipse/circle 683
22.9.7 Insert
..........................................................................................................................................................................
image 684
22.10 Customize report view
..........................................................................................................................................
in work window 685
22.11 Customize objects .......................................................................................................................................... 686
22.11.1 Edit
.......................................................................................................................................................................... 686
22.11.2 Align
..........................................................................................................................................................................
objects 687
22.11.3 Adjust
..........................................................................................................................................................................
format 688
22.11.4 Adjust
..........................................................................................................................................................................
margins 688
22.11.5 Adjust
..........................................................................................................................................................................
paper format 689
22.11.6 Adjust
..........................................................................................................................................................................
paper 689
22.11.7 Set
..........................................................................................................................................................................
anchor 690
22.11.8 Adjust
..........................................................................................................................................................................
table contents, graphics contents, table and data label layout 691
22.11.9 Align
..........................................................................................................................................................................
data labels 692
22.11.10 Edit
..........................................................................................................................................................................
text field 692
22.11.11 Adjust
..........................................................................................................................................................................
color and line settings 694
22.11.12 Adjust
..........................................................................................................................................................................
corners 694
22.11.13 Adjust
..........................................................................................................................................................................
arrows 695
22.11.14 Adjust
..........................................................................................................................................................................
image 695
22.12 Customize effects .......................................................................................................................................... 696
22.12.1 Adjust
..........................................................................................................................................................................
frame 696
22.12.2 Adjust
..........................................................................................................................................................................
shadow 697
23 Graphics 698
..........................................................................................................................................
graphics 698
23.2 Change graphics display
.......................................................................................................................................... 698
23.2.1 Change
..........................................................................................................................................................................
graphics settings 698
23.2.2 Display
..........................................................................................................................................................................
element graphics 703
23.2.3 Adjust
..........................................................................................................................................................................
model representation 704
23.2.4 Adjust
..........................................................................................................................................................................
element representation 705
23.2.5 Display
..........................................................................................................................................................................
probe points 706
23.2.6 Display
..........................................................................................................................................................................
probe point numbers 706
23.2.7 Display
..........................................................................................................................................................................
network grid 707
23.2.8 Display
..........................................................................................................................................................................
element label 707
23.2.9 Display
..........................................................................................................................................................................
feature label 708
23.2.10 Colorize
..........................................................................................................................................................................
element in left element window with color spectrum 709
23.2.11 Display
..........................................................................................................................................................................
machine components 710
23.2.12 Show
..........................................................................................................................................................................
display options 710
23.2.13 Position
..........................................................................................................................................................................
work piece 711

Table of Contents
23.2.14 Manage
..........................................................................................................................................................................
CAD model layer 713
23.2.15 Display
..........................................................................................................................................................................
probe swivel range 716
23.2.16 Connect
..........................................................................................................................................................................
probe points 716
23.2.17 Display
..........................................................................................................................................................................
deviation of probe points (residues) 717
23.2.18 Display
..........................................................................................................................................................................
position deviations of elements 717
23.2.19 Display
..........................................................................................................................................................................
tolerance zone 718
23.2.20 Show
..........................................................................................................................................................................
mouse pointer coordinates 719
23.2.21 Display
..........................................................................................................................................................................
coordinate axes 720
23.2.22 Display
..........................................................................................................................................................................
color spectrum 721
23.2.23 Display
..........................................................................................................................................................................
recorded motion paths 721
23.2.24 Record
..........................................................................................................................................................................
motion paths 722
23.2.25 Delete
..........................................................................................................................................................................
recorded motion paths 722
23.3 Change graphics view
.......................................................................................................................................... 723
23.3.1 Zoom
..........................................................................................................................................................................
all 723
23.3.2 Enlarge
..........................................................................................................................................................................
window area 723
23.3.3 Zoom
..........................................................................................................................................................................
out 724
23.3.4 Zoom
..........................................................................................................................................................................
in 725
23.3.5 Display
..........................................................................................................................................................................
CAD model and elements 725
23.3.6 Rotate,
..........................................................................................................................................................................
pan and zoom view 726
23.3.7 Move
..........................................................................................................................................................................
view 726
23.3.8 Back
..........................................................................................................................................................................
to the last view 727
23.3.9 Continue
..........................................................................................................................................................................
to next view 727
23.3.10 Display
..........................................................................................................................................................................
view perpendicular to element 728
23.3.11 Split
..........................................................................................................................................................................
graphics view 729
23.3.12 Define
..........................................................................................................................................................................
rotation angle 730
23.3.13 Rotate
..........................................................................................................................................................................
view around horizontal screen axis 731
23.3.14 Rotate
..........................................................................................................................................................................
view around vertical screen axis 731
23.3.15 Rotate
..........................................................................................................................................................................
view around screen normal 732
23.3.16 Load
..........................................................................................................................................................................
standard views 732
23.3.17 Create
..........................................................................................................................................................................
user view 733
23.3.18 Delete
..........................................................................................................................................................................
user view 734
23.3.19 Rename
..........................................................................................................................................................................
user view 734
23.3.20 Load
..........................................................................................................................................................................
user view 735
23.3.21 Save
..........................................................................................................................................................................
user view 735
23.4 Create and manage intersections
.......................................................................................................................................... 737
23.4.1 Create
..........................................................................................................................................................................
and load intersections 737
23.4.2 Manage
..........................................................................................................................................................................
intersections 738
23.5 Select elements .......................................................................................................................................... 739
23.5.1 Select
..........................................................................................................................................................................
elements 739

Table of Contents
23.5.2 Cancel
..........................................................................................................................................................................
selection 739
23.5.3 Fade
..........................................................................................................................................................................
selected elements out 740
23.5.4 Show
..........................................................................................................................................................................
all elements 741
23.5.5 Invert
..........................................................................................................................................................................
selection 741
23.6 Insert auxiliary elements
.......................................................................................................................................... 742
23.6.1 Insert
..........................................................................................................................................................................
point 742
23.6.2 Insert
..........................................................................................................................................................................
point-vector 743
23.6.3 Insert
..........................................................................................................................................................................
circle 745
23.6.4 Insert
..........................................................................................................................................................................
cylinder 747
23.6.5 Insert
..........................................................................................................................................................................
sphere 748
23.6.6 Insert
..........................................................................................................................................................................
rectangle 750
23.6.7 Insert
..........................................................................................................................................................................
slot 751
23.6.8 Insert
..........................................................................................................................................................................
edge point 752
23.6.9 Insert
..........................................................................................................................................................................
curve 754
23.7 Mirror CAD model .......................................................................................................................................... 755
23.8 Edit graphics .......................................................................................................................................... 756
23.8.1 Select
..........................................................................................................................................................................
elements 756
23.8.2 Cancel
..........................................................................................................................................................................
selection 757
23.8.3 Invert
..........................................................................................................................................................................
selection 759
23.8.4 Delete
..........................................................................................................................................................................
selected elements 759
24 Quick Selection Table 761

..........................................................................................................................................
quick selection table 761
24.2 Create new quick selection
..........................................................................................................................................
table 761
24.3 Open quick selection..........................................................................................................................................
table 763
24.4 Show quick access for
..........................................................................................................................................
program start 764
24.5 Edit buttons .......................................................................................................................................... 765
24.5.1 Configure
..........................................................................................................................................................................
button 765
24.5.2 Delete
..........................................................................................................................................................................
button 769
24.6 Use quick selection code
.......................................................................................................................................... 770
24.6.1 Enter
..........................................................................................................................................................................
quick selection code 770
24.6.2 Limit
..........................................................................................................................................................................
barcode 771
24.7 Use the batch mode .......................................................................................................................................... 772
..........................................................................................................................................................................
batch mode recording 772
24.7.2 Execute
..........................................................................................................................................................................
batch mode 773
24.7.3 Delete
..........................................................................................................................................................................
batch mode 774
24.8 Change view .......................................................................................................................................... 775
24.8.1 Call
..........................................................................................................................................................................
homepage 775

Table of Contents
24.8.2 Jump
..........................................................................................................................................................................
to previous page 776
..........................................................................................................................................................................
text display 776
24.8.4 Close
..........................................................................................................................................................................
quick selection table window 777
25 Statistics 778
..........................................................................................................................................
statistics 778
25.2 Mathematical fundamentals
..........................................................................................................................................
of statistics 778
25.2.1 Concept
..........................................................................................................................................................................
definitions 778
25.2.2 Capability
..........................................................................................................................................................................
indices 779
25.2.3 Sample
..........................................................................................................................................................................
size 785
25.3 Statistical evaluation..........................................................................................................................................
of features 785
25.4 Adjust the statistical..........................................................................................................................................
evaluation 786
25.4.1 Adjust
..........................................................................................................................................................................
filter settings 786
25.4.2 Select
..........................................................................................................................................................................
evaluation method 788
25.4.3 Change
..........................................................................................................................................................................
random sample scope 789
25.5 Display diagrams .......................................................................................................................................... 790
25.5.1 Adjust
..........................................................................................................................................................................
diagram settings 790
25.5.2 Change
..........................................................................................................................................................................
limits 791
25.5.3 Change
..........................................................................................................................................................................
diagram limits 792
25.5.4 Display
..........................................................................................................................................................................
overview 793
25.5.5 Display
..........................................................................................................................................................................
data page 794
25.5.6 Display
..........................................................................................................................................................................
trend diagram 795
25.5.7 Display
..........................................................................................................................................................................
histogram 797
25.5.8 Display
..........................................................................................................................................................................
X bar chart 798
25.5.9 Display
..........................................................................................................................................................................
R card 799
25.5.10 Display
..........................................................................................................................................................................
s card 800
25.5.11 Export
..........................................................................................................................................................................
diagram 801
25.5.12 Copy
..........................................................................................................................................................................
diagram 802
25.5.13 Print
..........................................................................................................................................................................
diagram 803
25.6 Change view .......................................................................................................................................... 804
25.6.1 Refresh
..........................................................................................................................................................................
statistics 804
25.6.2 Close
..........................................................................................................................................................................
statistics window 804
25.7 Export features in Q-DAS
..........................................................................................................................................
format 805
26 Feature Data 808

26.1 Display Feature Data.......................................................................................................................................... 808
26.2 Record feature data .......................................................................................................................................... 808
26.3 Delete feature data .......................................................................................................................................... 809

Table of Contents
26.4 Check feature data .......................................................................................................................................... 809

26.5 Filter feature data .......................................................................................................................................... 811
26.6 Close feature data window
.......................................................................................................................................... 811
26.7 Display feature data ..........................................................................................................................................
during program execution (Signal light) 812
27 Offline 814
27.1 Virtual joystick, click..........................................................................................................................................
probe point on CAD model and simulation speed 814
27.2 Simulation of a program
..........................................................................................................................................
process 815
28 General dialogs 816

28.1 Expression Editor .......................................................................................................................................... 816
28.1.1 Output
..........................................................................................................................................................................
system information 816
28.1.2 Output
..........................................................................................................................................................................
element and feature values 818
28.1.3 Offset
..........................................................................................................................................................................
element and feature values against each other 819
28.1.4 Assignment
..........................................................................................................................................................................
of feature components 820
28.1.5 Using
..........................................................................................................................................................................
functions 821
28.1.6 Available
..........................................................................................................................................................................
functions in the expression editor 822
28.1.7 Expression
..........................................................................................................................................................................
editor application examples 826
Calculate features 826
Filter expression examples for the expression editor 828
ID's in program loops 829
IDs of source elements for the construction function 830
File names using expressions 831
Examples of date formatting in DateToString 833
28.2 Direction dialog .......................................................................................................................................... 834
28.3 Position dialog .......................................................................................................................................... 835
29 Keyboard shortcuts 836

Index 840

Fluent User Interface
1 Fluent User Interface

The way how users interact with WM | Quartis has been completely new designed. Thus the program functions are
easier to find and use than with traditional menus and toolbars.
The look and performance of these functions has been optimized and new technologies have been introduced which
allow a "search, select and click" instead of looking for and selecting functions in complex dialogs.
You can work faster and better with the WM | Quartis Fluent User Interface. Fluent simplifies the access to the many
powerful functions of WM | Quartis.
· The ribbon arranges and presents functions just the way the user works.
· It is easier for the user to find powerful features.
· Due to the Quartis Fluent user interface, the user reaches faster and easier correct measurement results,
impressive inspection reports and meaningful statistics.
Quartis button Element window
Quick access toolbar Workspace
Ribbon Status Window
WM | Quartis ® R2018-2 Fluent User Interface 20

Fluent User Interface
1.1 Live preview

The live preview displays results of an editing step or a format change as soon as the user moves the pointer over
the results displayed in the catalog.
This new and dynamic function optimizes processes such as defining probing strategies and graphics views as well
creating layouts, formatting and editing of inspection reports.
Thus users achieve excellent results in a short time and with less effort.
WM | Quartis ® R2018-2 Fluent User Interface 21

Quartis button
2 Quartis button
The WM | Quartis Fluent user interface arranges all functions which are not assigned directly to the measuring
process in a central position of the user interface: the Quartis button.
The different windows in the workspace (Database, Program, Report, Features, Statistics, Quick Selection Table) can
be blended in if needed via the central Quartis button.
This offers two advantages: First, it helps the user to easier find these important features, and secondly the core
tasks of the application engineer are simplified. The ribbon helps you to focus on the work steps measure, evaluate
and report creation.
Further it acts a central entry point for all WM | Quartis options and settings.
Overview Metrosoft Button
New Measurement database

Create new measurement database
Work piece
Create new work piece
Measurement
Create new measurement
Program
Create new program
Report
Create new report, new template or new report paper
Quick Selection Table

Create new quick selection table
Measurement database
Open
Open measurement database
Work piece
Open work piece
Measurement
Open measurement
Program
Open program
Report
Open report, template or report paper

Open quick selection table
CAD Model
Save
Save CAD model under a new name
WM | Quartis ® R2018-2 Quartis button 22

Quartis button
Program
Save active program
Report
Save report, template or report paper
Settings
Save settings
Report
Print
Print report, template or report paper
CAD Model
Import
Import (convert) CAD models
Program
Import or link programs
VDA data
Import elements or points from VDA file
Probe systems
Import probe systems from file
Program
Export
Export programs
Coordinate system
Export difference of coordinate systems
Q-DAS data
Export features in Q-DAS format
Feature and statistical data

Export feature and statistical data
BMWIpp data
Export element data into BMWIpp format
VDA data
Export elements into CAD file
Probe systems
Export probe systems in CM system database
Database
Work window
Display and edit database
Program
Display, edit and execute programs
Report
Display and edit report

Show quick access for program start

Quartis button
Feature Data
Display Feature Data
Statistics
Statistical evaluation of features
Extras External Programs

Configure external programs
Remote support
Start remote support with support partner
Personalize
Quartis Options
Change personal settings
Quick access
Adjust the quick access toolbar
Machine
Adjust machine settings
Measure
Adjust measurement settings
Features
Adjust evaluation settings
Graphics
Adjust graphics settings
Database
Adjust database settings
Statistics
Adjust statistics settings
Report
Adjust report settings
System
Adjust system settings
Info
Display general information about WM | Quartis

Quartis button
2.1 New
2.1.1 Create new measurement database
This function creates and activates a new measurement database.
1. Click on the Quartis button.
2. Click on New.
3. Click on Measurement database.
4. Enter a unique name for the new measurement database.
If you want to save the measurement database in a different directory, switch to the corresponding directory
and click on OK in order to save and activate the measurement database.
When creating a new measurement database, the definitions of the user defined properties are
taken over from the active into the new measurement database.
It is possible to create the measuring database on an existing Microsoft SQL server.
Click on the command button SQL Server …, in order to open the dialog for the input of the
required parameters.
This option is only available if the module EXT-DB is unlocked on your Metrokey.

Quartis button
2.1.2 Create new work piece
This function creates and activates a new work piece in the currently active database.
2. Click on New.
3. Click on Work piece.
4. Enter an ID (can only contain numbers and be max. 10 letters long). The next free ID is always suggested.
5. Adjust and enter a description if needed.

Quartis button
In the example shown, properties such as description, drawing number and comment were
defined. However, it is possible to save any amount of information (weight, material, customer,
and so forth) with the work piece. How to define additional properties is described in the topic
Create user defined properties.
6. Click on OK.

Quartis button
2.1.3 Create new measurement
This function creates and activates a new measurement in the currently active work piece.
2. Click on New.
3. Click on Measurement.
4. Enter an ID (can only contain numbers and be max. 10 letters long). The next free ID is always suggested.
5. Adjust and enter a description if needed.

Quartis button
In the example shown, properties such as description, drawing number and comment were
defined. However, it is possible to save any amount of information (weight, material, customer,
and so forth) with the work piece. How to define additional properties is described in the topic
Create user defined properties.
6. Click on OK.

Quartis button
2.1.4 Create new program
This function creates a new program in the currently active work piece.
2. Click on New.
3. Click on Program.
4. Enter a program ID and select if you want to create a Quartis or DMIS program.
A new, empty program is created by clicking on Finish.
5. If you click on Next, an extended selection is available:

Quartis button
6. Select the option you want to start the program with.
Hints for the option Start with mirroring of existing program.
Hints for the option Start with program from list with elements and features.
A new program is created by clicking on Finish.
7. If you click on Next, another extended selection is available:
Steps 7 to 9 are not available for DMIS programs.

Quartis button
8. Define properties and corresponding values as needed.
More properties can be added by clicking in the lowest line of the properties or moving down the cursor
using the keyboard and then entering the desired property its value.
Properties are displayed as attributes in the program sentence details, when the header is marked within the
program.
9. Click on Finish.

Quartis button
2.1.5 Create new report, new template or new report paper
This function creates a new report, new template or new report paper.
2. Click on New.
3. Click on Report.
4. Select one of the following options:

Quartis button
Report
This option creates a new report. As report template the standard template defined in the Quartis
settings is used.
In case no report template was selected in the Quartis settings, no template is used at all.
Report from template

This option creates a new report using a report template.
The report template to be used can be selected in the subsequent dialog.
Report template
This option creates a new report template.
This report template can later be used for the creation of a new report by using the function Report
from template.
Report paper
This option creates a new report paper.

Quartis button
2.1.6 Create new quick selection table
This function creates a new quick selection table.
2. Click on New.
3. Click on Quick Selection Table.
4. Enter a short description for the quick selection table.
5. Select if the quick selection table should contain 4, 9 or 12 buttons.
6. If a Homepage is created, check the corresponding check box.

Quartis button
The homepage can be directly opened using the function Call homepage.
Only one table can be configured as homepage.
If a new table is selected as homepage, the old table loses this status.
7. Click on OK.

Quartis button
2.2 Open
2.2.1 Open measurement database
This function opens and activates an existing measurement database.
2. Click on Open.
4. Select the desired measurement database.
If the measuring database was created on a Microsoft SQL server, you might have to click on the command
button SQL Server in order to open the dialog for the input of the required parameters.

Quartis button
2.2.2 Open work piece
This function opens and activates an existing work piece from the active database.
2. Click on Open.
3. Click on Work piece.
4. Select the corresponding work piece in the list.
5. Click on OK.
2.2.3 Open measurement
This function opens and activates an existing measurement from the active work piece.

Quartis button
2. Click on Open.
3. Click on Measurement.
4. Select the corresponding measurement in the list.
5. Click on OK.
2.2.4 Open program
This function opens and activates already existing programs from the active work piece.

Quartis button
2. Click on Open.
4. Select the desired program from the list. It is also possible to select multiple programs at the same time.
5. Click on OK.
2.2.5 Open report, template or report paper
This function opens an existing report, template or report paper.

Quartis button
2. Click on Open.
3. Click on Report.
4. Select the desired report or template and click on Open.
The report or template is loaded and can be edited.

Quartis button
2.2.6 Open quick selection table
This function opens an existing quick selection table from the active system database.
2. Click on Open.
4. Select the desired quick selection table.
The selected quick selection table can be defined as homepage in the dialog.
Only one table can be defined as homepage; thus an already existing homepage loses its status.

Quartis button
2.3 Save
2.3.1 Save CAD model under a new name
This function saves an imported and altered CAD model under a new name.
2. Click on Save.
3. Click on CAD Model.
4. Enter the new file name for the CAD model, change the data type if needed and save it.
The CAD model can be saved as ACIS® file in binary (*.sab), text (*.sat) or auxiliary file format
(*.sax).
The saved CAD model can be read and edited in older versions of WM | Quartis and Metrosoft
CM when activating the option Save data in downwards compatible format in Converter options
for CAD files.

Quartis button
2.3.2 Save active program
This function saves the active program into the database.
2. Click on Save.
4. The current program is saved into the database.
A Quartis program is always automatically saved into the database whenever the record or edit
mode is terminated.

Quartis button
2.3.3 Save report, template or report paper
This function saves the currently active report or template (report template or report paper).
2. Click on Save
3. Click on Report.
4. Enter a filename for the report or template and click on Save.
The file name of a report can also be defined using the expression editor. In doing so, you can for
example, add the current measurement ID to the file name of the report.
With expressions you can automatically compile report file names using already stored information from
the database.
The expression editor is opened by clicking on the button Expression editor....
All available fields are listed in the expression editor. The spelling of a file name using variables is
described in the topic Expression Editor.
5. Select the file type.
When saving templates or report papers, only one option is available.

Quartis button
However, a report can be saved into different formats:
· Quartis report (*QrtReport)

Saves the report in the internal WM | Quartis format
· PDF (*pdf)
· Text (spaces-formatted) (*.txt, *.bat)
· CSV (separators-separated) (*.csv)
· Quartis report templates (*.QrtReportTpl):
Graphics and tables are automatically replaced with the corresponding place holders
When saving reports into CSV or text format, the contents of text and data labels, tables as well
as text fields are exported. In addition, text fields from the first report page that are assigned to
the corresponding report paper are also output.
The export order purely depends on the position of the upper left corner of the corresponding
object on the report page. A group is considered as a separate object.
After the export of each text field, a line break is inserted, manual line breaks within a text field
are also exported as line breaks. Contents of data labels and tables are also exported as tables.

Quartis button
2.3.4 Save settings
This function saves the current settings without the closing Quartis.
2. Click on Save.
3. Click on Settings.
The settings are saved into QuartisUserSession.QrtUsrCfg and QuartisSystemSession.QrtSysCfg, thus

ensuring that they are available again after restarting Quartis.
Even without calling this function, the settings are saved when closing Quartis.
2.4 Print
2.4.1 Print report, template or report paper
This function prints the currently active report or template (report template or report paper)

Quartis button
2. Click on Print
3. Click on Report.
4. Adjust the printer settings if needed.

Quartis button
2.5 Import
2.5.1 Import (convert) CAD models
This function imports a surface data record (CAD model) into the active work piece. The supported CAD formats are
listed here.
During the import path and file name of the imported model is saved in the database under CAD models.
2. Click on Import.

Quartis button
4. Enter a description for the CAD model.
5. Adjust, if necessary, the converter options for CAD files.
6. Select using Add... additional CAD models.
It is possible to select multiple CAD models at the same time.
If Select directory for the file storage location in the Converter options for CAD file is activated, you will be
asked to select the storage location for the *.sab and *.sat-file(s).
All imported CAD models including path and file name are now displayed in the dialog.
Each imported model is mapped to a sequential reference ID that is displayed at the beginning of the file
name.
If a Quartis program refers to CAD surfaces, e.g. with the measurement of points with projection
onto CAD, this CAD model reference ID and the surface ID from the CAD are saved within the
program. The name of the imported file does not matter. If an existing CAD model is to be
replaced, e.g. with the update of the drawing objects, it is advisable to do so via the function
Modify.
7. Adjust the list of CAD models using Modify, Delete and Delete all.
8. Select a model and a function in the contextual menu (right mouse button).
Change color... assigns a new color to the model using the color dialog. When adding a model, the default
color is assigned to it. Auxiliary files have a fixed color.
Standard auxiliary file sets an auxiliary file as standard auxiliary file. Newly added auxiliary elements (e.g.
curves) are added to this file.

Quartis button
The option Edit CAD coordinate system allows you to relocate CAD models.
9. Adjust the options for loading CAD files if needed.
10. Click on OK.
Depending on your selection in the previous step, the CAD models are loaded.
A progress bar is displayed during the loading of CAD models. It is possible to abort long
loading processes within this dialog. CAD models not loaded are marked with a cross in the
dialog.
(Yet) not loaded but in the directory available CAD models are marked with a cross .
CAD models that could not be loaded as they were not found in the defined directory are marked
with an exclamation point .

Quartis button
Options for loading CAD files

This topic describes how you can control loading all or individual CAD models when opening a work piece.
This is especially useful when working with very large CAD model in serial measurements whose loading process
could generate a considerable long waiting time when opening a work piece or when closing the dialog Import
(convert) CAD models with OK.
If you unchecked the check box before the file name of a CAD model, this CAD model will not be loaded when the
dialog is closed.
1. When the dialog is opened, the parent check box in front of the CAD model description displays the status
of the setting Load CAD models when opening work piece defined in the system settings.
By activating or deactivating this parent check box in front of the CAD model description, you can overwrite
the setting for Load CAD models when opening work piece for this individual import.
2. When the check box in front a CAD model file name is deactivated, the corresponding CAD model is not
loaded when closing the dialog with OK.
Example
Selected option Behavior when closing the dialog with OK
All 3 CAD files are loaded.
CAD_1.sab and CAD_3.sab are loaded, CAD_2.sab is deactivated and

therefore will not be loaded.
The parent check box (in front of the CAD model description) is
deactivated. This means no CAD model is loaded.

Quartis button
Converter options for CAD files

In this dialog different options for the conversion of CAD files can be set.
Most of these options are used in order to correct erroneous and inaccurate CAD files and make them useable for
the ACIS® Graphics Kernel.
General
Calculate facets
When this switch is enabled a file with facets (*.saf) for graphic representation of the model is created after the end
of CAD file conversion. If the facet file is present at the time of loading the model, the model will be displayed faster.
Through the submenus Fine/Medium/Rough you can select the display quality for which the facets should be
created.
Save as binary file
When the ACIS® files are saved in binary format (*.sab), a CAD file is loaded about twice as fast. Thus this option
should always be active. Moreover, it has no effects on the duration of the conversion process. If this option is not
activated, the file is saved in text format (*.sat). This is reasonable only for the error search or data exchange
between various computer systems.
Save data in downwards compatible format

Quartis button
This switch must be set so that the converted models can also be read and processed in older WM | Quartis
versions. Data is then saved in ACIS version 20.
The switch affects also Save CAD model under a new name and Mirror CAD model.
Storage Location of the file
These settings determine where to store CAD files (*.sab, *.sat, *.sag. *.saf, or *.sax).
Directory 'Common data'
The *.sab or *.sat file is stored in the directory "Common data". This directory can be defined in the Quartis options
under System.
Directory of original file
The *.sab or *.sat file is stored in the same directory where the original file to be converted is located.
Directory of measurement database
The *.sab or *.sat file is stored in the same directory where the currently opened measurement database is located.
Select directory
The directory in which the *.sab or *.sat file is to be stored can be selected individually for each new conversion.
These settings do not only apply for the conversion of CAD models but also when a *.sab or *.sat
file is imported directly. Except for the option Directory of original file, a copy of the *.sab or
*.sat file is stored in the corresponding directory.
Adjust data during conversion
If this switch is set, then the CAD data is adjusted to the high precision of ACIS® during the conversion. Additionally,
errors in the structure of the CAD model are corrected.
This option can slow down the conversion considerably.
Repair data subsequently
If this switch is activated, the converted data is then tested, repaired and simplified. This helps avoiding errors at the
time of display or intersection of models. This operation can take a long time.
Select CAD coordinate system
If this option is active, then the names of the coordinate systems included in the CAD model are listed in a dialog
during the import of CAD data.

Quartis button
In this dialog the user can select which coordinate system should be used.
If only one coordinate system is saved in the CAD data, or if the option is switched off, then the dialog is not
displayed.
Convert surface orientation
If this option is active, the orientation of the surface (front- and backside) will be kept during the conversion. The
surface orientation is displayed in the graphics,
Take over assembly group structure
If this option is activated, assemblies are converted as separate ACIS files and one assembly group file (*.SAG)
during the conversion. This is only available if the corresponding converter supports the conversion of assemblies.
During the import of the assembly group file, the corresponding ACIS files are added to the graphics. The individual
parts then can be displayed/hidden in the graphics via the layer management. The layer structure of the parts
remains.
Filter
· Convert trimmed surfaces

· Convert free surfaces
· Convert free curves
· Convert free points
This option allows you to switch on or off the translation of the corresponding elements.
Free surfaces are the surfaces that are not bordered by trimming curves. Free curves and free points are
curves/edges or points that are not part of any surface.
These switches enable excluding unnecessary elements from the conversion and reducing the size of the model file.
Definitions file for user format
Select here the file where the definition of the user format is saved.
The structure of such a definition file is described under User format converter.
Standard
The options for the conversion of CAD files are set back to their default values.
OK
The set conversion options are taken over.

Quartis button
2.5.2 Import or link programs
This functions imports a program which is available as *.QrtProg or *.dmi file into the current active work piece. It is
also possible to link the program to the work piece.
2. Click on Import.
4. Select the desired program and click on Open. It is possible to select multiple programs at the same time.
5. Select the program type.

Quartis button
Only Quartis (*.QrtProg) or DMIS (*.dmi) programs can be imported or linked.
6. Further programs can be added to the import list by using Add... .
7. Selected programs can be removed from the import list by using Remove.
8. In order to link the selected program with the work piece, check the check box Link. Else the programs will
be imported into the database.
If the program is linked, only file name and path are saved as a link into the database.
9. With the check box Link all you can determine if all programs from the list are to be linked or imported.
10. Activate the check box Open programs during import / linkage if all imported / linked programs are to be
opened after the import / linkage.

Quartis button
11. Activate the check box Rule based assignment of ID and description in case the file name is to be
separated into ID and description.
The sequence of digits in the beginning of the file name then creates the program ID; the description is
created out the remaining string of the original file name.
A '_' sign can be used in the file name as a separator between the sequence of digits and description; this
separator will be removed automatically.
Example:
4711_Part_A transforms to ID=4711, Description=Part_A
If the check box is not activated or the file name does not start with a sequence of digits, the entire file
name is used as ID.
Example:
Wenzel_Metromec_Standard transforms to ID = Wenzel_Metromec_Standard, Description = (empty)
12. Clicking on Close will terminate the dialog without importing / linking any programs.
13. Click on Import / Link in order to start the import / linkage.
A green colored program indicates that the import / linkage was successful.
A red colored program indicates that an error occurred during the import / linkage.
14. In order to display the error report, click on .
15. Click on Close.
The program creation and modification date as well as the corresponding time are displayed in
the database view.

Quartis button
For linked files the creation and modification information of the linked file is displayed; for
imported files the information from the file (DMIS programs) or the actual creation and
modification date of the program (Quartis programs).

Quartis button
2.5.3 Import elements or points from VDA file
This function imports element or point data from an ASCII file in VDA-FS format.
The VDA file must comply with the specifications according to the description of the VDA surface interface (VDAFS)
Version 2.0 of the VDA association.
Quartis can interpret data in PSET, MDI and CIRCLE format.
2. Click on Import.
3. Click on VDA data.
4. Select the VDA file.

Quartis button
5.
The selected VDA file can be loaded into the Windows text editor by clicking button.
The text editor has to be closed before continuing working with Quartis!
6. Define the start position (VDA name or line number) for the reading of the selected VDA file (if the field is left
empty, the start position corresponds to the file beginning) and the end position (VDA name or line number)
(if the field is left empty, the end positions corresponds to the file end).
The element descriptions created during export are used as names (e.g. "S2M3").
The names defined in Quartis are only exported as comment and are, therefore, no longer
relevant for import.
7. Define the starting number for the imported elements and the compensating model or element for saving in
the database. The VDA name is taken over in WM | Quartis as element name
8. Select which elements correspond with the elements defined in the dialog.
If different elements are saved in a VDA file, they have to be imported in individual steps with the
correct selection of the compensation element and the correct area. If an element cannot be
computed due to the selected compensation model, the import will be aborted. Already imported
elements remain saved.
9. Click on OK.

Quartis button
2.5.4 Import probe systems from file
So that the probe systems do not have to be reconfigured when switching from Metrosoft CM to WM | Quartis, the
existing Metrosoft CM probe systems can be imported into WM | Quartis.
In order to use this functionality, the following has to be taken into consideration:
· The master reference sphere (for CAA) has been calibrated at the same position in Metrosoft CM and WM |
Quartis.
· The Metrosoft CM probe system have to be written into an XML file first. This must be done with CM version
3.110 or later.
· Stylus changing systems were configured with the same ID in CM and WM | Quartis.
· No PHS, PH20 or REVO is configured as probe head.
2. Click on Import.
3. Click on Probe systems.

Quartis button
4. Select the xml file that contains the probe systems to be imported.
5. Click on OK.

Quartis button
2.6 Export
2.6.1 Export programs
This function exports existing programs from the active work piece.
Exported Quartis programs are encoded into the Quartis internal format.
2. Click on Export.
4. Select the desired program. It is possible to select multiple programs at the same time.
5. Click on OK.

Quartis button
6. Click on Export file....
If needed, change storage location and file name in the dialog that opens.
It is possible to add more program from the current work piece to the export dialog by clicking on Add....
7. Click on Export.
The programs from the list are exported.
8. Click on Close.

Quartis button
2.6.2 Export difference of coordinate systems
This function compares the position of two work piece coordinate systems with each other. The result of this
comparison can be exported into a file.
2. Click on Export.
3. Click on Coordinate system.
4. Select the reference and work piece coordinate system.
5. The following values appear in the mentioned order (separated by a comma):
· Name of the work piece coordinate system

Quartis button
· Object description (W=work piece)

· Related object
· Unit (M: millimeter, I: inch)
· Work piece rotated (1=rotated)
· Position of work piece changer
· Offset in X direction
· Offset in Y direction
· Offset in Z direction
· Turning angle around X axis
· Turning angle around Y axis
· Turning angle around Z axis
· Carriage Return - Line Feed
Example:
WKSZY,W,,M,1,0,4.482877,21.906707,30.000000,0.000000,0.000000,15.000000
The format relates to the interface standard AGIESOFT ML 2.0 <AGIE-ASCII3>.
6. Adjust, if needed, storage position and file name.
The file name can be automatically generated with expressions using already available information from the
database.
The expression editor is opened by clicking on the command button Expression editor... .
All available fields are listed in the expression editor. The file name notation when using expressions is
described in the topic Expression editor.
Three file extensions are available for the export, however, the output format is always the same no matter
which file extension is selected:
· Quartis Format (*.mes)

· Electrode (*.e)
· Work piece (*.w).
The filename can contain a placeholder (* (a star as placeholder will be replaced by the measurement number) or ?
(the question mark represents a placeholder for a single cipher. Thus for a measurement number in the range of 1 to
9999 four question marks (????) are required . Values under 1000 are complemented with leading zeros (e.g. 0001)) )
which will be replaced by the current measurement number.
7. Click on OK.

Quartis button
2.6.3 Export features in Q-DAS format
This function exports features from the database into a Q-DAS file.
The data then can be imported and evaluated with the statistics package QS-STAT from the company Q-DAS
2. Click on Export.
3. Click on Q-DAS data..

Quartis button
4. Select the features to be exported. If all features are to be exported, the check box Always all features can
be activated.
5. Select the Q-DAS key file (in this file the Q-DAS fields to be exported are configured).
This key file (Q-DAS field configuration) can be customized with the button.
6. Adjust, if needed, the storage position and file name of the Q-DAS file.
database.

Quartis button
You can choose between *.dfq format (description and values in one file) or *.dfd, *.dfx format (description
and values in two files) for the export.
7. Define if all measurements or only the current measurement are exported.
If only the current measurement is exported, the following additional options can be selected: attach to file
(the data is attached to the selected Q-DAS file) , new file (a new file with the same name and next measurement
number is created) or overwrite file (the selected Q-DAS file is overwritten with the new values) .
8. Select the export format (compressed/uncompressed) and the K0002 attribute with missing measurement
values. If the attribute 255 (measurement allocation remains) is selected, the gaps with missing measurement
values are not filled. If the attribute 256 (Measurement allocation does not remain) is selected, the gaps with
missing measurement values are filed with the next following measurement values.
9. Click on OK.
Q-DAS field configuration

In this dialog keys can be configured, this means you can define which fields are to be included in the Q-DAS export
file.
Only selected keys ( ) are exported.
The following rules are to be followed.
Types of fields
Fields with pre-defined content The user does not have any direct influence on the field content (for e.g. K2001
– feature number). The field is automatically defined by WM | Quartis.
Fields with editable content The user can define the contents of the fields. The field content can also be
queried or modified during the export. Therefore the switch <query (before
Export)> must have been set for the corresponding fields.
Mandatory fields Fields the user cannot unselect.
Query (prior to export)
If this switch has been activated for a field, it is queried again prior to the export and the content can be changed.
The condition for this is the edit ability and selection ( ) of the field for the export.
Variable for field content
A pre-defined variable can be used as field content. A corresponding variable can be assigned to the selected field
with the selection list via the right mouse button.
During the export the field content will automatically be replaced by the current value.

Quartis button
Local menu (right mouse button)
Edit Quartis expression... Opens the Quartis expression dialog where expressions and variables can be
edited.
Quartis fields A variable for the field content can be selected from a list of predefined
variables.
Display all fields A list of all available fields is displayed
Hide unused fields Only the selected fields are listed.
Display only query fields Only those fields that can be queried again prior to the export are displayed.
Add
After making a selection in the "Key" list, you can add a not yet existing K-field to the existing report list by using the
"Add" button. Thereafter, you can also edit the field content and the field name.
Save only selected fields
If this option is activated, only these fields are saved in the key file that are selected ( ).
Export compatible with CM
If this option is activated, then during export the content of the fields K2001 and K2002 are outputed as is the case
of comparable features in Metrosoft CM.

Quartis button
2.6.4 Export feature and statistical data
This function exports feature and statistical data from the database into a spreadsheet file.
2. Click on Export.
3. Click on Export feature and statistical data.
4. Define the settings for the statistics.

Quartis button
Depending on the defined evaluation method, either the machine capability Cm/Cmk, the process
capability Cp/Cpk or the preliminary process capability Pp/Ppk will be output as capability index.
The calculation of the capability index is based on the random sample scope.
5. Select output of statistical data if you want to export the overview including the statistical data of the
selected features using all measurements selected via the filter.
6. Select output of feature data if you want to export the individual actual values of the selected features
using all measurements selected via the filter.
7. Select a template file if needed.
The template file defines
· which content for the corresponding feature (e.g. upper/lower tolerance, description feature type)
· and in which position
· and in which format (data format, font sizes and colors, frame lines,..)
is exported.
The template file can be adjusted. However, it has to be saved in the format *.xlt or *.xltx and meet
certain requirements. You can find more information here.
8. Adjust, if needed, the storage position and file name of the export file.
The file name can be automatically generated with expressions using already available information from
the database.
The expression editor is opened by clicking on the command button Expression editor.

Quartis button
9. Limit the number of features to be output and the measurements to be taken into consideration via the
feature and measurement filter.
If a filter is active, the filter symbol is displayed on the corresponding tab.
If no filter is applied, all features and all their values in all measurements available in the database are
exported.
The available filter options do have the same effect as when applying the filter within the work window
statistics.
10. Click on OK.

Quartis button
Template file for feature and statistical data export

This help topic explains how the selected template file affects the look and content of the created export file when
executing the function Export feature and stistical data.
You determine in the dialog Export feature and ststistical data,
· which worksheets the spreadsheet contains (one worksheet with statistical data, one worksheet with feature data
across all measurements, one worksheet per feature to be exported),
· which features are to be exported,
· which measurements are to be exported, respectively are to be considered for the statistics.
However, the template file (*.xlt/*.xltx) selected in the dialog also determines,
· which content is to be exported for the corresponding feature and

· which additional information about the work piece or measurement (e.g. from user defined properties) is to be
exported,
· where the content is output within a worksheet and
· how the individual rows are formatted.
The content definition is mainly processed via text, field definitions and control commands.
The field definition within the template file are similar to the field definitions that are also available
in the layout editor of the Quartis report. Field definitions are always written in between {} and
control commands in between [].
Texts are also defined via fields (e.g. {Text.Statistic.Overview} for „Statistics Overview“) within the installed
templates, so that these can be output in the selected dialog language. To do so, additional field definitions, next to
the ones already available in the report, are provided.
It is also possible to directly define the desired text in the desired language.
Further topics
· Worksheets within the template file
· Output of user define properties
· Output of statistical data
· Output of feature data - on one worksheet
· Output of feature data - one worksheet per feature
· Additional field definitions
Worksheets within the template file

Each template file should at least contain three worksheets. The worksheet names have to start with $1$, $2$ and
$3$ (see table below). Which of template worksheets is used for the export depends on the selected options within
the export dialog.

Quartis button
Option in Quartis dialog Worksheet Worksheet name example (template) Worksheet name
name starts example (output file)
with
Output of statistical data $1$ $1${ Tex t . St at i s t i c . Ov er v i ew} Statistics overview*

$1$any t ex t any text **
Output of feature data - $2$ $2${ Tex t . Char ac t . Dat a} Feature data*
on one worksheet
$2$ Res ul t s Results**
Output of feature data - $3$ $3${ Char ac t . I d} [ID of the output feature]
one worksheet per
feature
*translated into the configured dialog language
**is not translated when changing the dialog language
The worksheet name for the output of feature data - one worksheet per feature has to be
chosen in such a way, that a different name is used for each feature. For example the feature ID
(Field: {Charact.Id}).
For each option in the Feature and statistical data export dialog, a worksheet is searched for when the function is
started whose name starts with the corresponding control character. The corresponding data is then output in this
worksheet.
Worksheets contained in the template that do not start with $1$, $2$ or $3$, are transferred into the new Excel file
without any changes.
Output of user defined properties
Output of individual user defined properties
It is possible to define and output individual user defined properties.
Example: Output of individual user defined properties
Template file

Quartis button
Export file
Output of user defined properties of the work piece
It is also possible to use place holders for all user defined properties in a database.
To do so, the following control commands and field defintions can be used:
[ Ex pandDown] Inserts the names of all user defined properties of the

{ Us er Def i ned. Capt i on. Wor k pi ec e. * }
loaded work piece into the active and the rows blow.
[ Ex pandDown] { Us er Def i ned. Wor k pi ec e. * } Inserts the content of all used defined properties of the
loaded work piece in the active and the rows below.
[ Ex pandDown] { Us er Def i ned. Capt i on. J ob. * } Inserts the name of all user defined properties of the
measurement in the active and the rows below.
[ Ex pandDown] { Us er Def i ned. J ob. * } Inserts the content of all user defined properties of the
corresponding measurement in the active and the rows
below.
Example: Output of user defined properties of the work piece / Insert cells downwards
Template file
Export file
Analog, it is possible to output all user defined properties not below but to the right. In this case, the control
command ExpandRight]{} has to be used.
Example: Output of all user defined properties of the measurement / Insert cells to the right
Template file

Quartis button
Export file
Output of statistical data

In order to output statistical data, the worksheet marked with $1$ in the name of the template is used.
So that each feature is inserted into a new row in the export file, the control command [DynamicRow]{} has to be
inserted in first cell of the corresponding row before the field defintion.
[DynamicRow]{} can only be used once per worksheet.
In contrast to the report layout definitions, it is not required to define all three possible components for the output
of statistical data and feature data for the feature and statistical date export with the option On one worksheet.
For example, in the template file only {Charact.Prefix} is defined. To do the same in the report layout, all three lines
including the definition of the components would be requires (e.g. {Charact.Prefix.Comp1}, {Charact.Prefix.Comp2},
{Charact.Prefix.Comp3})
Example: Output of statistical data
Template file
Export file
Output of feature data - on one worksheet

For the output of feature data with the option On one worksheet, the worksheet marked with $2$ within the
template is used.

Quartis button
So that a new row is inserted for each feature in the export file, the first cell of the corresponding row needs to
contain the control command [DynamicRow]{} before the field definition. (See Output of statistical data).
To ensure that for each measurement a new column is inserted, the control command [DynamicColumn] has to
be inserted into the first line of the column where the data of the individual measurements is to be output.
[DynamicColumn]{} can only be used once per worksheet.
In DynamicField (that is the cell in which the row defined with [Dynamic Row] {} and the column defined by [Dynamic Column]
{} column intersect) , the desired measurement results needs to be defined. This can be the actual value
({Charact.Actual}) of the corresponding measurement (as shown in the example below) or any other
information, such as, for example, the deviation ({Charact.Deviation}).
Example: Output of feature data - On one worksheet
Template file
Export file

Quartis button
Output of feature data - one worksheet per feature

For the output of feature data with the option One worksheet per feature, the worksheet marked with $3$ within
the template is used. For each feature to be output, an individual worksheet based on this worksheet template is
created in the export file.
So that a new row is inserted for each measurement in the export file, the first cell of the corresponding row needs
to contain the control command [DynamicRow]{} before the field definition. (See Output of statistical data).
The control command [DynamicColumn]{} must also be inserted in the first row of the worksheet. However it
does no have any influence on the worksheet.
In contrast to other worksheets within the template, all components have to be taken into consideration for the
output of feature data with the option One worksheet per feature. Therefore, it would not be sufficient to define
the actual values with {Charact.Actual}, but the actual value of each component has to be defined:
{Charact.Actual.Comp1}, {Charact.Actual.Comp2}, {Charact.Actual.Comp3})
Example: Output of feature data - One worksheet per feature
Template file
Export file

Quartis button
Additional field definitions

The following tables contain the additional field definitions that can be used in addition to the field definitions
available in the report.
Field definitions that define text
Field definition within the template file Text that is output in the export file
{Workpiece.Caption.Id} Work piece ID
{Text.Statistic.Overview} Statistics - Overview
{Text.Statistic.Data} Statistical data
{Statistic.Caption.RandomSampleScope} Random sample scope
{Charact.Caption.Prefix} Prefix
{Text.Charact.Data} Feature data
{Job.Caption.Id} Measurement ID
{Job.Caption.Date} Date
{Job.Caption.Time} Time
{Charact.Caption.Date} Date
{Charact.Caption.Time} Time
{UserDefined. … … see Output of user define properties
Field definitions that define database content:
Field definition within the template file Text that is output in the export file
{Workpiece.Id} Work piece ID
{Statistic.RandomSampleScope} Random sample scope defined during export
{Job.Id} Measurement ID
{Job.Date} Date (Measurement)

Quartis button
{Job.Time} Time (Measurement)
{Charact.Date} Date (Feature)

{Charact.Time} Time (Feature)
{UserDefined. ...} … see Output of user define properties
2.6.5 Export element data into BMWIpp format
This function exports element data in BMWIpp format into a csv file. The BMWIpp format description dated
29.04.2014 serves as basis.
The format description provides the output for values for the following elements:
Quartis Element Typ IPE.Typ
Edge point, Perpendicular BPT
Point FPT
Edge point, Rounded KPT
Circle KRE
Slot LLO
Plane PLN
Rectangle RLO
Point, Symmetry SYP
Point, Intersection SPT

Quartis button
2. Click on Export.
3. Click on BMWIpp data.
4. Select the decimal delimiter for the values to be output.
Depending on the decimal delimiter - according to the BMWIpp format description - the delimiter
between the columns is automatically set.
5. Select Use ID convertor only, if the IDs of the elements to be exported are to be converted into the
format used in the BMW measuring plan.
This can be required in these cases, when DMIS programs created with iDA are executed in which
element IDs were put together using another scheme as in the BMW measuring plan.
If an ID does not specifically correspond with a specific scheme, the export is executed without
converting the ID of that element.
For example:
ID in Quartis IPE.Name in export file
R010032 1_R32
L183591a 18_L3591_a
G183591a G183591a *)
*) The element G183591a is output without adapting the IPE.name as it does not correspond with the scheme defined
for the conversion.

Quartis button
The option Use ID convertor also applies if at a later point the data to be output is selected via
the function Selection via file.
6. Adjust, if needed, the storage position and file name of the export file.
the database.
7. Switch to the tab Element selection.
The selection list displays, besides the elements set by the format description, also elements of the type
sphere. These are output into the export file as circle (IPE.Typ KRE) but without diameter information.
Their output makes sense if they were measured in order to determine the position using spherical
measuring aids.
8. Select the elements to be output. To do so, three options are available
a) select the elements to be exported in the selection list or

b) use the function Selection via file, in order to select a csv file that contains at least the columns
IPE.Typ and IPE.Name.
When executing the function Selection via file, those elements are marked in the selection list,
whose IDs correspond with the values of the column IPE.Name of the selected file.
If the option Use ID convertor is activated, the file contents of the column IPE.Name is converted

Quartis button
before searching and selecting the corresponding element ID.
After Selection via file, the selection in the element list can be changed by pressing the Ctrl key.
If the selected file contains elements that do not exist in the current measurement, no
error message is displayed.
c) The function Output all elements exports all data of all elements in the current measurement,
independent from the current selection in the selection list.
9. Click on the command button OK.
10. This dialog is only displayed if user defined properties of the work piece or measurement are missing
that are required for the meta data output.
Select
· Create user defined properties, if the missing user defined properties are to created automatically
in the database.
· Next, if you do not want to automatically create user defined properties in the database.
More about the use of user defined properties as meta data can be found here.

Quartis button
11. If already existing or newly created user defined properties are empty, the dialog Edit user defined
properties is opened when required data fields are missing. Enter the meta data information required
for the export.
Which input in which user defined property is correct so that the exported file can be further
processed by the data receiver has to be arranged with the data receiver.
The help topic Meta data with BMWIpp data export contains template definitions for all meta data
and examples of required fields. No validation is performed during the export if the entered data
corresponds with these definitions.
12. Close the dialog with OK and confirm that you want to save the contents of the user defined properties
in the database.
When leaving the dialog, no validation if a required field actually contains a value or not is performed.

Quartis button
Meta data with BMWIpp data export

Besides element data, also so called meta data is output with the export ofBMWIpp data. This meta data can be
assigned in the user defined properties for the work piece and the user defined properties for the measuremen by
the user.
Which user defined property is assigned to which meta data field is defined in the template file
BMWIpp_Standard.xltx, that has to be available in the Quartis work directory for templates, in order for the export
to work.
In the BMWIpp format description, part of the meta data is defined as required fields, others as optional fields.
Required meta data fields for the output in BMWIpp format
ID of user defined Name of the user Desired format of field Content

property for the work defined property for the content
poiece work piece
InspectionTask InspectionTask * Alphanumeric Vehicle project

abbreviation, e.g. „F01“.
InspectionPlan InspectionPlan * Alphanumeric Master data - Measuring

plan version - composed
of - <Part number>
- <Drawing index>
- <Version number>
- <Description>
ID of user defined Name of the user Desired format of field Content

property for the work defined property for the content
poiece work piece
Component.ID Component.ID Alphanumeric, 10 digits Part_ID of an individual

measurement; e.g.
VIN, ID number or
measurement number
InspectionCategories InspectionCategories Alphanumeric * EM (for „Initial sample“) /

AM for „changing pattern“
/ ZM for „intermediate
pattern“ / S for „Series
(Audit measurement)“ / A
for „Analysis
measurement“
If no user defined property of the work piece or the measurement with exactly this ID exists in the database, a
dialog is displayed when starting the export of BMWIpp data offering the possibility to create all required user
defined properties automatically.
In this case all required and optional fields for the user defined properties are created in the database. Thereby the
ID is entered as name for the user defined properties and required fields are marked with „*“ at the end of the

Quartis button
name. The names of the user defined properties can be changed, for the export only the ID has to correspond with
the field definition in the template file.
Optional meta data for the output in BMWIpp format
The following fields can be output optionally. If one of these user defined properties is missing in the database, no
dialog is displayed when exporting and the corresponding column remains empty.
ID of the user define property of Name of the user define property Desired format of field content
the measurement of the measurement
InspectionOrder InspectionOrder Alphanumeric, 10 digits
InspectionGroup InspectionGroup Alphanumeric, 10 digits
Production.Device Production.Device Alphanumeric, 20 digits
Production.State Production.State Integer, max. two digits
Component.Variant Component.Variant Alphanumeric *
2.6.6 Export elements into CAD file
This function exports element data into the VDA-FS, IGES and ACIS format.
VDA-FS and IGES are data formats for the exchange of probe point and geometric descriptions of certain element
types between different evaluation and CAD/CAM system
Probe points are exported with compensated radius in relation to the work piece surface Probe points are not
projected into the reference.
ACIS is the format of the 3D modeling kernel from Spatial. This format is used by WM | Quartis and can be read
directly. The geometric description of the elements is written into an ACIS file during the export. Thus, an exported
curve can be used as a nominal curve for comparative measurements.
For the export into a VDA-FS or IGES file, the data is exported either in millimeter or inch
according to the settings defined in System – Measurement units.

Quartis button
2. Click on Export.
3. Click on Elements.
4. Select the format (ACIS, VDA-FS, IGES).
5. Select elements (all listed elements are output; the element in the left element window is suggested).
6. Select the coordinate system to be used for the export.
If no coordinate system is selected, reference sphere coordinates are used for the export.
7. Enter the complete path and name for the export file.

Quartis button
The file specification consists of the predefined default export directory and along the file name. The file
name is derived from the export format, the work piece and measurement number. As an extension, the file
extension of the corresponding export format us used, for example: VDA FS_2_12.vda.
database.
If a file with the same name already exists, it will be overwritten.
When exporting into VDA-FS and IGES format, more settings can be entered.
8. Define if the selected data records are to be appended at the VDA file or if a new file with the entered name
is to be created.
9. Define the VDA formats for the export. The following formats are available:

Quartis button
· Point sequence(PSET) (corrected coordinate values without normal direction)
· Point-Vector-sequence (MDI) (corrected co-ordinate values, normal direction away from the material)
· Point (POINT) (individual corrected coordinate value without normal direction)
10. Define if circles are to be output as element (CIRCLE (center, radius, 2 direction vectors in the circle plane, arch –
start angle, arch-end angle) ).
11. Define if the selected coordinate system (PCS) is to be written in VDA format TMAT in front of the elements
in the VDA file.
12. Select the IGES formats for the export. The following formats are available:
· Point sequence (106-2) (corrected coordinate values without normal direction)
· Point-Vector-sequence (106-3) (corrected coordinate values, normal direction away from material)
· Point (116) (individual corrected coordinate value without normal direction)
13. Define if elements are to be output as Element (100) (center, radius, 2 direction vectors in the circular plane,
arc start angle, arc end angle) .
14. Define if curves are to be output as Spline (126) (support points, nodes and weights).
15. Click on OK in order to create the export file.
2.6.7 Export probe systems in CM system database
So that probe systems do not have to be calibrated twice when using parallel mode (old programs are executed in
Metrosoft CM, new programs are written and executed in WM | Quartis) , the calibration data (including probe system
configuration) can be exported with WM | Quartis and then be used with Metrosoft CM.
In order to use this functionality, the following has to be taken into consideration:
· Metrosoft CM 3.110 or newer is required.

Quartis button
· Metrosoft CM probe systems have to be written into an XML file first. This must be done with CM version 3.110
or later.
· Stylus changing systems were configured with the same ID in Metrosoft and CM WM | Quartis.
· No PHS, PH20 or REVO is configured as probe head.
· The probe system ID has to be a number from 1 to 9999. IDs with more than 4 numbers or different characters
are not supported in Metrosoft CM and therefore cannot be exported.
2. Click on Export.
3. Click on Probe systems.

Quartis button
4. Select the probe systems to be exported.
Probe system ID has to be a number from 1 to 9999. IDs with more than 4 numbers or different
characters are not supported in Metrosoft CM and therefore cannot be exported.
5. Select the Metrosoft CM system database in which the probe systems are to be exported in.
If the CM system database already contains probe systems with the same ID, they will be
overwritten with no warning. Therefore it is possible to automatically write the calibration data
into the CM system database via a calibration program after each calibration.
6. Click on OK.

Quartis button
2.7 Work window

2.7.1 Display and edit database
This function displays the Database window in the workspace.
2. Click on Work window.
3. Click on Database.
4. The Database window is displayed in the workspace.

Quartis button
2.7.2 Display, edit and execute programs
This function displays the Program window in the workspace.
4. The Program window is displayed in the workspace.

Quartis button
2.7.3 Display and edit report
This function displays the Report window in the workspace.
2. Click on Work window
3. Click on Report.
4. The Report window is displayed in the workspace.

Quartis button
2.7.4 Show quick access for program start
This function displays the Quick Selection Table window in the workspace.
4. The Quick Selection Table window is now displayed in the workspace.
In case no quick selection table has been defined yet, an empty work window is opened.

Quartis button
2.7.5 Display Feature Data
With this function the feature data window is displayed in the work window.
3. Click on Feature Data.
4. The Feature Data window is displayed in the workspace.
2.7.6 Statistical evaluation of features
This function displays the Statistics window in the workspace.

Quartis button
3. Click on Statistics.
4. The Statistics window is displayed in the workspace.

Quartis button
2.8 Extras
2.8.1 Configure external programs
This function allows you to configure external programs.
2. Click on Extras.
3. Click on Configure external programs.
4. Enter the file name of the application program, including the path name.
Only an existing application can be specified.

Quartis button
If you do not know the name or the path of the file, use the browse button to open the file selection
dialogue field.
Specify the name under which the application is to be entered in the menu by entering a description.
If you insert a & before a letter, it will be used as a shortcut. Only ONE (1) short cut may be used!
A clear description must be given, i.e. two applications CANNOT have the same description. If no
description is specified, the file name is used as such.
5. If the application has start parameters, you may define them here.
If you enter a $ sign in this icon, you will be asked after the parameters when starting this
application.
6. Define the working directory to be used by the application.
Only existing directories can be defined!
7. Activate this check box as symbol if you would like the application program to be reduced to one symbol
when started.
If the option wait until program terminates is activated, you cannot proceed working with WM | Quartis
until the external program is terminated.
This option is especially used within programs in order to continue the program only after an external
program has been fully executed.
8. If an already existing selection is to be deleted from the list Installed applications, click on New. In addition,
the input fields for program name, description, program parameters and operating directory are deleted.
The input fields for program name, description, program parameters and operating directory are to
accepted, click on Accept. A new entry in the list is created or an existing entry is updated.
Program name, description and operating directory are checked for their validity.
In order to delete a selected application, click on Delete.
All already installed applications are listed in the fields Installed applications.
If you mark an entry, its specifications in the input field's program name, description, program parameters
and operating directory are transferred so that alterations can be performed. The alterations or entry of a
new application must be confirmed with Accept.
9. Click on OK.

Quartis button
Note that all alterations are not definitely accepted until the input mask is exited with OK.

Quartis button
2.8.2 Start remote support with support partner
This function simplifies the startup for a remote support session with the WM | Quartis support.
2. Click on Extras.
3. Click on Start remote support with support partner.
You will be redirected to the web page on which the remote support tool can be started given by your
support partner.

Quartis button
2.9 Quartis Options

2.9.1 Change personal settings
This function allows you to customize the personal user settings.
2. Click on Quartis Options.

Quartis button
3. Click on Personalize.
4. Edit name and abbreviation.
It is possible to create user profiles in the WM | Quartis configuration program in the tab User.
Each user profile consists out of a name, an abbreviation, a role (Administrator or program executor)
and a password.
If the function Activate user management in the WM | Quartis configuration program is

activated, all users have to log in with name and password when Quartis is started. It is not
possible to edit name and abbreviation as described in step 4. Thus you can for example secure,
that the correct name or the correct abbreviation is displayed in the field tester in the report.
The user role Program executor limits the access to execution of programs via the quick
selection table.
An Administrator has complete access to all functions of Quartis.
5. Customize the user interface according to your needs.
6. Click on OK.
2.9.2 Adjust the quick access toolbar
These functions allow you to assign individual functions to the Quick Access Toolbar.

Quartis button
3. Click on Quick access.
4. Select the desired function from the function tree.
5. The selected function is assigned to the quick access toolbar by clicking on .
6. The order of the functions can be adjusted using and . The selected function can be deleted from the
quick access toolbar by clicking on .
7. The toolbar for the quick access is displayed above the ribbon tabs by default. The quick access toolbar can
also be displayed below the ribbon just above of the workspace.
8. Click on OK.

Quartis button
2.9.3 Adjust machine settings
These functions allow to adjust the settings for the machine, the simulation of a program sequence, the collision
detection and controls as well as the multiple machine network.

Quartis button
3. Click on Machine.
4. Adjust the settings for
· Machine
· Joystick direction
· Probe system
· Reference sphere
· and Temperature compensation.
5. Select Gauss (the deviation results out of a gauss error distribution curve whose 6-time standard deviation (6s) is
defined as scattering range. In contrast to the rectangular distribution values outside the range of scattering can be
generated) or rectangle (the deviation moves within the predetermined range of scattering (interval), this means the
probe point varies (±0.5 * interval) around the target value) for the scattering distribution during the simulation
of the program sequence and enter the scattering range (the largest possible interval is 10.000 mm).
During the simulation probe points can be afflicted with errors (deviation to the target value). The
deviation occurs in the probing direction. The amount of deviation results out of a random
number generator which either delivers normal (Gauss) or uniformly distributed (Rectangle)
values.

Quartis button
6. Activate the collision detection with work piece if needed enter the safety distance (the safety distance is
added to the radius of the measuring sphere and has to be smaller than the measuring and retracting distance, else
collision will be calculated at all times) .
The collision detection with work piece checks if the planed motion paths of the probe possibly collide with
the work piece.
In case of a pre-calculated collision in CNC mode, the machine is stopped and a warning is displayed.
In order for the collision detection to work correctly, the following conditions have the be met:
· The probe system is calibrated and set up.

· The CAD models of the work piece and the clamping system - if applicable - are loaded.
· The work piece is correctly aligned.
· CNC mode is active during the program execution.
Rotation and swivel movements of the articulating probing system are not taken into consideration with the
collision detection. In order to recognize possible hazards, the probe swivel range of the active articulating
probing system can be displayed.
The collision detection can be used during the element measurement.
To do so, activate the corresponding check box and adjust - if needed - the safety distance during the
element measurement.
7. Adjust the settings for the machine collision control.
8. The group Multiple machine network is displayed only if the multiple machine network has been
configured in the Quartis configuration program.
The list of machines displays all registered machines of the multiple machine network.
9. Activate the option Execute program: Synchronize when changing to common section in the group
Multiple machine network. More informations about this setting you will find here.
10. Click on OK.

Quartis button
Collision control settings

This function recognizes, controls and stops possible collisions between machines when operating in multiple
machine mode or in multiple machine network.
The collision detection with work piece is defined in the machine settings.
1. Open the collision control settings in the machine settings.
2. Activate the machine collision control if needed.
3. Enter desired safety distance (the safety distance is added to the machine and defines the minimal distance
between the machine components) .
4. Define the setting for the option look ahead for the collision control.
· If the option look ahead is activated, possible collisions on the motion path are calculated in advance. If
the safety distance falls below the set value in relation to another machine on the motion path, the
machine is stopped until the motion path is clear. During the waiting time a message is displayed on
the screen of the halted machine.
· The option look ahead is applied regardless of whether a program is executed or not:
- with all functions that move a machine in CNC mode including any probe changes using a stylus
changing
system.
- with all functions that swivel the probe head.
· If the option look ahead is not activated, the collision control stops all machines and displays an error
message in case the safety distance falls below the set value in CNC mode. If the safety distance falls
below the set value while operating using a control console, only the error message is displayed.

Quartis button
If the option look ahead is deactivated, the probe head can be swiveled without any collision
warning, even if the safety distance falls below the set value and collisions can occur.
In case of a deadlock (when machines block each other with activated look ahead collision control and the message
"Waiting for motion path release" is displayed on each machine in the multiple machine network) , the program has
to be set to pause mode on one of the participating machines. This machine then has to be cleared using
the control console. As soon as the other machines receive the release, the cleared machine can be set back
to program execution mode.
Deadlocks can be avoided by creating programs that work from the work piece center towards
the work piece edge.
5. Define the setting for the option including base plate.
If this option is activated and the safety distance between the base plate and a machine in CNC mode falls
below the set value, the collision control stops only this machine and displays an error message.
If the safety distance to the base plate falls below the set value while operating with a control console, only
the error message is displayed.
6. Click on OK.
The collision control of the machine is only available with a configured multiple machine mode.
It stops all machines and displays a warning in case the machine clearance has fallen below the safety
distance in CNC mode. In joystick mode, only the warning is displayed.
If the machine is controlled using a control console, only the warning is displayed.
In multiple machine mode / multiple machine network, all machines are monitored for possible collisions.
In order for the collision control to work correctly, the following conditions have to be met:
· Multiple machine mode or multiple machine network is configured.

· A WENZEL WPC2030 or WPC 2040 controller is used.
· The articulating probing system PH10 or PHS is used.
· Probe system is set up and calibrated.
· The adequate CAD model for the machine is configured in the Quartis configuration program. The
positioning of the machine may have to be corrected in the same place so that the CAD model
corresponds with the real machine.
· When operating a multiple machine network, the machine collision control has to be activated for
each machine in the multiple machine network.
· The option look ahead has to either be activated or deactivated for all machines within a multiple
machine network.

Quartis button
The machine collision control can be activated even if not all of the above mentioned
requirements are met. Nevertheless, to ensure proper function of the machine collision control,
all requirements have to be met!
The machine collision control is not effective until the machine has moved to its origin.
If a machine is moved using the joystick after it has left the multiple machine network, its new
positions is not known to the collision control. The collision control uses the last known position
before leaving the multiple machine network.
Execute programs with machine synchronization
The option Execute program with synchronizing the machines is available in the Quartis Options under machine if
in the Quartis configuration program the Multiple machine network is configured.
If this option is deactivated, DMIS programs are executed without synchronizing the individual machines.
If the option is activated, all machines registered in the multiple machine network, are synchronized (all machines wait
until the last machine of the multiple machine network has reached the common section before continuing the program) when
changing to the common section (the common section starts with the DMIS statement CRSLCT/ALL) during the execution
of DMIS programs.
The function Synchronize multiple machine network is - independently from the option Execute program:
Synchronize when changing to common section - always executed.
Whether a common section (CRSLCT/ALL) should be executed on all machines or only on one specific machine is
controlled in certain DMIS programs with this option and the statement CRSLCT.
Condition is that the configured mode is multiple machine network and that the machines are logged into the
multiple machine network server.
Depending on the use case the option should be activated or deactivated.
Use case Execute programs with Master / Slave special treatment in common
(Program type) machine synchronization program sections?
DMIS Program with CRSLCT On Yes

commandt for multiple
Certain commands lead to synchronization
machines executed in one
and/or are only executed on the Master Client
central database
(role=server).

Quartis button
DMIS Program with CRSLCT Off No

command for multiple
All commands are executed.
machines executed in one
central database
DMIS Program with CRSLCT Off No

command for one machine
All commands are executed.
DMIS or QrtProg measuring On or Off No

program WIHTOUT CRSLCT
(Recommended: Off) All commands are executed.
command
With configured multiple machine network the activated option Execute program with synchronizing the
machines influences eventually the naming of a DMO file created in a DMIS program. With activated option, the
DMO file name is extended by the machine identification, provided that the creation of the DMO file is triggered
with the DMIS program. In this case the DMO file name is composed as follows:
[Program-ID]_[Program-Description]_M[Measurement-ID]-[Machine-ID].dmo
Is the file name of the DMO file defined with the Quartis program function Start DMO it will remain unchanged in
any case.
2.9.4 Adjust measurement settings
This function allows you to adjust the measurement settings. It is possible to define the range and the start values
for the ID generator as well as the number of probe points for each individual element type.

Quartis button
3. Click on Measure.
4. Click on Adjust.
The measure settings are displayed.
2.9.5 Adjust evaluation settings
These functions allow you to adjust the default tolerance settings for the evaluation.

Quartis button
3. Click on Features.
4. Click on Adjust.

Quartis button
The default tolerance settings are displayed.
5. Select if the display of deviations should relate to the target value (the target value is always located in the
middle of the tolerance range regardless of the nominal value) or the nominal value.
This setting has an effect on the display of the deviation (Dev) in the element window and in the report (table
and feature label) as well as on the graphical display of the position deviation (arrows) in the graphics.
The deviation bars in the element window and report as well as the value Deviation in % in the report table
still refer to the target value no matter which option is activated.
In order to update the data, the measurement has to be reloaded after changing this setting.

Quartis button
2.9.6 Adjust graphics settings
This function allows you to define the graphics display settings.

Quartis button
3. Click on Graphics.
4. Click on Adjust. The graphics settings are displayed.

Quartis button
2.9.7 Adjust database settings
This function allows you to adjust the database settings.

Quartis button
4. Click on Adjust. The database settings are displayed.

Quartis button
2.9.8 Adjust statistics settings
This function allows you to adjust the settings of the statistical diagrams.

Quartis button
4. Click on Adjust. The diagram settings are displayed.

Quartis button
2.9.9 Adjust report settings
This function allows you to adjust the report settings.
3. Click on Report.

Quartis button
4. Click on Adjust. The report settings are diplayed.
2.9.10 Adjust system settings
These functions allow you to adjust the system settings.

Quartis button
3. Click on System.
4. Adjust the date and time specifications.
5. Adjust the measurement units settings.
6. Scroll down using the scrollbar.

Quartis button
7. Adjust the acoustic signal settings.
8. Adjust the CAD converter settings.
9. Activate the option Load CAD models when opening work piece if needed.
If this option is activated, CAD models are loaded using the settings in the dialog Import (convert) CAD
models when opening a work piece.
If this option is deactivated, no CAD model is loaded when opening a work piece. The settings in the dialog
Import (convert) CAD models do not apply.
This option can be overwritten when importing CAD models.
10. Adjust the directory settings.
11. Click on OK.

Quartis button
2.9.11 Display general information about WM | Quartis
This function displays general information about WM | Quartis.

Quartis button
3. Click on Info.
4. Click on OK.

Quick Access Toolbar
3 Quick Access Toolbar

You can now work much more efficiently with the new ribbon than with traditional toolbars. Nevertheless it may be
desirable to be able to access certain functions directly.
Therefore the Fluent User Interface offers the quick access toolbar. This toolbar allows access to single functions
directly.
The quick access toolbar can be individually customized using the Quartis Options or by clicking on .
Intermediate point
Displays or hides the function Insert intermediate point.
Zoom all
Displays or hides the function Zoom all.
Zoom on CAD Model
Displays or hides the function Zoom on CAD Model and element.
More commands...
Opens the Quartis options for the quick access toolbar.
Display below ribbon
The toolbar for the quick access is displayed above the ribbon right next to the Quartis button by default.
It is possible to display it below the ribbon directly above the workspace.
Minimize ribbon
Minimizes the ribbon.
WM | Quartis ® R2018-2 Quick Access Toolbar 129

Ribbon
4 Ribbon
The required functions of a particular work step for a measuring task (machine and devices, measure elements,
evaluate measurement) are divided into the three main tabs Machine, Measure, Evaluate in the WM | Quartis
ribbon.
They provide those functions which are relevant for the current work step.
All available functions within these main tabs are grouped using catalogs.
The three main tabs are completed with contextual tabs. These contextual tabs provide further functions for the
currently active work window.
1. Main Tabs
· Machine
Machine, Probe System, Reference Sphere, Articulating probe system and Stylus changing system
· Measure
Measure, Construct and Align
· Evaluate
Default settings, Standard, Form and Position
2. Groups
3. Contextual Tabs
4.1 Groups
Groups create the core of the ribbon. They provide all existing functions.
The last and most frequently used functions are directly visible and selectable.
Functions that are not directly visible in the ribbon can be selected from the catalog by clicking on .
Catalogs provide access to the complete range of functions belonging to a group.
WM | Quartis ® R2018-2 Ribbon 130

Ribbon
1. Active main tab.
2. Opened catalog of the group Measure.
4.2 Contextual tabs

Certain function groups are only relevant when the corresponding work window is active or a function is executed in
one of the three main tabs. These functions are arranged in the contextual tabs.
For example, the functions for the measurement of an element are not relevant until an element is being measured
and therefore you switch to the corresponding main tab and call the particular function. The different functions and
settings for the measurement of an element are not displayed till then in the contextual tab. As soon as the
measurement is finished, the contextual tab disappears again.
Through contextual tabs it is even easier for the user to find the needed commands. For every working step WM |
Quartis only displays the relevant commands.
1. Active main tab

Ribbon
2. Contextual tabs

Element window
5 Element window
The element window is an important element of the Quartis user interface.
All information about a measured element is displayed within the element window. Elements from the
database, that are required for further work steps, as for example the construction or the alignment, can be
selected in the element window.
Element type, calculation method and measuring type are displayed

under Type.
If a description is added to the ID during the measurement of an element

it will be displayed under Description. This description can later be
edited.
The reference used during the measuring of the element is displayed

under Reference.
WM | Quartis ® R2018-2 Element window 133

Element window
All nominal and actual values of the active element are displayed in the
register Geometry. The meaning of the different letters is described in
the topic element description.
Here, the nominal values can be edited later. With points, that were
measured with Projection onto CAD, the actual point can be projected
onto a new CAD surface and the nominal values can be recalculated.
All statistical information about the element is displayed in the register

Details.
All points of the active element are displayed in the register Points.
The tab Tolerances and Deviations displays features that were

automatically created during the measurement including their tolerances
and deviations as long as they were created in the current coordinate
system or they are dynamic features.
Otherwise only deviations will be displayed.
5.1 Display previous element

In order to load the previous element into the corresponding element window, click on .
5.2 Display next element

In order to load the next element into the corresponding element window, click on .
5.3 Load element in element window (via list)

In order to load an element from the database in the active element window, click on .

Element window
Elements can be sorted by clicking on the title bar of the corresponding column.
5.4 Load element in element window (via mouse tool)

By activating the mouse tool you can click the desired element in the graphics in order to load it into the left
element window. Thereby the edge of the element can be clicked.
After the element is loaded, the clicked element is displayed in the left element window and the previous element is
moved to the right element window.

Element window
If the corresponding element info labels are displayed, you can also click on the info box in order
to load the corresponding element into the element window. In doing so, the mouse tool does
not necessarily be activated.
5.5 Exchange contents of element window

The elements are exchanged from the left and right element window by clicking on .
5.6 Lock element in right element window

The element in the right element window can be locked by clicking on .

Element window
This function is useful if the same element is going to be linked subsequently with other elements.

Element window
5.7 Edit element

By clicking on in the element window, the description, nominal values and the material thickness of the element in
the active element window can be edited directly. With points that were measured with projection onto CAD, the
actual point can be projected onto a new CAD surface and the nominal values can be recalculated.
If nominal values are changed, the deviation of their automatically created features in the register
Tolerances and Deviations will be recalculated.
Edit element without projection onto CAD
1. Click on Edit in the element window.
2. Edit the field Description and/or the nominal values. The meaning of the different letters is described in
the topic element description.
3. Switch to the tab Details if you want to change the material thickness.
4. Terminate the editing by clicking on again.
5. Confirm if the changes are to be taken over or rejected in the dialog.
Edit element with projection onto CAD
If the element in the left element window was measured using the option projection onto CAD, the referenced
projection surface is marked in color in addition to the element.
1. Click on Edit in the element window.

Element window
2. The mouse tool is activated. Select, if needed, the CAD surface on which the actual point is to be projected
onto with the left mouse button.
3. End the selection with the right mouse button.
4. Edit the description if needed.
5. Switch to the tab Details if you want to change the material thickness.
6. Terminate the editing by clicking on again. This is only possible if the measured point can be projected
onto the selected surface. Otherwise, an error message is displayed.
7. Confirm if the changes are to be taken over or rejected in the dialog.
By accordingly setting the option consider surface boundaries in the measurement settings,
points can also be projected outside the surface boundaries.

Workspace
6 Workspace
The workspace is arranged in the center of the application and therefore in the middle of the field of vision.
The graphics window is always displayed. All other work windows as Program, Database, Report, Feature Data,
Quick Selection table and Statistics can be blended in using the Quartis Button and can be docked anywhere in the
workspace or placed free floating on the desktop. Thus the user interface can be customized to the individual needs
of the user.
Multiple work windows can be displayed at the same time. Individual work windows can be placed on the second
monitor. The user decides.
If needed the element window and the status window can be collapsed. Thus the workspace can be displayed even
bigger.
6.1 Customize workspace

WM | Quartis enables you now to hide or display work windows, such as Program, Database, Feature Data, Quick
Selection Table and Statistics. Work windows can even be docked anywhere in the workspace
Therefore the user interface can be customized to one's individual's needs.
According to one's preferences, multiple work windows can be displayed at the same time or individual work
windows can be placed on an additional monitor.
WM | Quartis ® R2018-2 Workspace 140

Workspace
The workspace can be customized to the user's needs. WM | Quartis is out most flexible due to docking technology.
The work area can be doubled by an additional monitor.
In order to customize the user interface, click with the right mouse button on an empty space on the ribbon.
Customize toolbar for quick access ....
Opens the Quartis options for the quick access toolbar.
Display quick access toolbar below the ribbon
The toolbar for the quick access is displayed above the ribbon right next to the Quartis button by default.
It is possible to display it below the ribbon directly above the workspace.
Minimize ribbon
Minimizes the ribbon.
Fix window
All work windows can now be moved out of the user interface using drag & drop and then be placed wherever
needed.
The element and status window can also be collapsed by clicking on .
The collapsed in window is displayed when the mouse pointer is moved over the folded in tab. By clicking on it is
displayed again.
WM | Quartis ® R2018-2 Workspace 141

Status window
7 Status window
The status window displays all relevant states of WM | Quartis at once.
One click on the display of a particular information enables you to change the corresponding state.
In multiple machine mode, the information in the status window refers to the selected machine.
7.1 Machine mode display
Disconnected
WM | Quartis is disconnected from the machine; it is possible to work in offline mode.
Connected
WM | Quartis is connected with the machine; it is possible to work in online mode.
WM | Quartis ® R2018-2 Status window 142

Status window
By clicking on this function the machine is either set to online (connected) or offline (disconnected)
mode.
7.2 Display of machine identification and status of collision control

If the multiple machine mode or the multiple machine network is activated in the Quartis configuration program, the
machine identification of the active machine and the collision control status is displayed in the status window.
1. Display of the machine identification (ID which has been defined for the machine in the Quartis configuration
program) . The following applies for configured multiple machine mode:
· Another machine can be selected by clicking on this command button.
· The information in the status window and the ribbon Machine relate to the selected machine.
· During the execution of a program, the selected machine is controlled unless a multiple machine mode
program is executed.
· All configured machines are displayed in the graphics. The unselected machines are displayed brighter
than the selected ones so they can be easily distinguished.
Status of the coupling:
Coupling is activated.
Coupling is deactivated.
2. The command button Collision control settings displays the current status of the collision control of the
machine.
Collision control is activated.
Collision control is deactivated.
Collision control not active as no connection to the multiple machine network server
could be established.
When clicking on these icons, the Collision control settings dialog is opened.
7.3 Display of currently loaded work piece

Status window
By clicking on this command button an existing work piece is loaded (from the database) and activated.
7.4 Display of currently loaded measurement
By clicking on this command button an existing measurement can be loaded (from the active work piece) and be
activated.
7.5 Program information
The currently loaded program, current state and line number of the program are displayed in this command button.
Status indication
Program is executed.
Program is executed with parameter modification Standard.
Program is executed with parameter modification Selective.
Program is in pause mode.
Program is stopped.
Program is in recording mode.
Program is in edit mode.
The status of the program can be changed by clicking on the symbol.
Display of current program

Status window
By clicking on this command button an existing program can be loaded (from the active work piece) and activated.
No program loaded.
7.6 Display of currently loaded reference sphere
By clicking on this command button a reference sphere that already has been created and saved in the database is
loaded.
No reference sphere loaded.
7.7 Display of current probe head position
By clicking on this command button the position current articulating probe system can be rotated onto the desired
position.
7.8 Display of currently loaded probe system
By clicking on this command button a probe system that already has been calibrated and saved in the database can
be loaded
No probe system loaded.
The current probe system has been altered (probe head was rotated, configuration was changed or
a stylus was picked up in another slot).
7.9 Display of currently loaded stylus and probe mode

Status window
By clicking on this command button, the stylus can be changed.
Stylus is not calibrated.
By clicking on one of these command buttons the probe mode can be changed.
7.10 Display of current coordinate system
Display of the current coordinate system (PCS/PLCS/RCS).
Display of the current work piece coordinate system (PCS).
No PCS loaded.
Display of the current pallet coordinate system (PLCS). When a pallet coordinate system is created, the
date and time when it has been saved into the database is displayed in the status window.
No PCS loaded.
Display of the current rotary table coordinate system (RCS).
No RCS loaded.
By clicking on this command button an already saved coordinate system can be loaded from the database and be
activated.
7.11 Average machine/work piece temperature display
The display of the temperature compensation is only visible if it is activated in the Quartis
configuration program.
The temperature of the machine is beyond the specified limits.
The temperature of the work piece is beyond the specified limits.

Status window
7.12 Virtual joystick, click probe point on CAD model and simulation speed
The machine can be operated in offline mode using the virtual joystick.
These functions are only displayed if WM | Quartis is in offline mode(not connected to the
machine) .
1. Virtual joystick
2. Click probe point on CAD model
3. Simulation speed
Virtual joystick
The virtual joystick can be operated in several different ways.
Clicking in axis direction
The clicked axis direction (arrow) is colorized yellow.
One click moves the machine 1 mm.
If the Ctrl key is pressed at the same time, the machine is moved 0.1 mm.
If the Shift key is pressed at the same time, the machine moves 10 mm.
If the Alt key is pressed at the same time in multiple machine mode, all configured machines are moved
simultaneously.

Status window
Positioning in X, Y or Z direction
Position the mouse pointer on the middle button of the virtual joystick.
Depending on the position of the mouse pointer on the button, the X and Y or the Z direction is blended out. Now
draw the virtual joystick in the desired direction by holding down the left mouse button and moving the mouse in
the corresponding direction.
The speed can be set with the slider on the right side.
The current position of the machine is displayed in the coordinate display below the virtual
joystick.
Click probe point on CAD model
If this command button is activated you can adopt a measuring point directly from the CAD model by clicking on it.
Simulation speed
The speed of the machine can be set with the slider.
7.13 Current coordinates display
This drop down list allows you to switch the coordinate display between values from a work piece, pallet, coupling,
rotary table, reference or machine coordinate system
Thereby the coordinate system display will be refreshed automatically. The number of decimal places can be
defined in the system settings.
By clicking on the coordinate display with the left mouse button you can position the machine.

Status window
By clicking on the coordinate display with the right mouse button you can switch between Cartesian coordinates,
spherical coordinates and cylinder coordinates.
7.14 Display of active measurement units
The measurements units displayed in this display can be changed in the system settings.

Database
8 Database
8.1 Information about the database
WM | Quartis works with Microsoft Access databases in which all measuring relevant data is saved. Thus
measurements can be reproduced and evaluated again at a later point of time.
There are two different databases in WM | Quartis: a measurement database and a system database.
The measurement database contains all work pieces with their corresponding programs, CAD models, graphics
views, measurements and features. This database is machine-independent and can be created and selected in WM |
Quartis.
The system database contains probe systems, reference spheres, articulating probing systems, pallet coordinate
systems, coupling and quick selection tables. This database is machine-dependent and can be selected in the
configuration program off WM | Quartis.
8.2 Create new measurement database

This function creates and activates a new measurement database.
2. Click on New.
4. Enter a unique name for the new measurement database.
If you want to save the measurement database in a different directory, switch to the corresponding directory
and click on OK in order to save and activate the measurement database.
WM | Quartis ® R2018-2 Database 150

Database
When creating a new measurement database, the definitions of the user defined properties are
taken over from the active into the new measurement database.
It is possible to create the measuring database on an existing Microsoft SQL server.
Click on the command button SQL Server …, in order to open the dialog for the input of the
required parameters.
This option is only available if the module EXT-DB is unlocked on your Metrokey.

Database
8.3 Open measurement database

This function opens and activates an existing measurement database.
2. Click on Open.
4. Select the desired measurement database.
If the measuring database was created on a Microsoft SQL server, you might have to click on the command
button SQL Server in order to open the dialog for the input of the required parameters.

Database
8.4 Display and edit database

This function displays the Database window in the workspace.
4. The Database window is displayed in the workspace.

Database
8.5 Adjust database settings

This function allows you to adjust the database settings.
1. Activate the work window Database.
2. Activate the contextual tab Database.
3. Click on the command button Settings.
4. Select if the deleting (any deleting of database entries must be once again confirmed before it takes effect)
and/or the modification and copying (any editing of database entries must be once again confirmed before it
takes effect) should be confirmed.
5. Select if the database is to be compressed when it is closed.
The compression is not only executed when Quartis is terminated, but for every action in which a
database is closed. For example, if a database is closed in order to open or to create a new database.
The performance of the database is increased by the compression.

Database
For large databases that are not stored on local drives, the compression can take a lot of time due to
network requests. In these cases, it may make more sense to execute the compression manually at
regular intervals using the configuration program and disable the automatic compression when closing.
6. Select if Quartis should create an automatic database backup (a database backup is automatically created
under the name of "Databasename. qrtmeasdb.backupX ". X stands for the number of the backup copy, and 01
relates to the latest one. When the maximum number of backup copies is reached the oldest copy is deleted before
the creation of a new one) during start up or exiting Quartis and how many number of copies (maximum
number of backup copies, when this number is reached the oldest ones are overwritten) .
If the option during opening is selected, Quartis creates first a backup copy and then the database will
be compressed.
Finally you can save the backup copy in the same directory as the database or select a different
directory.
This function does not anyhow replace a broader data backup concept, as it only backs up the
current database and regularly overwrites the backup copy.
7. Click on OK.
8.6 Create user defined properties

It is possible to save any additional information together with each work piece and measurement. For example, you
can save which user executed the measurement and on what machine. This information can automatically be output
in the report.

Database
Work piece selected
Measurement selected
3. Select the line work piece or measurement. Depending on what is selected, additional information is
saved with the work piece or the measurement.
4. Click with the right mouse button on the title line in the data view.
5. Select User defined.

Database
6. Click on Add.
7. Enter the corresponding information into the empty fields:
Column ID: Define the ID for the user defined property. The ID differentiates between different
properties. The same ID can therefore only be assigned once.
Column Name: Define the name of the user defined property. The term defined is, e.g., displayed as
column title in the database or queried with this name when creating a new work piece or measurement.
Column Default: Optionally, you can define a default value. If a new work piece or measurement is
created at a later time, the corresponding property is already predefined with this value. The value can
be changed. It is also possible to enter expressions.
8. Click on OK.
The added property is now displayed as an additional column in the database. If a new work
piece or measurement is created, the value of this property can be defined.
The user defined properties of existing work pieces or measurement can be changed using the
function Edit data within the database window.
8.7 Edit database

8.7.1 Copy data
This function copies data out from the database.
It is possible to select and copy multiple data records.

Database
3. Select the desired data record.
4. Click on the command button Copy.
8.7.2 Paste data
This function pastes data from the clipboard into the database.
3. Mark the position where the data from the clipboard are to be inserted.

Database
4. Click on the command button Paste.

Database
Conflict during copying
If a conflict occurs during copying (data record with same ID exists already) the following dialog will be displayed.
1. Select the source database (from which database the data are copied) and the target database (in which
the data will be copied into).
2. Select if a dialog is displayed in case of a conflict (ID is already taken) or if the data is to be overwritten
automatically. It is also possible to skip (not copying).
3. Select the work piece to be copied.
4. Enter a work piece ID for the work piece to be inserted. In the offset field an offset for the current ID can
be entered.
Current uses the current ID.
5. Select the measurement ID from which you want to copy.
6. It is possible to enter an offset to the current ID.
Current uses the current ID.
7. Select if all corresponding elements are to be copied.
8. Select if the corresponding work piece coordinate systems are to be copied.
9. Click on OK.

Database
8.7.3 Delete data
This function deletes data from the database.
It is possible to select and delete multiple data records.
3. Select the data record to be deleted.
4. Click on the command button Delete.

Database
8.7.4 Edit data
This function allows you to edit the selected data sets in the database.
Furthermore, it is possible to select multiple data records and to subsequently edit them one after the other or
simultaneously.
Depending on the type of the selected data record(s), different fields can be edited.
Selecting a data record of type Action
Work piece / measurement Edit user defined property.
Program / element / PCS / PLCS / RCS / reference Edit description.

sphere / quick selection table
Probe system Edit description and group number.
Feature Edit description, tolerances and option dynamic

features.
Graphics - model Opens the dialog Import CAD model.
With the exception of editing data records of the type graphics - model, the procedure for all data record types is
similar:
3. Select the corresponding data records.

Database
4. Click on the command button Edit.
5. Enter the desired properties.
6. The button Adopt value for all further data sets is only available if multiple data records of the type
feature were selected.
Only activate the button Adopt value for all further data sets if the entered value is to be
adopted for all selected data records of the same feature type.
7. Click on OK.
When editing features you might also have to edit the corresponding programs.
Else the edited tolerances are overwritten when executing the program the next time.
8.7.5 Search data
This function searches data within the database.

Database
You can search in the left database window as well as in the right one. A search terminated in one window will not
continue automatically in the second window.
3. Select a line in the tree structure on the left, or in the list on the right.
The search takes place in the activated database window.
4. Enter the search term in the Search for field.
If the key combination Ctrl+F is pressed while the database window is active,
the ribbon Database is displayed and the focus is automatically set to the
Search for field.
5. Start the search starting from the selected line by clicking the command button (Search downwards)
or (Search upwards). Each further click searches the next existing term. If the focus is set to the field
Search for, the search can also be executed downwards by pressing the enter key.

Database
· In the left database window you can only search text which is also visible in the tree structure (ID
and description).
Exception: Programs
In the left database window the related program node is marked and the right database
window shows the list containing the program.
· Nodes containing a search term expand automatically.
· In the right database window search takes place in all columns. Not displayed columns, which
contain search terms, are not displayed automatically. You can activate/deactivate the display of
columns with a right mouse button click on the header of the list.
8.8 Customize View

8.8.1 Print data
This function prints the tree structure of the database.
3. Click on the command button Quick Print.
8.8.2 Split database view
This function allows you to split the database work window into two individual views.
Therewith another system or measurement database than the currently active one can be displayed in the second
view.
Thus data can be copied fast from one database to another.

Database
3. Click on Split view.
In order to load another database than the current one into the second view, you have to click on
the arrow next to the command button Split View and select a measurement or system database
from a directory or the list.
The data can also be copied with drag and drop from one to another database.
8.8.3 Close database window
This function closes the database work window.

Database
3. Click on Close.

Database
8.9 Display data details

This functions displays the details of the individual date records in the lower part of the database work window.
The function can be activated in the context menu by right clicking in the right side of the database window. It stays
active until it is deactivated again.

CAD Model
9 CAD Model
9.1 Import (convert) CAD models
This function imports a surface data record (CAD model) into the active work piece. The supported CAD formats are
listed here.
During the import path and file name of the imported model is saved in the database under CAD models.
2. Click on Import.
WM | Quartis ® R2018-2 CAD Model 169

CAD Model
4. Enter a description for the CAD model.
5. Adjust, if necessary, the converter options for CAD files.
6. Select using Add... additional CAD models.
It is possible to select multiple CAD models at the same time.
If Select directory for the file storage location in the Converter options for CAD file is activated, you will be
asked to select the storage location for the *.sab and *.sat-file(s).
All imported CAD models including path and file name are now displayed in the dialog.
Each imported model is mapped to a sequential reference ID that is displayed at the beginning of the file
name.
Modify.
7. Adjust the list of CAD models using Modify, Delete and Delete all.
8. Select a model and a function in the contextual menu (right mouse button).
Change color... assigns a new color to the model using the color dialog. When adding a model, the default
color is assigned to it. Auxiliary files have a fixed color.
Standard auxiliary file sets an auxiliary file as standard auxiliary file. Newly added auxiliary elements (e.g.
curves) are added to this file.

CAD Model
The option Edit CAD coordinate system allows you to relocate CAD models.
9. Adjust the options for loading CAD files if needed.
10. Click on OK.
Depending on your selection in the previous step, the CAD models are loaded.
A progress bar is displayed during the loading of CAD models. It is possible to abort long
loading processes within this dialog. CAD models not loaded are marked with a cross in the
dialog.
(Yet) not loaded but in the directory available CAD models are marked with a cross .
CAD models that could not be loaded as they were not found in the defined directory are marked
with an exclamation point .

CAD Model
9.1.1 Edit CAD coordinate system
This function allows to relocate individual CAD models within a work piece.
This is, for example, required when an automotive component is to be used in different vehicle types on different
positions.
1. Open the dialog Import (convert) CAD models.
2. Select the model and choose the function Edit CAD coordinate system in the contextual menu (right mouse
button).
3. Activate the check box Translation and enter the desired values for the translation in the corresponding
direction.
4. Click on OK.

CAD Model
A model that has been relocated is marked with a (Z) in the dialog Import (convert) CAD models.
9.2 Save CAD model under a new name

This function saves an imported and altered CAD model under a new name.
2. Click on Save.
4. Enter the new file name for the CAD model, change the data type if needed and save it.
The CAD model can be saved as ACIS® file in binary (*.sab), text (*.sat) or auxiliary file format
(*.sax).
The saved CAD model can be read and edited in older versions of WM | Quartis and Metrosoft
CM when activating the option Save data in downwards compatible format in Converter options
for CAD files.

CAD Model
9.3 Change CAD model

This function allows you to alter or exchange an imported CAD model of the active work piece.
By doing so, the reference ID of the CAD model remains the same. This is important if a previously created
programs refer to a CAD surface.
2. Click on Import.
4. Select the CAD model to be changed.
5. Click on Modify.

CAD Model
6. Select the corresponding format from the drop down. If you do not know the format, select All CAD files.
7. Select the corresponding CAD model.
8. Click on Open.
The new CAD file is imported. The path existing in the dialog and the database will be overwritten with the
path of the new CAD model.
Modify.

CAD Model
9.4 Delete CAD model

This function deletes a CAD model from the active work piece.
2. Click on Import.
4. Select the CAD model to be deleted.
5. Click on Delete.
The path of the CAD model is deleted from the dialog and the database of the active work piece.

CAD Model
9.5 Options for loading CAD files

This topic describes how you can control loading all or individual CAD models when opening a work piece.
This is especially useful when working with very large CAD model in serial measurements whose loading process
could generate a considerable long waiting time when opening a work piece or when closing the dialog Import
(convert) CAD models with OK.
If you unchecked the check box before the file name of a CAD model, this CAD model will not be loaded when the
dialog is closed.
1. When the dialog is opened, the parent check box in front of the CAD model description displays the status
of the setting Load CAD models when opening work piece defined in the system settings.
By activating or deactivating this parent check box in front of the CAD model description, you can overwrite
the setting for Load CAD models when opening work piece for this individual import.
2. When the check box in front a CAD model file name is deactivated, the corresponding CAD model is not
loaded when closing the dialog with OK.
Example
Selected option Behavior when closing the dialog with OK
All 3 CAD files are loaded.
CAD_1.sab and CAD_3.sab are loaded, CAD_2.sab is deactivated and

therefore will not be loaded.
The parent check box (in front of the CAD model description) is
deactivated. This means no CAD model is loaded.

CAD Model
9.6 Converter options for CAD files

In this dialog different options for the conversion of CAD files can be set.
Most of these options are used in order to correct erroneous and inaccurate CAD files and make them useable for
the ACIS® Graphics Kernel.
General
Calculate facets
When this switch is enabled a file with facets (*.saf) for graphic representation of the model is created after the end
of CAD file conversion. If the facet file is present at the time of loading the model, the model will be displayed faster.
Through the submenus Fine/Medium/Rough you can select the display quality for which the facets should be
created.
Save as binary file
When the ACIS® files are saved in binary format (*.sab), a CAD file is loaded about twice as fast. Thus this option
should always be active. Moreover, it has no effects on the duration of the conversion process. If this option is not
activated, the file is saved in text format (*.sat). This is reasonable only for the error search or data exchange
between various computer systems.
Save data in downwards compatible format

CAD Model
This switch must be set so that the converted models can also be read and processed in older WM | Quartis
versions. Data is then saved in ACIS version 20.
The switch affects also Save CAD model under a new name and Mirror CAD model.
Storage Location of the file
These settings determine where to store CAD files (*.sab, *.sat, *.sag. *.saf, or *.sax).
Directory 'Common data'
The *.sab or *.sat file is stored in the directory "Common data". This directory can be defined in the Quartis options
under System.
Directory of original file
The *.sab or *.sat file is stored in the same directory where the original file to be converted is located.
Directory of measurement database
The *.sab or *.sat file is stored in the same directory where the currently opened measurement database is located.
Select directory
The directory in which the *.sab or *.sat file is to be stored can be selected individually for each new conversion.
These settings do not only apply for the conversion of CAD models but also when a *.sab or *.sat
file is imported directly. Except for the option Directory of original file, a copy of the *.sab or
*.sat file is stored in the corresponding directory.
Adjust data during conversion
If this switch is set, then the CAD data is adjusted to the high precision of ACIS® during the conversion. Additionally,
errors in the structure of the CAD model are corrected.
This option can slow down the conversion considerably.
Repair data subsequently
If this switch is activated, the converted data is then tested, repaired and simplified. This helps avoiding errors at the
time of display or intersection of models. This operation can take a long time.
Select CAD coordinate system
If this option is active, then the names of the coordinate systems included in the CAD model are listed in a dialog
during the import of CAD data.

CAD Model
In this dialog the user can select which coordinate system should be used.
If only one coordinate system is saved in the CAD data, or if the option is switched off, then the dialog is not
displayed.
Convert surface orientation
If this option is active, the orientation of the surface (front- and backside) will be kept during the conversion. The
surface orientation is displayed in the graphics,
Take over assembly group structure
If this option is activated, assemblies are converted as separate ACIS files and one assembly group file (*.SAG)
during the conversion. This is only available if the corresponding converter supports the conversion of assemblies.
During the import of the assembly group file, the corresponding ACIS files are added to the graphics. The individual
parts then can be displayed/hidden in the graphics via the layer management. The layer structure of the parts
remains.
Filter
· Convert trimmed surfaces

· Convert free surfaces
· Convert free curves
· Convert free points
This option allows you to switch on or off the translation of the corresponding elements.
Free surfaces are the surfaces that are not bordered by trimming curves. Free curves and free points are
curves/edges or points that are not part of any surface.
These switches enable excluding unnecessary elements from the conversion and reducing the size of the model file.
Definitions file for user format
Select here the file where the definition of the user format is saved.
The structure of such a definition file is described under User format converter.
Standard
The options for the conversion of CAD files are set back to their default values.
OK
The set conversion options are taken over.

CAD Model
9.7 Converter
9.7.1 ACIS Converter
WM | Quartis uses the ACIS format from Spatial. Data in this format can be imported without conversion.
WM | Quartis supports all ACIS version until version 2018.
ACIS files can either be in binary format (*.sab) or text format (*.sat).

CAD Model
9.7.2 CATIA V4 Converter
The CATIA V4 converter converts CATIA V4 CAD files to the ACIS format used by Quartis.
The converter supports CATIA V4 versions 4.1.9 - 4.2.4.
The CATIA V4 data can be in model (*.model) or export format (*.exp).
The following table shows the CATIA V4 elements that are translated by the CATIA V4 converter.
CATIA V4 element ACIS element
Coordinate system WCS *
Name Name
Color Color
Layer Group (Layer)
Point Vertex
Line Line
Circle Circle
Ellipse/Circle Ellipse
Parabola/Hyperbola Spline curve
Polynomial curve Spline curve
NURBS curve Spline curve
Conic Bspline
Polynomial curve Bspline
NURBS Bspline
Plane Plane
Cylinder Cylinder
Cone Cone
Torus Torus
Sphere Sphere
Polynomial surface Spline curve
* (model is transformed into selected coordinate system)

CAD Model
9.7.3 CATIA V5 Converter
The CATIA V5 converter converts CATIA V5 CAD files to the ACIS format used by Quartis.
CATIA V6 data can also be converted as long as it has been previously exported as CATpart or CATproduct from
the CATIA V6 database.
The converter supports CATIA V5 versions R8 to R2018 as well as CATIA V6 to R2018.
The CATIA V5 / V6 data has to be available as single model (*.CATpart) or as assembly group
(*.CATproduct).
The following table shows the CATIA V5 / V6 elements that are translated by the CATIA V5 converter.
CATIA V5 element ACIS element
Name Name
Color Color
Layer Group (Layer)
CATLine Line
CATCircle Circle
CATEllipse Ellipse
CATNurbsCurve Spline curve
CATPlane Plane
CATCylinder Cylinder
CATCone Cone
CATTorus Torus
CATSphere Sphere
CATNurbsSurface Spline surface

CAD Model
9.7.4 DXF Converter
The DXF converter converts DXF CAD files to the ACIS format used by Quartis.
Only 2D elements are supported.
The converter supports the versions DXF 2000/2002 (AC1015) and DXF R12 (AC1009) and
compatible versions.
DXF files have to be available as *.dxf file.
The following table shows the DXF elements that are translated by the DXF converter.
DXF element ACIS element
Color Color
Name Name
Layer Group (Layer)
Point Point
Line Line
Circle Circle
Arc Circle
Plane Plane
Ellipse EllipseCone
Polyline Lines and Circles
Spline Bspline

CAD Model
9.7.5 IGES Converter
The IGES converter converts IGES CAD files to the ACIS format used by Quartis.
The converter only supports IGES files until version 5.3.
IGES files can be converted from individual models (*.igs) or from assemblies (*.igs).
The following table shows the IGES elements that are translated by the IGES converter.
IGES element ACIS element
Color Color
Name Name
Layer Group (Layer)
Point (Type 116) Vertex
Line (Type 110) Line
Circle (Type 100) Ellipse
Conic (Type 104) Spline curve
Composite curve (Type 102) Curves
Copious data (Type 106) Spline curve / line
Parametric curve (Type 112) Spline curve
BSpline Curve (Type 126) Spline curve
Offset curve (Type 130) Spline curve
Surface of Revolution (Type 120) Surface of revolution
Tabulated Cylinder (Type 122) Sweep surface / Plane
Parametric Spline (Type 114) Spline surface
BSpline Surface (Type 128) Spline surface
Offset (Type 140) Offset surface
Plane (Type 108) Plane
Cylinder (Type 192) Cylinder
Cone (type 194) Cone
Sphere (Type 196) Sphere
Torus (Type 198) Torus

CAD Model
9.7.6 INS Converter
The INS converter converts inspection plan files in the INS-format which have been exported from Audiplan (CATIA
V4) to the ACIS format used by Quartis.
Thereby auxiliary elements are created which later can be selected in the graphics in order to measure elements.
9.7.7 Inventor Converter
The Inventor converter converts elements from Inventor CAD files to the ACIS format used by Quartis.
The converter supports Inventor files up to version V11 to 2018.
The Inventor data can be in single model (*.ipt) or assembly group (*.iam) format.
The following table shows the Inventor elements that are translated by the Inventor converter.
Inventor element ACIS element
Point Point
Straight Line
Spline curve Spline curve
Plane Plane
Cone Cone
Cylinder Cylinder
Sphere Sphere
Torus Torus
Spline Surface Spline Surface
Offset Surface Offset Surface
Swept Surface Sweep Surface

CAD Model
9.7.8 Parasolid Converter
The Parasolid converter converts elements from the Parasolid CAD files to the ACIS format used by Quartis.
The converter supports Parasolid files from version 9 up to version 30.
The Parasolid data can be in text (*x_t) or binary (*.x_b) format.
It is also possible to convert assemblies.
The following table shows the Parasolid elements that are translated by the Parasolid converter.
Parasolid element ACIS element
Color Color
Name Name
Layer Group (Layer)
POINT Point
BCURVE Spline curve
CIRCLE Circle
ELLIPSE Ellipse
LINE Line
OFFSET Offset surface
PLANE Plane
CONE Cone
CYLINDER Cylinder
SPHERE Sphere
TORUS Torus
SPUN Spin surface
SWEPT Sweep surface
BSURF Spline surface

CAD Model
9.7.9 ProEngineer Converter
The ProEngineer converter converts ProEngineer CAD files to the ACIS format used by Quartis.
The converter supports the ProEngineer versions 16 to Wildfire 5 and Creo 4.0, whereby
compressed and encoded ProEngineer files are also accepted.
ProEngineer files can be converted from individual models (*.prt) or from assemblies (*.asm).
The following table shows the ProEngineer elements that are translated by the ProEngineer converter.
ProEngineer element ACIS element
Color Color
Layer Group (Layer)
Cylinder Cone
Cone Cone
Torus Torus
Degenerated Torus Sphere
Tabulated Cylinder Sweep surface
Bspline Surface Spline surface
Ruled Surface Spline surface
Surface of revolution Revolved surface
Fillet Surface Spline surface
Cylindrical Spline Spline surface
NURBS Surface Spline surface

CAD Model
9.7.10 Siemens NX Converter
The Siemens NX converter converts elements from Siemens NX CAD files to the ACIS format used by Quartis.
The converter supports Siemens NX1 files up to version NX12.
Siemens NX files can be converted from individual models (*.prt) or from assemblies (*.prt).
The following table shows the Siemens NX elements that are translated by the Siemens NX converter.
Siemens NX element ACIS element
Name Name
Color Color
Layer Group (Layer)
Point Point
Line Line
Ellipse Ellipse
Circle Circle
Plane Plane
Cone Cone
Cylinder Cone
Sphere Sphere
Torus Torus
Spline Surface (NURBS) Spline surface
Revolution Surface Spline surface
Offset Surface Offset surface
Sweep Surface Sweep surface

CAD Model
9.7.11 Solid Edge converter
The Solid Edge converter converts Solid Edge CAD files to the ACIS format used by Quartis.
The converter supports Solid Edge files from version 18 to ST10.
Solid Edge data can be in single model (*.par, *.psm) or assembly group format (*.asm).
The following table shows the Solid Edge elements that are translated by the Solid Edge converter.
Solid Edge Element ACIS element
Color Color
Layer Layer
PK_POINT_t Point
PK_BCURVE_t Spline curve
PK_LINE_t Line
PK_CIRCLE_t Circle
PK_ELLIPSE_t Ellipse
PK_PLANE_t Plane
PK_CONE_t Cone
PK_CYL_t Cylinder
PK_SPHERE_t Sphere
PK_TORUS_t Torus
PK_BSURF_t Spline surface
PK_OFFSET_t Offset surface
PK_SPUN_t Spin surface
PK_SWEPT_t Sweep surface

CAD Model
9.7.12 SolidWorks Converter
The SolidWorks converter converts SolidWorks CAD files to the ACIS format used by Quartis.
The converter supports SolidWorks files from version 2003 to 2014 in WM | Quartis (32-bit) and
versions from 2003 to 2018 in WM | Quartis (64-bit).
The SolidWorks data can be in single model (*.sldprt) or assembly group format (*.sldasm).
The following table shows the SolidWorks elements that are translated by the SolidWorks converter.
SolidWorks Element ACIS element
Color Color
Layer Layer
PK_POINT_t Point
PK_BCURVE_t Spline curve
PK_LINE_t Line
PK_CIRCLE_t Circle
PK_ELLIPSE_t Ellipse
PK_PLANE_t Plane
PK_CONE_t Cone
PK_CYL_t Cylinder
PK_SPHERE_t Sphere
PK_TORUS_t Torus
PK_BSURF_t Spline surface
PK_OFFSET_t Offset surface
PK_SPUN_t Spin surface
PK_SWEPT_t Sweep surface

CAD Model
9.7.13 STEP Converter
The STEP converter converts STEP CAD files to the ACIS format used by Quartis.
The converter supports the STEP format AP203, AP214 and AP242.
STEP files can be converted from individual models (*.stp, *.step) or from assemblies (*.stp,
*.step).
The following table shows the STEP elements that are translated by the STEP converter.
STEP Element ACIS element
COLOR Color
Name Name
LAYER Group (Layer)
LINE Line
CIRCLE Circle
ELLIPSE Ellipse
HYPERBOLA Spline curve
PARABOLA Spline curve
QUASI_UNIFORM_CURVE Spline curve
B_SPLINE_CURVE_WITH_KNOTS Spline curve
PLANE PLANE
CYLINDRICAL_SURFACE Cylinder
CONICAL_SURFACE Cone
SPHERICAL_SURFACE Sphere
TOROIDAL_SURFACE Torus
OFFSET_SURFACE Offset surface
QUASI_UNIFORM_SURFACE Spline surface
SURFACE_OF_REVOLUTION Revolution surface
SURFACE_OF_LINEAR_EXTRUSION Sweep surface

CAD Model
9.7.14 VDA Converter
The VDA-FS converter converts VDA-FS CAD files to the ACIS format used by Quartis.
The converter supports VDA-FS versions 1.0 and 2.0.
VDA files have to be available has *.vda files.
The following table shows the VDA elements that are translated by the VDA converter.
VDA Element ACIS element
Name Name
GROUP Group (Layer)
POINT Point
PSET Point (Group)
MDI Several Points
CIRCLE Ellipse
CURVE Spline curve
SURF Spline surface

CAD Model
9.7.15 User format Converter
The user format converter converts the geometry and measuring information from a text file (ASCII) to an ACIS
format used by Quartis. Thereby auxiliary elements are created which can be clicked on for the element
measurement in the graphics. Tolerances are not imported.
The elements contained in the text file must be marked using unique identifiers.
The structure of the user forma of the text file is defined in a definition file (*.INI).
The definition file used for the conversion can be selected using the function Converter options for CAD files. As a
default, the CustomFormat.ini in the work directory settings (Settings) of WM | Quartis is used. This file is also an
example for the structure of a definition file.
The definition file has a structure similar to that of a Window initialization file. It is divided into two sections -
"Definitions" and "Elements".
The section "Definitions" defines the following settings:
Key Setting
InputExtension File extension of the user file
WriteSax File extension for the generated ACIS file:
0 for SAT or 1 for SAX
KeyDelimiters Separator between the elements
(line break \n, tab \t)
ParamDelimiters Separator between the parameters of an element
(line break \n, tabulator \t)
The section Elements defines the elements contained in the user format and its parameters. The definitions for each
element are presented in a row as follows:
Key = identifier, Parameter1, Parameter2, …
The following table lists the elements, their key names and parameter that are supported by the user format
converter.
Geometry Key Fix parameter Optional parameter
Point Point posX, posY, posZ dirX, dirY, dirZ, name, matthick, tol,
layer, color

CAD Model
Edgepoint Edgepoint posX, posY, posZ, type, diam, name, matthick, tol,
layer, color
dirX, dirY, dirZ,
orientX, orientY, orientZ
Circle Circle posX, posY, posZ, name, matthick, tol, layer, color
dirX, dirY, dirZ, diam
Rectangle Rectangle posX, posY, posZ, name, matthick, tol, layer, color
dirX, dirY, dirZ,
width, length
Longhole Longhole posX, posY, posZ, name, matthick, tol, layer, color
dirX, dirY, dirZ,
width, length
Longhole Slot posX, posY, posZ, name, matthick, tol, layer, color
dirX, dirY, dirZ,
width, length, type,
Sphere Sphere posX, posY, posZ, name, matthick, tol, layer, color
radius
Cylinder Cylinder posX, posY, posZ, name, matthick, tol, layer, color
dirX, dirY, dirZ,
radius, length
Geometry
Reference point Reference posX, posY, posZ dirX, dirY, dirZ, name, matthick, tol,
layer, color
Reference Tolerance name, lowTol, uppTol
Linked tolerance TolLink tol, refList
The following points should be taken into account while defining elements:
· The identifier must correspond to the identifier used in the user format and should be listed as the first
parameter.
· The sequence of parameters should correspond to that in the user format.

CAD Model
· Parameters that are not separated by separators but have a fixed length must be terminated with a % and the
number of characters: e.g. …, Parameter%10, …
· If the user format contains parameters that are to be skipped, a "dummy" parameter must be inserted at the
desired position.
The table given below describes all the possible parameters and their contents. All measurements must be
expressed in millimeters.
Parameter Description Content
dummy text to be skipped Text
name Name Text
tol Name of the used tolerance element Text
matthick Material thickness Number
layer Layer number Integer
color Color coded from 1 to 8 (black, red, green, blue, yellow, Number
magenta, cyan, white)
posX Position in X Number
posY Position in Y Number
posZ Position in Z Number
dirX Direction in X Number
dirY Direction in Y Number
dirZ Direction in Z Number
orientX Reference direction or orientation in X Number
orientY Reference direction or orientation in Y Number
orientZ Reference direction or orientation in Z Number
type Edge point: Flanged edge or right-angled edge ROUND or FLAT
Slot: Long hole or rectangle
width Width Number
length Length Number
Slot: Length without semi-circle in case of long hole
diam Diameter Number
Edge point: Material thickness in direction of edge
radius Radius Number
lowTol Lower vector tolerance Number
uppTol Upper vector tolerance Number

CAD Model
refList List of element names separated through parameter Text

delimiters

Program
10 Program
10.1 Information about the program
Individual steps of the measurement process can be saved in a program.
This measurement process can then be used again by executing the saved program.
Two different types of programs can be created and executed with WM | Quartis:
Quartis programs (.QrtProg)
Quartis programs can only be created and executed with WM | Quartis. The program is recorded using Teach-In.
The program is automatically created if working steps are recorded in recording mode in Quartis.
It is also possible to create programs automatically from lists with elements and features.
Furthermore, a number of program functions is available.
DMIS programs (.dmi)
The DMIS standard (Dimensional Measuring Interface Specification) has established itself in the area of technology
transfer.
The DMIS standard defines the data format for transmitting measurement instructions from a CAD/CAM system to a
coordinate measuring machine or between different coordinate measuring machines.
A DMIS file contains, besides the geometrical data, all required technology data relating to the measurement
process, thus representing a complete measuring program. This way, measuring programs can be created either
away from the machine on a CAD system or using a software with built-in measuring machine simulation
independently from the machine used later.
DMIS also provides the export of inspection results in a standardized form (DMIS results output, DMO).
Information about the DMIS results output can be found in the corresponding help topic.
WM | Quartis supports DMIS Version 5.2.
The DMIS Characterization File of WM | Quartis documents which statements are supported.
WM | Quartis ® R2018-2 Program 198

Program
10.2 Program settings

This dialog allows you to define program settings.
1. Activate the work window Program.
2. Activate the contextual tab Program.
4. Activate the option Link probe system name with stylus number if you execute DMIS programs and have
configured a CMM-OS interface.
Example: DMIS program sentence executions
SNSLCT/SA(202),1,SW(RDS),'E',-90.00,'D',180.00

Program
Program setting Probe system required for program execution
Link probe system name with stylus number 202
Link probe system name with stylus number 202_1
5. Activate Interpret Text/OUTFIL for relative reference only in case when you are executing DMIS
programs in which the relative reference is marked with
TEXT/OUTFIL,'%RELATIV ZU [Relativbezug_ID]'
OUTPUT/FA(Element_ID),TA(Merkmal_ID)
and is to be saved in the database.
Both program sentences do not have to be executed subsequently after each other but within the same
measurement macro.
The information about the interpretation of a relative reference is obsolete
· when saving the [Relativbezug_ID] in the database

· with the execution of an end marker (this is the program marker ending in _E in automatically created DMIS
programs via iDA).
· with the execution of the program sentence
TEXT/OUTFIL,'%ISTPUNKTBERECHNUNG - NORMALENPROJEKTION'
before the OUTPUT statement.
Example: Execution of DMIS program sentences

TEXT/OUTFIL,'%RELATIV ZU CIR_1'
T(Feature)=TOL/PROFS,-1.000,1.000
OUTPUT/FA(CIR_2),TA(Feature)
In this case, the element CIR_1 is saved as relative reference with the element CIR_2 in the database, just as
it is the case when an element is measured as a relative reference via DMIS statement RMEAS or via the
Quartis function relative reference.
6. Activate Save F() as theoretical element when you are executing duplex DMIS programs, which have
been created with Zeiss iDA.
The correct setting depends on the program system with which the DMIS programs have been created:
· ON or OFF for
o iDA programs for Metrosoft CM, program export option "DMIS 3.0 (Probe system No.)"
· ON for
o iDA programs for Metrosoft CM, program export option "DMIS 4.0 (angle)"
· OFF for
o iDA programs which have been converted during import into Metrosoft CM3 and then exported
again as DMIS program.
o DMIS programs (not created with iDA) in which the ID (label) of a nominal value (Feature Nominal)
is a variable.
Example:
§ DECL/CHAR,32, KR_Ausricht
§ KR_Ausricht = ASSIGN/'Kreis_ID_Aus_Var'
Program
§ F(@KR_Ausricht)=FEAT/CIRCLE,OUTER,CART,-0.04787,$
-0.02439,5.52922,0.00000, 0.00000,1.00000,2.95000
§ CONST/CIRCLE,F(@KR_Ausricht),PROJCT,FA(998),FA(dummyplane)
7. Select the settings for the program execution with selective parameter modification.
When executing programs with selective parameter modification, the parameter modification only
applies to the selected types of program sentences.
If probe system, articulating probing system and/or edge point is activated, the parameter of the
corresponding functions can be edited during the program execution with selective parameter
modification before each program sentence is executed.
If the check box Projection onto CAD is activated, the recorded model and reference surfaces within the
program are re-referenced during the program execution with selective parameter modification in the
program sentences Measurement point with projection onto CAD.
Depending on the projection rules selection in the measurement settings this either takes place
automatically or by the user selecting the projection surface selected.
8. Activate Double-click to allow direct editing.
With this option you can activate the edit mode by double clicking on a program sentence and open this
program sentence for direct editing.
9. Click on OK.
10.3 Create new program

This function creates a new program in the currently active work piece.
2. Click on New.

Program
4. Enter a program ID and select if you want to create a Quartis or DMIS program.
A new, empty program is created by clicking on Finish.
5. If you click on Next, an extended selection is available:
6. Select the option you want to start the program with.
Hints for the option Start with mirroring of existing program.
Hints for the option Start with program from list with elements and features.
A new program is created by clicking on Finish.

Program
7. If you click on Next, another extended selection is available:
Steps 7 to 9 are not available for DMIS programs.
8. Define properties and corresponding values as needed.
More properties can be added by clicking in the lowest line of the properties or moving down the cursor
using the keyboard and then entering the desired property its value.
Properties are displayed as attributes in the program sentence details, when the header is marked within the
program.
9. Click on Finish.

Program
10.4 Program from list with elements and features

With WM | Quartis you can create directly a measuring program from a list with elements and features (inspection
plan). Names (IDs), nominal values and tolerances are used from the list.
Supported file formats:
· BMWIpp Format: *.csv: *.xls und *.xlsx

· Daimler/Audi Inspection Feature ASCII Format: *.csv
Check and configure the following points before you create a program:
· Machine settings
· Load probe system
· Measuring parameters for the actual elements in the ribbon
When creating programs from lists with elements and features, you have to proceed in the same way as when
creating a new program. In step 2 the option described below has to be selected.
1. Select the option Start with program from list with elements and features.
2. Select the format of the list with elements and features.
3. Select the file.
4. Click on Finish.
The program is created according the selected list with elements and features.
The order of elements in the program is identical with the order of elements in the inspection plan.

Program
A program created automatically from a list with elements and features cannot be executed
directly on CNC machines. The program must be complemented previously with the used
alignment, probe system, motion paths between the elements, etc. If necessary, the measuring
strategies of single elements can be adapted with Execute program with parameter modification.
The following element types are supported and converted in program sentences of type Measurement ('Element'):
· Point
· Circle
· Rectangle
· Edge point (perpendicular / rounded)
If tolerances (TOL) are assigned to the elements, they will be adopted in the program sentences and the
corresponding AUTO features (x, y, z, A, B, diameter, length and width) are activated.
Not supported element types like, sphere, cylinder, plane or cone are inserted into the program as comment.
Further, in the BMW or Daimler/Audi interface description defined data like construction elements (ORP / SYP, SPT),
alignments (ALG), measuring strategies (MST), mathematical measurement elements (WIN, ABS, FUG) etc. are
ignored. They are not inserted into the program as comment.
More about definitions in the file you can read in the following help topics:
Structure of a file in BMWIpp format

Structure of a file in Daimler/Audi Inspection Feature ASCII format
With the installation of WM | Quartis the following files are delivered in the folder …\Examples:
· Example BMWIpp Inspection Plan
· Example Daimler Audi Excel ASCII-Table
These files contain examples and further explanations of the format.
Measuring strategy
During creation of program sentences, parameters not defined in CSV files (for example distribution of points,
probing depth, sector, edge distance etc.) are set as defined in the actual settings in WM | Quartis. As a result the
program sentences are created with the measuring parameters, which are active when the measurement of an
element is opened in the ribbon.
Parameters not read from the ribbon:

Program
Parameter Used in program sentence
Relative reference None
Material thickness (on/off) deactivated
(the value is taken from the file)
Parameters relating the reference are adopted partly from the ribbon:
Currently selected reference Used in program sentence

in the ribbon
Nominal value Nominal value
Measuring Measuring
Number of points
Distance
Relative measuring
(if necessary)
Reference element Measuring
XY-plane Number of points
ZX-plane Distance
YZ-plane
Error handling when creating a program
· Elements, which begin with a supported element type (e.g. PT) but with missing relevant information (cells), are
listed as Error in the program sentence 1 (comment).
· Elements, which contain all information (cells) but contain invalid nominal values (e.g. diameter = 0), are also
listed as Error. They contain the note Nominal values are invalid and are inserted at the corresponding
position in the program as comment.
· If data sets exist in a wrong data format no matching data set will be found and an empty program is created.
This will be the case, if the format is set to BMWIpp and afterwards a file of Daimler / Audi Inspection Feature
ASCII Format is selected.
A name (ID) may occur only once in a file. Double IDs result in an exception error message. In this
case no program will be created.

Program
10.4.1 Structure of a file in BMW Format
The ASCII Excel format defined by BMW is described in the document BMWIpp Inspection Plan and Protocol
Formatbeschreibung (version of January 29, 2014).
The first line of the file (header) contains always the names of the columns. These names must match exactly the
BMWIpp format description. The sequential order of the individual column names is random. Nevertheless, the
content of the following data sets must correspond to this order.
Rows, which follow the header, correspond to a data set, which contains the number of data fields (columns)
defined by the header.
The file must contain at least the green marked columns in the table below, with the corresponding headings. The
file can contain, in contrast to the BMWIpp interface description, further column titles, but they are not taken into
account when creating the program.
Column assignment
This information is essential to create the program sentence.
x, y, z, i, j, k, i2, j2, k2 = element coordination and direction

Program
b = width, l = length, Ø = diameter of the element
Program sentences for edge points of IPE.Type = BPT are written as Measurement (edge point) with the
calculation method perpendicular.
Program sentences for edge points of IPE.Type = KPT are written as Measurement (edge point) with the
calculation method rounded.
Lx Lower tolerance limit of the x-component of feature position. Ly, Lz, LA and LB apply correspondingly to the
lower tolerance limit of other position features (y, z, A, B).
Ux Upper tolerance limit of the x-component of feature position. Uy, Uz, UA and UB apply correspondingly to
the upper tolerance limit of other position features (y, z, A, B).
LØ Lower tolerance limit of feature size (diameter). Lb and Ll apply correspondingly to the lower tolerance limit
of other size features (width, length).
UØ Upper tolerance limit of feature size (diameter). Ub and Ul apply correspondingly to the upper tolerance
limit of other size features (width, length).
Planes are not supported. Data is inserted into the program as comment.
These IPE.types are not supported and ignored when creating a program.
10.4.2 Structure of a file in Daimler/Audi Format
The ASCII Excel format defined by Daimler and Audi is described in the document Specification of an Excel ASCII-Table
to exchange feature information between CAD and CAQ Systems (actual version 4.0).
You must consider the following when you create a CSV file:
· «.» [dot] as decimal separator and «,» [comma] as column delimiter

· Parameters must be present in the correct column and the correct format in order that the program sentence
can be created correctly.
· Rows with an element description, which do not correspond completely the format description but contain the
necessary information in the correct column to create a program sentence, are converted into program
sentences.
Format for element data

Program
This information is absolutely essential to create the program sentence

(x = corresponding value, b = width, l = length, Ø = diameter of the element).
(3) Program sentences for edge points with Attr1 = FLAT are written as Measurement (edge point) with the
calculation method perpendicular.
(4) Program sentences for edge points with Attr1 = ROUND are written as Measurement (edge point) with
the calculation method rounded.
— This information is ignored, if it is contained.
This information about tolerances to be used is processed, if it exists and the corresponding information
about the tolerance follows further down in the CSV file (see below). Nevertheless, this information is not
essential to create the program sentence.
Data of material thickness is adopted in the program sentence, but not essential to create the program
sentence. Using the material thickness is depending partly on the measuring strategy, therefore the option
Consider material thickness is deactivated.
Not supported elements, data are inserted as comment into the program.
Format for feature data
If position tolerances (position x, y or z as well as deflection A and trimming edge B) or dimensional tolerances are
assigned to an element, the corresponding AUTO features with the tolerances are adopted in the program
sentence.
Information about the tolerance must be specified with the element and defined in the file. A tolerance group (e.g.
TG01) or a single tolerance (e.g. TOL_PT2) can be defined.

Program
Further information you will find in the document Specification of an Excel ASCII-Table to exchange feature information
between CAD and CAQ Systems (actual version 4.0).
10.5 Mirror program
This function is only available for WM | Quartis programs.
The measurement tasks are usually identical for symmetrical work pieces (e.g. left and right vehicle parts). However
coordinate values are mirrored. This function allows mirroring a work piece program (e.g. left fender) in its
counterpart (e.g. right fender).
When mirroring programs, you have to proceed the same way a new program is created. In step 2 the option
described below has to be selected.
1. Select the option Start with mirroring of existing program.
2. Select the program to be mirrored.
Only programs from the current work piece can be mirrored. If another program is to be
mirrored, it has to be copied first into the current work piece.
3. Select the mirroring plane on which the program is to be mirrored.
4. With a click on Finish, the new (mirrored) program is created.

Program
Features are always mirrored. Absolute values (e.g. size or roundness) remain unchanged. Only
one coordinate system (the one that defines the mirroring plane) can be active in the program to
be mirrored.
Positioning commands in the work piece coordinate system are mirrored. Positioning commands
in a machine coordinate system are taken over into the mirrored program without changes. Probe
systems have to be adjusted manually. This can be done for the entire program in one single step
by using the function Simultaneously edit multiple program sentences.
When creating measurement programs that will be mirrored, you should use as few probe
systems as possible with simple stylus assignments. This will simplify the automatic mirroring of
programs.
Example mirroring on YZ plane (y-axis)
Before mirroring After mirroring
Description X Y LTol UTol Description X Y LTol UTol
Point A 40 10 - 0.1 0.2 Point A’ - 40 10 - 0.2 0.1
Before mirroring After mirroring
Description LTol UTol Description LTol UTol
2D angle C 30° - 1° + 2° 2D angle C’ 150° - 2° + 1°

Program
10.6 Open program

This function opens and activates already existing programs from the active work piece.
2. Click on Open.
4. Select the desired program from the list. It is also possible to select multiple programs at the same time.
5. Click on OK.
10.7 Save active program

This function saves the active program into the database.

Program
2. Click on Save.
4. The current program is saved into the database.
A Quartis program is always automatically saved into the database whenever the record or edit
mode is terminated.

Program
10.8 Import or link programs

This functions imports a program which is available as *.QrtProg or *.dmi file into the current active work piece. It is
also possible to link the program to the work piece.
2. Click on Import.
4. Select the desired program and click on Open. It is possible to select multiple programs at the same time.
5. Select the program type.

Program
Only Quartis (*.QrtProg) or DMIS (*.dmi) programs can be imported or linked.
6. Further programs can be added to the import list by using Add... .
7. Selected programs can be removed from the import list by using Remove.
8. In order to link the selected program with the work piece, check the check box Link. Else the programs will
be imported into the database.
If the program is linked, only file name and path are saved as a link into the database.
9. With the check box Link all you can determine if all programs from the list are to be linked or imported.
10. Activate the check box Open programs during import / linkage if all imported / linked programs are to be
opened after the import / linkage.

Program
11. Activate the check box Rule based assignment of ID and description in case the file name is to be
separated into ID and description.
The sequence of digits in the beginning of the file name then creates the program ID; the description is
created out the remaining string of the original file name.
A '_' sign can be used in the file name as a separator between the sequence of digits and description; this
separator will be removed automatically.
Example:
4711_Part_A transforms to ID=4711, Description=Part_A
If the check box is not activated or the file name does not start with a sequence of digits, the entire file
name is used as ID.
Example:
Wenzel_Metromec_Standard transforms to ID = Wenzel_Metromec_Standard, Description = (empty)
12. Clicking on Close will terminate the dialog without importing / linking any programs.
13. Click on Import / Link in order to start the import / linkage.
A green colored program indicates that the import / linkage was successful.
A red colored program indicates that an error occurred during the import / linkage.
14. In order to display the error report, click on .
15. Click on Close.
The program creation and modification date as well as the corresponding time are displayed in
the database view.

Program
For linked files the creation and modification information of the linked file is displayed; for
imported files the information from the file (DMIS programs) or the actual creation and
modification date of the program (Quartis programs).

Program
10.9 Export programs

This function exports existing programs from the active work piece.
Exported Quartis programs are encoded into the Quartis internal format.
2. Click on Export.
4. Select the desired program. It is possible to select multiple programs at the same time.
5. Click on OK.

Program
6. Click on Export file....
If needed, change storage location and file name in the dialog that opens.
It is possible to add more program from the current work piece to the export dialog by clicking on Add....
7. Click on Export.
The programs from the list are exported.
8. Click on Close.

Program
10.10 Display, edit and execute programs

This function displays the Program window in the workspace.
4. The Program window is displayed in the workspace.

Program
10.11 Execute program

10.11.1 Check program
This function is only available for DMIS programs.
This function checks the current DMIS program.
3. Click on the command button Check.

Program
4. The result of the checking process is displayed in the message window. By double clicking on a
displayed error or warning, the corresponding line of the program is displayed.
When executing programs an automatic check is conducted.
Program texts are displayed in different colors within the DMIS editor:
Comments: Grey
Executable keywords (MAJOR WORDs): Dark blue
Executable keywords (MINOR WORDs): Blue
Skipped keywords (MAJOR WORDs), this means commands, that neither result in an action nor a
syntax error in Quartis: Purple
Texts: Maroon
Numbers: Green

Program
10.11.2 Execute program in new measurement
This function starts the program in a new measurement. This means that the measurement number is increased by 1
as long as elements are already available in the current measurement.
3. Activate the function Program execution in new measurement.
4. Click on the command button Execute.
The program is executed in a new measurement.
10.11.3 Execute program with parameter or selective parameter modification
This function activates or deactivates the parameter modification.
The parameter modification (default or selective) is an execution mode which allows to edit program during their
execution.
This can take place in a new measurement or in the current measurement.
The program is executed step by step in the order specified by the program. The user can change and confirm the
parameter of the corresponding function before the program sentence is executed.
The altered parameters are automatically saved into the program.

Program
3. Click on the command button Execute program with parameter or selective parameter modification .
Select the program execution mode
· Parameter modification Off

Each program sentence is directly executed when executing the program.
· Parameter modification standard
When executing the program, each program sentence can be edited before it is executed.
· Parameter modification selective
When executing the program, pre-defined program sentences can be edited before they are executed.
Which program sentences can be edited, is defined in the Program settings.
The selected parameter modification is displayed by the button Execute:
Parameter modification Off
Parameter modification standard
Parameter modification selective
The program is now executed with the selected option.

Program
During the execution with parameter modification or selective parameter modification, you have
to pay attention that only those program lines are executed that also would be executed during
the normal program execution.
If the functions Jump or Branch are used it is possible, depending on the program and data
constellation, that not all program lines are suggested for the parameter modification.
10.11.4 Execute program in current measurement
This function executes the program in the current measurement.
This means that the current measurement is overwritten.
3. Deactivate the function Program execution in new measurement if it is active.
The program is executed in the current measurement.
10.11.5 Execute program in single step mode
This function executes the program in single steps.
The new program sentence is executed by clicking on the command button.
After the execution the program is again in pause mode until the next click on the command button is carried out.

Program
3. Click on the command button Single step.
The program sentenced marked in red is executed with the next click on Single Step.
The program can be further executed in regular mode (not single step) by clicking on the
command button Continue.
10.11.6 Pause program
This function halts the execution of the program and sets it into pause mode.
This function is only active when a program is in execution mode.

Program
3. Click on the command button Pause.
The program is also halted if the command button in the status window is clicked.
The pause mode can be terminated with a click on Continue and the program is executed from
the position it was halted.
Commands that have already been sent to the controller are processed when clicking on Pause.
This also applies for multiple machine mode.
If you want that the machine is stopped immediately, Stop has to be clicked or the emergency
stop has to be used.
10.11.7 Stop program
This function stops the execution of the program or terminates the record / edit mode.
3. Click on the command button Stop.
The execution of the program can also be stopped when the program is in pause mode and the
pause button is clicked in the status window.

Program
The recording / editing mode can also be terminated using the corresponding command button
in the status window.
10.11.8 Execute selection
This function executes a selected part of a program.
3. Select the line(s) and open the context menu with a right click.
4. Click on the entry Execute selection.
A start mark is set on the first selected line and end mark is set on the last selected line in the program.
In the dialog select if you want to measure in CNC on or CNC off mode and then click on OK.
This function is not available if the function Program execution in new measurement is active.

Program
10.11.9 Execute from cursor
This function executes a program from the line in which the cursor is currently located to the end of the program.
The program is always executed in the current measurement!
3. Select the desired line and open the context menu with a right click.
4. Click on the entry Execute from cursor.
A start mark ( ) is set in the current line.
In the dialog select if you want to measure in CNC on or CNC off mode and then click on OK.

Program
10.11.10 Execute to cursor

The program is executed from program start or a defined start position till the current row, i.e. till the row in which
the cursor is currently located.
The program is always run in the current measurement!
3. Select the desired line and open the context menu with a right click.
4. Click on the entry Execute to cursor.
A stop mark ( ) is set in the current line. .

Program
10.11.11 Set execution position
This function sets a new execution point from which the program can be executed.
This function is only available when the pause mode is active.
1. Select the line where the execution point is to be set and open the context menu with a right click.
2. Click on the entry Set execution point.
3. Click on Continue.
The program is executed from the new position.
Please note, that setting the execution point in multiple machine mode can lead to a situation
where program lines of other machines are skipped or executed repeatedly.
10.12 DMIS Results Export

10.12.1 Information about the DMIS results output
DMIS provides the export of inspection results in a standardized form (DMIS results output, DMO).
The DMIS results output can either be activated by using the FILNAM statement in a DMIS program or via Start
DMO in a Quartis program.
The second one is useful when you want
· to combine the output of various DMIS subprograms in one DMO file or

· to define individually the storage location and file name of the DMO file or
· to create a DMO file when the Quartis program is executed.

Program
When the program, which started the output, executes a DMIS statement ENDFIL, the DMIS results output will be
finished. The DMIS results output will also be finished when the corresponding Quartis function Finish DMO is
executed.
Storage location and file name of the DMO file
When activating via the FILNAM statement the file name is made up of the program ID, the program description and
the current measurement ID. The work directory defined in the system settings is used for the storage location of
the DMIS results output.
If the DMIS results output is initiated using the function Start DMO in a Quartis program and the corresponding
DMIS program is integrated as subprogram, you can individually define storage location and file name of the DMIS
file when calling the function Start DMO.
If the DMIS results output is initiated in a main program, statements or functions regarding the start of the DMO
output included in the subprograms are ignored. In this case, the definition in the main program is responsible for
the creation of the DMO file. This way, you can also combine the content of multiple DMIS or Quartis subprograms
in a single DMO file.
When is a DMO file saved?
Results are saved or refreshed when one of the following events occurs:
· Program execution switches to pause mode

· Program execution is stopped
· Synchronization of two carriages takes place (CRSLCT/ALL) in a multiple machine network (MMN)
· Calling a subprogram and returning to the running program
· Calling an External Program (CALL/EXTERN,SYS,...)
10.12.2 DMIS results output when executing Quartis program sentences
The program functions Start DMO and Finish DMO operate also when executing Quartis program sentences of the
type Load coordinate system or Evaluate.
The following table shows, which Quartis program sentence generates which DMIS output
Program sentence DMIS statement in Output for element No output for

DMO output (only type element type
significant part of the
statement)
Position [x] TOL/CORTOL, XAXIS

Program
Position [y] TOL/CORTOL, YAXIS
Position [y] TOL/CORTOL, ZAXIS
Position dAB [A] TOL/PROFP
Position dAB [B] TOL/PROFP
Position dAB [d]
Diameter TOL/DIAM
Length TOL/WIDTH, …, LONG

TOL/WIDTH, …, SHORT
Width
Length 2
TOL/ANGL
Opening angle
TOL/RAD
Radius
Half opening angle
Turning point
Form
Program sentence DMIS statement in DMO output
(only significant part of the statement)

TOL/DISTB, NOMINL, …, XAXIS
Distance Point-Point [X]
TOL/DISTB,NOMINL, …, YAXIS
Distance Point-Point [Y]
TOL/DISTB,NOMINL, …, ZAXIS
Distance Point-Point [Z]

Program
TOL/DISTB,NOMINL, …, PT2PT
Distance Point-Point [r]
Distance Point-Line
Distance Point-Plane
TOL/DISTB,NOMINL, …, ANGL_A1)
Distance Point-Point [ax]
TOL/DISTB,NOMINL, …, ANGL_B1)
Distance Point-Point [bxy]
TOL/ANGLB, …, XYPLAN
Angle Line-Plane [XY]
Angle Line-Line [XY]

TOL/ANGLB, …, YZPLAN
Angle Line-Plane [YZ]
Angle Line-Line [YZ]

TOL/ANGLB, …, ZXPLAN
Angle Line-Plane [ZX]
Angle Line-Line [ZX]

TOL/ANGLB
Angle Line-Plane
Angle Line-Line
RECALL/DA
Load coordinate system
All other coordinate system functions
1) The Minorwords ANGL_A and ANGL_B and the output of the two angles in the spherical coordinate system do not correspond
to the DMIS standard – but the user has the possibility to write ax and bxy in the DMO file the same way it was possible in
Metrosoft CM.
If header data is needed at the beginning of the DMO file, it can be created with a DMIS
program, which is integrated in the Quartis program as a subprogram. You find an example
(Example_dmo_header.dmi) in the \Examples directory.
Quartis program sentences, which are not saved in the DMO file
There exist standard features which can be evaluated in Quartis but are not saved in the DMO file:

Program
1. Quartis functions for which no equivalent statement is available in DMIS standard 5.2.
For example the evaluation of the spatial deviation (d). In DMIS standard 5.2, only the evaluation of the
deviation perpendicular to the surface is defined, which corresponds to the deflection (A). In DMIS standard
5.2 exists no statement for the spatial deviation.
2. Most of the evaluations in a polar coordinate system.
DMIS Standard 5.2 is based on the assumption of a cylindrical coordinate system while in Quartis the polar
coordinates are based on a spherical coordinate system. Results are output in a polar coordinate system only
in the case of equal results in both coordinate systems or if there exists an identification for the output
differing from the standard because of Metrosoft CM history.

Program
10.12.3 Behavior of DMIS results output in connection with program interruptions
If a program with activated DMO output is set to pause or stop mode during its execution, the DMO file is
refreshed at the same time.
The behavior of Quartis during program execution depends on whether there is already a DMO file with same name
in the defined location and whether Quartis has been restarted since the creation of the DMO file:
Program started with Execute
DMO file does not exist yet/anymore: A new DMO file is created.
DMO file already exists in the position defined: The existing DMO file is completely overwritten.
Program interrupted with Pause and continued (from any position)
DMO file does not exist yet/anymore: —
DMO file already exists in the position defined: The existing DMO file is updated, possibly repeated
OUTPUTS are replaced.

Program
Start from different execution positions and Execute to cursor; Quartis has not been restarted in the
meantime
DMO file does not exist yet/anymore: The DMO file is created with the name defined
(including header data) and then written according to
the executed commands.
DMO file already exists in the position defined: The existing DMO file is further written, repeated
outputs of executed program lines are replaced if
needed. *
* As long as program changes do not change the number of lines to be output per statement and no lines were inserted or
completely removed from the program, the corresponding lines in the output file are replaced correctly, else duplicate entries can
be created in the DMO.
Start from different execution positions and Execute to cursor; Quartis has been restarted in the meantime
DMO file does not exist yet/anymore: The DMO file is created with the name defined
(including header data) and then written according to
the executed commands.
DMO file already exists in the position defined: The existing DMO file is updated, the output of the
executed program lines is written at the end of the
existing DMO file.
If the DMIS results output is started via a main program and an interruption occurs that can only be
solved using the Stop mode during the execution of a subprogram, it is important to choose the
execution position in such a way that the jump from the main program to the subprogram is
executed again. This is the only way that the DMO file defined in the main program is created or an
already existing DMO file is completed.
However, in the subprogram the function Set/delete breakpoints and Set execution position can be
used in order to continue the program execution at the desired position.
10.13 Record program

Program
This function activates the recording mode.
In this mode all work steps are recorded into the program.
3. Click on the command button Record.
The recording mode can also be activated in the program window using the right mouse button.
It can be terminated as follows:

· Click on Stop
· Click on the command button in the status window

· Using the right mouse button in the program window and select Stop.

Program
10.13.1 Delete backwards
This function irrevocably deletes the program sentence above the red insertion line.
1. Select the desired program line.
2. Click on Delete backwards in the context menu (right mouse button).
10.13.2 Set insertion point
This function defines a position within a program on which the next program sentences will be inserted from.
This function is only available when the recording mode is active.

Program
1. If necessary, set the insertion point on the right position.
2. Click on Set insertion point in the context menu (right mouse button).
10.14 Edit program

These functions allow editing program sentences.
Quartis Program DMIS Program
3. Select the desired function.
Depending on if a Quartis or a DMIS program is displayed in the work window, different editing
functions are available.

Program
Edit program
Cut*
This function cuts the selected program sentences and saves them into the clipboard.
Copy
This function copies the selected program sentences into the clipboard.
Parallel to the binary data, all selected lines are also copied in ASCII text format into the clipboard.
Thus allowing to use them in any editor, e.g. Notepad, as text.
Insert*
This function inserts either inserts Quartis program sentences from the clipboard into the Quartis
program or text from the clipboard into a DMIS program.
The content of the clipboard is available until other program sentences are copied into the
clipboard or WM | Quartis is terminated.
Delete*
This function deletes the selected program sentences. In Quartis programs, the program sentences
are irrevocably deleted.
If a program sentence of the type Measure element or Construct element

is deleted in a Quartis program, the measured / constructed element is also
deleted in the current measurement from the database.
Depending on the settings defined in the database settings, the deletion of

the assigned element has to be explicitly confirmed or it is deleted without
confirmation.
Go to program line or marker
This function positions the cursors at a certain line number or any marker. In DMIS programs you
can only jump to line numbers.
Search for
Enter the text to be searched for in a Quartis program into this field, e.g. Load probe system.
Search upwards
The search for the entered text is executed upwards from the selected program sentence on.
Search downwards
The search for the entered text is executed downwards from the selected program sentence on. If
the focus is set to the field Search for, the search can also be executed downwards by pressing the
enter key.

Program
If the key combination Ctrl+F is pressed while the program window is active,
the ribbon Program is displayed and the focus is automatically set to the
Search for field.
The program detail view is not taken into consideration for the search.
Find
This function displays a search dialog that allows you to search for any text within the DMIS
program.
Find and replace
This function displays a dialog that allows you to search for any text and replace it another text
within the DMIS program.
Undo
This function revokes the last changes executed within a DMIS program.
Redo
This function revokes the carried out change by the UNDO function.
* Before using editing functions for Quartis programs, the editing mode has to be activated. This is an
additional security measure to ensure that programs are not changed by accident.
In editing mode it is also possible to edit an individual program sentence by double clicking on it or to
activate/deactivate program sentences. It is also possible to edit multiple program sentences
simultaneously .
The functions Cut, Copy, Insert and Delete can also be executed in the program window using
the right mouse button.
10.14.1 Activate edit mode
This function activates the editing mode for all opened programs.
In this mode you can edit/change existing program sentences, without having to execute the particular program with
parameter modification.

Program
The altered values are automatically written into the program.
4. The values of this individual program sentence can be changed by double clicking on it.
You can also activate the edit mode directly in the program:
· Via the context menu (right mouse button)
· By double clicking a program sentence

Therefore, the option Double-click to allow direct editing must be activated in the program
settings.
You can terminate the edit mode as follows:

· Click on Stop
· In the status window click on the command button
· Select Stop in the context menu (right mouse button) of the program
After the edit mode is terminated all changed programs will be saved.
With program sentences of the type Measurement () and Load probe system () you can edit multiple
program sentences at once as long as program sentences of the same type have been selected and after
activating the editing mode, the function Edit... is activated using the right mouse button.
More information can be found in the chapter Simultaneously edit multiple program sentences.

Program
10.14.2 Simultaneously edit multiple program sentences
This function allows editing multiple program sentences of the same type in one step.
It is available for the following actions:
· Changing types and tolerances of AUTO features (features that are automatically created during the element
measurement).
· Activate/Deactivate projection onto CAD for program sentences of the type Measurement (Point).
Activating/deactivating of the Projection onto CAD for the elements of the type point is only
possible if the module SURF is unlocked on the Metrokey.
· Replacement of probe system in program sentences of the type Load probe system.

Program
4. Select the program sentences that are to be edited.
You can also select all program sentences using the key combination Ctrl+A.
5. Click on Edit in the contextual menu (right mouse button).
The possibilities for the editing of program sentences as well as the corresponding procedure
depend on which program sentence the mouse pointer points when pressing the right mouse
button. Only program sentences that are of the same type as the one the mouse pointer was
pointing to will be edited simultaneously.
If the clicked program sentence type is only available once within the selection, the procedure is
the same when editing an individual program sentence.
6. Enter the desired changes.
clicked program sentence Edit…

(right mouse button)
Measurement () Edit type and tolerance of AUTO features
Measurement (Point) Activate/deactivate projection onto CAD
Load probe system Replacement of probe systems
other editable program sentences Editing of each individual program sentences.
The same procedure as if an individual program

sentence is selected and edited in editing mode
(double click on selected program sentence or via the
contextual menu using a right mouse button click).

Program
In the preceding image all selected program sentences type Measurement (Point) are edited as
the focus is set on line 6. If program sentences of a different program sentence type (e.g.
Measurement (Circle) in program line 12 or edge point in program line 15) are selected, they will
not be changed.
7. Confirm that you want to edit all selected program sentences of the same type.

Program
Simultaneously edit multiple program sentences - Features automatically created

during measurement
This function allows to edit multiple program sentences of the type Measurement () in one step.
1. Start the editing of multiple program sentences as described in the help topic Simultaneously edit
multiple program sentences.
Please make sure that the mouse pointer points on a program sentence of the type Measurement ()
when pressing the right mouse button.
If you are editing multiple program sentences of the type Measurement (Point) and the module SURF
is unlocked on your Metrokey, the dialog Edit multiple program sentences is opened first.
2. The evaluation dialog is directly opened when editing multiple program sentences of the type
Measurement. In contrast to editing a single program sentences, only the AUTO features of the selected
program sentences can be edited.
Depending on the content of the selected program sentence that is focused on, the corresponding AUTO
features are differently displayed.
Example (see image above):

Program
a. Positions in x, y and z are not determined so far in any of the selected program sentences of the type
Measurement (Edge Point). The check box Evaluate is empty, UTol and LTol are set to 0.000.
b. The spatial deviation d is determined for some of the selected program sentences. Therefore the
check box Evaluate is filled. UTol is empty .
If only a tolerance value is entered into the empty field and the check box is not activated
(check box filled ), the d deviation is furthermore evaluated for only those program
sentences that already evaluated this component before the editing. Thus only the tolerance
is adjusted.
For newly created features, the IDs are created according to the same scheme, as proposed
during the element measurement.
c. The deflection A is determined for all selected program sentences with an UTol/LTol of +/- 0.100
mm.
d. The trimming edge B is determined for all program sentences, however, the different program
sentences contain different tolerances. Therefore the fields for UTOL and LTOL are empty.
3. Enter the desired settings.
In the example above the feature d with a tolerance of 0.100 would be created for all selected program
sentences of the type Measurement (Edge Point) as soon as the program is executed. The tolerances for
the trimming edge B are not changed.
4. Click on OK and confirm that you want to edit all selected program sentences of the same type.

Program
Simultaneously edit multiple program sentences - Projection onto CAD

This function allows to edit the option projection onto CAD as well as AUTO features created during the
measurement for all selected program sentences of the type Measurement (Point) in one step.
Please make sure that mouse pointer points on a program sentence of the type Measurement () when
pressing the right mouse button.
The following dialog is only displayed if the module SURF is unlocked on the Metrokey.
Else the dialog Evaluate is displayed.

Program
2. This option activates/deactivates the Projection onto CAD for all selected program sentences of the type
measurement (Point).
3. The dialog Evaluate is opened with a click on the button in order to change the features and
tolerances.

Program
Simultaneously edit multiple program sentences - Replace probe systems

This function allows to replace probe systems loaded in a Quartis program by other probe systems without the
need of replacing them one by one.
This is especially useful when replacing original probe systems with the mirrored ones after a program has been
mirrored.
Please make sure that the mouse pointer points on a program sentence of the type Load probe system
when pressing the right mouse button.
2. All loaded probe systems within the selected program lines are displayed.
Click on the probe system ID you want to replace in the column new. Then select the probe system to
replace the currently loaded one.

Program
You can also enter probe system IDs in the input field of the column new that are not available in the
system database. In this case an error message that the probe system is not available will be displayed
when executing the program.

Program
10.14.3 Deactivate/Activate program sentences
This function activates or deactivates program sentences in a program.
Deactivated sentences are not included in the program process. This means the corresponding function is not
executed.
The first three steps are not available for DMIS programs as the editing mode is always active.
4. Select the program sentences that are to be activated or deactivated.

Program
5. Click on Deactivate/Activate in the context menu (right mouse button).
In DMIS program, $$ is written in the beginning of deactivated program lines. When activating
these lines again, the $$ will be removed.
10.15 Use program functions
These functions are only available for WM | Quartis programs.
10.15.1 CNC mode on/off
This function activates / deactivates the CNC mode
If CNC mode is activated, all following motion commands in the program are automatically executed by the
controller.
If the CNC mode is deactivated, the machine is moved manually using the joystick.
To prevent collisions the CNC mode is automatically deactivated when a program is created.

Program
3. Click on the command button CNC on.
In order to deactivate the CNC mode the command button CNC on has to be clicked once again.
10.15.2 Insert intermediate point
This function inserts an intermediate point with the coordinates of the current probe position into the program.
This function is used by CNC controlled measuring system in order to control the motion paths of
the coordinates measuring device during the automatic program execution and to avoid
collisions.
The distance between the intermediate point and the work piece should be larger than the
defined measuring distance.
3. Click on the command button Intermediate Point.
With existing PH20 or REVO (with RSP2) articulating probing system, programs are recorded with
the directions resulting out of the current swivel angle A and rotation angle B in the current
coordinate system.

Program
While the angle values are more of an informative character, the articulating probing system
always rotates in the recorded directions of the current coordinate system during the program
execution.
10.15.3 Insert dialog
This function inserts a user dialog into the program.
This dialog is displayed during the execution of the program. The program is halted until the user confirms the
dialog.
With the help of this function the user is provided with some important recommendations (for
instance which probe to set up or how to probe the next element).
Upon creation of a CNC program it should be considered that here the program execution stops.
3. Click on the command button Dialog.

Program
4. Enter the dialog text.
5. The font can be adjusted if needed.
6. Preview displays the dialog as it will be displayed during the execution of the program.
7. Click on OK. The dialog is inserted into the program.
10.15.4 Insert image, sound or video
This function inserts pictures, sounds or videos into the program. Those are displayed (picture) or executed (sound,
video) during the program execution.
The following file types are supported: *.bmp, *.gif, *.ico, *.jpg, *.jpeg, *.wmf, *.png, *.wma, *.mid,
*.mp3, *.mi, *.wav, *.avi, *.wmv, *.mpeg, *.mpg.

Program
3. Click on the command button Media.
4. Select the file to be inserted.
Preview displays the file as it will be displayed during the execution of the program.
5. Select the display size in %.
6. Define the display time if needed.
The program will automatically proceed after the display time has elapsed. If no display time is selected,
the dialog has to be confirmed with OK in order for the program to proceed.
Define if the file is to be displayed in full screen and if a background color should be applied. If the
function Full screen is disabled, the media is displayed in a dialog.
7. Set if the program continues (program does not stop during the display of the file) and if an acoustic signal
is played before the media is displayed.
8. Click on OK. The file is inserted into the program.

Program
10.15.5 Insert comment
This function inserts a comment into the program.
This function enables the programmer to insert some explanatory comments in his program
Comment lines are ignored during the execution and a program will not be halted.
Explanatory comments can be given to the user with help of this function. The insertion of
comment lines makes a program clearer so that it can be quicker adapted to new requirements.
3. Click on the command button Comment.
4. Enter a comment.

Program
5. Click on OK. The comment is inserted into the program.

Program
10.15.6 Insert marker
This function inserts a marker into the program.
Markers can for example be used for calling a subprogram.
3. Click on the command button Marker.
4. Enter a description.
5. Already existing markers within the current program are displayed and cannot be inserted twice.
6. Click on OK. The marker is inserted into the program.

Program
10.15.7 Call subprogram
This function calls another program (B) as a subprogram from a program (A).
It is also possible to run only specified subprogram segments (from marker ...to marker).
The execution of program A is halted. The specified sentences from program B are executed.
Program A proceeds from the position it was halted.
3. Click on the command button Subprogram.
4. Enter the name of the program or select the desired program in the drop-down menu ( ) or selection
dialog ( ).

Program
Only already existing subprograms can be called. This requires a careful programming planning.
Eventually the subprogram to be called should be inserted into the PIP in a second step.
5. Select if the complete subprogram or only a part of it is to be executed.
If only a part of the subprogram is to be executed, you have to set first the corresponding
markers within the program.
Accordingly the corresponding jump targets have to be defined previously within the DMIS
subprogram.
6. Click on OK. The call of the subprogram is inserted into the program.
10.15.8 Insert program loop
This function inserts a loop into the program.
This loop is a single loop which repeatedly executes a certain range within a program.
3. Click on the command button Loop.

Program
4. Enter the desired loop index (this variable is set to the start value when the loop is executed and increased with
the step width each further run through) .
The loop index can be used as a variable for the ID of measuring elements and references within
a loop. For more information, see chapter define/edit nominal values.
5. Enter the start value (this value indicates the value of loop index with the first run).
6. Enter the end value (the loop is cancelled as soon as the loop index has exceeded this value).
7. Enter the step width (this value indicates by how much the loop index is increased after one run).
8. Click on OK.
10.15.9 Insert branch
This function inserts a branch into the program.
One branch includes at least one condition and one ELSE-part. The program lines, which are located within the
condition are only executed if the condition is met. Otherwise, the program lines are executed inside the ELSE part.
If several conditions are inserted into a condition, they are evaluated from top to bottom until one of them applies.
Program sentences within the applying condition are executed and then the program will continue to run from the
end of the branch.

Program
3. Click on the command button Branch.

Program
4. Enter a description.
5. Enter a name for the condition.
6. Define a condition. The expression can also be enter directly in the input field. However, it is
recommended to enter the expression using the expression editor.
A double click on the condition input field opens the expression editor.
Element and feature data fields as well as functions to define Boolean expressions (TRUE/FALSE
expressions) are available in the expression editor.
7. More conditions can be added with .
8. The order of the conditions can be adjusted with .
9. Conditions can be deleted with .
10. Confirm with OK.
11. Program sentences can be recorded within the condition in the program. Set an insertion point between
the IF and ELSE line or ELSE and end.

Program
10.15.10 Insert jump to marker
This function inserts a jump into the program.
The program execution jumps to a defined marker with this function and continues from this marker on.
3. Click on the command button Jump.
4. Select a marker. All markers previously inserted into the program are available.
5. Click on OK. The jump to the marker is inserted into the program.
10.15.11 Increase / Decrease current measurement number
This function increases or reduces the measurement number by a certain value. All following commands are
executed in a new measurement. This is helpful if several parts are measured in one loop program.
It has to be considered that a loaded work piece coordinate system will not be available in the
new measurement and has to be created again first.

Program
3. Click on the command button Change measurement.
4. Enter the value by which you want to increase (positive value) or to reduce (negative value) the current
measurement.
5. Click on OK.
10.15.12 Edit measurement properties
With this function the opening of the dialog Edit measurement properties can be inserted into the program.
Before generating a report for example it is possible to modify the defined measurement properties again, or to
request the input of measurement properties with the function Increase Measurement.

Program
3. Click on the command button Properties.
The dialog Edit measurement properties opens as it would be the case if the Measurement properties
are edited in the database view.
10.15.13 Start / Finish DMIS results output
These functions can initiate and finish the DMIS resultats output.
The DMIS results output of one or multiple Quartis or DMIS subprograms can be combined in one DMO file defined
in a Quartis main program.
Information about which Quartis program sentence generates which DMIS output you will find in the help topic DMIS
resultats output when executing Quartis program sentences.
3. Click on the command button Start DMO.

Program
4. Define file name and storage location for the DMO file.
Click on button opens the dialog Define DMO file name and storage location.
the database.
The expression editor is opened by clicking on the command button Expression editor....
5. In the field FILNAM/’text’ you can define which text should be output after the statement FILNAM in the
DMO file.
You can enter the variable ’text’ as text or as expression. Click on opens the Expression editor.
If no input is made into the field FILNAM / ’text' during the recording of Start DMO, the directory path
and file name of the DMO file will be output after FILNAM/ in the DMO file.
6. Click on OK.
7. Now insert program sentences and/or subprograms whose results have to be recorded in the DMO file
just created.
Any DMO file definitions included in these subprograms will be ignored as the output has already been
defined and initialized in the Quartis main program.
8. Click on Finish DMO.

Program
The DMO file is created during the execution of the main program. The results of the DMIS
subprograms are recorded for this DMO file as soon as the corresponding DMIS Statements are
executed.
You find more information about DMIS results output in the corresponding help topics.
10.16 Change and print view

10.16.1 Activate/Deactivate split program view
This function splits the program window into 2 views.
3. Click on the command button Split View.

Program
10.16.2 Print program
This function prints the active program in the program window on the standard printer.
3. Click on the command button Quick Print.
10.16.3 Close program window
This function closes the program window.
3. Click on the command button Close.

Program
10.17 Display program sentence details
This function displays detailed information about the individual program sentences.
3. Click on Details in the context menu (right mouse button). Details can either be displayed right of the
program or below it.

Program
10.18 Set/Delete breakpoint

This function sets/deletes breakpoints within a program.
The program halts and is set into pause mode as soon as such a breakpoint is reached during the execution.
The program proceeds as soon as Continue is clicked or can be executed in single step mode by clicking on Single
Step.
3. Click with the right mouse button on the line number where you want to insert a breakpoint. Click on
Delete in the context menu (right mouse button).
It is possible to set several breakpoints in a program.
In order to delete all breakpoints, select Delete all break points in the context menu.

Multiple machine network
11 Multiple machine network

11.1 Information about multiple machine mode / multiple machine network
WM | Quartis is usually used on a single machine in single mode.
It is also possible to control multiple machines in multiple machine mode or in a multiple machine network. These
modes are mostly used in the car body metrology when, for example, one wants to measure a body shell on a
double column system with both columns at once.
Multiple machine mode (MMM)
In multiple machine mode, one Quartis client controls up to eight machines that are configured in the Quartis
The required common reference coordinate system for all machines is created either via a common reference
sphere or the function Couple machine.
Each machine uses its own system database. The measurement results of all machines are written into the (common)
measurement database.
In multiple machine mode, DMIS programs simultaneously control the configured machines.
Quartis programs can only be executed on the selected machine and not simultaneously for all configured
machines.
With properly configured multiple machine mode, the multiple machine network server (the multiple machine
network server is an application that ensures the synchronization and the collision control between the machines in the multiple
machine network) is automatically started when starting up Quartis.
Multiple machine network (MMN)
Up to eight machines can be controlled in a multiple machine network. Thereby each machine is controlled via its
own Quartis client (one Quartis client per computer).
Machines used in a multiple machine network are defined by a common multiple machine network ID configured in
the Quartis configuration program. The required common reference coordinate system is created either via a
common reference sphere or the function Couple machine.
Each machine uses its own system database and its own measurement database; however, the elements and work
piece coordinate system of the measurement database can be synchronized.
Quartis and DMIS programs can be executed in a multiple machine network. The function Synchronize multiple
machine network for the individual Quartis clients is controlled via a Quartis program as well as the data exchange
via the functions Send elements / PCS and Receive elements / PCS.
In the multiple machine network, a multiple machine network server (the multiple machine network server is an
application that ensures the synchronization and the collision control between the machines in the multiple machine network) is
used. When starting Quartis on a computer, the corresponding machine is registered with the multiple machine
mode server.
Thereby the Quartis client has to be started first for which the computer name or IP address matches the multiple
machine network identification.
Which machines are registered with the current multiple machine network is displayed in the settings for the
machine.
WM | Quartis ® R2018-2 Multiple machine network 275

If a system crash occurs on a Quartis client within the multiple machine network, the multiple
machine network is shut down.
The other Quartis clients can continue to be operated in single mode after confirming an
appropriate message. In order to re-create the multiple machine network, all Quartis clients have
to be stopped first and then be restarted.
11.2 Synchronize multiple machine network

The function Synchronize multiple machine network synchronizes all machines within the multiple machine network
as soon as the corresponding program sentence is reached within a program.
The machine that executes the program sentence Synchronize multiple machine network with a defined ID, waits
until all other machines registered with the multiple machine network server have also executed the program
sentence Synchronize multiple machine network with this ID.
The function is only available if the multiple machine network has been configured in the Quartis
1. Click on the ribbon tab Machine.
2. Click on the command button Sync.
3. Change the ID if needed.

The program sentence Synchronize multiple machine network is now recorded into the measurement
program.
When this program sentence is reached during the program execution, a message might be displayed that
the machine is waiting for the other machines.
The program execution only continues after all other machines of the multiple machine network
have also executed the program sentence Synchronize multiple machine network with the same
(synchronization) ID.
11.3 Send elements / PCS

In combination with the function Receive elements / PCS, this function allows the data exchange between two
machines connected via a multiple machine network.
2. Click on the command button Send.
4. Select the elements with the mouse tool in the graphics or using the element list.

5. If needed, select the work piece coordinate system to be sent.
6. Click on the command button Send.
The sent data is now cached on the multiple machine network server until the function Receive elements /
PCS with the same (data exchange) ID is executed on another machine of the same multiple machine
network.
The data exchange is synchronized, the sending machine waits until the data has been received.
If the function Send elements / PCS is executed while only one machine is registered with the
multiple machine network, the machine will not wait until another machine receives data.
If individual elements or work piece coordinate systems, that were to be sent, are missing in the
current measurement, the program sentence is executed nevertheless without message.
However, if all elements or work piece coordinate systems to be sent are missing in the current
measurement, an error message is displayed.
11.4 Receive elements / PCS

In combination with the function Send elements / PCS, this function allows the data exchange between two machines
connected via a multiple machine network.
2. Click on the command button Receive.

4. Click on the command button Receive.
Data sent from another machine with the same (data exchange) ID is now stored into the measurement
databases of the receiving machine.
The data exchange is synchronized; if no machine has sent data with the same ID, the receiving machine will
wait until it receives data.
Only data of one machine can be received; if another machine sends data with the same (data
exchange) ID, only the data of the machine sending data first will be received.
If elements or work piece coordinate systems with the same element or PCS ID already exist in the
measurement database of the receiving system, they will be overwritten.
If the function Receive elements / PCS is executed while only one machine is registered with the
multiple machine network, the machine will not wait until it receives data. Instead a message that
no data was received is displayed.
If this happens during the recording of a Quartis program, the program sentence is nonetheless
recorded correctly.

Machine
12 Machine
12.1 Information about the machine
Functions directly related to the machine are available under Machine.
The machine components such as controller, probe system, joystick and temperature sensors have to be configured
in the WM | Quartis configuration program.
The following machines are supported:
Machines
WPZ50, WPZ55, WPZ100, Leadshine ENC7480, WPC2030, WPC2040, WENZEL

WMC. WENZEL Pointmaster, WENZEL exaCT Analysis, I++DME Server, Zeiss
CMM-OS, Hexagon RDS (from RDS Version 4.1.0), FARO USB measuring arm.
12.2 Adjust machine settings
The settings for the simulation of a program process, the collision detection and control and
the multiple machine network can be adjusted in the settings for the machine.
12.2.1 Change measuring-/search-/retraction distance
The measuring distance defines the distance between the work piece surface and the lead point. From the lead
point the positioning speed is switched to the measuring speed and the probe is activated for the probe point
measurement.
The search distance defines the maximal distance which the machine travels further when a probe point is expected
in order to find it. If within this distance no probe contact takes place, the message "No point found" is displayed
and the probe moves back to the lead point.
The measuring and search distance should have the same value.
The retraction distance defines the distance which the probe will retract after measuring the probe point.
WM | Quartis ® R2018-2 Machine 280

Machine
a) Positioning
b) Measuring
1) Measuring distance
2) Search distance
3. Adjust the Measuring/Search/Retraction distance (depending on the global length measurements in mm or

inch) .
How to change the global length measurements>>
4. Click on OK.

Machine
The retraction distance is disabled as long as the check box next to it is not activated and the
probe will move back to the lead point.
With the inside elements circle, cylinder, sphere, rectangle and slot, the measuring and retraction
distance is automatically reduced in case it has been defined too large.
12.2.2 Change positioning speed and acceleration
The positioning speed defines how fast the machine is moving outside of measuring sequences.
The positioning acceleration defines how fast the machine accelerates to the positioning speed.

Machine
3. Adjust the positioning speed and acceleration (in % of the maximal possible speed/acceleration of the machine).
4. Click on OK.
12.2.3 Change measuring speed and acceleration
The measuring speed defines how fast the machine moves within measuring sequences.
The measuring acceleration defines how fast the machine accelerates to the measuring speed.
3. Adjust the measuring speed and acceleration (in % of the maximal possible measuring speed and acceleration of
the machine) an.
4. Click on OK.

Machine
12.2.4 Change articulating probing system settings
With a PH20 articulating probing system you can select if probe points are to be measure using head probing or
not.
3. Without head probing
If the check box is not selected, the probe points are approached by traversing in the three machine axes
X, Y and Z. A and B angle of the articulating probing system remain unchanged.
With head probing
If the check box is selected, probe points are measured by rotating and swiveling the articulating probing
system. The advantage in doing so is, that only the articulating probing system is moved and not the entire

Machine
machine, which reduces the vibrations. Thus it is possible to measure with higher measuring speed and
acceleration.
Min. probing angle and Max. probing angle
These settings allow limiting the probing angle α to the bottom and top. The probing angle α describes the
angle between the work piece surface and the stylus direction.
1 = Work piece, 2 = Max. probing angle, 3 = Min. probing angle
In order to avoid grinding probing, the max. probing angle is limited to 70°.
With a plane, for example, you can avoid with the min. probing angle that the probe head touches the plane
to be measured.
The limitation angles do not have an influence on the effective probing angle α with all element
types:
Element Effective probing angle α
Plane, Line, Surface, Point, Edge point, Inside slot, - α is larger than the min. probing angle
Inside rectangle, Inside sphere, Outside sphere,
- α is smaller than the max. probing angle
Outside cone
Inside circle, Inside cylinder, Inside cone - α is smaller than the max. probing angle
Min. probing angle has no influence on

measurement.
(Effective probing angle can go towards 0° , see

example inside circle)
Outside circle, Outside cylinder, Outside slot, - α corresponds with the min. probing angle
Outside rectangle, Curve
Max. probing angle has no influence on the
measurement.

Machine
Example inside circle:
If the quill can be positioned in the bore axis and the probing angle α does not exceed the max. probing
angle, all probe points are measured with the A and B axes of the PH20 without movement in the X, Y and Z
axis.
With large bores, the quill is positioned in X and Y in such a way, that the probing angle α equals the
defined max. probing angle. This prevents grinding probing or probing that does not reach the material
anymore.
α = max. probing angle
4. Click on OK.

Machine
12.2.5 Change scanning settings
The scanning speed is entered in [mm/s] or [Inch/s].
3. Change the scanning speed and acceleration.
4. Select if the measurement is to be executed with known or unknown scan path:
· known: With this method known (calculated from nominal values, distribution methods and distribution
parameter) scan paths are measured. This method is selected when the assembly deviations to be
expected are small (within the probe deflection).
Advantage
It is possible to measure with a high scanning speed (depending on the assembly)
Disadvantage
In the case of too large assembly deviations (larger than the probe deflection) an excessive deviation of the

Machine
probe system can occur or the probe loses contact to the assembly.
· unknown: With this method only start and end points as well as scan directions are calculated out of the
nominal values, distribution methods and distribution parameter. The probe does not follow a specified
scan path but moves along the assembly outline. This method is selected when the assembly deviations to
be expected are large (larger than probe deflection).
Advantage
It is possible to measure assemblies with large deviations.
Disadvantage
The scanning speed has to be reduced (depending on assembly).
When executing a program, an element can be measured with known or unknown scan paths. It
does not matter how this element had been measured while recording the program
5. Choose if you want to measure the pre-scan respectively the post-scan distance and adjust the values
accordingly.
The values defined for the pre-scan and post-scan distance only apply if the checkbox is activated.
At the beginning and end of each scan path no points are measured on the defined distances.
Open scan paths (e.g. lines or circles with reduced sector <360°) are shortened according to the set
distances.
Closed, circular scan paths are automatically elongated. This means, that the stylus actually travels more
than 360° with a complete circle so that a circle without gaps can be saved despite the pre-scan and post-
scan distance.
6. Activate the check box Probe deflection [%] in order to set the target probe deflection for the scan in
percent related to the minimum/maximum deflection of the probe.
If the check box is deactivated, the target probe deflection is defined automatically depending on the set
scan speed.
7. Click on OK.
12.3 Change joystick direction

The joystick direction can be set in 3 different ways. It can be moved in the machine coordinate system, the current
coordinate system or in element direction.

Machine
2. Click on the command button Joystick.
3. Select the joystick direction by clicking on the corresponding symbol.
4. Click on OK.
If the switch Automatic update when changing coordinate system is set, the joystick direction is
automatically adjusted after each coordinate system change.
With Move in element direction the joystick direction is adjusted to the largest component (X. Y
or Z) of the direction vector of the selected element.
12.4 Move machine to origin

This function moves a CNC-controlled machine automatically to the origin marks of the scale (initialize). This is
mandatory after the controller has been restarted.

Machine
2. Click on the command button Origin.
3. Check the motion path and the position of the articulating probing system. Then click on Move machine to
origin.
A dialog is displayed during the initialization, which provides information about the order and
actual state of the initialization sequence.
The displayed colors have the following meaning
Visualization
The axis cannot be initialized at the moment (is used on measuring machines with a
Red waiting
prescribed order of initialization)
Yellow ready The axis is ready to be initialized
Green done The axis is initialized

Machine
12.5 Activate/Deactivate axis drives

The machine can be moved manually by disengaging the axis drives. This can helpful for scribing a work piece for
example.
In order to be available, this function has to be enabled in the WM | Quartis configuration

program. The function can only be activated for machines, which are suitable for it.
Switch off axis drives
2. Click on the command button Drives.
3. Activate the option Scribe.
4. Click on OK.

Machine
Switch on axis drives
2. Click on the command button Drives.
3. Click on OK.

Machine
12.6 Position machine

This function positions the machine either absolutely or relatively in work piece or machine coordinates.
2. Click on the command button Position.
3. Select relative (stylus is shifted by the specified X, Y and Z values relative from the current position) or absolute
(stylus is shifted to the specified position absolute from the origin of the selected coordinate system) .
4. Select PCS (the relative movement or the absolute positioning respectively refer to the current part coordinate system)
or MCS (the relative movement or the absolute positioning respectively refer to the machine coordinate system).
5. Enter the X, Y and Z values.
Individual axes can be locked using the corresponding check box.
6. If a PH20 or REVO (with RSP2) articulating probe system is mounted, the swivel angle A and the rotation
angle B can be entered additionally.

Machine
When recording programs, the directions resulting out of these angles are recorded in the
current coordinate system.
While the angle values are more of an informative character, the articulating probing system
always rotates in the recorded directions of the current coordinate system during the program
execution.
7. Click on OK.
After confirmation with OK the movement is performed immediately and can only be aborted with
the EMERGENCY STOP.
12.7 Adjust temperature compensation settings

This function allows you to setup the manual or automatic temperature compensation.
2. Click on the command button Temperature.
3. Adjust the settings to your needs.
More information>>
4. Click on OK.

Machine
Temperature compensation
Work piece
Material
A material along with the corresponding expansion co-efficient can be selected from the material list for the work-
piece from the drop down list. This expansion co-efficient is then used for the work piece temperature
compensation and can be recorded in a program.
Active work piece sensors
This entry is only visible if a WPT100 temperature box is selected in the Quartis configuration program. If the check
box <Sensor 1>, <Sensor 2>, <Sensor 3> is activated, the corresponding work piece sensors are included in the
temperature compensation. If more than one sensor is activated, the average temperature of the active sensors is
used for the calculation.
The activation and deactivation of individual sensors can be recorded in the program.
Temperature limits
The temperature limits defines at what time a warning message is displayed. Enter the minimum and maximum work
piece temperature. The warning message is displayed as soon as the work piece temperature exceeds or undercuts
the corresponding value.
If a WPT100 temperature box is connected, an additional field for the maximum temperature difference is displayed.
Here you can define how much the temperature of different work piece sensors can differ from each other. If the
value is exceeded, a warning message is displayed.
The values for the temperature limits and the maximum temperature difference can be recorded in the program.

Machine
Materials
This tab sheet contains a table with a listing of all materials entered so far. By clicking on the corresponding field,
new material can be entered or an existing on can be altered.
The materials in this dialog are saved when you quit the entire temperature compensation dialog.
An entry always consists of material name and expansion co-efficient (alpha) of the material.
Delete
The active entry in the table (saved in blue) is deleted by clicking this button.
Temperatures

Machine
Depending on the way the temperature is measured, this tab has two different meanings.
Temperature measurement with a WPT 100 unit
This dialog displays the current temperatures T of the work piece and the axes and refreshes every second. If
multiple sensors are used per axis, the average temperature of these sensors is displayed.
In the column Tc the temperature which currently is used for the temperature compensation is displayed.
This temperature can be refreshed by proceeding as follows:
1. Exit the temperature compensation dialog by clicking on OK

2. Execute the program sentence Measure machine temperature resp. Measure Work Piece temperature.
3. Start Quartis
4. Switch from Offline and Online
Manual temperature measurement
The temperature to be used for the compensation for the work piece and axes are entered manually.
Below alpha the currently selected expansion coefficient for the work piece and the axes is displayed.
The expansion coefficient (alpha) for the axes is entered in the Quartis configuration program.
Work piece
Input / Display of the current work piece temperature as well as display of the temperature and expansion
coefficient (alpha) used for the compensation.
X axis, Y axis, Z axis
Input / Display of the current axis temperature as well as display of the temperature and expansion coefficient
(alpha) used for the compensation.
Sensors
This tab is only displayed if a WPT 100 unit is connected and selected in the configuration
program.

Machine
The tab displays the temperature of all the sensors selected in the configuration file along with their place of
installation, current temperature and permissible limits.
If more than one sensor is mounted for each axis or work piece, then the entries are also made for the current
difference and the maximum value.
The temperature limits as well as the maximum temperature difference of the sensors is entered
in the configuration program.

Machine
12.8 Couple machine

With multiple machine mode / multiple machine network, the individual machines are coupled with this function. By
coupling machines, elements that were measured on different machines are saved into an identical coordinate
system (coupling coordinate system) and therefore have the same basis for the evaluation.
In order to couple machines, all elements are measured with all machines and then saved into the same coordinate
system. The individual machines are then subsequently coupled using this coordinate system.
This function is only available if the multiple machine mode / multiple machine network is activated
in the Quartis configuration program. An already existing coupling is only active if the multiple
machine made is activated.
1. Place appropriate work pieces in the measuring volume in such a way that they are accessible with all
machines (e.g. three spheres in the center of the measuring volume).
2. Measure the elements with one machine and create a coordinate system (PCS or PCLS) with the available
alignment functions.
4. Click on the command button Coupling to open the dialog Couple machine.
Confirm that you want to create a new coupling, to activate an existing coupling or to deactivate an existing
coupling.
5. Repeat above steps with all other machines.
The coupled machines are specially marked in the status window in the display of the selected
machine with configured multiple machine network.
The display of the current coordinates can be switched to coupling coordinate system
coordinates.

Machine
The coupling is saved into the system database. The displayed coupling values correspond with
the rotation around Z-Y-X with subsequent translation.
With the button Coupling you can deactivate an existing coupling without deleting it and you can
activate it again.
The coupling can be deactivated by deleting it from the system database.
If another coupling is executed, the existing data will be overwritten.
If the rotation of the machines to each other is corrected via the corresponding CAA, one
coupling with a pure translation (Define origin) is sufficient.

Rotary table
13 Rotary table
13.1 Information about the rotary table
For using a rotary table as positioning axis, a rotary table must be configured in the WM | Quartis configuration
program.
The following machines are supported:
Machines
· WENZEL WPC 2030
· WENZEL WPC 2040
· WENZEL WMC
· I++ DME Server
In order to work with the rotary table, the module ROT (Rotary table) has to be unlocked on the
Metrokey.
13.2 Rotary table settings

The settings for the rotary table can be changed within this dialog
WM | Quartis ® R2018-2 Rotary table 301

Rotary table
3. Select the setting for the position of the rotary table.
do not change
The rotary table is used as handling system.
rotate with
The rotary table is used to enlarge the measuring volume, so that large, rotation-symmetric parts can be
measured.
4. Click on OK.
13.3 Calibrate rotary table

This function creates the rotary table coordinate system (RCS).
Calibrating the rotary table takes place in two steps:
1. Approximate alignment: Plane (rotary table surface) and circle (rotary table center)
2. Fine alignment: Measuring sphere in at least three rotary table angle positions
Mount the reference sphere on the rotary table, as far as possible towards the outside, at any angle position.
2. Click on the command button Calibrate.

Rotary table
3. Select the number of angle positions.
4. Enter the spherical diameter.
Before you start the calibration you must clear the probe.
The following contextual tab will be displayed:
6. Probe with the joystick the points on the surface of the rotary table.
8. Probe with the joystick the points in the center of the rotary table.

Rotary table
10. Probe with the joystick one point on the pole of the reference sphere.
11. Click on Save.
The calibration sequence will be terminated and the data of the rotary table coordinate system is saved in
the systems database.
13.4 Position rotary table

This function positions the rotary table.
3. Select the rotation type.
The rotary table can rotate absolutely from 0° to 360° or relatively to the actual position.
4. Select the rotation direction.
The rotation direction Shortest way is available only for the rotation type Absolute. Clockwise and
Counter-clockwise are always available.
5. Select the angle.
The angle is entered into the input field New in degrees. The old value of the angle is shown in the field Old
for easy control.

Rotary table
6. Enter a division.
As an alternative for the input of the angle in degrees, you also can enter a value for the division.
7. Click on Start.
The rotary table rotates to the new target position.

Probe system
14 Probe system
14.1 Information about the probe system
The following probe systems are supported:
Triggered probe system
TP2, TP6, TP20, TP200.
Scanning probe systems
SP25, SP80, SP600.
14.2 Adjust probe system settings

This dialog box allows you to predefine the probe calibration settings.
WM | Quartis ® R2018-2 Probe system 306

Probe system
3. Define the calibration settings:
If you want to use a program for the probe system calibration, select if the probe and intermediate points
are to be recorded in machine coordinates or relative to the reference sphere.
In machine coordinates
· The calibration program can only be executed on the machine on which the program was recorded.
· During the execution of the program no probe system has to be available in the database.
· With star probe calibration programs you have to record intermediate points between the individual styli.
Relative to the reference sphere
· The calibration program can be executed with different reference spheres (different positions) and on
different machines
Please note that during the execution the first positioning move is executed onto the original
reference sphere. If another reference sphere is active, the positioning command in the beginning
of the program should be adjusted manually.
· When recording a calibrated probe system (reference probe system) is required. This probe system has
to be available when executing the program.
· Star probes cannot be recorded relatively.
4. Enter the Number of probe points for the calibration of triggered probe systems.

Probe system
5. Activate the Message when exceeding maximum range and enter the maximum range for the calibration. If
the range is exceeded, a dialog (you can define in the dialog if the probe system is to be saved or deleted) is
displayed automatically.
6. Select the desired Calibration quality of Renishaw PH10-iQ probe system.
This option is available only if the articulating probe system is configured as PH10-iQ.
The higher the selected calibration quality, the more probe positions must be calibrated, before the PH10-iQ
probe system can be created.
7. In case you want to drastically reduce the calibration time for scanning probe systems, activate the check
box Time optimized calibration for scanning probe systems.
Whenever this option is activated, the characteristic lines of the probe system previously calibrated, are not
re-determined as these characteristic lines are very constant, even across a long period of time. The scan
paths are not re-scanned and the reference sphere is directly probed using 10 points.
The time optimized calibration cannot be used

· after a mechanical change has been carried out on a probe system, e.g. another stylus has
been mounted
· after a collision.
8. Define the settings for the capability (volumetric probing deviation) according to ISO 10360-4:
Enter the calibrated diameter of the test sphere and select the desired test method:
· HP: Scanning on a known path in order to measure with a high point density
· LP: Scanning on a known path in order to measure with a low point density
· HN: Scanning on an unknown path in order to measure with a high point density
· LN: Scanning on an unknown path in order to measure with a low point density
9. Select the Filter method to be applied for the capability (volumetric probing deviation).
10. Click on OK.
14.3 Switch probing mode

In order to measure elements, WM | Quartis supports different probe modes (Triggered, Scanning, Pecking and
Centering). An overview of the individual modes can be found in the topic Information about measuring.

Probe system
2. Click on the arrow ( ) in the command button Switch probing mode.
3. Select the desired probe mode.
Depending on the used hardware, different probe modes are available.
All probe modes unlocked on the Metrokey are available in offline mode. Therefore it is
important to only select a probe mode that is supported by the used measuring machine.
14.4 Calibrate probe system

14.4.1 Calibrate probe system manually or semi-automatically
This function calibrates a probe system either manually (all points are measured by hand using the joystick) (only
triggered probe system) or semi-automatically (the first point (the first two points with disc or cylindrical stylus flat) is
measured manually using the joystick, all further points are measured automatically) .
Scanning probe systems can only be calibrated semi-automatically or automatically. A manual

calibration is not possible.
In order to calibrate a SP25, the probe configuration has to be known. The probe configuration is
determined using the function Set up probe system.
The form of the stylus (spherical, cylindrical or disc) has to be known for the calibration. The form
is defined using the function Set up probe system.
If no reference sphere is available on the database yet, the reference sphere calibration is
automatically started when calling the function Calibrate probe system. The reference sphere is
then calibrated together with the first probe system.

Probe system
3. Adjust the machine or probe system settings if needed.
The option Time optimized calibration for scanning probe systems can be activated or deactivated in
the probe system settings.
If no probe system is loaded, yet, the probe head position to be calibrated has to be selected via
the function Rotate articulating probe system prior to starting the calibration.
4. Select the stylus to be calibrated.
5. Manual calibration:
Select the stylus and probe the points - without confirming the dialog with Start - on the reference
sphere using the joystick.
Semi-automatic calibration:
Click on Start. Then probe one point with the joystick on the pole of the reference sphere. Thereby the
pole is located in the elongation of the stylus. All other points are probed automatically.
With the semi-automatic calibration of spherical disc stylus, cylindrical disc stylus and cylindrical
stylus flat, you have to probe two points using the joystick. The first point is probed on the pole,
the second one on the side, slightly above the equator of the reference sphere.

Probe system
Spherical stylus Spherical disc stylus Cylindrical stylus flat

Spherical cylinder stylus Cylindrical disc stylus
6. Enter a unique description for the probe system or accept the automatically suggested ID.
7. Click on OK.
14.4.2 Calibrate probe system automatically
This function allows you to take over the probe systems of an articulating probing system into calibration list. These
can subsequently be calibrated automatically.

Probe system
In order to be able to use this function, a reference probe system has already to be calibrated
and loaded. The articulating probing system also has to be calibrated.
Only styli that are positioned in the same axis as the probing system can be calibrated with this
function. Therefore it is not possible to automatically calibrate star probes or angled probes (L-
probes, hook probes).
Collisions can occur if the automatic calibration is started for such probes!
3. Adjust the machine or probe system settings if needed.
The option Time optimized calibration for scanning probe systems can be activated or deactivated in
the probe system settings.
4. Select the appropriate stylus to be calibrated.
5. Select the reference probe system.
When calling the function, the currently loaded probe system is suggested as reference probe system.
The same group number (same number as for the reference probe system) is assigned to all
subsequently calibrated probe systems).

Probe system
Length and diameter of the current stylus have to be known in order to execute an automatic
calibration correctly. Therefore select a reference probe system which has been calibrated with
the current stylus.
6. Click on the command button Create calibration list via program if you only want to calibrate probe
systems for certain programs.
7. Click on the command button Create calibration list via matrix,in order to select the desired probe head
positions for the calibration list or to expand an existing calibration list.
8. Click on the command button Create calibration list for PH10-iQ probe system to enter the needed
angle positions for the creation of the PH10-iQ probe system.
This option is only available for a configured PH10-iQ articulating probe system.
9. The entire calibration list can be deleted by clicking on the command button Delete.
10 Click on Start.
Create calibration list via matrix

This function allows you to select and then calibrate any angle position of the probe system and to take them over
into the calibration list. These can subsequently be calibrated automatically.
1. Start the calibration as described in the help topic Calibrate probe system automatically.
2. Click on the command button Create calibration list via matrix.

Probe system
3. Select the desired probe head position(s) in the matrix to be calibrated.
The probe head position for the selected angle is displayed in the graphics. By clicking with the right
mouse button into the graphics, the display of the articulating probe system can be adjusted to the
mounting position of the machine.
Additionally, the following functions are available for the selection of the probe head positions to be
calibrated:
Functions
All already existing probe systems within the selected range are marked/unmarked with a green
check band and can be re-calibrated.
All already existing probe systems outside of the selected range are marked/unmarked with a
red check band and can be re-calibrated
All defined but not yet calibrated probe systems are marked with a grey check and can be
calibrated.
Such probe systems only exist if they were copied from another system database into the
current one. They consist out of a name and the angle positions A and B but do not possess any
calibration data.

Probe system
All probe systems calibrated offline (whenever WM | Quartis is not connected to the machine, the
function Calibrate probe system automatically can be started in order to calibrate additional probe system
angle positions in offline mode) are marked with a check mark and can be calibrated.
Probe systems with the status Offline only contain simulated calibration data
for the creation of measuring programs on an offline workstation.
Before using on a machine, these probe systems must be calibrated on the

actual machine.
Opens the list view. In the list view all probe systems with their calibration data belonging to the
reference probe system are listed.
The group number can be changed in the database window using the
function Edit data.
Opens the dialog Rotate and swivel probe head and thus provides the dialog's functionality
for the selection of the probe head positions to be calibrated .
4. Enter a unique ID and optionally a description for the probe system to be calibrated.
The selected probe head positions are adopted into the calibration list.
Additional information can be found in the help topic Calibrate probe system automatically.
Create calibration list via program

This function allows you to select measuring programs and to automatically take over probe systems included into
the calibration list. These can subsequently be calibrated automatically.

Probe system
2. Click on the command button Create calibration list via program.
3. Select the programs whose probe systems are to be taken over into the calibration list.
If another program is called as subprogram from a selected program, the probe systems
included in the subprogram are also taken into consideration.

Probe system
5. Deactivate probe systems that are not to be calibrated.
Only those probe systems are taken over into the calibration list, that are assigned to the same
group as the reference probe system. If there are also other configurations or groups in the
measuring program, they will be grayed out on the dialog.
The group number can be changed in the database window using the function Edit data.
The selected probe systems are taken over into the calibration list. The calibration list can be edited, if
needed, via the function Create calibration list via matrix.
Create calibration list for PH10-iQ

Depending on the selected option for Calibration quality of Renishaw PH10-iQ probe system and the mounting
position of the head, the calibration list will be created on the basis of Renishaw guidelines.
The calibration of these probe systems is a precondition for the function Create PH10-iQ probe system.
The function is available only for configured PH10-iQ articulating probe systems.
So that a calibration list for a PH10-iQ probe system can be created, a reference element must be
selected, in which position the gravity has no influence on deflection of the probe system. The
stylus direction must point downwards.
Load this probe system before starting the function Calibrate probe system.
2. Click on the command button Create calibration list for PH10-iQ.

Probe system
editor
3. Deactivate probe systems that are not to be calibrated.
If the corresponding probe systems do not yet exist in the system database, they will be displayed as
new calibrating probe systems in the dialog. Their IDs and descriptions can be edited before they are
entered in the calibration list.
Only existing probe systems are taken into account which belong to the same group as the
reference probe system.
In the database window you can change the group number within the function Edit database.
The selected probe systems are taken over into the calibration list. The list can be changed with the
function Create calibration list via matrix if necessary.
14.4.3 Calibrate probe system for PHS
As soon as the PHS articulating probing system is calibrated, a probe system can be calibrated. Each used probe
system has to be calibrated in only one position.
All other positions can then be approached using the function Swivel and rotate articulating probing system without
having to calibrate them. As only one position has to be calibrated, the function Calibrate probe system
automatically is not available.
The probe system configuration has to be known for the PHS calibration. It can be defined using
the function Set up probe system.

Probe system
2. Click on the command button Set up.
3. Switch to the tab Configuration.
4. In order to be able to use the probe system in each position, the deflection of the configuration has to
be defined.
Select the adequate deflection for the configuration in the drop down menu or enter the corresponding
value.
5. Click on OK.
6. Start the function Calibrate probe system manually or semi-automatically in order to execute the probe
system calibration.
14.5 Set up probe system

This function is used to display and modify the current probe system. Further, the probe system can also be fully
configured so that the probe system can be displayed in 3D graphics.

Probe system
In order to calibrate a SP25, it is required that the probe system is set up (graphically configured).
The stylus form (spherical stylus, cylindrical stylus, disc stylus) has to be known in order to
calibrate a probe systems.
If the probe system is set up, the stylus form is automatically adopted from the configuration. If
you do not set up a probe system, the stylus form has to be determined by the used.
3. Change to the tab Components.
4. Select the desired components from the template catalog (below) and add them to the user catalog
(above) by clicking on .
By clicking on components can be deleted from the user catalog.

Probe system
5. In the user catalog components from the template catalog can be adjusted to the real existing
components.
To do so, the component has to be selected, expanded and the object to be changed has to be
marked.
The properties of the object are then displayed to the right and can be edited.
6. The user catalog can be saved as ProbeComponents.xml file in the directory which is defined under
Common data by clicking on .

Probe system
7. Change to the tab Configuration.
8. Select the components from the user catalog (below) that correspond with the current probe system.
Add them with to the configuration. The components have to be mounted from top to bottom.
Wrong components can be removed with .
deletes the current configuration and one can mount another configuration.
9. Select New Configuration.
10. Enter a name for the configuration.
11. The configuration can be saved as an assembly group under this name.
Click on to do so.
The assembly group then appears in the user catalog under assembly group and can later be loaded
for a new configuration without having to mount all individual components.
12. Click on Adopt to assign the new configuration to the current probe system.

Probe system
13. Change to the tab Stylus.
All available styli are displayed. The status of the styli is shown using different symbols:
Stylus is calibrated
Stylus data has been changed
Stylus is not calibrated
The calibration data of the stylus have been marked for deletion
The detail data of the selected stylus is displayed in the data table.
Date/time of calibration
Date and time of the last calibration are displayed.
Diameter
Displays the diameter of the ball tip of the current stylus. If the exact diameter of the ball tip is known,
then the same can be entered here. Diameter 0 is displayed for styli that have not been calibrated.
Range
The range determined at the time of calibration is displayed along with date and time of calibration.
Position
The distance of the probe tip center to the rotation and swiveling point of the probe head is displayed
Offset

Probe system
An offset in machine coordinates (MCS) for each axis can be assigned for the current stylus. The probe
tip center is shifted by the value of the offset in X, Y and Z. The movement can be seen in the display
fields Position.
Coordinates
Here the direction can be switched from Cartesian to Polar.
Direction
This is the direction of the current stylus. For star probes, the direction for styli 2 to 5 has to be entered.
14. By clicking on the stylus is set as calibrated.
With the calibration of the selected stylus is marked as deleted. If you exit the dialog with OK, the
calibration is definitely deleted.
15. Click on OK.
It is possible to enter an offset for the stylus in case you want to measure with the calibrated
stylus in a different depth than the calibrated position (e.g. with a cylindrical stylus or for the shaft
probing with spherical styli).
14.6 Load probe system

This function loads an already calibrated and in the database available probe system.
2. Click on the command button Load.

Probe system
3. Select the desired probe system in the drop down list ( ) or directly from database ( ).
4. The stylus diameter and the corresponding range are displayed.
5. The angles of the selected probe system are displayed under Probe head.
When loading a probe system with active PHS articulating probing system, the option Retain angles is
available. If this option is activated, the articulating probing system will not swivel to the calibrated
position, but the current position of the articulating probing system is kept. In this case, the current D
and E angles are displayed.
6. The field previous displays the slots which are currently (before the change) active.
The field after displays the slots which are assigned to the selected probe system and therefore will be
active after the change.
Thus it is possible to recognize if the components of the new probe system have to be retrieved from
the stylus changing racks.
7. Different options are available for the change.
8. Click on OK.
Make sure that, before a probe system is deposited in or retrieved from an ACR1 stylus
changing system, the speed control of the operating unit (HT-400) is set to maximum speed (100
%).
If the speed is too low, the screwing process starts before the probe system has reached the
desired end position. The start of the screwing process to fasten or loosen the fastening screw
starts after a certain time after the probe system has passed a light barrier system.

Probe system
14.7 Save probe system

This function saves the current probe system into the system database.
2. Click on the command button Save.
3. Enter a probe system ID or take over the automatically suggested ID.
If an already existing probe system is to be overwritten, it can be selected in the drop down list ( ) or in
the selection dialog ( ) from the database.
4. The stylus diameter and the corresponding range are displayed.
5. The angles of the probe system are displayed in the fields next to Probe head.
6. The slots of the probe system are displayed under Current configuration.
7. Click on OK.

Probe system
14.8 Create PH10-iQ probe system

With this function a PH10-iQ probe system can be created. The function is available only for configured and
calibrated PH10-iQ articulating probe systems.
A PH10-iQ probe system can be rotated in any position and used for measurements. This position must not be
calibrated before.
PH10-iQ probe systems can only be inferred for triggered systems with a spherical styli tip, whose
styli lie on the same axis as the probe system.
Scanning probe systems as well as triggered probe systems with star probes, angled probes (L-
probes, hook probes) or probes with special probe tips (disc probes) may not be used as basis
for an inferred probe system.
2. Click on the command button Create.
3. Adjust if needed the calibration quality of the PH10-iQ probe system in the Probe system settings.
4. Select the reference probe system.
It must be a probe system where gravity has no influence on the deflection of the probe system. The stylus
direction must point downwards.
5. If the reference probe system is calibrated and the stylus points downwards, probe systems, which are
necessary for the calculation of the inferred PH10-iQ probe system, are entered in the calculation list.
Which probe systems are necessary for the calculation depends on the selected PH10-iQ probe system
calibration quality and the mounting position of the articulating probe system.
Only calibrated probe systems are entered in the calculation list.

Probe system
6. Click Create to infer the PH10-iQ probe system in the calculation list from the data of the displayed probe
systems.
If not yet all necessary probe systems are calibrated, the button Create is deactivated.
You can use the function Create calibration for PH10-iQ to see, which angle positions are used for
the calculation.
In the database view the created PH10-iQ probe system has the status inferred. If this probe
system is loaded, in the status window its ID is prefixed with the letter "iQ".
Programs, written for a common PH10 probe system, contain no program sentences ‘Rotate
probe head to angle’ to rotate the PH10-iQ probe system, but ‘load probe systems: [ID]’-
program sentences. For executing such programs with a PH10-iQ, the necessary positions must
be saved as inferred probe systems with the desired ID.
In order to do so the PH10-iQ probe system is rotated to the necessary position and saved under
the desired ID. Thus created probe systems are also marked as inferred probe systems.
14.9 Adjust probe system

This function adjusts the position and the diameter of a calibrated stylus based on two measured elements (one
element is used as reference element).
Circles and spheres can be used for the adjustment.
Both elements have to be measured before the function is called.

Probe system
2. Click on the command button Adjust.
3. Select the element which was measured with the current stylus.
4. Select the element (reference element) to which the current stylus is to be adjusted.
5. Select either Auto (the actual diameter of the reference element is used for the diameter correction of the current
stylus) or Fixed nominal value (a fixed nominal value is used for the diameter correction of the active probe
stylus. If the diameter is set to 0 in the Fixed Nominal Value field, then no diameter correction is executed, but only a
position correction) for the nominal value for diameter correction.
6. The offset of the position in X, Y and Z, the diameter correction D by which the current stylus is
corrected with as well as the new stylus diameter are displayed.
7. Click on OK.
The adjustment of the current stylus is executed and the dialog Save probe system is displayed
automatically.

Probe system
8. Enter the probe system ID or adopt the suggested ID. If an already existing probe system is to be
overwritten it can be selected using the drop down list ( ) or directly from the database ( ).
9. Click on OK.
14.10 Optimize probe system

This function optimizes the stylus diameter of a calibrated probe system based on a measured element with known
nominal value.
The elements circle, cylinder, or sphere can be used for the optimization.
The element has to be measured before the function is called

Probe system
2. Click on the command button Optimize.
3. Select the element with which the probe stylus is to be optimized
4. Enter the nominal value of the selected element.
5. The uncorrected and corrected stylus diameters are displayed.
6. Click on OK.
While exiting with OK, the diameter of the active probe stylus is corrected by the difference between the
nominal and actual value and the Save probe system dialog is displayed automatically.

Probe system
7. Enter the probe system ID or adopt the suggested ID. If an already existing probe system is to be
overwritten it can be selected using the drop down list ( ) or directly from the database ( ).
8. Click on OK.
14.11 Determine volumetric probing deviation

This function allows you to check if a certain measurement is possible within the accuracy and time defined by the
manufacturer (Capability of probing system ISO 10360-4).
In doing so, a sphere is scanned on predefined paths. Specific deviations are calculated and reported from the
measuring points. The deviations have to lie within the manufacturer's data.
The function is only executable for scanning probe systems.
2. Click on the command button Capability.
Probe the pole of the sphere in direction of the stylus.
Afterwards the sphere position is automatically determined with 5 points in triggered mode.
The ISO 10360-4 distribution is subsequently scanned in a second sphere measurement. In both cases,
the distribution is displayed in the graphics. The standard values are used for the ISO 10360-4
distribution. These values can partially be adjusted in the probe system settings.

Probe system
3. At the end of the measurement a dialog containing the results is displayed.
4. Click on Close.
The results are saved in the file "Quartis_ISO10360-4_JJJJ-MM-TT_hh.mm.ss.dat" in the Quartis report
directory.
If the file cannot be created, an error message is displayed.
No measuring element is created nor saved in the database
The function can be recorded in a program. However, no dialog is displayed when executing the
program. The output file is automatically created at the end of the measurement.
14.12 Define stylus form

The stylus form is adopted automatically from the configuration.
If the probe system has not been set up, the stylus form has to be determined by the user.

Probe system
3. Switch to tab Stylus.
4. Select the desired stylus.
5. Select the stylus form.
Sphere Spherical disc Cylindrical disc Flat cylinder Spherical cylinder
6. Enter the diameter of the sphere, disc or cylinder.

Probe system
7. Enter the height of the disc or the cylinder. The height has only to be entered if disc cylindrical, disc
spherical or cylinder flat has been selected under form.
8. Click on OK.
14.13 Enter stylus offset

It is possible to enter an offset for a stylus in case you do not want to measure with the calibrated stylus on the
calibrated position but in another depth (e.g. with cylindrical stylus or for shaft probing with spherical stylus)
3. Switch to tab Stylus.
4. Select the desired stylus.

Probe system
5. Under Offset, enter the corresponding relocation in desired direction. X, Y and Z correspond with the
machine axes, stylus direction correspond with the stylus direction from the configuration (including
articulating probing system calibration).
In order to optimize the stylus direction, you can measure a cylinder on the reference sphere with
the cylindrical stylus beforehand.
6. Now the direction of the previously measured cylinder can be adopted for the stylus direction by
selecting the cylinder under From element.

Reference sphere
15 Reference sphere
15.1 Information about the reference sphere
The reference sphere serves as a normal for the calibration of probe systems.
15.2 Adjust reference sphere settings

This function displays the data of already existing reference spheres. They can be changed and saved into the
database.
3. Select the reference sphere using the drop down menu ( ) or the selection dialog ( ).
The ID can also be entered directly.
4. Enter the diameter d1 of the reference sphere (this diameter is determined exactly and is written down in the
certificate of your reference sphere; the number of decimal positions is independent of the country settings and is 4 for
mm and 6 for inch) .
WM | Quartis ® R2018-2 Reference sphere 337

Reference sphere
5. Enter the angle probing area a (this angle is used for calculating the probing points during the automatic calibration
or automatic creation of a new reference sphere. For an optimal point distribution > 180° should be selected. In
exceptional cases (e.g., short styli) it can be reduced, but this can drastically reduce the quality of the calibration) .
6. Enter the diameter d2 of the security area (this is an area around the shaft of the reference sphere which is left out
during the calibration of a stylus) .
7. Enter the direction v of the reference sphere shaft (the direction v determines the direction of the cylinder that is
left out while calibrating a probe. It always points from the outside to the sphere center) .
Enter the direction directly Cartesian or using the direction dialog .
The entered values can be inverted using .
8. Click on Adopt.
9. Click on OK.
15.3 Load reference sphere

This function loads a reference sphere that has already been created and saved in the database.

Reference sphere
3. Select the reference sphere using the drop down menu ( ) or the selection dialog ( ).
4. Click on OK.
15.4 Calibrate reference sphere

This function generates a new reference sphere and saves it in the database.

Reference sphere
3. Enter the ID for the reference sphere to be created.
If an already existing reference sphere is to be overwritten, it can be selected using the drop down menu ( )
or the selection dialog ( ).
4. Enter the diameter d1 of the reference sphere (this diameter is determined exactly and is written down in the
certificate of your reference sphere; the number of decimal positions is independent of the country settings and is 4 for
mm and 6 for inch) .
5. Enter the angle probing area (this angle is used for calculating the probing points during the automatic calibration or
automatic creation of a new reference sphere. For an optimal point distribution > 180° should be selected. In exceptional
cases (e.g., short styli) it can be reduced, but this can drastically reduce the quality of the calibration) .
6. Enter the diameter of the security area (this is an area around the shaft of the reference sphere which is left out
during the calibration of a stylus) .
7. Enter the direction of the reference sphere shaft (the direction v determines the direction of the cylinder that is left
out while calibrating a probe. It always points from the outside to the sphere center) .
Enter the direction directly Cartesian or using the direction dialog .
The entered values can be inverted using .
8. Click on OK.
The following contextual tab is displayed:

Reference sphere
9. Probe one point on the pole of the reference sphere which is in the stylus direction. All further points are
measured automatically.
If no reference sphere is available on the database yet, the reference sphere calibration is
automatically started when calling the function Calibrate probe system. The reference sphere is
then calibrated together with the first probe system.

Articulating probing system
16 Articulating probing system

16.1 Information about the articulating probing system
In order to be able to use an articulating probing system it has to be selected in the WM | Quartis configuration
program.
The following articulating probing systems are supported:
Articulating probing systems
PH10M*, PH10MQ*, PH10T*, MH8, MIH, MH20i, PH20, REVO, REVO-2, PHS1, PHS2
* also configurable as PH10-iQ
The following probe heads are also configurable in the configuration program. However, the group Articulating
probing system is not available as they are fix probe heads:
Fix probe heads
Fix, PH6, PH6M, SP80
16.2 Change articulating probing system settings

The calibration settings for the articulating probing system can be changed within this dialog.
WM | Quartis ® R2018-2 Articulating probing system 342

3. Enter the number of probe points.
4. For the calibration of a PHS you can enter the maximal permitted calibration quality (maximal position
deviation of the spheres per reference sphere position) . If the check box is activated, a dialog (you can enter if the
calibration is to be saved or discarded in the dialog) is automatically displayed when exceeding the calibration
quality.
5. When the checkbox Time optimized calibration is activated, a PHS2 is initialized and then calibrated, when
calling the function Calibrate articulating probing system PHS and in the system database no calibration data
is available. If calibration data is available, a PHS2 will be only initialized, but not recalibrated.
When the checkbox Time optimized calibration is deactivated, a PHS2 is initialized and then calibrated,
when calling the function Calibrate articulating probing system PHS Calibration takes place always, even if
calibration data is available.
6. Click on OK.
The check box Message when exceeding calibration quality is only available if a PHS is
configured.
The checkbox Time optimized calibration is only available if a PHS2 is configured.
16.3 Swivel and rotate articulating probing system

This function rotates the articulating probing system onto the desired position.

2. Click on the command button Rotate.
3. Enter either
· the angles
Angles can either entered manually, defined by moving the angle cursor or by moving the mouse and holding down the
left mouse button on the graphics. Only angles that can be reached with the existing articulating probing system can be
defined.
· the reference element
Selection of a reference element from the database. The probe head is rotated in such a way that the probe system
points in direction opposite to the element direction. The direction can be reversed using the button.
· or the direction
The direction can either be entered Cartesian or using the button via the direction dialog. The probe head is rotated
in such a way that the probe system points in the opposite direction. The direction can be reversed using the button.
4. The articulating probing system is rotated by clicking on Rotate.
5. Click on OK.

When the dialog is terminated with OK, the articulating probing system is rotated onto the
entered angles.
By clicking with the right mouse button in the graphics the following functions can be activated:
· Machine view
· Head rotation
With these functions the display of the articulating probe system can be adjusted to the mounting
position of the machine.
When using a PHS 1 articulating probing system, it can be rotated with the joystick via the function
Rotate with joystick ( ). This function can also be started directly via the HT4000 with the
function key F9.
The PHS articulating probing system can only be rotated/swiveled if it has been initialized. The
exception is rotating/swiveling via the function Rotate with joystick ( ). The articulating probing
system is initialized during its calibration.
16.4 Calibrate articulating probing system PH10

This function calibrates a PH10 articulating probe system.
The calibration determines the spatial alignment and position of the articulating probing system.
Generally only one calibration is necessary. Alteration of alignment or position of the swivel-head or a displacement
of the reference sphere require re-calibration.
2. If needed, adjust the number of probe points for the calibration in the Articulating probing system settings.
Click on the command button Calibrate.

3. Click on Continue... and position the stylus in a way that the longitudinal axis of its shaft points towards the
center of the reference sphere.
Probe the first point towards the center of the reference sphere. The first position is then measured
automatically.
The probe head automatically rotates to the corresponding position when clicking on Continue!

4. Click on Continue... and position the stylus in a way that the longitudinal axis of its shaft points towards the
center of the reference sphere.
Probe the first point towards the center of the reference sphere. The second position is then measured
automatically.
The B angle for the measurement can be reversed by 180° by double-clicking on the marked line
in the dialog.
5. Click on Continue... and the stylus so that the longitudinal axis of its shaft is towards the center of the
reference sphere.
Probe the first point towards the center of the reference sphere. The third position is then measured
automatically.

The B angle for the measurement can be reversed by 180° by double-clicking on the marked line
in the dialog.
6. Click on OK if all positions have been calibrated correctly ( ).
The calibration of the articulating probe system is saved in the system database.
16.5 Calibrate articulating probing system PH10-iQ

This function calibrates a PH10-iQ articulating probe system.
The calibration determines the spatial alignment and position of the articulating probing system.
The calibration data of the PH10-iQ articulating probe system influences the accuracy of the probe system. The
calibration should be repeated periodically.
The calibration can be executed with any reference sphere. If the calibration is recorded into a program, the
adequate reference sphere has to be loaded previously.
The short stylus has to be mounted for the calibration so no deflection will influence the
calibration.

3. The graphical display of the PH10-iQ corresponds with the currently selected position in the list.
Clear the PH10-iQ in order to be able to swivel to the desired position without collision.
4. If a program is recorded, an intermediate point can be recorded into the program by using the program
command button Intermediate point.
5. Click on Continue... and position the stylus in a way that the extended direction of the stylus points towards
the center of the reference sphere.
automatically.
Each successfully measured position is marked with a green check mark in the list. If the sphere
measurement is aborted or an error occurs, the corresponding position is marked with a cross. The user
then has the option to either re-measure the position or to abort the calibration with ESC.
Click on Continue... in order to measure all positions.

6. Click on OK if all positions have been calibrated correctly.
The calibration of the articulating probing system is then stored in the system database.
If the calibration is aborted, the probe head symbol in the status window will be marked with a
cross.
16.6 Calibrate articulating probing system PHS

This function calibrates a PHS articulating probe system.
The calibration determines the spatial alignment of both PHS rotary axes. The approaching of the reference marks is
executed prior to the calibration and initializes the angles.
The calibration of PHS1 has to be executed every time the controller has been turned on. PHS2 can use existing
calibration data (Time optimized calibration).
The calibration can be executed with any reference sphere. If the calibration is recorded into a program, the
adequate reference sphere has to be loaded previously.
The short stylus has to be mounted for the calibration so no deflection will influence the
calibration.

The calibration should be executed as close as possible to the z-pillar. This way, the rotation of
the y-arm is at its lowest.
The more probe points are used, the better the calibration quality.
3. Enter the number of positions.
The default angles are automatically calculated and added to the list. If the number of positions is changed,
all default angles will be re-calculated and updated.
Certain angles can be edited directly in the list, even if they have already been measured. The graphical
display of the PHS corresponds with the currently selected position in the list.
4. Clear the PHS in order to be able to swivel to the desired position without collision. If a program is
recorded, an intermediate point can be recorded into the program by using the program command button
Intermediate point.

5. Click on Continue... and position the stylus in a way that the extended direction of the stylus points towards
the center of the reference sphere.
automatically.
Each successfully measured position is marked with a green check mark in the list. If the sphere
measurement is aborted or an error occurs, the corresponding position is marked with a cross. The user
then has the option to either re-measure the position or to abort the calibration with ESC.
Click on Continue... in order to measure all positions.
6. Click on OK if all positions have been calibrated correctly.
The calibration of the articulating probing system is then stored in the system database.
If the calibration is aborted, the probe head symbol in the status window is marked with a cross.
The PHS can only be used after a successful calibration.

Stylus changing system
17 Stylus changing system

17.1 Information about stylus changing system
The following stylus changing systems are supported:
Stylus changing systems
ACR1, ACR2, ACR3, MCR20, SCR200, manual stylus changing

system, FCR25, FCR25-L3, FCR25-L6, SCP80, SCP600
The ACR1 is only supported with ACC2 control unit.
17.2 Deposit probe and retrieve from a slot

This function either deposits a probe into a slot or retrieves a probe from a slot.
Further an existing probe system can be assigned to a slot.
2. Click on the command button Change.
WM | Quartis ® R2018-2 Stylus changing system 353

3.Check the current configuration.
This configuration has to correspond with the currently mounted one.
Should this not be the case, change the configuration using .
4.Select the slot in which the component to be changed is to be deposited.
If no component is to be deposited, select <none>.
5.Select the slot where the new component is to be retrieved from.
If no component is to be retrieved, select <none>.
6.Select where the machine is supposed to move to after the change and if the machine should move back
along the motion path.
The options move to change starting point and move back along motion path is only
available if the change starting point resp. the motion path is defined.
It is also possible to execute a slow change. To do so, activate the check box Slow change and enter a
percentage of the normal changing speed.
Pay attention with ACR1 stylus changing system, that are not configured in the Quartis
configuration program as ARC1 Active:

Make sure that, before a probe system is deposited in or retrieved from an ACR1 stylus
changing system, the speed control of the operating unit (HT-400) is set to maximum speed (100
%).
If the speed is too low, the screwing process starts before the probe system has reached the
desired end position. The start of the screwing process to fasten or loosen the fastening screw
starts after a certain time after the probe system has passed a light barrier system.
For this reason, the option Slow change is not available for the ACR1 stylus changing system.
7.Click on Change.
8.Check the new configuration.
9.Click on Close.
17.3 Define a probe system component (slot content)

The definition of the contents of a slot is purely informative and only serves for a plausibility check if a defined
probe system can really be mounted. The actual probe system configuration in the graphics is not changed with a
change.
Exceptions are components and length information; see hints and warnings below.

2. Click on the command button Change.
3. Select the desired slot in the retrieve from window.
4. Click on Define slot.

5. Define the contents of the slot graphically. The operation of the dialog is the same as in set up probe
system.
Additionally two more properties are available for editing.
The check box use length information determines if an available length is to be used for each change.
This option must be used if an extension is mounted, as the changing point is moved by the length of
the extension. The used length is displayed and can be edited if necessary.
Further the content of the slot is also used for a plausibility check to determine if a defined probe
system can be mounted in reality. If this should not be the case, a warning message is displayed during
the change.
6. Click on OK.
17.4 Calibrate stylus changing system

This function calibrates a stylus changing system. The stylus changing system has to be configured before in the WM
| Quartis configuration program.
The calibration of the stylus changing system is dialog guided.
Ensure that the measuring machine has been initialized, that the current probe system has been
calibrated and the probe head is in the correct position in which the stylus can be changed before
calling the function.
3. Follow the directions in the dialogs.

Define changing start point
This function defines a changing start point where the machine moves to before each stylus change.
3. Switch to the tab Motion paths.
4. Select the entry Starting point for probe change.
5. Click on Add.
The current position of the probe system in the machine coordinate system is adopted as starting point.
6. Click on Close.

Enter position correction
This function allows you to manually correct the calibrated rack ports of a stylus changing system.
3. A position correction can be entered for each individual stylus changing system or for individual rack
ports in the tab Calibrate.
As soon as a position correction has been taken over by clicking on Adopt, the corresponding value is
displayed below the stylus changing system or rack port.
The position correction moves the position of a stylus changing system or a rack port by the
value that has been entered in the corresponding field. The directions from the machine
coordinate system are used.
Please note that the entered values are representing corrections in relation to the calibrated
position and are NOT absolute values in relation to the machine origin.
If a stylus changing system as well as a rack port is corrected, BOTH changes are affecting the
rack port.

Define motion paths
As probe system can be mounted with components from different stylus changing systems, it is important to define
the motion paths between the systems.
If no motion path is defined, the system takes the shortest way between the stylus changing
systems. This can lead to collisions with the work piece or a stylus changing system.
3. Switch to the tab Motion paths.
4. Select the stylus changing configuration for which the motion path is to be defined.
5. Position the probe with the joystick at the position where the machine should move to during a change.
Click on Add. The current position of the probe system in machine coordinates is adopted. It is possible

to add several intermediate points that are moved to during a change between the corresponding stylus
changing systems.
Define the desired motion paths for all stylus changing systems.
6. Click on Close.

Measure
18 Measure
18.1 Information about measuring
In order to measure elements, WM | Quartis supports different probe modes (Triggered, Scanning, Pecking and
Centering).
How the individual modes are activated is described in the topic Switch probing mode.
Triggered probe mode
In triggered probe mode, the elements are measured via single point.
Available for element Required probe system Required controller
Point Triggered probe systems WPC2030 (from Firmware 23.26)

Line (e.g. TP6, TP20, TP200). WPC2040 (from Firmware 30.331)
Plane WPZ50
It is also possible to use scanning
Circle WPZ55
probe systems in triggered probe
Cylinder WPZ100
mode (e.g. SP25, SP80, SP600, RSP2,
Sphere WENZEL WMC
RSP3).
Cone Leadshine ENC7480
Rectangle WENZEL WMC can only be used with I++ DME Server
Slot scanning probe systems. Zeiss CMM-OS
Edge point Hexagon RDS
Curve FARO USB measuring arm
Surface
Scanning probe mode
Scan paths are measured. The probe system has always contact with the work piece during the probe point
measurement.
Line Scanning probe systems WPC2030 (from Firmware 25.52)

Plane (e.g. SP25, SP80, SP600, RSP2, RSP3). WPC2040 (from Firmware 30.331)
Circle WENZEL WMC
Cylinder I++ DME Server
Sphere Hexagon RDS
Cone FARO USB measuring arm
Curve
WM | Quartis ® R2018-2 Measure 362

Measure
Pecking probe mode
In pecking probe mode, the elements are measured via single point.
In contrast to the triggered probe mode no fix probe point distribution is defined but only default values (e.g. start
and end value)
are defined via the manual pre-probing.
The machine seeks its path along any contour from start to end point, however, remains in predefined plane.
Curve Triggered probe systems WPC2040 (from Firmware 30.83),

(e.g. TP6, TP20, TP200). connection via Ethernet is required.
Centering probe mode
In self centering probing mode, the machine searches for a probe point in the defined probing direction and
centering plane.
The measured probe point is not compensated with the probe radius.
This mode can be used for the automatic centering with bores and threaded holes and for the search of the
deepest probe
point in tooth spaces, inner edges and V form flutes.
Point Scanning probe systems WPC2030 (from Firmware 25.52)

(e.g. SP25, SP80, SP600, RSP3). WPC2040 (from Firmware 31.01)
I++ DME Server
If the measurement of an element is started that cannot be measured in the activated mode, the
probing mode will automatically be switched.

Measure
18.2 Adjust measuring settings

This function allows you to adjust the measurement settings. It is possible to define the range and the start values
for the ID generator as well as the number of probe points for each individual element type.
1. Click on the ribbon tab Measure.

Measure
3. Define the settings for the calculation:
· Input of maximum range

If the maximum range is exceeded a dialog (you can define in the dialog if the element is to be saved or
deleted) is automatically displayed.
· Input of allowable probe point number deviation
Analog to the range of an element, the number of measured points can also be controlled. If the
number of required points deviates from the number of points delivered by the controller a dialog (you
can define in the dialog if the element is to be saved or deleted) is displayed. You can specify for what
percentile deviation the message is displayed.
· If parameter are to be calculated after each point (when this option is activated, the element parameter are
recalculated after each new probe point; if it is deactivated, the element parameter are calculated after the
measurement is terminated)
This function only has an effect with the manual measurement of elements.
· If a dialog (you can define in the dialog if the element is to be filtered, not to be filtered or to be deleted) is to be
displayed when the minimal amount of probe points for an optimal Gaussian filtering (7 points/wave)
falls below the required amount, activate the corresponding check box. This message is only displayed
with elements that are measured in scanning mode.
4. Enter the projection rules settings for the measurement of points and edge points with Projection onto
CAD:
· Search range
The search range added to the probe radius defines the radius of a spherical zone around the actual
point, in which all possible nominal points are calculated on the CAD model. If multiple solutions are
possible, they will be displayed in a selection list.
If no solution is possible within this tolerance sphere, the probe point will not be adopted.
· Automatic selection with multiple solutions

The nominal point with the smallest d deviation to the actual point is automatically selected if this option
is activated.
· Consider surface boundaries

If the option Consider surface boundaries is activated, only the nominal points that are within the
surface boundaries are determined by the projection onto CAD. If the actual point to be projected is
probed outside of the surface boundaries, a corresponding error message is displayed.
If the option Consider surface boundaries is deactivated, the CAD surface - in the same case as above -
is elongated tangential beyond the surface boundaries and the point or edge point is projected onto
the elongated surface.
· Consider surface orientation

The surface orientation is considered during the selection of the measured surface points.
Only surfaces that are possible due to the probing direction are considered as possible nominal
surfaces. Points or edge points are projected, depending on the probing direction, automatically on the
correct side of the CAD model.

Measure
While the projection rules generally only apply for the manual measurement (if no nominal values were
defined before the measurement start but one starts directly with measuring points) of points and edge points
with projection onto CAD and the program execution with selective parameter modification, the option
Consider surface boundaries also applies for the following actions:
· automatic measurement
· during the program execution
· during the editing of points with projection onto CAD that are already saved in the database (Edit
element in left element window)
· with a re-projection due to a coordinate system change.
5. Enter which number of the ID should be incremented by the ID generator.
Example: 3 (i. e. the third number will be incremented)
A1_B1_C1_D1
A1_B1_C2_D1
A1_B1_C3_D1
A1_B1_C4_D1
…
If the value of Increment at n-th place is higher than the count of numbers in the ID, the last number
(right) is incremented. You can set a high value so that the last number in the ID is always incremented.
The setting Increment at n-th place is effective for the following functions:
· Measure and construct elements
· Create features
· Save coordinate system
· Save probe system
· Create new quick selection table
· Calibrate reference sphere
6. Set the settings for the start values of the ID generator.
7. If Terminate with key press is selected, the measurement is not terminated until the command button Stop
is activated.
8. Click on OK.
18.3 Measure element

The measurement steps remain the same for all types of elements.

Measure
2. Click on the command button of the element to be measured (example circle).
3. The tab Geometry is displayed and the mouse tool is active.
4. Define the nominal values with the mouse tool, by pre-probing or by input.
During the measurement of a circle, you can define via a click on the button if the circle is to be measured
on a cylinder (default) or on a cone or sphere.
5. Enter the reference for the element to be measured.
6. If required, select the relative reference for the element to be measured.
This group is only available during the measurement of elements of the type point, circle, edge point,
rectangle and slot.
7. Define if and how the material thickness is to be considered.
This group is only available during the measurement of elements of the type point, circle and plane.
8. Select the calculation method for the element to be measured.
9. Define if and how outliers are to be eliminated.

Measure
10. Select the filter for the probe points of the element.
11. Change to the tab Distribution.
12. Select the distribution method for the element to be measured.
13. Enter the distribution parameter for the element to be measured.
14. Enter the safety plane for the element to be measured.
If a plane is measured, a limitation can be selected.
15. Change to the tab Edit.
Intermediate and/or probe points can be added to or deleted from the measurement sequence if needed.
It is also possible to edit suggested intermediate and/or probe points.
16. Change to the tab Features.
17. Select the desired features.

Measure
18. Switch to the tab Repeat if it is displayed.
This tab is only available when measuring points, circles, cylinders and edge points and allows measuring
several elements from the same element type in one step.
19. Click on the command button Start in the group Actions if the element is to be measured automatically.
After activating the command button Start, the machine automatically moves to the first
intermediate or probe point of the active measurement sequence.
20. If a manual measurement is to be executed, switch to the contextual tab Progress.
21. Enter the desired number of points and measure the element manually (see contextual tab Progress).
While measuring a rectangle, the points have to be probed as follows:
5 points
Start with the first two points on the longer side of the rectangle. All other points have to be
distributed evenly clockwise or counter clockwise, on each side one point.

Measure
6 points
Start with the first two points on the longer side of the rectangle. All other points have to be
distributed evenly clockwise or counter clockwise. In doing so ensure that on the opposite side
two points have to be probed.

Measure
18.3.1 Actions
The Actions are available for all functions in the group Measure.
Actions
Opens the machine settings.
When this command button is activated, the ribbon to measure the same
element type is displayed again right after the element measurement.
Starts the automatic element measurement.
Aborts the current element measurement.
After activating the command button Start, the machine automatically moves to the first
intermediate or probe point of the active measurement sequence.
18.3.2 Contextual Tab Geometry

Define/Edit nominal values
The sign of the actual direction of a line and a cylinder depends on the probing sequence. If you
probe a plane against the nominal direction, nominal and actual directions of the element have
reversed signs which can lead to a rotation of the coordinate system within an alignment.
Different calculation methods that affect the actual value can be selected for the cylinder.
1. Enter an ID for the element or accept the suggested next free data record number.
If an already existing element is to be overwritten, select the corresponding element using the drop down
list ( ) or the selection dialog ( ).

Measure
If you want to define the ID of an element variable, for example when the element is measured multiple times
using a program loop, you hav to enter in the ID input field the following for an output of Circle_1, Circle_2,
Circle:3, etc.:
='Circle_'+STR(i)
It is important that the loop index (here "i") which has been defined in the loop, is set between brackets.
For a double loop (e.g. with perforated plate), the input should look like this:
='Circle_'+STR(i)+'_'+STR(j)
This leads, depending on the start and end values of the two loops, to the following output:
Circle_1_1
Circle_1_2
Circle_1_3
Circle_2_1
Circle_2_2
Circle_2_3 and so forth.
The reference element ID can also be taken over from the expression editor by double clicking on
the input field.
2. If the option Lock element ID - activated/deactivated with a click on the lock symbol - is activated, the
element ID of all elements of the same type to be measured is not increased anymore.
By doing so, elements and auto features are overwritten.
3. The desired element can directly be clicked on the CAD model by using the element selection tool Click
nominal values on model ( /left mouse button). The nominal values of the geometrical element are taken
over automatically into the fields by clicking with the right mouse button.
For the element curve it is possible that the model does not contain the nominal curve. In this case the curve
can be inserted previously.
In order to adopt the nominal values when Measuring with measuring aid the key combination Ctrl+ Shift
has to be pushed when clicking the nominal value.
4. If no CAD model is available, the nominal values and limitation points of the elements point, line, plane,
circle, cylinder, sphere, cone and curve can be determined using the function Manually pre-probe element (
).
5. With the elements point and edge point, the command button Projection onto CAD model ( ) defines if the
set nominal values are kept or if they are to be recalculated after the measurement by projecting the actual
point onto the CAD model. The projected CAD surface is marked with a color in the graphic view.
6. With elements that can be either measured as an inside or outside element, you can define the kind of
element to be measured with the command button Define inside or outside element ( inside element,
outside element).

Measure
When measuring curves, the command button Invert probing direction ( ) is displayed instead of the
command button Inside/Outside.
7. Depending on the element type the corresponding nominal values are displayed. What the different
characters mean is described in the topic Element description.
The nominal values can be taken over directly from the CAD model using the mouse tool, determined via a
manual pre-probing (see 2) or entered via the keyboard.
Nominal values cannot be enter for curve and plane as these elements cannot be described using
nominal values.
If nominal values for edge points with the calculation method rounded are entered using the
keyboard, the desired probing depth should be entered previously in the tab Distribution. This is
necessary as the nominal values are changed when modifying the probing depth.
It is not required to enter the nominal values or to determine them with a pre-probing when
measuring without a CAD model. Elements can also be measured manually without nominal
values.
8. With the elements circle and cylinder, the current machine position is adopted continuously into the nominal
value fields x, y and z by activating the command button Adopt current machine position
( ).
By doing so, the probe can be placed above the bore center and the measurement started directly via the
HT 400 function key F1.
To do so, the reference element, probing depth and diameter have to be defined first. These values ?are,
however, proposed according to the preceding measurement.
Therefore the value input is only necessary for the first element when measuring multiple circles or cylinders
with identical reference and diameter.
9. When measuring circles, it is possible to also measure circles on cones or spheres instead of measuring
them on a cylinder form (default). The required parameter can be entered by clicking on the button .
10. The nominal values are checked and taken over for the measurement by clicking on .
The measuring sequence is displayed in the graphics.

Measure
Element description
The following table describes the different element components.
Some components are only displayed when defining nominal values in the ribbon, others are only displayed in the
element window or the database.
Nominal value Actual value
x,y,z Position x,y,z Position
i,j,k Direction (corresponds to opposite i,j,k Direction

probing direction)
x,y,z Start position* x,y,z Center of gravity projected onto

reference
x2,y2,z2 End position*
i,j,k Direction from start to end position
i,j,k Direction from start to end position
i2,j2,k2 Opposite probing direction
i2,j2,k2 Opposite probing direction
*in element window and database projected onto

reference
x,y,z Position (entered or clicked position x,y,z Position of the center of gravity
of the plane)
i, j, k Normal
i, j, k Normal
x,y,z Center point position x,y,z Position of the circle center projected
onto the reference
i,j,k Direction of the reference (axis
direction) i,j,k Direction of the reference (axis
direction)
ø Diameter
ø Diameter
x,y,z Position of a point on the axis x,y,z Position of center of gravity

projected onto axis
i,j,k Axial direction
i,j,k Axial direction
ø Diameter
ø Diameter
x,y,z Top of cone position* x,y,z Top of cone position
i,j,k Axial direction of the cone i,j,k Axial direction of the cone
ø Diameter** β Opening angle

Measure
β Opening angle
* Position of point on the axis with specified diameter

in ribbon
**only in ribbon
x,y,z Sphere center position x,y,z Sphere center position
i,j,k Direction of sphere i,j,k Direction of sphere
ø Diameter ø Diameter
x,y,z Position (center in rel. to length and x,y,z Position (center in rel. to length and
width) width)
i,j,k Direction of reference (normal) i,j,k Direction of reference (normal)
i2,j2,k2 Longitudinal direction i2,j2,k2 Longitudinal direction
l Length l Length
b Width b Width
x,y,z Position (center in rel. to length and x,y,z Position (center in rel. to length and
width) width)
i,j,k Direction of reference (normal) i,j,k Direction of reference (normal)
i2,j2,k2 Longitudinal direction i2,j2,k2 Longitudinal direction
l Length l Length
b Width b Width
x,y,z Position (projected onto reference) x,y,z Position (projected onto reference)
i,j,k Opposite probing direction i,j,k Opposite probing direction
i2,j2,k2 Direction of reference i2,j2,k2 Direction of reference
x,y,z Position of the clicked point when x,y,z Position of first probe point
determining the nominal curve
i,j,k Normal of the plane in which the
i,j,k Normal of the plane in which the plane is positioned
plane is positioned
x,y,z Position of the clicked point when x,y,z Position of first probe point
determining the nominal surface
i,j,k Direction of the first probe point
i,j,k Direction of the clicked point when
determining the nominal surface

Measure
Measure circle on cone/sphere

Circles are usually measured on cylinders, respectively on shafts or in bores.
In order to measure a circle on a cone or a sphere to, for example, evaluate the circularity in a certain depth, the
corresponding settings have to be pre-selected
2. Click on the command button Circle.
3. The tab Geometry is display. Open the dialog Nominal values with click on in the group Nominal values
in the ribbon.
Measure circle on cone
4. Select Circle on cone.

Measure
5. Select the cone on which the sphere is to be measured.
If the cone has already been measured or a theoretical cone has been constructed earlier, it can be selected
in this field. The cone defines the nominal geometry of the circle, taking into account the probing depth and
reference element. The direction of the circle is only determined by the direction of the cone.
6. As an alternative to step 5, the cone can be clicked on the CAD model without previously measuring it.
7. Select reference, outlier elimination, calculation method and filter for the circle.
8. Switch to the tab Distribution and define the probing depth. The probing depth refers to the selected
reference.
Quartis corrects the probing depth during the measurement in such a way that not the measuring
sphere center lies in the probing depth but the contact point of the measuring sphere with the
cone.
9. Enter, if needed, other distribution parameter, edit the Measuring sequence and define the safety plane as
well as any features, as usual when measuring in Quartis.
10. Click the command button Start in the group Actions to start the circle measurement.
The machine automatically moves to first intermediate or probe point of the active measuring
sequence after clicking on the command button Start.

Measure
Measure circle on sphere
4. Select Circle on sphere.
5. Select the sphere on which the circle is to be measured.
If the sphere has already been measured or a theoretical sphere has been constructed earlier, it can be
selected in this field. The sphere defines the nominal geometry of the circle, taking into account the probing
depth and reference element.
6. As an alternative to step 5, the sphere can be clicked on the CAD model without previously measuring it.
7. Select reference, outlier elimination, calculation method and filter for the circle.
8. Switch to the tab Distribution and define the probing depth. The probing depth refers to the selected
reference.
Quartis corrects the probing depth during the measurement in such a way that not the measuring
sphere center lies in the probing depth but the contact point of the measuring sphere with the
cone
9. Enter, if needed, other distribution parameter, edit the Measuring sequence and define the safety plane as
well as any features, as usual when measuring in Quartis.
10. Click the command button Start in the group Actions to start the circle measurement.

Measure
The machine automatically moves to first intermediate or probe point of the active measuring
sequence after clicking on the command button Start.
Projection onto CAD

For the elements point and edge point, the command button Projection onto CAD ( ) in the group nominal values
defines if fix defined nominal values are to be kept or if they are to be recalculated after the measurement by
projecting the actual point onto the CAD model.
The CAD surface on which is projected onto is colored in the graphics view and can be re-clicked if needed. The
projection rules are defined in the Measurement settings.
It is also possible to manually measure points or edge points with the option Projection onto CAD without
previously clicking the model or reference surface on the CAD model. In this case, the nominal point is determined
using the projection rules defined in the measurement settings.
When measuring points and edge points with projection onto CAD, only the CAD model reference
ID and the surface ID from the CAD model are saved into Quartis programs. This reference is
displayed in the line Projection onto CAD in the program sentence details.
Therefore it is important that these two IDs are the same as during the recording when executing
the program. If this is not the case, the referenced surfaces cannot be found and an error
message will be displayed.
This should be considered when changing CAD models.
For the re-referencing of individual points and edge points, the projection suffice information has
to be updated by re-clicking the CAD surface. This can be done in editing mode or with program
execution with parameter modification.
For the re-referencing of multiple points within a Quartis program, the function program
execution with selective parameter modification is recommended.
Manually pre-probe element

If no CAD model is available, the nominal values and limitation points of the elements point, line, plane, circle,
cylinder, sphere, cone and curve can be determined using the function Manually pre-probe element ( ).
This allows to subsequently measure the element with a distribution in CNC mode automatically. The measured
positions are rounded and the directions unrounded taken over into the input fields and can be used as nominal
values for point, line, plane, circle, cylinder, sphere and cone.
The probing strategy when pre-probing has an influence on the distribution of the measuring points for all
elements. For some elements a certain probing strategy has to considered in order to receive correct nominal
values:

Measure
Element type Position of pre-probe points /

Element direction (i, j, k)
Line* Probe start point (1. probe

point) and end point (2. probe
point).
Sphere Probe 1. probe point on pole of

the sphere and 3 more on a
diameter.
The direction decisive for the

distribution runs from the sphere
center through the 1. probe
point.
Plane* Probe at least 3 limitation points

and then terminate the pre-
probing with the command
button( ).
Cylinder Probe 3 probe points on a

diameter and 2 more on a
second diameter.
Cone The first 3 probe points on the

first diameter define the cone
diameter, using 3 more probe
points on a second diameter
determine the opening angle
and therefore also the top of the
cone.
With curves, the pre-probing is used to define the limitation points for the single point measurement in probing
mode Pecking or Scanning. Thereby the machine searches the path along any contour from start to end point but
always stays in a predefined reference plane.

Measure
With curves, the direction of the probe points has to be perpendicular to the direction of the
reference element. The correct probing can be simplified by choosing the optimal Joystick
direction.
Element type Position of pre-probing points /

Search direction
Open curve Probe end point (1. probe point)

and start point (2. probe point"
and define search direction with
3. probe point.
Closed curve The first probe point defines the

end point and the second probe
point the circumferential
direction.
In order to measure a closed

curve, the pre-probing is
terminated via the command
button ( ) after two probe
points.
Measuring with measuring aid

For the measurement of inaccessible threaded and punched holes in sheet metal, auxiliary measuring adapter can
be used.
Most frequently this is a half-sphere, which is mounted in the bore in such a way that the center of the sphere
corresponds with the center of the circle to be determined. By measuring the hemisphere, you thus obtain the
position of the threaded or punched hole.
Measurement of circles with spherical measuring aids
Since the hemisphere (measuring aid) to be measured is usually not available in the CAD model, you can use the
possibility described below in order to at least adopt the position and direction of the hemisphere from the existing
CAD model circle.

Measure
1. Select the command button Sphere in the ribbon Measure.
2. Adjust - if needed - the element ID in the group Nominal values.
3. Correct the diameter to the measuring aid diameter if needed.
4. Activate the mouse tool if it is not activated yet.
5. Push the key combination Ctrl+Shift and simultaneously click a surface on the CAD model close to the
circle to be measured with the left mouse button.
6. Confirm the selection with the right mouse button.
The coordinates of the circle center as well as the circle direction are adopted as nominal values.
The sphere diameter as well as the information inside/outside element are not changed by the
nominal value click and are taken over from the preceding measurement.
7. Define the sphere as an outside element.
8. Proceed the enter all other settings for the sphere measurement as usual
Select/Edit reference
The reference of the element to be measured can be selected in the group Reference. The reference is independent
from the relative reference that can be activated in the group Relative reference.
The following options are available:
Element Reference
Point
Circle
Rectangle
Slot
Edge point

Measure
Line
Plane ---
Surface
Cylinder
Cone
Sphere
Curve
Nominal values
The nominal values are used as reference.
Reference element
Example
rectangle
Select the reference element in the drop down list ( ) or in the selection dialog ( ).
The ID of the reference element can also be taken over from the expression editor by double
clicking on the corresponding input field.
In addition, it is possible to activate the relative measurement for the measurement of the elements edge point,
circle, rectangle and slot.
During measurement of sheet metal parts, frequently occurring springing causes a problem. During execution of
correctly programmed programs, elements such as edge points, circles, rectangles and slots are not exactly probed
at half sheet thickness. In extreme cases a measurement point is missed or a collision occurs.
With activated relative measurement, the probing depth and if needed, the probing direction is changed relative to
the actual values. If this option is not selected, the probing depth and direction refer to the nominal values of the
reference.
XY -Plane
The XY -Plane is used as reference.
YZ-Plane
The YZ-Plane is used as reference.

Measure
ZX-Plane
The ZX-Plane is used as reference
Measuring
With the option Measuring, a reference element can be measured before measuring the individual element.
Example Circle
To do so enter the number of points to be measured and their distance from the edge. Prior to measurement of the
element to be measured, the reference is measured. In doing so, the reference element is not saved as an
independent element.
In addition, it is possible to activate the relative measurement for the measurement of the elements edge point,
circle, rectangle and slot.
During measurement of sheet metal parts, frequently occurring springing causes a problem. During execution of
correctly programmed programs, elements such as edge points, circles, rectangles and slots are not exactly probed
at half sheet thickness. In extreme cases a measurement point is missed or a collision occurs.
Probing of these elements relative to the reference plane solves this problem.
With activated relative measurement, the probing depth and if needed, the probing direction is changed relative to
the actual values. If this option is not selected, the probing depth and direction refer to the nominal values of the
reference.
For points, the direction of the reference defines the direction for the probe compensation.
Select/Change relative reference

The complete measuring sequence defined via the distribution and the group reference can be transformed relative
to a relative reference via the group Relative reference. Thereby nominal values remain unaltered.
A relative reference is, for example, needed if the position of the element to be measured deviates so much from
the nominal value that collisions can occur during the measurement.
The correction of the measuring sequence is not directly visible in the graphics, this means that
the measuring sequence is always drawn on the nominal position.

Measure
Element Reference
Point None
Reference element
Measuring
Input
Circle None
Reference element
Edge point
Input
Rectangle
Slot
None
The measuring sequence is not corrected.
Reference element
The measuring sequence is corrected relative to the selected reference element. The correction corresponds with
the deviation of the actual reference element from the nominal reference element.
This option is selected if the position of the element to be measured is correct in reference to a previously
measured element.
Following the DMIS functionality, the reference element has to be from the type plane so that the direction is also
corrected.

Measure
1 = Actual reference element, 2 = Nominal reference element, 3= Actual point, 4= Nominal point
With other element types that cannot be reduced to a point, only the position is corrected.
If an element from the type point is selected as relative reference element, the correction of the measuring sequence
basically covers all 3 axes. If you want to correct only in primary direction, then the point used as reference element
has to be either measured with Projection onto CAD or with the option Move to target point.
Select the corresponding reference element using the drop down menu ( ) or the selection dialog ( ).
The ID of the reference element can also be taken over from the expression editor by double
clicking on the corresponding input field.
Measuring
A reference element can be measured before the actual element is measured. However, this reference element is
not saved as an element but is rather used for the correction of the measuring sequence. The measuring sequence
is corrected relative to the measured reference.
1. Activate the mouse tool and click the reference.
2. Select the number of points and the distance that the points should have from the clicked reference point.

Measure
3. The set number of points is distributed with the defined distance around the clicked point.
If the relative reference is measured with one (1) point, the correction of the measuring sequence takes only
place in nominal direction of the clicked relative reference.
If the relative reference is measured with three (3) or more points, the correction of the measuring sequence
takes place in position and direction.
4. Before the element to be measured is actually measured, the relative reference is measured. The relative
reference element is not saved as a separate element.
Input
The measurement sequence is shifted by the entered values. This option is selected if the approximate translation
between nominal position and actual position of an element to be measured is known.
1. Enter the values for the axes with which the measuring sequence should be corrected.
Define/Edit material thickness

If and how the material thickness is to be compensated can be defined in the group Material thickness. This is
especially then required, when the material thickness (e.g. sheet strength, coating, machining allowance) is not
considered in the CAD model available.
By entering the material thickness, the probe points are relocated within the distribution using the entered values.
However, during the measurement, the actual probe point position is corrected with the material thickness. The
nominal values of the elements are not changed.
Element Material thickness
On probe point
On probe point
On reference
On probe point

Measure
The material thickness compensation is applied to the probe points during the element measurements.
The material thickness of an element can also be corrected after the measurement via the function
Edit element.
On reference
The material thickness compensation is applied to the reference.
If reference element has been selected as reference, the material thickness of the reference element is automatically
adopted.
If the material thickness of the reference element is changed later, the element must be measured
again.
To accept the new value of the material thickness from the reference element in a program
sentence, this program sentence must be edited.
Only the material thickness On probe point is output in the database view and the report.
For the output of the material thickness On reference in a report, Reference element must be
selected as reference. So the material thickness of the reference element can be output as On
probe point.
Select calculation method

The calculation method for element to be measured or constructed can be entered in the group Calculate.
Example Cylinder
Element Calculation method
Point Standard
X - axis
Y - axis
Z - axis
Move to nominal point
Line Least squares (Gauss)

Chebyshev

Measure
Tangential outside ***

Tangential inside ***
Plane Least squares (Gauss)

Chebyshev
Tangential outside
Tangential inside
Circle Least squares (Gauss)

Cylinder * Chebyshev
Sphere Minimum circumscribed
Maximum inscribed
Cone * Least squares (Gauss)

Chebyshev
Rectangle Least squares (Gauss)

Slot
Edge point Perpendicular

Rounded
Curve (Planar curves)
planar, direct
planar. transformed
planar, spline **
(Cam profile)
axial direct****
Surface -
* Due to the selected point distribution, it can occur that the element regression calculation finds multiple solutions
when measuring a cylinder or cone and therefore does not calculate the desired element.
In this case it is possible to select a different calculation option that influences the regression calculation in such a
way that the desired element is calculated.
** The calculation method Spline cannot be selected for the measurement of curves on nominal curves. It is
automatically used if curves are measured with the function Manually pre-probe element without nominal values.
*** is only available for this element during measurement.
**** Curves of the type axial can be measured only with probing mode scanning with scan path known on a
nominal curve.
Calculation options
Due to the selected point distribution, it can occur that the element regression calculation finds multiple solutions
when measuring a cylinder or cone and therefore does not calculate the desired element.

Measure
In this case it is possible to select a different calculation option that influences the regression calculation in such a
way that the desired element is calculated.
To so, proceed as follows:
1. By clicking on this button a dialog is displayed wherein the calculation option can be changed.
2. Select the desired calculation method.
The option Automatic is selected by default. This means, no specification for the regression calculation are
set.
If the option With nominal values is activated, the entered nominal values are considered in the regression
calculation which means they are set as start values for the calculation.
If the option With probing strategy is activated, the cylinder or cone has to be probed as follows:
Cylinder
The first 3 points have to be on a circle. The remaining points may be distributed at will. The direction
of the cylinder then points from the subsequently following points in direction of the first circle.
Cone
The first 3 points have to be on a circle. The 4th point cannot be on the same circle as the first 3 points.
The remaining points may be distributed at will.
The setting is reset to Automatic after the measurement.
Standard
The calculation method Standard is available for the element point.
The probe point is always evaluated with the given direction and thus can be used unlimitedly for alignments. This
method is generally recommended to be used.
Probed with surrounding points Probed without surrounding points

Measure
1 = Probing direction 1 = Probing direction

2 = Probe point = Actual point 2 = Probe point = Actual point
3 = Target point 3 = Target point
4 = Target surface 4 = Target surface
5 = Actual surface 5 = Actual surface

Measure
X-, Y-, X-axis

The calculation method X-axis, Y-axis and Z-axis is available for the element point.
X-axis (Point)
Only the deviation in the X-axis is evaluated. The actual point is moved to the nominal point in a plane parallel to the
reference plane in the Y-axis and the Z-axis.
Y-axis (Point)
Only the deviation on the X-axis is evaluated. The actual point is moved to the nominal point in a plane parallel to
the reference plane in the X-axis and the Z-axis.
Z-axis (Point)
Only the deviation in the Z-axis is evaluated. The actual point is moved to the nominal point in a plane parallel to the
reference plane in the X-axis and the Y-axis..
Move to nominal point

The calculation method Move to target point is available for the element point.
The evaluated is executed in direction of the target point.
The probe point is moved on the actual surface perpendicularly over the target point. If nominal values was selected
as reference, the direction of the actual surface correspond with the nominal direction (image left). Otherwise the
direction corresponds with the selected reference element or plane on which the surrounding points were measure
(image right)
Reference: nominal values Reference: Surrounding points or reference element
1 = Probing direction 1 = Probing direction

2 = Probe point 2 = Probe point = Actual point
3 = Target point 3 = Target point
4 = Target surface 4 = Target surface
5 = Actual surface 5 = Actual surface
6 = Actual point 6 = Actual point

Measure
Least squares (Gauss)

The calculation method Least square is available for the following elements:
· Line
· Plane
· Circle
· Cone
· Sphere
· Rectangle
· Slot
With this calculation method, the regression element is calculated in such a way that the sum of the deviation
squares is as small as possible (LSC = Least Square Circle). Thus the regression element is fitted in the center of all
probe points best possible. No probe point is favored.

Measure
Chebyshev
The calculation method Chebyshev is available for the following elements:
· Line
· Plane
· Circle
· Cylinder
· Cone
· Sphere
With this calculation method, the regression element is calculated in such a way that the largest deviation to the
regression element is as small as possible (MZC = Minimum Zone Circle).
With a circle, two concentric circles are determined so that all probe points are within one but outside of the other
circle and the diameter difference of both circles is as small as possible. The regression circle is determined by
adding the diameter difference to the inner circle. The regression element with the smallest form deviation is
calculated with this method. This is the reason why this method is favored when evaluating form deviations.
In contrast to the least square method, the minimum and maximum probe point has the same deviation to the
regression circle.

Measure
Minimum circumscribed
The calculation method Minimum circumscribed is available for the following elements:
· Circle
· Cylinder
· Sphere
With this calculation method, the regression element is calculated in such a way, that all probe points are within the
regression element (MCC = Minimum Circumscribed Circle).
This method is often used for waves which are paired with bores.
If the calculation method minimum circumscribed is selected, probe points have to be distributed
on a sector of at least 180°. The probing range for the minimum circumscribed sphere has to be
at least 180°. If not, an error message that the alignment of the probe points is unsuitable will be
displayed after the measurement.

Measure
Maximum inscribed
The calculation method Maximum inscribed is available for the following elements:
· Circle
· Cylinder
· Sphere
With this calculation method, the regression element is calculated in such a way, that all probe points are outside of
the regression element (MIC = Maximum Inscribed Circle).
This method is often used for bores which are paired with waves.
If the calculation method maximum inscribed is selected, probe points have to be distributed on a
sector of at least 180°. The probing range for the maximum inscribed sphere has to be at least
180°. If not, an error message that the alignment of the probe points is unsuitable will be
displayed after the measurement.

Measure
Tangential outside
The calculation method Tangential outside is available for the following elements:
· Line
· Plane
With this calculation method, the regression element is positioned on the most outside probe point in relation to the
work piece.
Furthermore, the tangential line or tangential plane is parallel to the Chebyshev line or Chebyshev plane.
Tangential inside
The calculation method Tangential inside is available for the following elements:
· Line
· Plane
With this calculation method, the regression element is positioned on the most inside probe point in relation to the
work piece.
Furthermore, the tangential line or tangential plane is parallel to the Chebyshev line or Chebyshev plane.

Measure
Perpendicular
The calculation method perpendicular is available for the element edge point.
With the calculation method perpendicular, it is assumed that both surfaces limited by the edge are perpendicular
to each other and the nominal point is located on this edge. Since this edge cannot be probed directly, the probe
point is measured at a position shifted with the probing depth and then projected onto the selected reference.
1 = Reference / Probe points Reference, 2 = Probe Point, 3 = Probing depth, 4 = Nominal point
For the measurement of rounded edges ("flanged edges") the calculation method rounded has to
be selected.

Measure
Rounded
The calculation method rounded is available for the element edge point. It is suitable for the measurement of
rounded edges (flanged edges).
With the calculation method rounded, the nominal point is not located on the reference surface but on the rounded
surface of the edge. The position of the nominal point is influenced by the probing depth.
1 = Reference / Probe points Reference, 2 = Probe Point, 3 = Probing depth, 4 = Nominal point
Because the selected calculation method for edge points (perpendicular/rounded) plays a
decisive role for the definition of nominal values, it has to be - in contrast to all other element
measurements - selected first
The nominal value can then be defined by clicking on the reference surface (close to the edge). As
an alternative, it is possible to enter the nominal point using the keyboard. In this case you have
to consider that changing the probing depth subsequently will change the nominal value. This is
why the probing depth should be entered first.

Measure
Planar, direct / Planar, transformed / Axial, direct

Three different methods can be selected for the measurement of curves:
· planar, direct
· planar, transformed
· axial, direct
The calculation methods planar, direct and planar, transformed can be selected for plane curves (nominal curve is
positioned in the plane).
The calculation method axial, direct is applied exclusively for cylinder intersection curves.
Comparison of planar, direct and planar, transformed:
Planar, direct Planar, transformed
Calculation method Calculation method
Actual points are directly projected onto the nominal Actual points are transformed into a optimized position
curve. and then projected onto the nominal curve.
The nominal point is the point, that is the closest to the The nominal point thus lies on the optimal position on
actual point on the nominal curve. the nominal curve. Therefore residues (deviations) are
not perpendicular to the nominal curve, they show the
Residues (deviations) are therefore always
actual position deviation.
perpendicular to the nominal curve.
Application Application
Components with evenly or slightly curved curves and Components with highly curved or closely spaced
little position deviation. curves and/or large position deviation.
1 = Probe points, 2= Residues, 3= Nominal curve 1 = Probe points, 2= Residues, 3= Nominal curve
Unfavorable: Unfavorable:
With closely spaced curves and large position deviation. With evenly curved curves and little position deviation.
Actual points may not be projected onto the correct The transformation of the actual points for the nominal
positions on the nominal curve; this can lead to point calculation may not be processed optimally, this

Measure
erroneous deviations. can lead to erroneous deviations.
1 = Probe points, 2= Residues, 3= Nominal curve 1 = Probe points, 2= Residues, 3= Nominal curve
Probe radius correction for the calculation methods planar, direct and planar,
transformed
The direction of the probe radius correction depends on how the nominal curve has been created.
1 = Curve plane
2 = Probe sphere position during probing
3 = Nominal position on nominal curve
4 = Un-projected corrected probe position (database,
element window)
5 = Projected corrected probe position (graphics)
6 = Residues
For a nominal curve, which is not created by intersecting a CAD surface, the probe radius correction is calculated in
the curve plane, which means 2-dimensionally.
The residues (6) are calculated in the curve plane (1) using the nominal position (3) and the actual position (5)
projected onto the curve plane.

Measure
1 = Curve plane
2 = Probe sphere position during probing
3 = Nominal position and surface direction on
nominal curve
element window)
5 = Moved corrected probe position (graphics)
6 = Residues
The probe radius correction is calculated in surface direction in 3D with nominal curves that have been created by
intersecting a CAD surface using the function Insert curve.
Residues (6) are calculated in the curve plane (1) with nominal position (3) and the actual position (5) moved in the
curve plane parallel to the surface.
Probe radius correction for the calculation method axial, direct
The probe radius correction takes place in the curve plane (two-dimensional).
1 = Cylinder surface on intersection cylinder

2 = Probe sphere position when measuring
3 = Nominal position on nominal curve
element window)
5 = Projected corrected probe position (graphics)
6 = Residues
7 = Direction of cylinder
Probe points (4), corrected by the probe radius, are projected onto the cylinder surface (1).
Residues (6) are calculated in the cylinder surface (1) with nominal position (3) and the actual position (5) projected
onto the cylinder surface.
Spline
The calculation method Spline is available for the element curve.
This calculation method assumes that there is no nominal curve available for the underlying curve because it was, for
example, measured using pecking probing mode or constructed without nominal values.

Measure
Instead of a nominal curve, an approximation of the curve profile, a so called Spline is used for the probe
compensation. The probe radius compensation is always calculated in the curve plane. For a correct result, the curve
plane and the probing surface have to be perpendicular.
It is not possible to evaluate the line profile of curves measured using the calculation method Spline as the
information of the nominal curve is not available for the measured or constructed element.

Measure
Eliminate outliers
You can define in the group Outliers if and how outliers are to be eliminated.
The following methods are available for the outlier elimination:
None
Outliers are not eliminated.
Median
If Median is selected, the window width can be set using a second selection. The window width defines how many
points located next to each other are recognized as outlier and eliminated.
With Median a window with the selected window width is applied over the measurement values and then moved
step by step from left to right over the measurement values.
In each position of the window, the value in the center of the window is replaced with the median value (the median
value is not the same as the average value but the median value of the 3 respectively 5 values (Median) in the window. In the
example below value 4 (center of window) is replaced by value 3 (median value). The outlier is eliminated with both
window widths.
Window width 3 Window width 5
If two outliers are following each other directly, the median value is also an outlier with window width 3 but not with
window width 5. Thus two successive outliers would only be eliminated with window width 5.

Measure
The following table shows how many successive outliers are recognized with the corresponding window:
Window width Number of successive outliers
3 1
5 2
7 3
9 4
If outlier elimination and a filter are selected in the same measurement, the outliers are eliminated
first and then the element is filtered. For the element filtering it generally is reasonable to
eliminate the outliers first.
Filter elements
One can define in the group Filter if and how elements are to be filtered.
None
Probe points are not filtered.
Adaptive
This is a low pass filter. The filter characteristic is automatically set out of the measured points.
Gaussian
This is a low pass filter. You can either input the cut off wave length (CWL) or the cut off wave number (W/C).
CWL
The threshold wave length can either be adopted from the suggested value or entered into the input field.

Measure
The larger the threshold wave length (CWL), the more is filtered.
Example
Line with 2000 points and length 60 mm (in each case with previous outlier elimination).
Not filtered
CWL = 0.25 mm
CWL = 0.80 mm
CWL = 2.50 mm
CWL = 8.00 mm
Recommended threshold wave length
Threshold wave length [mm] Probe points per mm Point distance [mm]
0.25 > 28 0.036
0.80 > 8.75 0.114
2.50 > 2.8 0.357
8.00 > 0.875 1.143
W/C
With circle and cylinder* you can also define the number of waves per circumference (cut off wave number) as an
alternative. As long as the diameter of the element was established, the threshold wave length corresponding to the
number of waves per circumference is displayed in the field CWL.
* only with circular or spiraled distribution

Measure
The larger the number of waves per circumference with same diameter, the less is filtered.
Recommended number of waves per circumference
Only form evaluation For form and waviness evaluation
Diameter [mm] Waves per Probe point per Waves per Probe point per
circumference amplitude circumference amplitude
[W/U] [W/U]
up to 25 15 > 105 50 > 350
> 25 to 80 50 > 350 150 > 1050
> 80 to 250 150 > 1050 500 > 3500
> 250 500 > 3500 1500 > 10500
For a good filtering at least 7 points/wave are recommended. The option that a dialog is
displayed when this number falls below 7 points/wave can be activated in the measurement
settings.
If outlier elimination and a filter are selected in the same element measurement, outliers are
eliminated first and then the element is filtered. For the element filtering it generally is reasonable
to eliminate the outliers first.

Measure
18.3.3 Contextual Tab Distribution

Define/Edit distribution method and parameter
The distribution parameters depend on the selected distribution method and the current probe system
(triggered/scanning/pecking/centering).
The function Lift off probe ( ) is available when measuring an element in scanning probing
mode. This function defines if the probe keeps contact with the material while moving to the next
path or if it lifts off and moves in air to the next start point.
The function Consider model ( ) is available when measuring a plane, circle, line, cylinder, cone
or sphere in triggered probing mode.
This function automatically removes all points that are not on the selected surfaces of the CAD
model from the distribution.
Multiple surfaces can be selected by holding down the shift key while clicking nominal values on
the model.
This function is also available in scanning probing mode for the element plane.
The distribution parameter Sector is available for the elements plane, circle, cylinder, cone and
sphere.
A value entered in the field Sector is adopted and saved internally. This value is displayed without
decimal places.
The distribution parameter and methods of the different probing modes are listed in the following topics:
· Triggered probe mode

· Scanning probe mode
· Pecking probe mode
· Centering probe mode

Measure

Point
Distribution not possible.
Line
Distribution method Distribution parameter
Manual Distribution not possible.
Number of points
Plane
Manual Distribution not possible
Mesh type 1 Number of

points
Mesh type 1 Distance

points
Mesh type 2
Polygon Number of
points
Polygon Distance points
Circles: Constant
number of points
Circles: Constant point

distance

Measure
Circle
Manual
Number of points
Spiral clockwise
Spiral counter clockwise
With the measurement of circle on cone or sphere, only the distribution method circle is available.
Cylinder
Circle
Axial lines
Spiral clockwise

Measure
Cone
Circle
Axial lines
Sphere
Circles: Constant
number of points
Circles: Constant point

distance
Axial lines
Rectangle
Manual
Uniformed

Measure
Slot
Manual
Uniformed
Notch
Sheet metal
Edge point
-----
If the calculation method rounded is selected in the tab Geometry, the adjustment of the probing
depth can sometimes lead to unwanted nominal value changes. For this reason, you should first
select the probing depth and the the calculation method if you want to use this special calculation
method.
Curve
Number of points
Distance points

Measure
Surface
Manual Distribution not possible.
Mesh type number of

points
Mesh type distance

points
The distribution Mesh type is calculated depending on the first nominal value click. Thereby it is
recommended to set the first nominal value click in such a way, that theoretical lines could be
stretched in coordinate system direction over the maximal length and width of the selected
surface.
The mesh-type distribution on surfaces is described in detail in the topic Distribution method
Mesh type.
Scanning probe mode

Point
Not possible.
Line
Line
Plane
Manual: Polyline (open)
Manual: Polyline
(closed)

Measure
Manual:
Curve (open)
Manual:
Curve (closed)
Mesh type 1
Mesh type 2
Polygon
Curve
Circles
Circle
Circle
Cylinder
Circles
Axial lines

Measure
Spiral clockwise
Cone
Circles
Axial lines
The following has to be taken into consideration for the distribution with scanning probe
systems and unknown scan path:
· Cone opening angles between 150° and 180° cannot be measured with the distribution method
Circles.
· Cone opening angles between 120° and 150° with distribution method Circles are critical.
Therefore it is recommended to select the distribution method Axial lines for these ranges or to
select known scan path in the machine settings.
Sphere
Circles
Axial lines
The following has to be taken into consideration for the distribution with scanning probe
systems and unknown scan path:
· Probing zones from 0° to 30° cannot be measured with the distribution method Circles.

Measure
· Probing zones from 30° to 60° with distribution method Circles are critical.
Therefore it is recommended to select the distribution method Axial lines for these ranges or to
select known scan path in the machine settings.
Rectangle
Not possible.
Slot
Not possible.
Edge point
Not possible.
Curve
Curve
Search
Surface
Not possible.

Measure
Pecking probe mode

Point
Not possible.
Line
Not possible.
Plane
Not possible.
Circle
Not possible.
Cylinder
Not possible.
Cone
Not possible.
Sphere
Not possible.
Rectangle
Not possible.
Slot
Not possible.
Edge point
Not possible.
Curve
Search

Measure
Surface
Not possible.
Centering probe mode

Point
2D
3D Distribution not possible.
With the self centering probing in 2D, the search direction is limited in one plane. To do so, the
centering plane has to be defined in the distribution parameters. During the scanning, the probe
is held within this centering plane. The probing direction defined in the tab Geometry has to be
within the centering plane. If this is not the case, the direction is automatically projected into the
centering plane.
With the self centering probing in 3D, the search direction is not limited. The probe searches for
the deepest point in a defined probing direction in a contour (e.g. in a bore).
Line
Not possible.
Plane
Not possible.
Circle
Not possible.
Cylinder
Not possible.
Cone
Not possible.
Sphere
Not possible.

Measure
Rectangle
Not possible.
Slot
Not possible.
Edge point
Not possible.
Curve
Not possible.
Surface
Not possible.

Measure
Distribution method Mesh type

This topic describes the optimization of the mesh type distribution method for measuring points with repeat.
The opportunities to optimize the distribution are available when measuring points with repeat as well as surfaces.
1. Activate the element selection tool . Click with the left mouse button on the desired surface on
the CAD model. With a right mouse click you see the distribution of the points.
The distribution Mesh type is calculated depending on the first nominal value click. Thereby it is
recommended to set the first nominal value click in such a way, that theoretical lines could be
stretched in coordinate system direction over the maximal length and width of the selected
surface.
Distribution direction optimal Distribution direction inappropriate
(1) first mouse click
(2) second mouse click
2. Rotate the direction of the distribution by 90° by clicking .
3. Change directly the distribution direction on the CAD model by using the element selection tool .
Change the distribution direction by setting the distribution direction on the model with two click points
(left mouse button) and accepting the points with a right mouse button click. Between these two points a
line is drawn. Perpendicular to this line the distribution grid is created, An interruptio of the line ,e. g. a
hole, has as consequence that in the area of the interruption no grid is built. In this area no points are
distributed.
Distribution direction optimal Distribution direction unfavorable

Measure
(1) first mouse click
(2) second mouse click
4. Clicking allows the selection of a curvature dependent or curvature independent distribution of the
individual probe points for the second direction.
Define limitation
It is possible to define a limitation for the measurement of planes and curves.
Limitation for a
plane
Limitation
Limitation points can be clicked with the mouse on the selected plane or curve. Within those the
probe points are automatically distributed when the limitation is finished (right mouse button).
Displays or hides the limitation points.
Deletes the limitation and point distribution.
Reverses the probing sequence.

* Some distribution methods (e.g. mesh type 2) require a certain amount of limitation points in order
to calculate and display the distribution.
This function automatically adjusts the number of limitation points to the selected distribution
method.
* This function is only needed for planes and is therefore hidden when measuring a curve.
Limitation for a plane
With the distribution method Mesh type 2 four limitation points are possible.

Measure
Mesh type.
Limitation for a curve
Probe points are distributed along the complete curve by default as long as the edge distance is set to millimeter. If
you want to measure only individual segments, the limitation points have to be deleted first ( ). Afterwards the
limitation points can be redistributed ( ).
In doing so the following rules apply:
1. Limitation point corresponds with the start point of the first segment
2. Limitation point corresponds with the end point of the first segment
3. Limitation point corresponds with the start point of the second segment
4. Limitation point corresponds with the end point of the second segment
5. Limitation point corresponds with the start point of the third segment
6. etc.
If an uneven number of limitation points is defined on a nominal curve, the last limitation point is ignored.
If only two limitation points are set new, the distribution runs from the first limitation point through the clicked
nominal value of the selected curve to the second limitation point.
Example
In the following example two (multi selection is possible by holding down the Ctrl key during the selection of the nominal
curves) nominal curves that are separated by the bore are selected. Two limitation points are set on the first curve
(point 1 and 2). On the second curve five more limitation points are set (point 3 to 7).
After confirming with the right mouse button, the probe points are distributed between limitation point 1 and 2, as
well as between point 5 and 6. Point 7 is ignored.

Measure
Thin out points

This function allows you to thin out points, delivered by the controller during the measurement of elements with a
scanning probe system, for the calculation of the corresponding element.
The function is only available if the element is measured with a scanning probe system.
No.
The points delivered from the controller are thinned out to this number. This number of points is then used to
calculate the element. If the number of points is changed, the distance between two successive points is
automatically adjusted and displayed in the field below.
Distance
The points delivered from the controller are thinned out to the entered distance between two successive points.
These points are then used for the calculation of the element. If the distance is changed, the number of points is
automatically adjusted and displayed in the field above.
An element can be measured with a maximum of 100'000 points. However, the delivered number
of points depends on the controller and the scanning speed.
Define/Edit safety plane

This function defines a safety plane with a distance to a measuring element. Before and after each measurement of
an element, the machine moves automatically to intermediate points on the safety plane. This movement is recorded
into the program. The function also offers different options:

Measure
1. If the option Before first point is activated, the probe is moved from the current position perpendicular
onto the safety plane before moving towards the first intermediate point. Therefore the parameter safety
plane is recorded into the program before the first intermediate point.
2. Specifies the distance of the safety plane. The distance is always calculated from the nominal position of the
element and in element direction.
3. If the option After each point/After each path is activated, the machine moves to the safety plane and
automatically sets the corresponding intermediate points after each measuring point or each scan path.
The option After each path can only be activated if the function Lift off probe is selected under
Method.

Measure
18.3.4 Contextual Tab Edit
The measuring sequence can be edited in the contextual tab Edit. It is possible to delete, add or edit intermediate
and or probe points.
Only measuring sequences which were measured with a triggered probe system can be edited.
1. Select an intermediate or probe point in the measuring sequence where you want to add an additional
intermediate or probe point.
2. Select if an intermediate or probe point is to be inserted before or after the selected point.
3. Select if an intermediate or probe point is to be inserted.
4. This command button inserts the intermediate or probe point at the selected position.
5. As long as this command button is active, an intermediate or probe point can b clicked directly on the CAD
model which then is inserted.
6. This command button deletes the selected intermediate or probe point from the measuring sequence.
7. With the selection can be edited. The X, Y and Z values can either be edited manually or by clicking with
the mouse ( ) on the CAD model. It is also possible to adopt the point at the current machine position ( )
. After the changes are done, the function is terminated by clicking on again.
Actions
Inserts object before the selection.
Inserts object after the selection.
Inserts an intermediate point.
Inserts a probe point.
Inserts the intermediate or probe point with the defined coordinates at the selected position.
As long as this command button is active, an intermediate or probe point can be clicked with the
mouse on the CAD model. This point then is inserted into the measuring sequence.
Deletes the selected intermediate or probe point from the measuring sequence.
Opens the edit mode.

Measure
18.3.5 Contextual Tab Features
In the contextual tab Features, it is possible to select features of an element that are created automatically during
the element measurement and are saved into the database.
These features are also displayed in the element window under Tolerances and Deviations.
1. Select the features to be evaluated.
2. If the option Dynamic is set, the position feature (x,y,z and d,A,B) are created dynamically. Else, features
are created statically.
3. This button opens a dialog wherein an ID as well as the tolerances for the feature can be edited.
3. The fields can be directly edited by clicking into the corresponding field
4. Click on OK.
The position of planes, cylinders and lines can only be reasonably evaluated with axially parallel
planes, cylinders and lines in one or with the cylinder in two axes.

Measure
18.3.6 Contextual Tab Repeat
The contextual tab Repeat allows measuring several elements of the same element type after each other in a single
step. This tab is available for the elements point, edge point, circle and cylinder. Thereby, settings defined in the
other tabs (e.g. probing depth) apply for all elements.
The defined ID will be assigned to the first element. The ID for the following elements is automatically counted up.
1. Select the distribution method.
Point
Distribution method
None No element repetition is executed.
Manual You can distribute and measure any amount of elements on the CAD model with the
mouse tool.
Number of Intersection or edge curves of the CAD model can be selected with the mouse tool.
elements
The defined number of elements is distributed on the selected curves. The offset
defines the offset of the distribution to the selected curves.
Distance elements Intersection or edge curves of the CAD model can be selected with the mouse tool.
The elements are distributed on the curves with the defined distance to each other.
The offset defines the offset of the distribution to the selected curves.
Curvature-based Intersection or edge curves of the CAD model can be selected with the mouse tool.
angle
Using this method, more points are distributed on areas with larger curvatures than
on areas with smaller or no curvature.
In order to define the curvature-based distribution, the angle (the larger the entered
angle, the smaller is the difference between the point distribution on the straight and the
curved curve parts) as well as the chord length Min (minimum distance to respect
between the probe points on the curve, regardless of the entered angle) and Max
(maximum allowable distance between probe points on the curve, regardless of the entered
angle) are additionally available.
The offset defines the offset of the distribution to the selected curves.
Mesh type number Any surfaces can be selected with the mouse tool in the group Method.
of elements
The defined number of elements is distributed on the selected surfaces.

Measure
Mesh type element Any surfaces can be selected with the mouse tool.
distance
The elements are distributed on the selected surfaces with the defined distance.
Mesh type.
It is important to activate the option Projection onto CAD when distributing points with an offset.
This ensures that the nominal values of the probe points are re-calculated after the
measurement.
It is recommended to set the offset value to zero for intersection curves. The intersection curve
should already be inserted in such a way, that you can directly measured on them.
Edge point
Distribution method
Manual You can distribute and measure any amount of elements on the CAD model with the
mouse tool.
Number of Any edges can be selected with the mouse tool.

elements
The defined number of elements is distributed on the selected edges.
Distance elements Any edges can be selected with the mouse tool.
The elements are distributed on the selected edges with the defined distance.
The following applies for the distribution of edge points: If three edges that have the same
reference surface are selected, the selection is automatically extended with the edge pieces in
between them. This can be helpful when, for example, a radius on the CAD model consists out of
multiple small individual segments. In this case, it is sufficient if a first edge segment is selected in
order to define the start of the edge, a second segment in order to define the direction, and a
third segment in order to define the end of the edge.
Circle and cylinder
Distribution method

Measure
Manual You can distribute and measure any amount of circles/cylinders on the CAD model
with the mouse tool.
Grid Circles/cylinders are distributed on a grid (x, y, z) with a defined increment

(dx/dy/dz) and defined amount (Nx/Ny/Nz).
Circle The defined number of circles/cylinders are circularly distributed around a defined
point (x/y/z).
The alignment of the circles/cylinders is defined via the input of an angle or a

division.
2. Define the distribution parameter.
3. Define any limitations for point or edge point if you do not want to have the elements distributed
among the whole curve or edge.
Limitation
Limitation points can be clicked with the mouse on the selected curve or edge. Within this selected
edge, the probe points are automatically distributed when the limitation is finished (right mouse
button).
Displays or hides the limitation points.
Deletes the limitation and point distribution.
Reverses the probing sequence.

Measure
18.3.7 Contextual Tab Progress

Edit measuring sequence
Actions
Accept measuring point from current machine position.
Accept intermediate point from current machine position.
Delete last measured measuring or intermediate point.
Terminate measurement and save element (if enough points are available)
Abort measurement.
View measurement progress

The progress window displays the preset number of points as well as the already measured number of points.
Increase/Decrease number of points

The specified (by Quartis) or selected minimal number of points for the manual element measurement is displayed
in the group Number of points.
The number of points can be increased or decreased . The progress window is automatically updated.

Measure
18.3.8 Contextual Tab Head orientation
The head orientation for a REVO articulating probing system equipped with probe module RSP2 can be defined in
the contextual tab Head orientation.
1. Select the method.
Method
Head probing off Probe points are approached by positioning the three machine axes in X, Y and Z.
The A and B angles of the articulating probing system remain unchanged.
Critical angle Probe points are measured by rotating and swiveling the articulating probing
system. The probing angle α can be limited against the top and bottom via the
critical angles. The probing angle α describes the angle between work piece surface
and stylus direction.
Scanning probe mode
Method
Critical angle The probing angle α can be limited against the top and bottom via the critical
angles. The probing angle α describes the angle between work piece surface and
stylus direction.
Fixed angle The head orientation is defined with the input of α and β. α defines the angle
between element direction and stylus direction. β defines the rotation around the
element direction.
The current angle position of the articulating probing system in reference to the
element to be measured is taken over with the function Adopt current head
orientation ( ).
Focal point CMM and articulating probing system are positioned in a way that the focal point
defined by dx, dy and dz always lies in stylus direction.
2. Define the parameters.

Measure
Critical angles
The probing angle α can be limited to the top and bottom with the angles α min and α max.
The probing angle α describes the angle between the work piece surface and the stylus direction.
1 = Work piece, 2 = Max. probing angle, 3 = Min. probing angle
With certain element types only α min or α max can be limited.
Element Effective probing angle α
Plane, Line, Surface, Edge point, inner slot, inner - α is larger than α min
rectangle, inner sphere, outer sphere, outer cone
- α is smaller than α max
Inner circle, inner cylinder, inner cone - α is smaller than α max
Outer circle, outer slot, outer rectangle, curve - α equals α min
Example inner circle:
If the probe head can be positioned in the bore axis and the probing angle α does not exceed the defined critical
angles, the inner circle is measured with 2 axis movement.
Else, the probing angle α is set to the defined critical angles α max and the inner circle is measured with 5 axis
movement.

Measure
Fixed angles
α is the angle between the element direction (here z) and the stylus direction. β is a rotation around the element
direction (here z).
If the element has no element direction, the reference direction is used (line, circle, curve).
Angle α and β on an outer sphere
Focal point
The focal point is displayed as preview point in the graphics. The parameter dx, dy, dz are relative to the element
coordinate system.
dz is the offset from the nominal point in primary direction. The primary direction of the element coordinate system
corresponds with the element direction, respectively the reference direction with line, circle and curve.
dx is the offset from the nominal point in secondary direction. The secondary direction corresponds with the
direction that is used as start for the sector-angle distribution. With line and curve it is the reversed probing
direction.
dy is the offset form the nominal point in the third direction.

Measure
18.4 Determine roughness

The Renishaw REVO probe module SFP1 allows to determine the roughness of a surface.
The SFP1 probe module is equipped with a stylus tip for roughness measurement and an additional axis, the C
axis that allows the probe to twist. This is necessary so that the stylus tip can always be aligned perpendicular to
the work piece surface. The twisting of the C axis always occurs automatically on the C axis module that is mounted
on the track of the stylus changing system. If an alignment of the C axis is required for the measurement, the
probe automatically moves to the changing starting point when the measurement is started.
The roughness can only be determined in CNC mode.
1. Load a probe system equipped with a probe module SFP1 as described in the help topic Load probe
system.
3. Click on the command button Line.
4. The tab Geometry is opened and the mouse tool is active.
5. Define the nominal values using the mouse tool or by manually entering them into the corresponding
fields.
When using the mouse tool, the first clicked point (x/y/z) corresponds with the start point of the
probing length (this is the length on which the stylus tip is dragged across the surface during the measurement),
while the second clicked point (x2/y2/z2) only defines the direction of the probing length. The length
and thus the end of the probing length is only set via the selected roughness parameters (See step 11).
Therefore the end of the probing path can either be before or behind the point x2/y2/z2.

Measure
The direction i2/j2/k2 has an effect on the probe system angles as the stylus tip has to be perpendicular
to the surface during the measurement.
A: Stylus tip direction
B: probing length direction
2: Start point (x/y/z)
3: second clicked point (x2/y2/z2)
When entering the nominal values, you need to pay attention that the controller positions the
probe system automatically and aligns it depending on the direction of the probing length and
the selected head orientation. See also point 15.
For this reason the user has to ensure:

· that the nominal values are defined in such a way, that the probe system can reach the position
required for the measurement without collision
· that the path from the current position to the stylus changing system is clear in case a new
alignment of the C axis is necessary to position the probe system. The new alignment of the C
axis and hence the movement of the probe system to the stylus changing system (start point
for probe change), is automatically executed when starting the measurement.
6. Select the reference for the line to be measure. The reference determines whereto the measured lines is
projected onto; but it has no influence on the roughness parameters.
7. Select the calculation method for the element to be measured.
The selected calculation has no influence on the roughness parameters.
8. Select the option none for outliers.
The option eliminate outliers has an influence on the determined roughness parameters.
9. Select the option none for the filter.
The option filter has an influence on the determined roughness parameters.

Measure
10. Switch to the tab Distribution.
11. Select the roughness parameters:
Start-up length / run-off length (path at the beginning and end of the probing length where no points are
measured. Usually you select a start-up length / run-off length that is half of the cut-off) , cut-off length(the profile
filter (cut-off) is selected depending on the workpiece surface either according to the valley spacing
or the expected roughness values) and the cut-off number that are to be measured after each other.
The roughness parameters determine the probing length.
1 Edge distance 4-8 Cut-off
2 Start-up length 9 Measurement length
3 Run-off length 10 Probing length
The probing length cannot exceed 40 mm. If the probing length is longer, an error message is displayed.
12. Select the edge distance.
13. Define the safety plane.
14. Switch to the tab Head orientation.
15. Select the method for the head orientation:
In general, the method Optimal to probing length should be used, as the probe system is also calibrated
with this method. With this method the probe system, as recommended by the manufacturer, is dragged

Measure
from the starting point (x/y/z) in the direction of the end point (x2/y2/z2) (pictured below), whereby the shaft
of the probe is parallel to the probing length.
The method Slanted to probing length is only selected, if, due to the geometry of the work piece, it is not
possible to align the probe system in direction of the probing length.
16. If the method Slanted to probing length is selected, the angle α (angle between the reference direction of the
element and the probe shaft) defines the skew of the probe during the roughness measurement. Thus α also
has an influence on how the probe system is aligned at the start of the measurement.
Probe system position with method optimal to Probe system position with method slanted to
probing length (the probe system position does probing length with α = 30 °
not depend on the reference direction)
(i/j/k): Direction of the reference
B: Direction of the probing length
2: first clicked point in step 5 (x/y/z)
3: second clicked point in step 5 (x2/y2/z2)
17. Adjust the alignment tolerance( The alignment of the SFP1 sensor needle to the measurement surface affects the
accuracy of the roughness measurement. The smaller the alignment tolerance the more accurate the measurement, but
the greater the probability that a realignment of the C-axis is required. ) of the C-axis if needed.
18. Switch to the tab Features.
19. Select the desired features of the line to be measured.
The roughness parameters are evaluated independent from the features defined here.

Measure
20. Click on the Start command button in the group Actions.
After clicking on the command button Start, the machine will move automatically.
The probe system moves, if needed, to the stylus changing system in order to rotate in the C axis.
On the way to the first intermediate or probe point of the active measuring sequence, the REVO is
aligned in the A and B axes.
How roughness parameters and roughness profile are saved is described here.
18.4.1 Output of roughness parameter and roughness profile
The roughness parameters are not saved into the database but in a text file (roughness parameters), an image file
(roughness profile) and a x3p file (2-D-profile data).
The storage location of these files is the directory defined for reports in the Quartis options under System.
This is by defaults C:\Users\Public\Documents\WENZEL\WM Quartis Rx\Reports.
Composition of file names
Roughness parameters:[Workpiece-ID]_[Measurement-ID]_[Element-ID].txt
Roughness profile: [Workpiece-ID]_[Measurement-ID]_[Element-ID].png
2-D-Profile data: [Workpiece-ID]_[Measurement-ID]_[Element-ID] .x3p
Example
Workpiece-ID: 110 / Measurement-ID: 1 / Measured Line: LIN_1
File name roughness parameters: 110_1_LIN_1.txt
File name roughness profile: 110_1_LIN_1.png
File name 2-D-profil data: 110_1_Lin_1.x3p
The text file and the image file can be inserted as text field and image into the report.
In order to insert the most current files for the program execution, you can also use expressions.

Construct
19 Construct
19.1 Information about constructing elements
Elements that cannot be measured with the machine can be constructed using measured elements.
19.2 Create element with input
Elements which cannot be measured or constructed are created by manual input with this function.
The actual and nominal values can be calculated using element or feature data from other elements. Detailed
information is available in the topic Calculate theoretical element.
It is also possible to create surfaces using CAD data in order to use them, for example, for intersections or
construction actions.
2. Click on the command button Input.
3. Select the target element.
4. Enter an ID for the element or accept the next suggested free ID.
If an already existing element is to be overwritten, select the corresponding element using the drop
down list ( ) or the selection dialog ( ).
It is also possible to enter the source and target element IDs using the expression editor by
double clicking on the input field.
WM | Quartis ® R2018-2 Construct 439

Construct
5. If an element can be created either as inside element or outside element, select the corresponding
value.
6. Enter actual values for appropriate elements.
The input of the position and direction can either be entered directly as cartesian values or via using
the position dialog or the direction dialog.
The input of additional actual values depend on the selected target element.
The calculated actual values are directly proposed as nominal values.
You can enter an actual value with the expression editor by double clicking on an input field. The
expression is used for the corresponding nominal value. If the nominal value should contain
another expression or a fix value, you must subsequently adapt the value in the group Nominal
value.
7. Using the element selection tool the desired element can be directly clicked with left mouse button.
The parameters of the clicked element are entered into the display after selection with right mouse
button.
8. If necessary confirm the parameters by clicking .
The element is displayed in the graphics window as live preview. Direction vectors are normalized, if
needed.
9. Select Display nominal values only, if different values apply as nominal values and actual values during
testing or simulation. Note that input of actual values will overwrite nominal values automatically. If the
inputs should be different, the actual values must be entered before the nominal values.
10.
Confirm nominal values by clicking . This is necessary only for prior displaying the group Nominal
values.
To construct the element, actual values and nominal values must be confirmed with . Are
actual values and nominal values different, the group Nominal Values cannot be hidden.
Displaying and defining nominal values is optional. Construction is also possible with displayed
nominal values.

Construct
11. Click on the command button Construct.
The input element will be constructed and saved in the database.
19.2.1 Create surfaces using CAD data
With the function Create element with input surfaces can be created using the nominal values of the loaded CAD
model.
These surfaces can be used, for example, for intersection or construction actions.
3. Select Surface as target element.
4. Enter an ID for the target element or accept the next suggested free ID.
5. Click the element selection tool .
The desired surfaces can be selected directly on the CAD model using the left mouse button.
By clicking the right mouse button, you confirm your selection and the position of the first clicked point
is entered as parameter into the dialog.

Construct
An element Surface, referencing to the previously clicked CAD surfaces, is created.
Not all data of the CAD surface is saved in the element Surface but only the reference ID of the
CAD model and the ID of the CAD surface.
This information is especially important if you refer in a program to a CAD surface created via
input and then import a changed CAD model at a later point in time. In this case, the model
should be replaced via the command Modify during the CAD import so that the reference ID of
the CAD model remains unaltered in Quartis.
If the surface ID has changed in the CAD model, the surfaces has to be re-created.
19.2.2 Calculate theoretical element
It is also possible to calculate theoretical elements with the function Create element with input.
The expressions can be entered directly in the group Actual values. However, it is recommended to enter
the expressions using the expression editor.
A double click on an actual or nominal value field opens the expression editor.
Should you want to enter the expression nevertheless directly into the actual or nominal value field, the
input has to start with an equals sign (=). This defines that the input is in fact an expression.
By using the expression editor, you can
· Output element and feature values

· Offset element and feature values against each other
· Use functions
· Insert formulas copied from the application examples.
The result of the expression must be of type floating point number. Otherwise, the dialog cannot
be confirmed.
19.3 Create element out of existing elements

19.3.1 Create intersection element out of two elements
This function creates elements that cannot be measured (e.g. body edges) by intersecting two elements (e.g. probed
plane with probed cylinder).

Construct
2. Click on the command button Intersection.
3. Select the source elements.
4. If necessary swap the order of the source elements.
The construction result can depend on the order of the source elements in the input fields
(upper / lower). Informations, which can not be determined by construction, are taken over from
the element in the upper input field. Therefore it might be necessary to swap the source elements,
to get the desired result.
5. Select the target element point, line or circle.
If no intersection element can be constructed out of the selected source elements, is

displayed.
An overview of all possible solutions is displayed in the corresponding table.

Construct
7. If a circle is created, you can select if an inside or outside circle is to be created.
8. Check the nominal values.
If the nominal values can be taken over from the source elements, they will be automatically displayed
and activated with .
If the nominal values cannot be taken over from the source elements, the calculated actual values are
entered; will not be activated automatically. In this case you have to adjust the nominal values and set
them manually with . If is not activated, the intersection element will be created without nominal
values.
The intersection element is constructed and stored in the database.
In a program always the recorded nominal values of an intersection element are used. If the
nominal values of the source elements are adjusted in the program, the nominal values of the
intersection element have to be adjusted as well.
19.3.2 Create symmetry element out of two elements
This function creates an element which has the same distance from two selected elements.
2. Click on the command button Symmetry.

Construct
If no symmetry element can be constructed out of the selected source elements, is

displayed.
them manually with .
If is not activated, the symmetry element will be created without nominal values.
The symmetry element is constructed and stored in the database.

Construct
In a program are always the recorded nominal values of a symmetry element used. If the nominal
values of the source elements are adjusted in the program, the nominal values of the symmetry
element have to be adjusted as well.
19.3.3 Create connection element out of two elements
This function creates a connecting element between two elements.
The result is always a straight line.
2. Click on the command button Connection.
5. If no connecting element can be constructed out of the selected source elements, is

displayed as target element.

Construct
If is not activated, the connecting element will be created without nominal values.
The connecting element is constructed and stored in the database.
In a program are always recorded nominal values of a connecting element used. If the nominal
values of the source elements are adjusted in the program, the nominal values of the connecting
19.3.4 Create a construction element of several elements
This function creates a new element using multiple already existing elements (e.g. a pitch circle out of circles).

Construct
4. Enter an ID for the target element or accept the next suggested free ID.
5. For elements that either can be created as an outside or inside element, the corresponding option has
to be selected.
Note that commas (,), which separate the IDs of different source elements must be also a
component in the expression of the source elements.
Note also the Examples for IDs of source elements for the construction function.
6. Select the source elements using the selection dialog ( ) or enter the elements manually into the input
field (seperate the elements of the list with comma and no spaces between them).
For the elements cylinder, cone, slot or rectangle the order of the source elements must be
selected in such a way that they correspond to the prescribed probing strategy.
The probing strategies are described under Manually pre-probe element and Measure element.
7. Alternatively, you can select the source elements directly in the graphics window. Activate the element
selection tool and click on the desired elements in the graphics window. Clicking a listed
element will remove it from the list.
8. Select if the calculation is executed using element parameters (center of gravity of element) or using
element points.

Construct
If is not activated, the connecting element will be created without nominal values.
Please see the note regarding nominal values at the end of this chapter.
10. Select the reference elements if this is needed for the target element.
11. Select the calculation method.
For a calculation based on element points, in addition you can select a probe radius correction after
construction.
If the checkbox is not activated the already compensated probe points will be used for the construction.
The connection element is constructed and saved in the database.
If curves, that were measured without nominal curve, are connected to a construction element
Curve, the calculation method Spline has to be selected.
Comparing the probe points of the source element with the probe points of the target element
after the construction, you need to realize that points of different elements are projected
differently.
You find more information and notes for the construction of surfaces using curves here.
Notes about nominal values during construction
If a construction element is created by element point calculation, the target element (constructed element) is
automatically assigned nominal values in the following cases:
The target element gets the same nominal values as the first source element of the same type. Let's say two
cylinders are connected to one cylinder, the nominal values originate from the first cylinder. If no source element of
the same type is available, the following rules apply:
· If the target element is a plane and at least one source element is a point, the nominal values are taken from
the first point.

Construct
· If the target element is a cylinder and at least one source element is a circle, the nominal values are taken from
the first circle.
· If the target element is a cone and at least one source element is a circle, the nominal values are taken from the
first circle.
The first element is the one that is marked on top of the sorted selection list ( ).
Construct surfaces using curves

During construction you need to realize that probe points of different elements are projected differently. Among
other things, this is important for the construction of curves to surfaces.
Probe points (1) of a curve are projected onto the corresponding nominal curve (2), while probe points of a surface
are always projected perpendicularly onto the next CAD surface(3).
1. Actual position of probe point

2. Point of curve projected onto nominal curve
3. Point of constructed surface projected
perpendicularly onto CAD surface.
The following needs to be noted when using this function to construct surfaces using curves:
Is the plane of the curve perpendicular to the work piece surface and the part differs only slightly, then the points of
the curve and the points of the resulting constructed surface will have nearly identical positions.
The difference between these positions increases the more the angle between the plane of the curve and the surface
of the work piece deviates from 90°.
This effect will be increased the greater the used probe radius and the greater the deviation of the work piece are.
The information about the surface ID must be available for the projection of the probe points
onto the CAD surface. This ID is saved in the .sax file since Quartis R12.
For this reason only curve, which are based on a .sax file, can be constructed as surfaces. The .sax
file must be created in a Quartis version greater R12. In the case of a change of the CAD model
the .sax file must be recreated and the program sentence "Measure (curve):" must be recorded
again.

Construct
19.3.5 Create top of cone
This function creates a point in the vertex of the cone in the left element window.
2. Click on the command button Top of cone.
4. Click on OK.
19.3.6 Create extract element out of curve
This function creates a line or a circle out of the probe points of a curve. The extract element is calculated out of the
probe points that are within a defined search area defined by the range.

Construct
2. Click on the command button Extract.
3. Now click a point on the curve in the graphics and confirm your selection with the right mouse button. This
point is used as start point for the calculation of the extract element.
This point is taught into the program and therefore can be reused as start value for the extract calculation
during the execution of the program.
The ID of the clicked curve is automatically taken over as source element.
4. Select the target element line or circle.
As target element the one that contains more probe points within the defined range is always suggested.
If an already existing element is to be overwritten, select the corresponding element using the drop down
6. For a circle you can additionally select if it is an inside or outside circle.
7. Enter the desired range. This determines how large the range of the target element can beat most.
Depending on the range and the deviation of the individual probe points more or less points will be
included into the extract calculation.
If the nominal values are to be taken over from the curve, they are automatically input and activated by .

Construct
If the nominal values are not to be taken over from the curve, the calculated actual values are input, is not
automatically set. In this case the nominal values have to be adjusted manually and be set manually with .
If is not set, the extract element is created without nominal values.
9. Select the calculation method for the extract element. Depending on the target element different calculation
methods are available.
The extract element is constructed and saved into the database.
19.3.7 Create min/max element
This function determines the minimum or maximum point of an element in a specified direction.
A point or a plane with the specified evaluation direction can be created at this position.
2. Click on the command button Min/Max Element.
3. Select the source element using the drop down list ( ) or the selection dialog ( ) or enter the name of
the element manually into the input field.
4. Alternatively, you can select the source element directly in the graphics window. Activate the element
selection tool and click the desired element in the graphics window.
5. Select the desired solution (point or plane).

Construct
If you cannot construct a Min/Max element from the selected input (source element or evaluation
direction) will be shown as target element.
7. Select the evaluation direction.
It can either be entered or taken over from an element.
The evaluation of the direction can also be executed radial for the elements circle, cylinder, sphere and
cone.
The maximum point for circle and sphere is the one that is at the longest distance from the center
of the circle or sphere. The minimum point consequently is the one at the shortest distance.
The maximum point for cylinder and cone is the one that is at the longest distance from the
surface of the cylinder or sphere in the direction away from the axis. The minimum point is the
one that is at the longest distance from the side surface in the direction to the axis.
8. If needed, control the nominal values and confirm the values with .
The actual values of the target element are proposed or can be entered manually.
If is not activated the Min/Max element is created without nominal values.
19.3.8 Create offset point
This function allows you to relocate a point in the left element window and then to save it as a new element.

Construct
2. Click on the command button Offset Point.
3. Enter the relocation vector in X, Y and Z.
4. Click on OK.
6. If multiple solutions are possible, they are displayed. Click on the desired solution.

Construct
7. Click on OK.
19.3.9 Create offset line
This function allows you to define connection lines that cannot be measured.
These connect the position of the element in the left element window with a point that has a specified distance/offset
from the position of the element in the right element window.
2. Click on the command button Offset Line.
3. Enter the offset (Distance of the connection line from the point in the right element window) and direction if
needed.
The suggested direction corresponds with the direction of the element in the right element window. If it
does not contain any direction information, the direction can be entered manually in the direction fields.

Construct
The offset line is created in a plane. This plane is defined by the direction and position of the element in
the right element window.
This must be particularly considered if both elements are not in the same plane or have different
directions.
Ensure that the offset distance is always shorter than the distance between both elements;
otherwise no mathematical solution will be possible.
4. Click on OK.
6. Select the adequate solution.
7. Click on OK
19.3.10 Create offset plane
This function creates an offset plane that has specific distances to several elements.

Construct
Therefore an offset can be assigned in a defined direction to each element.
2. Click on the command button Offset Plane.
3. Select the reference element for the direction of the distances in the drop down list ( ) or the selection
dialog ( )
4. or enter the direction.
The direction entered influences the direction in which the offset is applied and therefore also the
constructed offset plane. An example can be found at the end of this chapter.
5. Click on OK.

Construct
6. Select at least 3 measured elements whose distances from the searched plane are known.
7. Click on OK.
8. Select the calculation method for the offset plane.
9. Now enter the offset for each selected element by marking the corresponding element in the left field
and assign the entered offset to it by clicking on .
Repeat this for each element.
10. Click on OK.

Construct
12. Click on OK

Construct
Example of the effects of the direction either entered manually or using a predetermined
reference element
A offset plane is to be constructed using the points PT_3, PT_4 and PT_5 . The entered offset is 5 mm for all points.
Therefore, a sphere with radius 5 mm is put around each point. The plane to be constructed is then tangential
positioned on to these spheres.
Thus there are two possibilities where the offset plane can be positioned, marked as PLN_2 (green) and PLN_3 (red)
in the image below. Which plane will finally be constructed depends on the entered direction in the offset dialog.
entered direction from offset dialog constructed offset plane
x y z ID Direction of offset plane
i j k
Example 1 0.000 0.000 1.000 PLN_2 0.000 0.707 0.707
Example 2 0.000 0.000 -1.000 PLN_3 0.000 -0.707 -0.707

Construct
19.3.11 Create parallel element
This function creates a line or plane that is parallel to the first selected element and runs through the point selected
as second element. This second element can also be an element reducible to a point.
2. Click on the command button Parallel.
The line or plane to be constructed lies parallel to the element in the upper input field and runs through
the element in the lower input field.
For the construction to be successful, the two source elements must fulfill the following characteristics:
Upper Input Field Lower Input Field
Element Element
· is a line / plane · is a point
· can be reduced to a line / a plane
· can be reduced to a point
5. If no parallel element can be constructed from the selected source elements, is

displayed.

Construct
If is not activated, the parallel element will be created without nominal values.
The parallel element is constructed and stored in the database.
In a program are always recorded nominal values of a parallel element used. If the nominal values
of the source elements are adjusted in the program, the nominal values of the parallel element
have to be adjusted as well.
19.3.12 Create perpendicular element
This function creates a line or plane perpendicular to the first selected element that runs through a point selected
as second element. This second element can also be an element reducible to a point.

Construct
2. Click on the command button Perpendicular.
If no perpendicular element can be constructed out of the selected source elements, is

displayed.
If is not activated, the perpendicular element will be created without nominal values.

Construct
The perpendicular element is constructed and stored in the database.
In a program are always recorded nominal values of a perpendicular element used. If the
nominal values of the source elements are adjusted in the program, the nominal values of the
perpendicular element have to be adjusted as well.
19.3.13 Create projection element
This function projects the element with the deeper spatial definition onto the element with the higher spatial
definition (e.g. point [1D] on plane [3D]).
In the case of projection of a plane onto a plane (same spatial definition), the plane in the upper
element window is projected onto the plane in the lower element window.
The result element is always of the same type as the projection element (e.g. point -> point).
2. Click on the command button Projection.

Construct
4. If necessary swap the order of the source elements
(upper / lower). Information, which can not be determined by construction, is taken from the
element in the upper input field. Therefore it might be necessary to swap the source elements, to
get the desired result.
If no projection element can be constructed using the selected source elements, is

displayed.
7. If a circle is created, you can select if an inside or outside circle is to be created.
If is not activated, the projection element will be created without nominal values.
The projection element is constructed and saved in the database.

Construct
In a program are always recorded nominal values of a projection element used. If the nominal
values of the source elements are adjusted in the program, the nominal values of the projection
19.3.14 Create tangent element
This function creates a tangential element.
2. Click on the command button Tangent.
3. Select the desired target element. If the target element is a circle, the radius or diameter can be entered
optionally.
4. Click on OK.

Construct
6. If multiple solutions are possible, they are displayed. Click on the desired solution.
7. Click on OK.

Construct
The following table displays how the original elements (left and right element window) are used for the construction
of a tangent:
Element in left element window
Point No solution Point
Line Line Line
Plane No solution No solution
Cylinder reduced to line reduced to line
Sphere No solution reduced to point
Cone reduced to line reduced to line or reduced to point
Rectangle reduced to line (longitudinal direction) reduced to line (longitudinal direction) or

reduced to point
Slot reduced to line (longitudinal direction) reduced to line (longitudinal direction) or

reduced to point
Edge point No solution Point
The following table displays how the original elements (left and right element window) are used for the construction
of a tangent:
Target element Left (reduced) element Right (reduced) element Solution
Line Circle Point Line through a point

tangential to circle
Circle Line tangential to two circles
Plane Circle Point Plane through a point

Circle Line Point Circle through a point

tangential to line
Line Circle tangential to two lines
Circle Circle tangential to line and

circle
Circle Point Circle through a point

Line Circle tangential to circle and

plane
Circle Fit circle tangentially

Construct
19.3.15 Construction Tables

Intersection
The following table shows all possible solutions for the construction function Intersection:
Only element combinations that result in a valid solution are displayed.
Element 2** Element 1*

Construct
* Source element in the upper drop down list
** Source element in the lower drop down list
With intersections of two 2D elements, one element is projected into the plane of the other element before
calculating the intersection
point (see table below). The projection is only executed if the element planes are parallel.
Element type combination Projection
Circle – Line / Line – Circle Line is projected into the circle plane.
Line – Curve / Curve – Line Line is projected into the curve plane.
Circle – Curve / Curve - Circle Circle is projected into the curve plane.
Circle – Circle Second circle is projected into the plane of the first circle.
Line - Line No projection.
A symmetry point is always output.
The nominal values of the surface are used for intersections with a surface, both with measured
surfaces as well as with surfaces created via input.

Construct
Symmetry
The following table shows all possible solutions for the construction function Symmetry:

Construct
* Source element in the upper drop down list , ** Source element in the lower drop down list

Construct
Connection
The following table shows all possible solutions for the construction function Connection:

Construct
Min/Max element
The following table shows all possible solutions for the construction function Min/Max Element:
Element Direction 0,0,1 Own element direction Radial

Construct

Construct
Offset Line
The following table shows all possible solutions for the construction function Offset Line:

Construct
Parallel
The following table shows all possible solutions for the construction function Parallel:

Construct
Perpendicular
The following table shows all possible solutions for the construction function Perpendicular:
Element REW * Element LEW **

Construct
Projection
The following table shows all possible solutions for the construction function Projection:
Element REW * Element LEW **
* Element in right element window / ** Element in left element window

Construct

Align/Coordinate system
20 Align/Coordinate system
20.1 Information about the coordinate system
Coordinate systems are used to determine the position of the work piece on the machine and for their alignment.
To do so, the following different methods can be used:
· Primary direction, secondary direction, origin alignment

· RPS (Reference Point System) alignment
· Define coordinate system using Bestfit
20.2 Switch between PCS/PLCS/RCS

This button switches between PCS (Part Coordinate System), PLCS (Pallet Coordinate System) and RCS (Rotary
Table Coordinate System).
Depending on this setting a PCS, PLCS or RCS is created with all subsequent alignment actions.
The PCS is saved in the measurement database with the current measurement and therefore can
only be used for this work piece/measurement.
The PLCS and RCS are saved in the system database and therefore can be used across
measurements and workpieces.
Activate PCS
2. Click on the command button PLCS or RCS.
3. Click on PCS.
WM | Quartis ® R2018-2 Align/Coordinate system 482

Activate PLCS
2. Click on the command button PCS or RCS
3. Click on PLCS.
Activate RCS
2. Click on the command button PCS or PLCS.
3. Click on RCS.
20.3 Load coordinate system

This function loads an already existing coordinate system from the database.
Depending on the setting of the PCS/PLCS/RCS button, either a PCS, PLCS or a RCS is loaded.

3. Select the coordinate system using the drop down ( ) or the selection dialog ( ).
4. Click on OK.
20.4 Save coordinate system

This function saves the currently created coordinate system into the database.
2. Click on the command button Save.

3. Enter an ID for the coordinate system.
An existing coordinate system can be directly overwritten by entering the corresponding ID. It also can be
selected using the drop down ( ) or selection dialog ( ).
4. The following additional options for the saving of a work piece coordinate system are available:
· Interlink RCS, PLCS, PCS and save as PCS absolute (Possible active rotary table, pallet and work piece
coordinate systems are interlinked and saved as a work piece coordinate system)
· Interlink PCS with PLCS and save as PLCS (A work piece coordinate system can be converted into an OCLS
and then be saved as such) .
5. Click on OK.
20.5 Delete coordinate system

This function deletes the current coordinate system.
Depending on the setting of the PCS/PLCS/RCS button, either the PCS, PLCS or RCS is deleted.

The coordinate system is not deleted from the database but removed from the status. It can be
reloaded from the database at any time.
20.6 Create a coordinate system with primary direction, secondary direction and
origin
20.6.1 Define primary direction
The function Primary Direction allows you to define the spatial position of the work piece or the pallet.
For the determination of the primary direction, the direction vector of the element in the left element window is
used. If needed, the origin of the desired direction can be defined with the element at the same time.
Depending on the setting of the PCS/PCLS the primary direction is determined for a PCS or PCLS.
2. Click on the command button Primary direction.
3. Select in which axis the element is to be aligned. The suggestion relates to the nominal direction of the
element in the left element window.

If the button is active, the primary direction of the coordinate system is defined in the direction of the
element. The primary direction can be defined in the reversed direction of the element by activating the
button.
4. Select in which axis the element is to be set to zero. It is possible to select multiple or no axes.
5. Click on OK.
20.6.2 Define secondary direction
The secondary direction defines the rotation of the work piece or pallet around the primary direction.
At the same time it is possible to define the origin in the desired direction.
Depending on the setting of the PCS/PCLS the secondary direction is determined for a PCS or PCLS.
The calculation of the secondary direction depends on the element type and it's direction:
Line, Cylinder, Cone, Edge point:

The direction vector of the element is used for the secondary direction.
Point, Sphere:
A connection line between the current coordinate system origin and the position of the element is calculated for the
secondary direction.
Circle, Rectangle, Slot:

If the direction vector points parallel to the primary direction, a connection line between the current coordinate
system origin and the position of the element is calculated for the secondary direction. Else, the direction vector is
used.
Plane:
If the secondary direction is defined right after the primary direction, an intersection line between the main
coordinate system plane and the element is calculated. Else, the direction vector of the element is used.
2. Click on the command button Secondary direction.

3. Select in which axis the element is to be aligned. The suggestion relates to the nominal direction of the
element.
If the button is active, the secondary direction of the coordinate system is defined in the direction of the
element. The secondary direction can be defined in the reversed direction of the element by activating the
button.
4. Select in which axis the element is to be set to zero. It is possible to select multiple or no axes.
5. Click on OK.
20.6.3 Define origin
The origin defines the precise position of the work piece, pallet or rotary table.
The position of the element in the left element window is used for the definition of the origin.
Depending on the setting of the button PCS/PCLS, the origin is defined for a PCS or PLCS.
2. Click on the command button Origin.

3. Select in which axis the element is to be set to zero. It is possible to select multiple axes.
4. Click on OK.
20.7 Define coordinate system using reference point systems (RPS)

This function allows you to align work pieces that do not have any surfaces with a direct reference to a chosen
coordinate system.
Whether a work piece or pallet coordinate system should be generated, must be determined
before the function is activated!
2. Click on the command button RPS.

3. Select at least 3 and maximum 6 elements for the calculation of the coordinate system.
4. If RPS elements are to be selected without changing the already entered coordinates, activate the
corresponding command button.
5. By clicking on , 6 values can be selected that are locked for the calculation of the coordinate system.
Thereby the 3-2-1 rule (the selection has to be made so 3 values are selected on one axis, 2 on another one and 1 on
the third) has to be respected.
6. As a special case point by point best fit can be used on its own. Hence limiting of degrees of freedom is
ignored. All values are always used for the calculation of the coordinate system.
7. Click on Calculate coordinate system in order to check if a correct calculation can be done. In doing so, the
coordinates of the elements in the input fields are changed to the values of the calculated coordinate
system.
With Reset the calculated coordinates in the input fields are reset to their original value.
8. With Save and Load intermediate results can be saved in a file or loaded from an existing file.
9. Click on OK.
The calculated coordinate system is activated and the Save current coordinate system dialog is automatically
opened.
10. Enter a coordinate system ID and click on OK.
Further information about saving can be found in the topic Save coordinate system.

If the dialog Save current coordinate system is terminated with ESC, the coordinate system will
not be saved, however, the previously created alignment remains activated.
20.8 Define coordinate system using Bestfit

The function Alignment calculates an optimized coordinate system by using a three dimensional Bestfit so that the
deviations between the actual and target or nominal geometry are minimized or zero.
In doing so, the actual geometry (measured elements) is compared to the target geometry and is moved
(translation) and rotated (rotation) until either the position or the probe points of the actual geometry have a
minimal distance to the target / nominal geometry.
The target geometry corresponds with the target values that are calculated out of nominal value and tolerance. This
means that the target value corresponds with the center of the tolerance. If no tolerances are given, the
corresponding nominal value is used.
Depending on the button PCS/PLCS, the alignment is either determined for a PCS or PLCS.
2. Click on the command button Align.

3. Select if the alignment is to be based on the CAD coordinate system or the active coordinate system.
All displays in the dialog refer to the coordinate system selected here.
If the alignment is based on the CAD coordinate system, the current coordinate system is
transformed into the CAD coordinate system before the Bestfit, just as with the function Transform
coordinate system into CAD model coordinate system.
This transformation is applied independent from the limitation of the degrees of freedom and
stays active if the dialog is terminated with OK.
4. Select if the alignment based on is to be executed based on the target values or the nominal values.
5. Select those elements in the list that are to be used for the alignment.
A double click on an element displays the target, nominal and actual values with the corresponding
tolerances and deviations.
The target coordinates / nominal coordinates with the nominal values as well as the displayed actual values
refer to the coordinate system previously selected under Alignment based on.
Only elements with nominal values can be used.
6. Define if the element position or its probe points are used for the alignment. If None is selected for a
marked elements, it will not be considered for the alignment.

7. In case of an alignment with (element) position, define for which element component the deviation is to be
minimized or set to zero.
By doing so either the spatial deviation d, it's individual components in x/y/z or the separation in A
(deflection) and B (trimming edge) can be used.
The axes correspond with the axes of the coordinate system selected under Alignment based on.
The following table shows the available alignments and parameters for the individual elements:
Position Probe points
x y z d A B
Point
Point
(Projection onto CAD)
Line
Plane
Circle
Cylinder
Sphere
Cone
Rectangle
Slot
Edge point*
Edge point*
(Projection onto CAD)
Curve
Surface
* edge points measured with calculation method Perpendicular are available for the alignment function
8. Click on Accept.
The settings from step 5 to 6 are adopted for the selected elements. The parameter are only adopted for
those elements that actually support them.
9. The 6 degrees of freedom (translation in X, Y and Z as well as rotation around X, Y and Z axis) can be
restricted. The axes correspond with the axes of the coordinate system selected under Alignment based
on.
These restrictions apply for the entire alignment.

10. The coordinate system that minimizes the deviations and displays the resulting translation and rotation for
the degrees of freedom is calculated by clicking on the button Calculate coordinate system.
The new coordinate system is not activated yet.
The resulting maximal deviation, with element ID and component, is displayed below Deviations as well as
the average deviation of the elements included in the Bestfit.
With edge points and points with projection onto CAD, the target / nominal values are not re-
calculated in the dialog. The deviation refers to the current target value.
When exiting the dialog with OK, the values are re-calculated by projection onto CAD in the new
coordinate system.
11. Click on OK.
The calculated coordinate system is activated.
If the option Alignment based on CAD coordinate system, the previous transformation into the CAD
coordinate system remains active.
Subsequently the Save current coordinate system dialog is opened.
20.9 Relocate coordinate system

This function relocates the coordinate system either relative or absolute.

2. Click on the command button Relocate.
3. Enter the X, Y and Z values (depending on the global length measurement settings in mm or inch) for the
relocation.
How to change the length measurement settings>>
4. Select if the relocation is executed relative (the current coordinate system is shifted by the specified amount in X, Y
and Z direction from the starting position) or absolute (the current coordinate system is shifted to the specified
position with the coordinates X, Y and Z whereby the next highest coordinate system is the reference) .
5. Activate, if needed, the check box Relocate CAD model with coordinate system.
If the check box is activated, not only the coordinate system but also the CAD model is relocated with the
entered value.
This is recommended if several identical work pieces are measured using a palette. As soon as the
alignment of one work piece is relocated onto the next work piece, the CAD model is also relocated onto the
next work piece. Thus the CAD model is always located on the work piece which is currently measured.
If the alignment is only relocated within a work piece (e.g. in order to measure a repeating hole
pattern via a loop), the check box cannot be activated as the CAD model must not be moved.
6. Click on OK.
20.10 Rotate coordinate system

This function rotates the current coordinate system around one of its axes.

2. Click on the command button Rotate.
3. Select the rotation axis.
4. Enter the rotation angle (in °dec) or the division or the corresponding axis values (depending on the
global length measurement settings in mm or inch).
5. Activate, if needed, the check box Rotate CAD model with coordinate system.
If the check box is activated, not only the coordinate system but also the CAD model is rotated with the
entered value.
This is recommended if several identical work pieces are measured using a palette. As soon as the
alignment of one work piece is rotated onto the next work piece, the CAD model is also rotated onto the
next work piece. Thus the CAD model is always located on the work piece which is currently measured.
If the alignment is rotated only once within a work piece (e.g. in order to measure the bore of a
pitch circle via a loop), the check box cannot be activated as the CAD model must not be rotated.
6. Click on OK.

20.11 Synchronize coordinate system and CAD model coordinate system

This function transforms the current coordinate system into the CAD coordinate system or one can use the current
coordinate system as CAD coordinate system.
Depending of the option PCS/PLCS, the PCS or PLCS is transformed.
2. Click on the command button CAD Model.
3. Select the required function
· Transform coordinate system into CAD model coordinate system

This option is used, for example, when a local work piece coordinate system is active but the evaluation
is to be executed in the CAD coordinate system.
· Use coordinate system as CAD model coordinate system
The CAD model is relocated/rotated to the position of the current coordinate system.
This option can only be used if the current coordinate system corresponds with the
CAD model coordinate system.
In the automotive industry the CAD model coordination system is equal to the vehicle
coordinate system. Therefore the option can be used without loaded CAD model if
the actual coordination system corresponds to the vehicle coordinate system.
4. Click on OK.
The selected function is executed.
The Save current coordinate system dialog is automatically opened.

20.12 Export difference of coordinate systems

This function compares the position of two work piece coordinate systems with each other. The result of this
comparison can be exported into a file.
2. Click on Export.
3. Click on Coordinate system.

4. Select the reference and work piece coordinate system.
5. The following values appear in the mentioned order (separated by a comma):
· Name of the work piece coordinate system

· Object description (W=work piece)
· Related object
· Unit (M: millimeter, I: inch)
· Work piece rotated (1=rotated)
· Position of work piece changer
· Offset in X direction
· Offset in Y direction
· Offset in Z direction
· Turning angle around X axis
· Turning angle around Y axis
· Turning angle around Z axis
· Carriage Return - Line Feed
Example:
WKSZY,W,,M,1,0,4.482877,21.906707,30.000000,0.000000,0.000000,15.000000
The format relates to the interface standard AGIESOFT ML 2.0 <AGIE-ASCII3>.
6. Adjust, if needed, storage position and file name.
database.

Three file extensions are available for the export, however, the output format is always the same no matter
which file extension is selected:
· Quartis Format (*.mes)

· Electrode (*.e)
· Work piece (*.w).
The filename can contain a placeholder (* (a star as placeholder will be replaced by the measurement number) or ?
(the question mark represents a placeholder for a single cipher. Thus for a measurement number in the range of 1 to
9999 four question marks (????) are required . Values under 1000 are complemented with leading zeros (e.g. 0001)) )
which will be replaced by the current measurement number.
7. Click on OK.

Features
21 Features
21.1 Information about the evaluation
With help of the evaluation functions, features can be evaluated for the measured work piece.
To do so, standard, form and position features are available.
21.2 Static and dynamic features

Features can be evaluated statically or dynamically.
Evaluate features statically
Actual values, nominal values and tolerances of the element are evaluated statically in the coordinate system which
is loaded during the feature evaluation.
If the coordinate system is changed, the actual values, nominal values and tolerances of the features are not
transformed.
The features always refer to the coordinate system, which was active during the evaluation of the corresponding
feature.
Evaluate features dynamically (applies for position deviation x,y,z and d,A,B)
Actual values, nominal values and tolerances of the element are evaluated dynamically in the coordinate system
which is loaded during the feature evaluation.
If the coordinate system is changed, the actual values and nominal values are transformed into the current
coordinate system.
Dynamic features are labeled as type Dynamic in the database.
The property Dynamic can be activated or deactivated in the database window using the function
Edit data.
If a feature is changed to the type Dynamic, the change does not have an effect on the displayed
actual values until a coordinate system change has been executed in the corresponding
measurement.
It is difficult to realize statistical evaluations in the work window Statistic or Report, as the user has
to ensure that each measurement is finished with the same coordinate system in order to be able
to truly compare the dynamic features of the individual measurements.
WM | Quartis ® R2018-2 Features 501

Features
Example
Static Dynamic
Load coordinate system 1
Measure CIR_1 with automatic features x, y and diameter
Actual Nominal UTol LTol Dev. Actual Nominal UTol LTol Dev.
CIR_1 CIR_1
x 0.009 0.000 0.100 -0.100 0.009 x 0.009 0.000 0.100 -0.100 0.009
y 0.007 0.000 0.100 -0.100 0.007 y 0.007 0.000 0.100 -0.100 0.007
ø 5.000 5.000 0.100 -0.100 0.000 ø 5.000 5.000 0.100 -0.100 0.000
Load coordinate system 2
Actual Nominal UTol LTol Dev. Actual Nominal UTol LTol Dev.
CIR_1 CIR_1
x 0.009 0.000 0.100 -0.100 0.009 x 14.009 14.000 0.100 -0.100 0.009
y 0.007 0.000 0.100 -0.100 0.007 y 13.607 13.600 0.100 -0.100 0.007
ø 5.000 5.000 0.100 -0.100 0.000 ø 5.000 5.000 0.100 -0.100 0.000
Actual and nominal values do not reference to the Actual and nominal values were transformed into the
current coordinate system 2. current coordinate system 2.

Features
21.3 Reference system according to ASME (Dialog)

The following table illustrates how the reference system according to ASME (American Society of Mechanical
Engineers) is converted in WM | Quartis (please refer to ASME Y14.5.1M-1994, Mathematical Definition of
Dimensioning and Tolerancing Principles).
The rules and abbreviations can be taken from the following table.
Symbol Description
A Primary reference
B Secondary reference
C Tertiary reference
PT Point
AX Axis
PL Plane
{LI …} Line through …
{LI … : …} Line through … so that … is given
Does not contain, (not coincidental)
Ì Contains
Ë Does not contain
// Parallel
^ Perpendicular
Ù Logic AND
v Logic OR (this one or that one or both)
Ø Logic NOT
x, y, z Position in a Cartesian coordinate system
u, v, w Rotation around the x, y, z – axis, respectively: yaw, pitch, roll

gz Relative angle with reference to the Z axis
r Sphere radius
rz Cylinder radius
— No entry

Features
Reduction of reference elements
The reference elements are reduced as follows:
Reference element Point (PT) Axis (AX) Plane (PL)
Point X
Line X
Plane X
Circle X
Cylinder X
Cone X
Sphere X
Rectangle X
Slot X
Edge point X
The individual cases
Sometimes in order to create the cases from 1.7 to 1.10, auxiliary elements must be constructed
so that the axis (Reference B) runs through the point (Reference A).
Sometimes in order to create the cases from 2.3 to 2.6, auxiliary elements must be constructed so
that the axis (Reference B) runs through the point (Reference A).

Features
Case Datum Free Invariants Figure

xfrms
A B C
1.1 PT — — u, v, w r
Reference A is on the origin of the reference system.
Limitation:
Not permissible.
Use the distance of the feature in place of the position

tolerance of the feature.

xfrms
A B C
1.2 PT PT — w r z, z, g z
A¹ B
The connection line A-B becomes the primary axis.
Limitation:
Permissible only for axis elements that run orthogonal to the

primary axis, and for point elements.
The evaluation takes place only in the primary direction.

xfrms
A B C
1.3 PT PT PT — all
(A ¹ B ) Ù (C Ë {LI A-B} )
The projection of the connection line A-C onto the ST plane

defines the secondary axis.

Features

xfrms
A B C
1.4 PT PT AX — all
(A ¹ B) Ù ( C ¹ { LI A-B})
The secondary axis runs parallel to the projection of the

reference line C onto the ST plane.
If the reference line C runs parallel to the primary axis, then

the connection line A at the intersection point of the reference
line C onto the ST plane becomes the secondary axis.

xfrms
A B C
1.5 PT PT PL — all
(A ¹ B) Ù Ø (C ^ {LI A-B})
The secondary axis runs parallel to the projection line from

the projection of the direction of the reference plane C onto
the ST plane.

Features

xfrms
A B C
1.6 PT AX — — all
AËB
The direction of the reference line B determines the direction

of the primary axis.
The connection line from A to the intersection point of the

reference line B and the ST plane becomes the secondary
axis.

xfrms
A B C
1.7 PT AX — w r z, z, g z
AÌB
The primary axis corresponds to the direction of B.
Limitation:

The evaluation takes place in the primary direction.

Features

xfrms
A B C
1.8 PT AX PT — all
((A Ì B) Ù (C Ë B )
The reference line B becomes the primary axis.


xfrms
A B C
1.9 PT AX AX — all
(A Ì B) Ù (B ¹ C)

the projection of reference line C onto the ST plane.

the connection line from A to the intersection point of
reference line C and the ST plane becomes the secondary
axis.

Features

xfrms
A B C
1.10 PT AX PL — all
(A Ì B) Ù Ø (B ^ C)
The projection line of the projection from the direction of

reference plane C onto the ST plane becomes the secondary
axis.

xfrms
A B C
1.11 PT PL — w r z, z, g z
The direction of the reference plane B determines the

direction of the primary axis.
Limitation:

The evaluation takes place in the primary direction

Features

xfrms
A B C
1.12 PT PL PT — all
C Ë { LI A: LI ^ B}



xfrms
A B C
1.13 PT PL AX — all
C ¹ { LI A: LI ^ B}

The secondary axis runs parallel to the projection line of the

projection of reference line C onto the ST plane.

the connection line from A to the intersection point of the
reference line C and the ST plane becomes the secondary
axis.

Features

xfrms
A B C
1.14 PT PL PL — all
Ø (C // B)

The projection line of the projection of the direction of

axis.

xfrms
A B C
2.1 AX — — z, w r z, g z
The reference element B becomes the primary axis.
Limitation:
Not permissible.

tolerance of the feature

xfrms
A B C
2.2 AX PT — — all
BËA
The reference axis becomes the primary axis.
The secondary axis runs through the Reference Point B.

Features

xfrms
A B C

xfrms
A B C
2.3 AX PT — w r z, z, g z
BÌA
The reference element A becomes the primary axis.
Reference B becomes the origin of the reference system.
Limitation:
Permissible only for axis elements that run orthogonal to

the primary axis, and for point elements.

xfrms
A B C
2.4 AX PT PT — all
(B Ì A) Ù (C Ë A)
The projection of the connection line B-C onto the ST plane


Features

xfrms
A B C
2.5 AX PT AX — all
B Ì A Ù (A ¹ C)
The secondary axis runs parallel to the projection line of the

projection of reference line C onto the ST plane.

the connection line B at the intersection of reference line C on
the ST plane becomes the secondary axis.

xfrms
A B C
2.6 AX PT PL — all
(B Ì A) Ù Ø (A ^ C)

the reference plane C onto the ST plane becomes the
secondary axis.

Features

xfrms
A B C
2.7 AX AX — — all
(A ¹ B) Ù Ø (A // B)
The secondary axis and the origin of the reference system

can be constructed from reference B as illustrated.

xfrms
A B C
2.8 AX AX — z x, y, u,v, w
(A ¹ B) Ù (A // B)
The secondary axis is derived from the projection of the

intersection point of axis B and the ST plane onto the
primary axis.
Limitation:
Permissible only for axis elements that run parallel to the

The evaluation takes place in the secondary and tertiary

directions only.

Features

xfrms
A B C
2.9 AX AX PT — all
(A ¹ B) Ù (A // B)

intersection point of axis B and the ST plane onto the
primary axis.
Reference C defines the origin of the reference system in

the primary direction.

xfrms
A B C
2.10 AX AX AX — all
(A ¹ B) Ù (A // B) Ù Ø (A // C)

can be constructed from reference B and C, as shown.

Features

xfrms
A B C
2.11 AX AX PL — all
(A ¹ B) Ù (A // B) Ù Ø (A // C)


xfrms
A B C
2.12 AX PL — — all
Ø ((A // B) v (A ^ B))
The reference axis A becomes the primary axis.

can be constructed from reference B, as illustrated.

xfrms
A B C
2.13 AX PL — z x, y, u, v,
w
A // B (including A Ì B)

Features

xfrms
A B C
The secondary axis corresponds to the direction of

reference plane B.
Limitation:


directions.

xfrms
A B C
2.14 AX PL — w r z, z, g z
A^B
The intersection point of the reference line A with the

reference plane B becomes the origin of the reference
system.
Limitation:


Features

xfrms
A B C
2.15 AX PL PT — all
A // B
The secondary axis corresponds to the direction of the

reference plane B. Reference C defines the origin of the
reference system in relation to the primary axis.

xfrms
A B C
(A ^ B) Ù (C Ë A)
The intersection between the reference line A and the

system.
The projection of the connection line from the origin to the

reference C onto the ST plane defines the secondary axis.

Features

xfrms
A B C
2.17 AX PL AX — all
(A // B) Ù Ø (A // C)

reference plane B.

relation to the primary axis.
The origin of the reference system can be constructed from

reference C as represented.

xfrms
A B C
(A ^ B) Ù (A ¹ C)
The intersection of reference line A with reference plane B

becomes the origin of the reference system.


the connection line from A to the intersection point of C
with the ST plane becomes the secondary axis.

Features

xfrms
A B C
2.19 AX PL PL — all
(A // B) Ù Ø (A // C)

reference plane B.

The origin of the reference system can be derived from


xfrms
A B C
(A ^ B) Ù Ø (A ^ C)
The intersection of the reference line A with the reference

plane B becomes the origin of the reference system.
The secondary axis runs parallel to the projection line of

the projection from the direction of reference plane C onto
the ST plane.

Features

xfrms
A B C
3.1 PL — — x, y, w z, g z
The direction of the primary axis and the ST plane can be

determined from the reference element A.
Limitation:


xfrms
A B C
3.2 PL PT — w r z, z, g z
The primary axis runs through reference B.
Limitation:


xfrms
A B C
3.3 PL PT PT — all
C Ë {LI B: LI ^ A}

The primary axis runs through Reference B.


Features

xfrms
A B C

xfrms
A B C
3.4 PL PT AX — all
C ¹ {LI B: LI ^ A}


the projection of the reference line C onto the ST plane.

the connection line between the origin and the intersection
point of the reference line C and the ST plane becomes the
secondary axis.

xfrms
A B C
3.5 PL PT PL — all
Ø (A // C)


the projection of the direction of the reference plane C
onto the ST plane.

Features

xfrms
A B C
3.6 PL AX — — all
Ø ((A // B) v (A ^ B))

The intersection point between the ST plane and the

reference line B becomes the origin of the reference
system.
The secondary axis corresponds to the projection of the

reference line B onto the ST plane.

xfrms
A B C
3.7 PL AX — w r z, z, g z
A^B


system.
Limitation:

The evaluation takes place only in the primary directly.

xfrms
A B C
3.8 PL AX — x y, z, u, v,
w
A // B

Features

xfrms
A B C

The secondary axis corresponds to the projection line of

the reference line B onto the ST plane.
Limitation:

secondary axis and for point elements.
The evaluation takes place in the primary and tertiary

direction.

xfrms
A B C
3.9 PL AX PT — all
(A ^ B) Ù (C Ë B)


system.


Features

xfrms
A B C
A // B


The origin of the reference system corresponds to the

projection of the reference point C onto the secondary
axis.

xfrms
A B C
3.11 PL AX AX — all
(A ^ B) Ù (B ¹ C)

The intersection point of the reference line B with the ST

plane becomes the origin of the reference system.


the connection line of the origin with the intersection point
of the reference line C and the ST plane becomes the
secondary axis.

Features

xfrms
A B C
(A // B) Ù Ø (B // C)


The intersection point of the projection of the reference

line C onto the ST plane with the secondary axis becomes
the origin of the reference system.

xfrms
A B C
3.13 PL AX PL — all
(A ^ B) Ù Ø (B ^ C)

The intersection point of the reference line B and the ST


the projection from the direction of the reference plane C
onto the ST plane.

Features

xfrms
A B C
3.14 PL AX pl — all
(A // B) Ù Ø (B // C)


the projection of reference line B onto the ST plane.
The intersection point of the intersection line of the

reference plane C and the ST plane with the secondary axis

xfrms
A B C
3.15 PL PL — x y, z, u, v,
w
Ø (A // B)

The secondary axis corresponds to the intersection line of

the reference planes A and B.
Limitation:

The evaluation takes place only in the primary and tertiary

direction.

Features

xfrms
A B C
3.16 PL PL PT — all
Ø (A // B)



projection of reference point C on the secondary axis.

xfrms
A B C
3.17 PL PL AX — all
Ø (A // B) Ù Ø (C // {LI (A Ç B)})


The intersection point of the projection of reference line C

onto the ST plane with the secondary axis becomes the
origin of the reference system.

Features

xfrms
A B C
3.18 PL PL PL — all
Ø (A // B) Ù Ø (C // {LI (A Ç B)})

determined from Reference A.

The intersection point of the reference plane C and the

secondary axis becomes the origin of the reference system.
21.4 Reference system according to ASME (Ribbon)
The following table illustrates how the reference system according to ASME (American Society of Mechanical
Engineers) is converted in WM | Quartis (please refer to ASME Y14.5.1M-1994, Mathematical Definition of
Dimensioning and Tolerancing Principles).
The rules and abbreviations can be taken from the following table.
Symbol Description
A Primary reference
PT Point
AX Axis
PL Plane
{LI …} Line through …
{LI … : …} Line through … so that … is given
Does not contain, (not coincidental)

Ì Contains
Ë Does not contain
// Parallel

Features
^ Perpendicular
Ù Logic AND
v Logic OR (this one or that one or both)

Ø Logic NOT
Ç Intersection
x, y, z Position in a Cartesian coordinate system
u, v, w Rotation around the x, y, z – axis, respectively: yaw, pitch, roll

gz Relative angle with reference to the Z axis
r Sphere radius
rz Cylinder radius
— No entry

Features
Reduction of reference elements
The reference elements are reduced as follows:
Reference element Point (PT) Axis (AX) Plane (PL)
Point X
Line X
Plane X
Circle X
Cylinder X
Cone X
Sphere X
Rectangle X
Slot X
Edge point X
The individual cases
Sometimes in order to create the cases from 1.7 to 1.10, auxiliary elements must be constructed
so that the axis (Reference B) runs through the point (Reference A).
Sometimes in order to create the cases from 2.3 to 2.6, auxiliary elements must be constructed so
that the axis (Reference B) runs through the point (Reference A).

Features

xfrms
A B C
1.1 PT — — u, v, w r
Not supported
Limitation:
Not permissible.

tolerance of the feature.

xfrms
A B C
1.2 PT PT — w r z, z, g z
A¹ B
Not supported
The A-B connection becomes the primary axis.
Limitation:


xfrms
A B C
1.3 PT PT PT — all
(A ¹ B ) Ù (C Ë {LI A-B} )
The projection of A-C onto the ST plane becomes the

secondary axis.

Features

xfrms
A B C

xfrms
A B C
1.4 PT PT AX — all
(A ¹ B) Ù ( C ¹ { LI A-B})
The secondary axis runs parallel to the projection of the


the connection line A at the intersection point of the
reference line C on the ST plane becomes the secondary
axis.

xfrms
A B C
1.5 PT PT PL — all
(A ¹ B) Ù Ø (C ^ {LI A-B})

the projection of the direction of the reference plane C onto
the ST plane.

Features

xfrms
A B C
1.6 PT AX — — all
AËB
The direction of the reference line B determines the direction

of the primary axis.
The connection line A with the intersection of the reference

line B on the ST plane becomes the secondary axis.

xfrms
A B C
1.7 PT AX — w r z, z, g z
AÌB
Not supported
The primary axis corresponds to the direction of B.
Limitation:

The evaluation takes place in the primary direction.

Features

xfrms
A B C
1.8 PT AX PT — all
((A Ì B) Ù (C Ë B )


xfrms
A B C
1.9 PT AX AX — all
(A Ì B) Ù (B ¹ C)


the connection line A at the intersection of reference line C
on the ST plane becomes the secondary axis.

Features

xfrms
A B C
1.10 PT AX PL — all
(A Ì B) Ù Ø (B ^ C)

axis.

xfrms
A B C
1.11 PT PL — w r z, z, g z
Not supported

Limitation:

The evaluation takes place in the primary direction

Features

xfrms
A B C
1.12 PT PL PT — all
C Ë { LI A: LI ^ B}



xfrms
A B C
1.13 PT PL AX — all
C ¹ { LI A: LI ^ B}

The secondary axis runs parallel to the projection lines of

the projection of reference lines C onto the ST plane.

the connection line A to the intersection of the reference line
C with the ST plane becomes the secondary axis.

Features

xfrms
A B C
1.14 PT PL PL — all
Ø (C // B)

The projection line of the projection of the direction of

axis.

xfrms
A B C
2.1 AX — — z, w r z, g z
Not supported
The reference element B becomes the primary axis.
Limitation:
Not permissible.

tolerance of the feature

Features

xfrms
A B C
2.2 AX PT — — all
BËA
Not supported
The reference axis becomes the primary axis.
The secondary axis runs through the Reference Point B.

xfrms
A B C
2.3 AX PT — w r z, z, g z
BÌA
Not supported
Limitation:


Features

xfrms
A B C
2.4 AX PT PT — all
(B Ì A) Ù (C Ë A)
The projection of the connection line B-C onto the ST plane


xfrms
A B C
2.5 AX PT AX — all
B Ì A Ù (A ¹ C)
The secondary axis runs parallel to the projection lines from


the connection line B at the intersection of reference line C
on the ST plane becomes the secondary axis.

Features

xfrms
A B C
2.6 AX PT PL — all
(B Ì A) Ù Ø (A ^ C)

the reference plane C onto the ST plane becomes the
secondary axis.

xfrms
A B C
2.7 AX AX — — all
(A ¹ B) Ù Ø (A // B)

can be constructed from Reference B as illustrated.

xfrms
A B C
2.8 AX AX — z x, y, u,v, w
(A ¹ B) Ù (A // B)

Features

xfrms
A B C
Not supported

intersection point of axis B with the ST plane on the primary
axis.
Limitation:


directions only.

xfrms
A B C
2.9 AX AX PT — all
(A ¹ B) Ù (A // B)

intersection point of Axis B with the ST plane on the primary
axis.

the primary direction.

Features

xfrms
A B C
2.10 AX AX AX — all
(A ¹ B) Ù (A // B) Ù Ø (A // C)


xfrms
A B C
2.11 AX AX PL — all
(A ¹ B) Ù (A // B) Ù Ø (A // C)


Features

xfrms
A B C
2.12 AX PL — — all
Ø ((A // B) v (A ^ B))

can be constructed from reference B, as illustrated.

xfrms
A B C
2.13 AX PL — z x, y, u, v,
w
A // B (including A Ì B)
Not supported
The secondary axis corresponds to the direction of

reference plane B.
Limitation:


directions.

Features

xfrms
A B C
2.14 AX PL — w r z, z, g z
A^B
Not supported

Limitation:


xfrms
A B C
A // B

reference plane B. Reference C defines the origin of the
reference system in relation to the primary axis.

Features

xfrms
A B C
(A ^ B) Ù (C Ë A)
The intersection between the reference line A and the

system.
The projection of the origin C onto the ST plane gives the

secondary axis.

xfrms
A B C
(A // B) Ù Ø (A // C)

reference plane B.

The origin of the reference system can be constructed from


Features

xfrms
A B C
(A ^ B) Ù (A ¹ C)
The intersection of reference line A with reference plane B

The secondary axis runs parallel to the projection lines

from the projection of reference line C onto the ST plane.

the connection line A between intersection point C with the
ST plane becomes the secondary axis.

xfrms
A B C
(A // B) Ù Ø (A // C)

reference plane B.

The origin of the reference system can be derived from


Features

xfrms
A B C
(A ^ B) Ù Ø (A ^ C)


the projection from the direction of reference plane C onto
the ST plane.

xfrms
A B C
3.1 PL — — x, y, w z, g z
Not supported

Limitation:


Features

xfrms
A B C
3.2 PL PT — w r z, z, g z
Not supported

Limitation:


xfrms
A B C
3.3 PL PT PT — all
C Ë {LI B: LI ^ A}



Features

xfrms
A B C
3.4 PL PT AX — all
C ¹ {LI B: LI ^ A}


the projection of the reference lines C onto the ST plane.

the connection between the origin and the intersection
point of the reference line C with the ST plane becomes the
secondary axis.

xfrms
A B C
3.5 PL PT PL — all
Ø (A // C)


the projection of the direction of the reference plane C
onto the ST plane.

Features

xfrms
A B C
3.6 PL AX — — all
Ø ((A // B) v (A ^ B))


system.


xfrms
A B C
3.7 PL AX — w r z, z, g z
A^B
Not supported


system.
Limitation:

The evaluation takes place only in the primary directly.

xfrms
A B C
3.8 PL AX — x y, z, u, v,
w
A // B

Features

xfrms
A B C
Not supported


the reference line B onto the ST plane.
Limitation:

The evaluation takes place in the primary and tertiary

direction.

xfrms
A B C
(A ^ B) Ù (C Ë B)


system.


Features

xfrms
A B C
A // B



projection of the reference point C on the secondary axis.

xfrms
A B C
(A ^ B) Ù (B ¹ C)




the connection of the origin with the intersection point of
the reference line C on the ST plane becomes the
secondary axis.

Features

xfrms
A B C
(A // B) Ù Ø (B // C)


The projection of the intersection point of the reference

line C in the ST plane with the secondary axis becomes the

xfrms
A B C
3.13 PL AX PL — all
(A ^ B) Ù Ø (B ^ C)



the projection from the direction of the reference planes C
onto the ST plane.

Features

xfrms
A B C
3.14 PL AX pl — all
(A // B) Ù Ø (B // C)

The secondary axis corresponds to the projection lines of

the projection of reference lines B onto the ST plane.
The intersection of the intersection line of the reference

plane C in the ST plane with the secondary axis becomes
the origin of the reference system.

xfrms
A B C
3.15 PL PL — x y, z, u, v,
w
Ø (A // B)
Not supported


Limitation:

The evaluation takes place only in the primary and tertiary

direction.

Features

xfrms
A B C
3.16 PL PL PT — all
Ø (A // B)



projection of reference point C on the secondary axis.

xfrms
A B C
3.17 PL PL AX — all
Ø (A // B) Ù Ø (C // {LI (A Ç B)})


The intersection point of the projection of reference line C

onto the ST plane with the secondary axis becomes the

Features

xfrms
A B C
3.18 PL PL PL — all
Ø (A // B) Ù Ø (C // {LI (A Ç B)})

determined from Reference A.

The intersection point between reference plane C and the

secondary axis becomes the origin of the reference system.

Features
21.5 Reference system according to ISO GPS

This chapter describes how the reference system is realized in WM | Quartis according the standards ISO 1101 and
ISO 5459.
The following table contains the symbols used for the description of applicable reference elements and supported
reference systems and their tolerances:
Symbol Description
A Primary reference
PL Situation feature (Plane)
SL Situation feature (Straight Line)
^ Perpendicular to
// Parallel to
SØ Tolerance zone: spherical
Ø Tolerance zone: cylindrical
without symbol Tolerance zone: parallel planes (without symbol applies always to this tolerance zone)
a Distance to reference A
b Distance to reference B
c Distance to reference C
g Angle to reference C
— No entry
Applicable reference elements
You can use the following measured regression elements as reference elements:
Reference element Situation feature
Plane (PL) Straight line (SL)
Plane X
Cylinder X
Line X

Features
Reference element Situation feature
Plane (PL) Straight line (SL)
Cone X
All listed reference elements can be reduced to the actual situation feature and applied accordingly. The reduction
takes place after the recalculation in order to match the additional conditions. That means the resulting situation
features already match the additional condition.
Theoretical reference elements are corrected only according their direction. If theoretical elements
are used as reference, their actual position can influence decisively the resulting reference system.
Additional conditions of the references
The additional condition defines the relationship between two references which must be fulfilled, e. g.
perpendicularity.
The primary reference is never influenced by an additional condition.
The secondary reference is influenced by the additional condition in direction to the primary reference and must
match.
The tertiary reference is influenced by the additional condition in direction to the primary and secondary reference,
which both must be fulfilled.
When combining the necessary reference elements their nominal values will be examined in advance for compliance
of the additional conditions. As soon as an additional condition is not fulfilled a message will be displayed and the
evaluation with this reference system is not possible.
If at least one reference has no nominal value, the actual values of all selected references will be examined.
The measured regression elements fulfill the additional conditions rarely. Therefore the elements for the secondary
and tertiary reference are recalculated with the defined direction according the standard to create the necessary
reference system.
The recalculation of the reference elements has been improved as a part of the modernization
and updated to the current state of standards. Direct comparison with the dialog based position
tolerance is not possible, because these improvements are not anymore integrated into the
dialog based position tolerance. Comparison with the ASME standard is also not possible,
because ASME creates the reference system according other rules.
If you use a theoretical element as reference you must ensure that the position of the element is considered as a
single probe point. A correction to match the additional conditions is only performed for the direction and can

Features
cause a greater shift of the reference system.
Supported reference systems and their tolerance zones
The evaluation can proceed as soon as one of the supported reference systems is selected and the required
additional conditions are fulfilled. The situation features in the following table may be replaced by the
corresponding reference elements.
Reference system PL PL PL (three planes)
Reference
A B C
Situation feature
[PL] [PL] [PL]
Additional condition
— ^ A ^ A
— — ^ B
Comment The position of the tolerance zone is completely fixed.

Features
Tolerance zone Orientation TED
SØ — a
— b
— c
Ø ^ A —
— b
— c
^ A —
// B b
— —
^ A —
— b
^ C —

Features
^ A —
— —
// C c
^ A —
^ B —
— c
Reference system PL PL (two planes)
Reference
A B —
Situation feature
[PL] [PL] —
— ^ A —
— — —
Comment The tolerance zone may be shifted freely along the two references.

Features
Reference system PL PL (two planes)
^ A —
— b
— —
Reference system PL (one plane)
Reference
A — —
Situation feature [PL] — —
Additional condition — — —
— — —
Comment The tolerance zone may be shifted freely along the reference.
Reference system PL (on plane)
// A a
— —

Features
Reference system PL (on plane)
— —
Reference system PL SL (plane with rotation axis)
Reference
A B —
Situation feature
[PL] [SL] —
— ^ A —
— — —
Comment The tolerance zone may be rotated freely around the second reference.

Features
SØ — a
— b
— —
Ø ^ A —
— b
— —
^ A —
// B b=0
— —

Features
^ A —
// B b
— —
Reference system PL SL PL (plane with rotation axis and direction of the plane)
Reference
A B C
Situation feature
[PL] [SL] [PL]
Additional condition — ^A ^A
— — // B
Comment The position of the tolerance zone is completely fixed.

Features
Reference system PL SL PL ((plane with rotation axis and direction of the plane)
SØ — a
— b
— g
Ø ^ A —
— b
— g
^ A —
^ B b=0
— g

Features
Reference system PL SL PL ((plane with rotation axis and direction of the plane)
^ A —
^ B b
— g
Reference system SL (Rotation axis)
Reference A — —
Situation feature [SL] — —
Additional condition — — —
— — —
muss A sein!!!
Comment The tolerance zone may rotate freely around the reference.
Ø // A A=0
— —
— —

Features
Ø // A A
— —
— —
// A A=0
— —
— —
// A A
— —
— —

Features
Reference system SL PL (Rotation axis and plane)
Reference
A B —
Situation feature
[SL] [PL] —
Additional condition — —
^ A
— — —
Comment The tolerance zone may rotate freely around the first reference.
SØ — a
— b
— —
Ø ^ A a=0
— b
— —

Features
Ø ^ A a
— b
— —
^ A —
^ A b
— —
21.6 Coordinate planes and coordinate axes

Coordinate planes and coordinate axes are available at every time and represent the current coordination system.
In principle the selection of the coordinate planes and coordinate axes can build each supported reference system
at the coordinate origin.
For each plane and each axis of the coordinate system a corresponding coordinate plane respectively a coordinate
axis is available. The center of gravity for these references is situated in the coordinate origin.

Features
If you combine coordinate planes and coordinate axes with measured reference elements you must note the
following: Coordinate planes and coordinate axes are shifted with the coordinate system (the origin and direction at
the time of evaluation are valid), while measured references do not follow this shift.
Coordinate planes and coordinate axes are handled as theoretical elements, if they must be corrected to match the
additional conditions. So they also adapt the behavior of theoretical elements (see also reference systems).
21.7 Edit defaults

21.7.1 Edit default fix tolerances
The fixed tolerances in the table below are suggested for each feature independently from its nominal value if fixed
tolerances are used for the default tolerance settings.
1. Click on the ribbon tab Features.
2. Click on the command button Settings in the group Default Settings.
3. Change to the tab Fixed tolerance defaults.
4. Adjust the tolerances.
5. Click on OK.

Features

Features
The following table shows which tolerances are used for which feature:
Length Zero limited Spatial Deflection Trimming Trimming Angle

measurements features deviation d A edge B edge B measurements
(unilateral)
--- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- ---
---
---
--- ---
--- ---
---
---
--- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- ---

Features
21.7.2 Edit general ISO and DIN tolerances

Adjust ISO 2768 tolerances
For ISO 2768 tolerances a selection can be made between the tolerance class fine, medium, rough and very rough.
They apply for machined and reshaped surfaces.
3. Change to the tab General ISO or DIN tolerances.
4. Change to the tab ISO 2768.
5. Select the tolerance class to be used.
With position and form tolerances, the option Fine and Medium correspond with the tolerance
class H according to ISO 2768-2, the option Rough corresponds with the tolerance class K and
the option Very rough corresponds with the tolerance class L.

Features
6. Click on OK.
For which features the tolerances are specified and which size of the element is used for the nominal
size range, can be seen here.
Adjust DIN 1688 tolerances

For DIN 1688 tolerances a selection can be made between the casting techniques sand casting, permanent mold
casting and die casting.
4. Change to the tab DIN 1688.
5. Select the casting technique.
6. Enter the largest external dimension. Select if tolerances are applied for length dimensions (button
pressed) or for thickness dimensions.

Features
7. Select the machining allowance( A choice can be made between no machining allowance, machining
allowance and restricted machining allowance.) .
8. Select the degree of accuracy.
9. Select the tolerance group.
10. If the tolerances for tool-linked dimensions are to be used, activate the button (button pressed). If the
button is not activated, the tolerances for non tool-linked dimensions are used.
11. Click on OK.

For DIN 16742 tolerances a selection can be made between the tolerance groups 1 to 9. They apply to synthetic
preforms. The DIN 16742 requirements concerning position tolerance are not supported.

Features
7. Click on OK.

For DIN 16901 tolerances a selection can be made between the tolerance groups FWT, 110, 120, 130, 140, 150 and
160. They apply to synthetic preforms.

Features
7. Click on OK.
21.7.3 Load company specific tolerances
This function loads company specific tolerance tables which are suggested when features are created.
3. Change to the tab Company specific tolerances.

Features
4. Load the tolerance file(The tolerance tables must be available in the form of ASCII files with the ending *.TOL on
the fixed disk or on an accessible network path. These files can be generated and/or processed by the user with a
standard text editor.) .
An example file with the name TOLERANCE.TOL is supplied and is located in the directory "TEMPLATEs".
The syntax of these files must be as follows:
3.0, 0.10, -0.10,

6.0, 0.10, -0.10,
30.0, 0.20, -0.15,
First value: Upper nominal value

Second value: Upper tolerance
Third value: Lower tolerance
5. Check if the tolerances are correct.
6. Click on OK.
In contrast to the fixed tolerance defaults, company specific tolerances are not changed when the
global measurement unit settings (mm <-> inch) are changed.
21.7.4 Overview of default tolerances in WM | Quartis
The following tables shows for which features the ISO 2768, DIN 16742 and DIN 16901 apply and for which features
the company specific tolerances applies.
It also shows which size of the element is used for nominal size range.
Form
Rec- Edge
Norm Point Line Plane Circle Cylinder Cone Sphere Slot
tangle point
Longer
ISO 2768 --- Length Diameter Diameter Length Diameter --- --- ---
side
DIN From From From From From From

--- --- --- ---
16742 ISO 2768 ISO 2768 ISO 2768 ISO 2768 ISO 2768 ISO 2768

Features
DIN From From From From From From

--- --- --- ---
16901 ISO 2768 ISO 2768 ISO 2768 ISO 2768 ISO 2768 ISO 2768
Compan
Longer
y specific --- Length Diameter Diameter Length Diameter --- --- ---
side
tolerance
Size
Rec- Edge
tangle point
From
Length Length
ISO 2768 --- --- --- Diameter Diameter fixed Diameter ---
Width Width
values
From
DIN Length Length
--- --- --- Diameter Diameter fixed Diameter ---
16742 Width Width
values
From
DIN Length Length
--- --- --- Diameter Diameter fixed Diameter ---
16901 Width Width
values
Compan From
Length Length
y specific --- --- --- Diameter Diameter fixed Diameter ---
Width Width
tolerance values

Features
Half Size
Rec- Edge
tangle point
From
ISO 2768 --- --- --- Radius Radius fixed Radius --- --- ---
values
From
DIN
--- --- --- Radius Radius fixed Radius --- --- ---
16742
values
From
DIN
--- --- --- Radius Radius fixed Radius --- --- ---
16901
values
Compan From
y specific --- --- --- Radius Radius fixed Radius --- --- ---
tolerance values
Position
Rec- Edge
tangle point
ISO 2768 Position --- --- Position --- Position Position Position Position Position
DIN
Position --- --- Position --- Position Position Position Position Position
16742
DIN
Position --- --- Position --- Position Position Position Position Position
16901
Compan
y specific Position --- --- Position --- Position Position Position Position Position
tolerance
Distance
Rec- Edge
tangle point
ISO 2768 Distance Distance Distance Distance Distance Distance Distance Distance Distance Distance
DIN
Distance Distance Distance Distance Distance Distance Distance Distance Distance Distance
16742
DIN
Distance Distance Distance Distance Distance Distance Distance Distance Distance Distance
16901
Compan
y specific Distance Distance Distance Distance Distance Distance Distance Distance Distance Distance
tolerance

Features
Angle 2D
The tolerance defaults are applied from the fix tolerance defaults. Any specifications from ISO 2768, DIN 16742, DIN
16901 or
the company specific tolerances are not supported.
Rec- Edge
tangle point
From From From From From From From

ISO 2768 --- fixed fixed fixed fixed fixed --- fixed fixed ---
values values values values values values values

DIN
--- fixed fixed fixed fixed fixed --- fixed fixed ---
16742

DIN
16901
Compan From From From From From From From

y specific --- fixed fixed fixed fixed fixed --- fixed fixed ---
tolerance values values values values values values values
Angle
16901 or
Rec- Edge
tangle point

ISO 2768 --- fixed fixed fixed fixed fixed --- fixed fixed ---

DIN
16742

DIN
16901
Compan From From From From From From From

y specific --- fixed fixed fixed fixed fixed --- fixed fixed ---
tolerance values values values values values values values

Features
Turning Point
Rec- Edge
tangle point
ISO 2768 --- Position Position Position Position Position Position Position Position ---
DIN
--- Position Position Position Position Position Position Position Position ---
16742
DIN
--- Position Position Position Position Position Position Position Position ---
16901
Compan
y specific --- Position Position Position Position Position Position Position Position ---
tolerance
Position dAB
16901 or
Rec- Edge
tangle point
A,B: ---
From From From From From
d: From
ISO 2768 fixed --- --- fixed --- --- fixed fixed fixed
fixed
values values values values values
values
A,B: ---
DIN d: From
fixed --- --- fixed --- --- fixed fixed fixed
16742 fixed
values
A,B: ---
DIN d: From
fixed --- --- fixed --- --- fixed fixed fixed
16901 fixed
values
A,B: ---
Compan From From From From From
d: From
y specific fixed --- --- fixed --- --- fixed fixed fixed
fixed
tolerance values values values values values
values

Features
Input
Rec- Edge
tangle point
Nominal Nominal Nominal Nominal Nominal Nominal Nominal Nominal Nominal Nominal
ISO 2768
value value value value value value value value value value
DIN Nominal Nominal Nominal Nominal Nominal Nominal Nominal Nominal Nominal Nominal
16742 value value value value value value value value value value
DIN Nominal Nominal Nominal Nominal Nominal Nominal Nominal Nominal Nominal Nominal
16901 value value value value value value value value value value
Compan
Nominal Nominal Nominal Nominal Nominal Nominal Nominal Nominal Nominal Nominal
y specific
value value value value value value value value value value
tolerance
Straightness
Rec- Edge
tangle point
ISO 2768 --- Length --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
DIN From
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
16742 ISO 2768
DIN From
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
16901 ISO 2768
Compan
y specific --- Length --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
tolerance
Flatness
Rec- Edge
tangle point
Longer
ISO 2768 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
side
DIN From
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
16742 ISO 2768
DIN From
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
16901 ISO 2768
Compan
Longer
y specific --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
side
tolerance

Features
Roundness
Rec- Edge
tangle point
ISO 2768 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
DIN
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
16742
DIN
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
16901
Compan
y specific --- --- --- Diameter --- --- --- --- --- ---
tolerance
Cylindricity
Rec- Edge
tangle point
ISO 2768 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
DIN
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
16742
DIN
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
16901
Compan
y specific --- --- --- --- Diameter --- --- --- --- ---
tolerance
Line profile
ISO 2768, DIN 16742, DIN 16901: Company specific tolerances not supported; the tolerance suggestions are taken
over from the fix tolerance defaults
The line profile can only be used for curves and is not available for other features.

Features
Position
Rec- Edge
tangle point
ISO 2768 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
DIN
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
16742
DIN
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
16901
Compan Smallest Smallest Smallest

Effective Effective Effective Effective Effective Effective Effective
y specific size size size
length length length length length length length
tolerance tolerance tolerance tolerance
Concentricity / Coaxiality
There is no general tolerance in the ISO 2768 norm for the Concentricity / Coaxiality; the same values are suggested
as for the run-out evaluation.
Rec- Edge
tangle point
ISO 2768 --- Fix --- Fix Fix Fix --- --- --- ---
DIN From From From From

--- --- --- --- --- ---
16742 ISO 2768 ISO 2768 ISO 2768 ISO 2768

--- --- --- --- --- ---
16901 ISO 2768 ISO 2768 ISO 2768 ISO 2768
Compan
Effective Effective Effective
y specific --- --- Diameter --- --- --- ---
length length length
tolerance
Symmetry
Rec- Edge
tangle point
Effective Effective Effective Effective

ISO 2768 --- --- --- --- --- ---
length length length length

--- --- --- --- ---
16742 ISO 2768 ISO 2768 ISO 2768 ISO 2768

--- --- --- --- ---
16901 ISO 2768 ISO 2768 ISO 2768 ISO 2768
Compan
Effective Effective Effective Effective
y specific --- --- --- --- ---
length length length length
tolerance

Features
Angularity
There is no general tolerance for the angularity: thus
· the same values are suggested for ISO 2768 as with the evaluation of the perpendicularity
· the corresponding values for the size deviation of the element are suggested for DIN 16742 and DIN 16901.
Rec- Edge
tangle point

ISO 2768 --- --- ---
DIN Effective Effective Effective Effective Effective Effective Effective

--- --- ---
16742 length length length length length length length

--- --- ---
Compan
y specific --- --- ---
tolerance
Parallelism
There is no general tolerance in ISO 2768, DIN 16742 and DIN 16901 for the parallelism: Thus
· the same values as for the evaluation of the flatness / straightness are suggested for ISO 2768
· the corresponding values for the size deviation of the element are suggested for DIN 16742 and DIN 16901..
Rec- Edge
tangle point

ISO 2768 --- --- ---

--- --- ---

--- --- ---
Compan
tolerance

Features
Perpendicularity
Rec- Edge
tangle point

ISO 2768 --- --- ---
DIN From From From From From From From

--- --- ---
16742 ISO 2768 ISO 2768 ISO 2768 ISO 2768 ISO 2768 ISO 2768 ISO 2768
DIN From From From From From From From

--- --- ---
16901 ISO 2768 ISO 2768 ISO 2768 ISO 2768 ISO 2768 ISO 2768 ISO 2768
Compan
tolerance
Run-out
Rec- Edge
tangle point
ISO 2768 --- --- Fix Fix --- --- --- --- --- ---
DIN From From

--- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
16742 ISO 2768 ISO 2768
DIN From From

--- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
16901 ISO 2768 ISO 2768
Compan
Longer
y specific --- --- Diameter --- --- --- --- --- ---
side
tolerance
Total run-out
There is no default tolerance in the ISO 2768 norm for the total run-out the same values are suggested as for the
run-out evaluation..
Rec- Edge
tangle point
ISO 2768 --- --- Fix --- Fix --- --- --- --- ---
DIN From From

--- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
16742 ISO 2768 ISO 2768
DIN From From

--- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
16901 ISO 2768 ISO 2768
Compan
Longer
y specific --- --- --- Diameter --- --- --- --- ---
side
tolerance

Features
From fixed values
The default tolerance for this feature is applied from the table Fixed tolerance defaults.
From ISO 2768
The default tolerance for this feature is applied in such a way as if IS0 2768 is set, Thereby the set tolerance class of
ISO 2768 applies.
Fix
The default tolerance for this feature is applied fix from the norm, independent of size or effective length
Effective length
The tolerances are set depending of the effective length when opening the dialog.
If the effective length is changed within the dialog, the default values are not automatically
updated.
---
The feature cannot be evaluated with this element or the automatic tolerance specification is not supported
Smallest size tolerance
The smallest general tolerance (sizes/angle) is suggested.

Features
21.7.5 Select default tolerances
This function allows you to select the default tolerances to be applied for the evaluation.
2. Select the default tolerances.
21.7.6 Select Cartesian/polar output for evaluation

Position features can either be calculated polar (the polar representation describes a feature as distance to the origin of the
current work piece coordinate system (Feature: Position) or as an absolute spatial distance between two elements (Feature:
Distance), thereby the direction is determined with the aid of the associated angle of rotation (ax) and inclination angle (bxy)) or
Cartesian (position and distance are calculated with X, Y and Z values).
2. Select the desired output (Polar/Cartesian).

Features
21.7.7 Select evaluation (ISO GPS or ASME Y14.5)
You can evaluate form and position feature according the standard ISO GPS or ASME Y14.5
Actually the selection of the standard influences only the position tolerance (ribbon).
2. Select the desired standard.

Features
21.8 Evaluate standard features

21.8.1 Evaluate form deviation of an element
This function calculates the form deviation of an element.
2. Click on the command button Form.
3 Adjust the settings if needed.
4. Enter an ID for the feature or accept the next suggested free ID.
If an already existing feature is to be overwritten, select the corresponding element using the drop down
5. Select the element to be evaluated. Using the element selection tool you can also click the
element in the graphics.
The feature ID and the ID of the element to be evaluated can also be defined using an expression.
This is especially helpful in case you want to define the IDs within program loops variable.
The expression editor is opened by double clicking on the input field.
6. Adjust the tolerance value if necessary.
7. Click on Evaluate.

Features
21.8.2 Evaluate size of an element
This function evaluates the size of an element.
The following table indicates which size can be determined for which element:
Element Size
Circle Diameter
Sphere Diameter
Cylinder Diameter
Cone Opening angle
Rectangle Width b / Length l
Slot Width b / Length l / Length 2 li
2. Click on the command button Size.
3. Adjust the settings if needed.

Features
6. Select, if needed, the component to be evaluated (only required for the evaluation of rectangles and
slots).
7. Select, if needed, a calculation method (possible only for the evaluation of circles and cylinders).
8. Adjust the nominal value and the tolerances if necessary.
9. The upper and lower tolerances can be defined according to the ISO286 tolerance system (all tolerance
fields for bore holes and shafts are integrated. The system automatically differentiates between shaft and bore hole.
The tolerance (e.g. H7) or the nominal value and the tolerance (e.g. 10H7) can be entered in field ISO286. Under
certain conditions the system cannot distinguish between shaft and bore. In this case, the system is instructed to
accept the tolerance as entered with a * (e.g. * 40 * H7 or H7)) if needed.
21.8.3 Evaluate half size of an element
This function evaluates the half size of an element.
Element Size
Circle Radius
Sphere Radius
Cylinder Radius
Cone Half opening angle

Features
2. Click on the command button Half Size.

Features
21.8.4 Evaluate position of an element
This function evaluates the position of an element.
The position can be evaluated either in polar or Cartesian coordinates. For that purpose, the corresponding
selection has to be made in the drop down list in the default settings.
5. If the option Dynamic is activated, the position features (x, y and z) are created dynamically. Else the
features are created statically.

Features
7. Select in which coordinates the position is to be evaluated.
The position of planes, cylinders and lines can only be reasonably evaluated with axially parallel
planes, cylinders and lines in one or with the cylinder in two axes.

Features
21.8.5 Evaluate distance between elements
This function evaluates the distance between two elements.
2. Click on the command button Distance.
3. Adjust the default settings if needed
5. Select the elements whose distance to each other is to be determined.
Using the element selection tool you can also click the elements in the graphics.
The selected elements are displayed in the graphics in the color for construction elements. Only the
component to be evaluated is colored, e.g. the axis for a cone.
With Cartesian calculation, the corresponding distances are displayed in the axis colors (X, Y, Z).
With polar calculation, the absolute spatial vector distance (r) as well as the rotation (ax) and tilt angle
(bxy) are displayed.
The feature ID and the IDs of the elements can also be defined using an expression. This is
especially helpful in case one wants to define the IDs within program loops variable.
6. Select how the selected elements are to be considered.

Features
For example, a cone can either be considered as a point or a line. If the cone is considered a point, the
evaluation of the distance is determined using the top of the cone. But if the cone is considered a line,
the evaluation of the distance is determined using the cone axis.
More information can be found in the help topic Element consideration for the distance evaluation.
8. The upper and lower tolerances can be defined according to the ISO286 tolerance system if needed.
All tolerance fields for bores and shafts are integrated, whereby the system automatically differentiates
between bore and shaft. The tolerance (e.g. H7) or the nominal value and the tolerance (e.g. 10H7) can
be entered into the field ISO286.
Under certain conditions, you cannot differentiate between bore and shaft. In this case, the system can
be instructed to accept the tolerance as entered by using a * in the tolerance (e.g. *H7 or 40*H7).
Contemplation for the distance evaluation of elements

The following table shows how elements can be reduced for the distance evaluation:
Reference element Point * Line Plane
Point X X
Line X X
Plane X X
Circle X
Cylinder X X
(Cylinder axis)
Cone X X
(Cone axis)
Sphere X
Rectangle X
Slot X
Edge point X
* If an element is reduced to a point, it is reduced to the element position (x, y, z).

Features
Contemplation Contemplation second element (RE)

first element
(LE)
Point Line Plane
Point
Line
not allowed
Plane
not allowed not allowed
a = Distance
Example for Line-Line reduction
In order to evaluate the distance a between the two red lines, the lines cannot be reduced. This means they have to
be looked at as splines. Thus the shortest distance between the lines is output.
Example for Point-Line reduction

Features
In order to evaluate the distance between the two red lines, one of the lines has to be reduced to a point (center of
gravity). This determines the position from where the distance is to be output.
If the reduction to a point is not be executed, the distance would be output from the position where the distance
between the two lines is the shortest. This would often output a result of 0 mm, as lines never are exactly parallel but
intersect down the range.
21.8.6 Evaluate projection angle between elements
This function evaluates the projection angle (plane or 2D angle) between two elements.
2. Click on the command button Angle 2D.
5. Select the elements between which the projection angle is to be evaluated. Using the element selection
tool one can also click the elements in the graphics.
The selected elements are displayed in the graphics in the color for construction elements. Only the
component to be evaluated is colored, e.g. the axis for a cone.
This is especially helpful in case one wants to define the IDs within program loops variable.

Features
6. Select the coordinate system to be used for the angle evaluation.
The corresponding angle legs and angle arches are displayed in the axis colors of the coordinate
system (XY, YZ, ZX).
In case that adjacent angle of the displayed angle are to be evaluated, activate the command button
Evaluate adjacent angle.
The projection angle is calculated from the reference element into the rotational direction of the
coordinate system to the other element. The calculated angle corresponds with the smallest
possible enclosed projection angle.
If the command button Evaluate adjacent angle is deactivated, the element in the bottom
selection field is considered as the reference element. If this command button is active, the
element in the top selection field is used as reference element.
21.8.7 Evaluate 3D angle between elements
This function evaluates the angle between two elements.
The intermediate angle can only be calculated for direction elements (plane, cylinder, cone, line,
circle, rectangle and slot). The calculated angle corresponds to the smallest possible included
solid angle.
Special angles can be calculated using the expression editor.

Features
2. Click on the command button Angle.
5. Select the elements between which the angle is to be evaluated. Using the element selection tool
one can also click the elements in the graphics.
This is especially helpful in case one wants to define the IDs within program loops variable.
21.8.8 Evaluate turning point of an element
This function evaluates the turning points of an element in an axis of the current coordinate system.
The calculated distances always refer to the origin of the current coordinate system.
Furthermore it is possible to calculate the range between the minimal and maximum point in the corresponding axis
of the current coordinate system.

Features
2. Click on the command button Turning Point.
6. Select in which direction of the current coordinate system the distances are to be output.
7. Select the features to be output.
min The minimum distance in the selected direction is output.
max The maximum distance in the selected direction is output.
d The range in the selected direction is output (max. distance - min. distance)

Features
21.8.9 Evaluate position deviation dAB of an element
This function evaluates the spatial deviation d, the deflection A and the trimming edge B.
The following features can be output:
Element Size
Point Spatial deviation d, Deflection A, Trimming edge B
Edge point Spatial deviation d, Deflection A, Trimming edge B
Circle Spatial deviation d, Deflection A, Trimming edge B
Rectangle Spatial deviation d, Deflection A, Trimming edge B
Slot Spatial deviation d, Deflection A, Trimming edge B
Sphere Spatial deviation d
The spatial deviation d is the position deviation in space. This deviation is always positive. At the edge point, d is the
deviation from the actual point to the edge.
The deflection A is the position deviation to the reference plane. Depending on which side of the reference plane the
actual value is located, A is positive or negative.
The trimming edge B is the position deviation in the reference plane. This deviation is always positive. Exception is
the edge point for which the trimming edge B is the position deviation from the actual value to the edge plane*.
Depending on which side of the edge plane the edge point is located, B is positive or negative.
* edge plane: plane on which the edge point is probed.
Example circle
1=Nominal circle, 2=Actual circle, 3=Reference plane

Features
2. Click on the command button Position dAB.
5. If the option Dynamic is activated, the position features (d, A and B) are created dynamically. Else the
features are created statically.
7. Select the features to be output.
8. Adjust the tolerances if necessary.
21.8.10 Enter user specific feature
This function allows the manual integration of features in the inspection report, which have been defined with third
party programs or shop measuring tools.

Features
The actual and nominal value can be calculated using element or feature data from other elements. Detailed
information is available in the topic Calculate user defined feature.
The feature ID can also be defined as an expression.
5. Enter the feature type, this can, for example, also be an additional description
6. Enter actual value, nominal value and tolerances.
In order to calculate the actual and nominal value out of data from different elements or features, you
can enter expressions into the actual value and nominal value field. A double click into these fields opens
the expression editor.

Features
Detailed information is available in the topic Calculate user defined feature.
If this command is recorded in a program, a dialog is displayed during the execution of the
program and the actual value can be entered manually.

Features
Calculate user specific feature

It is also possible to calculate user defined features with the function Enter user specific feature.
The expression can be entered directly into the actual or nominal value field. However, it is recommended to enter
the expression using the expression editor.
A double click on the actual or nominal value field opens the expression editor.
Should you want to enter the expression nevertheless directly into the actual or nominal value field, the input has to
start with an equals sign (=). This defines that the input is in fact an expression.
By using the expression editor, you can
· Output element and feature values

· Offset element and feature values against each other
· Use functions
· Insert formulas copied from the application examples.
The result of the expression must be of type floating point number. Otherwise, the dialog cannot
be confirmed.

Features
21.9 Calculation method — Features

The calculation method for elements to be evaluated can be selected in the group Calculate.
The elements circle and cylinder can be evaluated with different calculation methods. The selection is independent of
the calculation method with which the circle or cylinder has been measured.
Selection of the calculation method is not available for theoretical or constructed elements.
Calculation method
Element
Two-point size
Chebyshev
Maximum inscribed
Envelope requirement
In the report the used calculation method is represented by the appropriate prefix (Ø, LP, GG, GC,
GN, GX or E).
21.9.1 Element
The calculation method Element is available for the following elements:
· Circle
· Cylinder
With this calculation method the evaluation is carried out with the method used for the measurement.

Features
21.9.2 Two-point size
The calculation method Two-point size is available for the following elements:
· Circle
· Cylinder
As result this calculation method delivers two actual values and two deviations. The two actual values are the
maximum rank-order size and the minimum rank-order size as required as default by standard ISO 14405-1.
Example: Cylinder
Basis is a cylinder calculated with the calculation method Gauss.
The sizes of the circles on the different probe depth are evaluated.
—— maximum rank-order size
—— minimum rank-order size
The maximum and minimum actual value are evaluated per circle. Then the maximum and minimum actual value are
evaluated for all circles as result. These two sizes are refered to as maximum and minimum rank-order size.
To calculate the diameter as two-point size and as envelope requirement, the cylinders must be
measured with the automatic distribution method Circle. Ideally, an even number of points per
circle is defined.

Features
In principle, the evaluation is also possible with only a few points (at least four points per circle).
For a significant evaluation an appropriate number of points per circle is necessary.
With a suitable distribution of points you can evaluate also as two-point size cylinders , which
have been measured with other distribution methods like Manual, Axial lines and Helix.
However, we do not recommend this method. An unfavorable distribution of points may lead to
inaccurate results.
21.9.3 Envelope requirement
The calculation method Envelope requirement is available for the following elements:
· Circle
· Cylinder
This calculation method delivers as result two actual values and two deviations. The two actual values are a
combination between two-point size (maximum rank-order size) and maximum inscribed calculation for an inside
element or between minimum circumscribed calculation and two-point size (minimum rank-order size) for outside
elements.
The selection of the right combination takes place automatically.
21.10 Evaluate form features

21.10.1 Evaluate straightness tolerance
The straightness defines the form deviation of a line.
The tolerance value defines a tolerance zone in which the actual form of the line must lie.
Independent from the calculation method that is used for the measurement or construction of the
line, the straightness evaluation is based on Chebyshev.
Due to the re-calculation of the element according to Chebyshev, it is important that the correct
coordinate system is selected for the evaluation.

Features
2. Click on the command button Straightness.
3. Adjust the default settings if needed.
5. Select the line to be evaluated. Using the element selection tool you can also click the line in the
graphics.
6. Activate - if needed - the evaluation cross the entire length of the line and enter the corresponding
tolerance value.
7. Activate - if needed - the evaluation with limited evaluation range and enter the corresponding tolerance
value and the length of the evaluation range (The entered tolerance applies for any partial area of the line with
the straightness with limited evaluation range. Thereby an evaluation window with the length of the entered
evaluation range is moved across the line. Two neighboring evaluation windows overlap each to 80 %. For each
evaluation window a Chebyshev line is calculated out of the probe points lying within the evaluation window. The
largest form deviation of all evaluation windows is output as deviation) .
8. Select the size compensation to be applied to the tolerated feature.
Leave the field empty if the feature is to be calculated without material condition (RFS).
Select for the calculation with maximum material condition (MMC) and for the calculation with
minimum material condition (LMC).
The size compensation applies to the entire length of the line.
9. Select the feature for the size compensation (this feature must have been generated in advance. It must not
necessarily have been generated using the same element to which the minimum or maximum material principle is
to be applied. The selection list displays only the applicable feature types. The following features can be used for the

Features
size compensation: Straightness, Flatness, Roundness, Cylindricity, Form Deviation, Diameter, Radius and Distance)
if you selected the option or .
21.10.2 Evaluate flatness tolerance
The flatness defines the form deviation of a plane.
The tolerance value defines a tolerance zone between two parallel planes in which the actual form of the plane must
lie.
Independent from the calculation method that is used for the measurement or construction of the
plane, the flatness evaluation is based on Chebyshev.
2. Click on the command button Flatness.
5. Select the plane to be evaluated. Using the element selection tool you can also click the line in
the graphics.

Features
6. Activate the evaluation across the entire plane if needed and enter the corresponding tolerance value.
7. Activate the limited evaluation range if needed and enter the corresponding tolerance value as well as
the side length of the square evaluation range (the entered tolerance applies for any partial area of the plane
for the flatness with limited evaluation range. Thereby a quadratic evaluation window with the side length of the
entered evaluation range is moved across the plane. Neighboring evaluation window overlap each other 80 %. For
each evaluation window is a Chebyshev plane is calculated level including the probe points contained therein. The
largest form deviation of all evaluation windows is displayed as a deviation) .
21.10.3 Evaluate roundness tolerance
The roundness defines the form deviation for a circle or a sphere.
The tolerance value defines a tolerance zone with 2 concentric circles or spheres in which the actual form of the
circle or the sphere must lie.
The roundness evaluation is calculated using Chebyshev, regardless of the calculation method that was used to
measure or construct the element.
Due to the re-calculation of the element according to Chebyshev, it is important that the correct
coordinate system is selected for the evaluation.

Features
2. Click on the command button Roundness.
5. Select the element (circle or sphere) to be evaluated. Using the element selection tool you can
also click the element in the graphics.
6. Activate the evaluation across the entire element if needed and enter the corresponding tolerance value.
7. Activate the evaluation with limited evaluation range and enter the corresponding tolerance value as well
as an angle for the sector size for the evaluation range (the entered tolerance applies to any sector of the
entered size when evaluating the roundness with limited evaluation range. Thereby an evaluation window (circle
sector with the entered angle) rotates around the entire circumference. Two subsequent evaluation windows
overlap each other with 80 %. For each evaluation window a Chebyshev circle is calculated for the probe points
included and therewith the form deviation determined. The largest form deviation of all evaluation windows is
output as deviation.) .
21.10.4 Evaluate cylindricity tolerance

The cylindricity defines the form deviation for a cylinder.
The tolerance value defines a tolerance zone between two concentric cylinders in which the actual form of the
tolerated cylinder must lie.
The cylindricity evaluation is calculated using Chebyshev, regardless of the calculation method that was used to
measure or construct the element

Features
2. Click on the command button Cylindricity.
5. Select the circle to be evaluated. Using the element selection tool you can also click the element
in the graphics.
21.10.5 Evaluate profile tolerance of any line
The line profile limits the deviations of any created line.

Features
2. Click on the command button Line profile.
5. Select the curve to be evaluated. Using the element selection tool you can also click the line in
the graphics.
6. Adjust the tolerance if needed.
7. Select the tolerance zone.
8. Select if the line profile is to be evaluated with or without reference.
Without reference (Bestfit)

Features
The target line and therefore the tolerance zone is fitted into the probe points using a Bestfit.
Therefore only the form of the curve is evaluated
ABC in relation to a reference system
The position of the target line and therefore also the position of the tolerance zone is
determined by a complete reference system. Thus not only the form, but also the position of
the curve is evaluated.
The reference system has to be defined in the tab Datum Reference Frame.
XYZ In active coordinate system
The position of the target line and therefore also the position of the tolerance zone is
determined by the active coordinate system. Thus not only the form but also the position of
the curve is evaluated.
Definition of Datum reference Frame:
These steps are only necessary if the line profile is to be evaluated with a reference system. In all other
cases proceed to step 11.
9. Switch to the tab Datum Reference Frame.
10. Define the datum reference frame. The reference system is calculated out of the reference elements
according to ASME. Only cases that define a reference system without any degrees of freedom are
accepted.
The ID of the feature and the ID of the element to be evaluated can be taken over from the
expression editor by double clicking on the input field.
21.10.6 Evaluate profile tolerance of any surface
The surface profile limits the deviations of any created profile.

Features
2. Click on the command button Surface profile.
5. Select the curve to be evaluated. Using the element selection tool you can also click the surface
in the graphics.
6. Adjust the tolerance value if needed.
8. Select if the surface profile is to be evaluated with or without reference.
Without reference (Bestfit)
The target surface and therefore the tolerance zone is fitted into the probe points using a
Bestfit. Therefore only the form of the surface is evaluated
ABC in relation to a reference system

Features
The position of the target surface and therefore also the position of the tolerance zone are
determined by a complete reference system. Thus not only the form but also the position of
the surface is evaluated.
The reference system has to be selected in the tab Datum Reference Frame.
XYZ In active coordinate system
The position of the target surface and therefore also the position of the tolerance zone is
determined by the active coordinate system. Thus not only the form but also the position of
the surface is evaluated.
Definition of Datum Reference Frame:
These steps are only necessary if the line profile is to be evaluated with a reference system. In all other
cases proceed to step 11.
9. Switch to the tab Datum Reference Frame.
10. Define the datum reference frame. The reference system is calculated out of the reference elements
according to ASME. Only cases that define a reference system without any degrees of freedom are
accepted.
21.10.7 Select tolerance zone
The different tolerance zones are explained using the feature line profile.
The same applies for the surface profile under consideration if the third dimension.
Equally disposed tolerance zone
If the evaluation is to be executed using an equally disposed tolerance zone, the tolerance selection field remains
empty.

Features
1=Target, 2=Actual, 3=Tolerance, 4=Deviation
The largest deviation in relation to the target curve is doubled and output as deviation.
The tolerance describes the distance of the tolerance limits (0.1 mm) and not the
distance to the target line (±0.05 mm).
In order to compare the deviation with the tolerance, the largest deviation of the
actual curve from the target curve is doubled and output as deviation.
In the image a tolerance of 0.1 mm is defined as an example. With a largest

deviation from the actual to the target curve of 0.04mm, the output deviation is 0.08
mm. The tolerance usage is 80%. If the tolerance is completely used (100 %), the
deviation is 0.1 mm. This means the largest deviation from the actual to the target
curve is 0.05 mm.

Features
Unequally disposed tolerance zone (according to

ISO)
If the evaluation is to be executed using an unequally disposed tolerance zone according to ISO1101:2013, the
symbol UZ is to be selected in the tolerance selection field.
In this case, an additional field is available for the displacement (this is the value used to displace the target curve, and
therefore the tolerance band, in relation to the nominal curve) . ISO1101:2013 defines the displacement in regard to the
center of the tolerance.
1=Target, 2=Actual, 3=Nominal, 4=Tolerance, 5=Displacement according to ISO1101:2013, 6=Deviation
The largest deviation in relation to the target curve is doubled and output as deviation.
Unequally disposed tolerance zone (according to

ASME)
If the evaluation is to be executed using a bilateral, unequally disposed tolerance zone according to ASME Y14.5-
2009, the symbol is to be selected in the tolerance selection field.
In this case, an additional field is available for the displacement (this is the value used to displace the target curve, and
therefore the tolerance band, in relation to the nominal curve) . ASME Y14.5-2009 defines the displacement in regard to
the upper of the tolerance limit.
1=Target, 2=Actual, 3=Nominal, 4=Tolerance, 5=Displacement according to ASME Y14.5-2009, 6=Deviation
The largest deviation to the target curve is doubled and output as deviation.

Features
Unilateral, inwards limited tolerance zone
The largest deviation in relation to the target curve in direction inside of the material is output as
deviation. Deviations with direction outside of the material are ignored.
Unilateral, outwards limited tolerance zone
The largest deviation in relation to the target curve in direction outside of the material is output as
deviation. Deviations with direction inside of the material are ignored

Features
21.11 Evaluate position features

21.11.1 Evaluate position tolerance (Dialog)
The position tolerance defines the position of an element in the left element window. The position of the element is
calculated in the work piece coordinate system or is referred to a reference element or to a reference system. The
tolerance value defines the expansion of a tolerance zone.
The type and form of the tolerance zone can be defined in different ways. The position tolerance can be also
calculated applying the minimum or the maximum material principle (size compensation).
The minimum/ maximum material principle can be applied to the element to be tolerated and/or the reference
elements.
The position tolerance can be calculated in a Cartesian or polar manner.
For the different element types the following tabs are available for the position tolerance:
Element type Size
Plane Parameters, References, Effective length
Point, Sphere, Edge Parameters, References, Tolerance zone

point
Circle, Cylinder, Parameters, References, Effective length, Tolerance

Cone, Rectangle, zone
Slot

Features
Using the button, nominal values and tolerances of an already create d feature can be taken
over.
4. Select the evaluation direction to be considered to the calculation for the deviation.
5. Adjust the TED (theoretical exact dimension) if necessary.
6. Adjust the nominal tolerance if necessary.
to be applied. The selection list displays only the applicable feature types. The following features can be used for the
size compensation: Straightness, Flatness, Roundness, Cylindricity, Form Deviation, Diameter, Radius and Distance)
if required.
8. Select which size compensation is to be applied to the tolerated feature.
RFS (Calculate without minimum/ maximum material condition), MMC (Calculate with maximum material
condition) and LMC (Calculate with minimum material condition) are available.
Before MMC or LMC options can be selected, the feature to which the minimum or maximum
material principle is to be applied must have been selected in the input field Feature for size
compensation.

Features
9. Change to the tab References.
10. Select the reference:
The position is calculated referred to the origin of the work piece coordinate system.
The position is calculated referred to the origin of the reference system for the reference
elements.
The reference system is calculated using the reference elements according to ASME.
11. Select the reference element (if the position is not calculated referred to the origin of the current work piece
coordinate system). By clicking the button, the element direction is reversed.
12. Select which size compensation is to be applied to the tolerated feature.
RFS (Calculate without minimum/ maximum material condition), MMC (Calculate with maximum material condition)
and LMC (Calculate with minimum material condition) are available.
Before MMC or LMC options can be selected, the feature to which the minimum or maximum
material principle is to be applied must have been selected in the input field Feature for size
compensation.

Features
13. Change to the tab Tolerance zone.
14. Select either a circular or a square tolerance zone.
If a square tolerance zone is selected, the effective tolerance (thereby a line is drawn between the
tolerance center and the actual value and then intersected with the tolerance square. The distance between
the tolerance center and the intersection point equals the effective tolerance) is calculated.
15. Change to the tab Effective length.
16. Enter the effective length or select limitation planes.
The effective lengths define the dimensions (length, width, height) of the tolerance zones in
which the feature is calculated.
Limit planes can be used to restrict or extend (project) the tolerance zone. They can be
selected in the input fields. The plane direction can be reveres by clicking on the buttons.

Features
17. Click on OK.
21.11.2 Evaluate position tolerance (Ribbon)
The position tolerance defines the position of an element. The position of the element is calculated in the work piece
coordinate system or is referred to a reference system. The tolerance value defines the expansion of the tolerance
zone.
The type and form of the tolerance zone can be defined in different ways. The position tolerance can be calculated
applying the minimum or the maximum material condition (size compensation).
The minimum/ maximum material condition can be applied to the element to be tolerated.
The switch between Cartesian and Polar does not influence the position tolerance.
5.
Select the element to be evaluated. Using the element selection tool you can also click the

Features
Tolerated element Tolerance zone
Point, Sphere, Circle, Edge point, Slot, spherical

Rectangle
cylindrical
parallel planes
Line, Cylinder, Cone cylindrical
parallel planes
Plane parallel planes
8. Select a specification element if necessary to select the calculation method. Without a specification
element the element to be tolerated will be evaluated with form.
The following specification elements are available to select the calculation method:
with form
without specification element
For Line, Plane, Circle, Sphere, Cylinder, Cone
Chebyshev
For Line, Plane, Circle, Sphere, Cylinder, Cone
For Circle, Sphere, Cylinder
Maximum inscribed

Features
For Circle, Sphere, Cylinder
Tangential outside
For Line, Plane
9. Select if necessary the specification element of the material condition for the element to be tolerated.
Without a specification element the element to be tolerated will be evaluated without material
condition.
The following specifications are available:
without material condition (RFS)
Maximum material condition (MMC)
Minimum material condition (LMC)
For the calculation with material condition you must select the corresponding feature for the size
compensation.
For the selection of the specification element an order is not specified. The symbols are arranged
automatically corresponding the standard ISO 1101.
10. Select up to three references to create the necessary reference system.
The button Evaluation becomes active when a supported reference system is selected and all
necessary inputs are done.
The selected reference elements are displayed in the color for construction preview in the graphic. The tolerated
element is colored in the graphic according to the selected colors and warning limits of the report settings.
Besides measured elements also predefined coordinate planes and coordinate axes are available. You can use
these references for all supported reference systems.

Features
Coordinate planes and coordinate axes refer to the coordinate system which was valid at the time
of evaluation.
The group Orientation is displayed only, if different orientations are possible for the tolerance zones.
11. Select the orientation (parallel or perpendicular).
12. Select the orientation element.
The selected elements of the secondary and tertiary reference are available.
There is a maximum of three fields in the group Actual value, which are assigned to the three
references.
The first line is attributed to the primary reference, the second line the secondary reference and
the third line the tertiary reference.
Displayed are only those fields, which permit a valid value respectively a TED.
An actual value shows the distance to the corresponding reference. The distance facing the
material side of the reference has a positive value, the distance opposite the material side has a
negative value.
13. Adjust the TED (theoretical exact dimension) if necessary.
The effective lengths define the dimensions (length, width, height) of the tolerance zones in
which the feature is calculated.
The symbol shows the direction of the effective length corresponding to the reference.
The effective length is not available for all reference systems.

Features
Depending on the tolerated element (e. g. straight line) and selected tolerance zone (parallel
plane) you can enter values for two effective lengths. Depending on the direction of the element
both effective lengths do not necessarily influence the result.
Limit planes can be used to restrict or extend (project) the tolerance zone. They can be
selected in the input fields.
Depending on the tolerated element (e. g. straight line) and selected tolerance zone (parallel
plane) you can enter more than two limitation planes. But only the two relevant reference planes
are considered, depending on the direction of the element.
The group Offset is only visible, when the effective length is defined using the value. The group Offset is not
available for a definition using limitation planes.
15. .Change the value of the offset if needed.
If you change the value, the center of gravity will move and consequently the field of the effective length. The
value of the offset facing the material side of the reference has a positive value, the value of the offset
opposite the material side has a negative value.
21.11.3 Evaluate concentricity and coaxiality tolerance
The concentricity tolerance defines the position limitation of a center to the reference point. The tolerance value
describes a circular tolerance zone within the center of the element to be tolerated has to lie.
The coaxiality tolerance defines the position limitation of an axis to a reference axis. The tolerance value describes
a cylindrical tolerance zone along the reference axis within the axis of the element to be tolerated has to lie.
The form deviation of the axis as well as the form deviation of the reference element is not
included for calculating the coaxiality.
Depending on what kind of element (axis/point) is loaded for the evaluation and what kind of element is used as
reference, either the coaxiality or the concentricity can be evaluated.

Features
Tolerated element In reference to
Line, Cylinder, Cone Line, Circle, Cylinder, Cone: Evaluation of the coaxiality
Point, Circle, Sphere, Edge point Line, Circle, Cylinder, Cone: Evaluation of the concentricity
Plane, Rectangle, Slot Evaluation not possible
Evaluation of a concentricity tolerance
2. Click on the command button Coaxiality.
7. Select the reference element.
The selected reference element is displayed as axis in the color for construction elements within the
graphics. The tolerated element is colored in the graphics according to the selected colors and warning
limits in the report settings.

Features
The diameter of the tolerance zone as well as the position of the tolerated element is displayed
using a magnification. The displayed position of the tolerated element in the preview is relative to
the tolerance zone and depends on the value of the defined tolerance.
especially helpful in case you want to define the IDs within program loops variable.
Evaluation of a coaxiality tolerance
2. Click on the command button Coaxiality.
5. Select the element to be evaluated. Using the element selection tool one can also click the

Features
7. Select which feature for the size compensation is to be applied to the tolerated feature.
Calculate without minimum/ maximum material condition (RFS)
Calculate with maximum material condition (MMC)
Calculate with minimum material condition (LMC)
to be applied) if required.
9. Select the reference element
The selected reference element is displayed in the color for construction elements within the graphics.
The tolerated element is colored in the graphics according to the selected colors and warning limits in
the report settings.
The length of the tolerance zone in the graphics displays the true effective length, while the
diameter of the tolerance zone as well as the position of the tolerated elements is displayed using
a magnification. This magnification depends on the effective length.
The displayed position of the tolerated element in the preview is relative to the tolerance zone
and depends on the default tolerance.
especially helpful in case one wants to define the IDs within program loops variable.
10. Select the feature for the size compensation for the reference element if required.
to be applied) for the reference element if required.

Features
The effective length defines the dimensions (length, width, height) of the tolerance zone on
which the feature has been calculated.
Limitation planes can be used to restrict or extend (project) the tolerance zone. They can
be selected in the input fields.
The center of gravity of a measured element depends on the point distribution and therefore
cannot be precisely defined. For this reason it is better to define the effective length with to
limitation planes!
21.11.4 Evaluate symmetry tolerance
The symmetry tolerance defines the position limitation of a point, a line, axis or plane to a reference mid plane or
reference axis.
The tolerance value defines a tolerance zone between 2 parallel planes or axes in which the point, line, axis or plane
must lie.
The tolerance zone lies parallel to the reference mid plane or the reference axis.
The form deviation of the axis as well as the form deviation of the reference element is not
included for calculating the symmetry.
2. Click on the command button Symmetry.

Features
8. Enter the effective length (the effective length defines the length of the tolerance zone on which the feature is
calculated) .
21.11.5 Evaluate angularity tolerance
The angularity tolerance defines the position limitation of a line, axis or plane to a reference line, axis or plane.
The tolerance value defines a tolerance zone within which the line, axis or plane must lie.
The tolerance zone lies at a defined angle (nominal value) to the reference element.
The form deviation of a tolerated plane is considered for calculating the angularity tolerance only
when in the group Element the option is selected.

Features
The form deviation of lines or axis as well as the form deviation of the tolerated element is not
considered for calculating the angularity tolerance.
2. Click on the command button Angularity.
6. Activate the button .
The angularity tolerance of a plane is calculated on the basis of the individual measuring points.
An auxiliary element at the specified angle from the reference element passing through the center of
gravity of the toleranced element is used for calculating the deviation. The range of the individual
measurement points to this auxiliary element is taken as deviation.
7. Adjust the angles if necessary.

Features
10 Select the feature for the size compensation (this feature must have been generated in advance. It must not
The length of the tolerance zone in the graphics displays the true effective length, while the width
of the tolerance zone as well as the position of the tolerated elements is displayed using a
magnification. This magnification depends on the effective length.
12. Select which feature for the size compensation is to be applied to the reference element.
necessarily have been generated using the same element to which the minimum or maximum material principle is to be
applied) if required.
The effective length defines the dimensions (length, width, height) of the tolerance zone on which
the feature has been calculated.
Limitation planes can be used to restrict or extend (project) the tolerance zone. They can be

Features
15. Click on OK.
21.11.6 Evaluate parallelism tolerance
The parallelism tolerance defines the position limitation of a line, axis or plane with respect to a reference line, axis
or plane.
The tolerance value defines a tolerance zone within which the line, axis or plane must lie.
The tolerance zone lies parallel to the reference element.
The form deviation of a tolerated plane is considered for calculating the parallelism only when in
the group Element the option is selected.
The form deviation of lines or axis as well as the form deviation of the reference element is not
considered for calculating the parallelism.
2. Click on the command button Parallelism.
5.
Select the element to be evaluated. Using the element selection tool you can also click the
The parallelism of a plane is calculated on the basis of the individual measuring points.

Features
This option is only available when the element to be toleranced as well as the reference element consist
out of axes or lines
diameter / the width of the tolerance zone as well as the position of the tolerated elements is
displayed using a magnification. This magnification depends on the effective length.

Features
Parallelism between two planes is calculated on the basis of the individual measured points.
15. Click on OK.
21.11.7 Evaluate perpendicularity tolerance
The perpendicularity tolerance defines the position limitation of a line, axis or plane to a reference line, axis or
plane.
The tolerance value defines a tolerance zone in which the line, axis or plane must lie.
The tolerance zone lies at right angle to the reference element.
The form deviation of a tolerated plane is considered for calculating the perpendicularity only
when in the group Element the option is selected.
The form deviation of lines or axes as well as the form deviation of the reference element are not
included for the perpendicularity calculation.

Features
2. Click on the command button Perpendicularity.
The perpendicularity of a plane is calculated on the basis of the individual measuring points.

Features
diameter / the width of the tolerance zone as well as the position of the tolerated elements is
displayed using a magnification. This magnification depends on the effective length.
14. Click on OK.
21.11.8 Evaluate circular and planar run-out tolerance
The circular run-out tolerance defines the position limitation of a circle to a reference axis (cylinder). It limits the
roundness deviation and the coaxiality deviation. The tolerance value describes the tolerance zone between two
concentric circles perpendicular to the reference axis.
The planar run-out tolerance defines the position limitation of a plane to a reference axis (cylinder). It limits the
flatness deviation and the perpendicularity deviation. The tolerance zone is defined through two parallel planes that
lie at a certain distance (tolerance value) perpendicular to the reference axis.

Features
2. Click on Run-out.

Features
21.11.9 Evaluate total circular and planar run-out tolerance
Total circular run-out tolerance defines the position limitation of a cylinder to a reference axis (cylinder). It limits
the roundness, coaxiality, straightness and parallelism deviations. The tolerance value describes the tolerance zone
between two concentric cylinders parallel to the reference axis.
Total planar run-out tolerance defines the position limitation of a plane to a reference axis (cylinder). It limits the
flatness deviation and the perpendicularity deviation. The tolerance zone is defined through two parallel planes that
lie at a certain distance (tolerance value) perpendicular to the reference axis.
2. Click on Total run-out.

Features

Report
22 Report
22.1 Information about the report
The report is used to record reproducible measurement results in a document.
In order to be able to provide compelling reports, diagrams, tables, pictures and drawing objects can be inserted
into the report.
22.2 Open report, template or report paper

This function opens an existing report, template or report paper.
2. Click on Open.
3. Click on Report.
4. Select the desired report or template and click on Open.
The report or template is loaded and can be edited.
WM | Quartis ® R2018-2 Report 650

Report
22.2.1 Create new report, new template or new report paper
This function creates a new report, new template or new report paper.
2. Click on New.
3. Click on Report.
4. Select one of the following options:

Report
Report
This option creates a new report. As report template the standard template defined in the Quartis
settings is used.
In case no report template was selected in the Quartis settings, no template is used at all.
Report from template

This option creates a new report using a report template.
The report template to be used can be selected in the subsequent dialog.
Report template
This option creates a new report template.
This report template can later be used for the creation of a new report by using the function Report
from template.
Report paper
This option creates a new report paper.

Report
22.3 Save report, template or report paper

This function saves the currently active report or template (report template or report paper).
2. Click on Save
3. Click on Report.
4. Enter a filename for the report or template and click on Save.
The file name of a report can also be defined using the expression editor. In doing so, you can for
example, add the current measurement ID to the file name of the report.
With expressions you can automatically compile report file names using already stored information from
the database.
The expression editor is opened by clicking on the button Expression editor....
All available fields are listed in the expression editor. The spelling of a file name using variables is
described in the topic Expression Editor.
5. Select the file type.
When saving templates or report papers, only one option is available.

Report
However, a report can be saved into different formats:
· Quartis report (*QrtReport)

Saves the report in the internal WM | Quartis format
· PDF (*pdf)
· Text (spaces-formatted) (*.txt, *.bat)
· CSV (separators-separated) (*.csv)
· Quartis report templates (*.QrtReportTpl):
Graphics and tables are automatically replaced with the corresponding place holders
When saving reports into CSV or text format, the contents of text and data labels, tables as well
as text fields are exported. In addition, text fields from the first report page that are assigned to
the corresponding report paper are also output.
The export order purely depends on the position of the upper left corner of the corresponding
object on the report page. A group is considered as a separate object.
After the export of each text field, a line break is inserted, manual line breaks within a text field
are also exported as line breaks. Contents of data labels and tables are also exported as tables.

Report
22.4 Print report, template or report paper

This function prints the currently active report or template (report template or report paper)
2. Click on Print
3. Click on Report.
4. Adjust the printer settings if needed.

Report
22.5 Display and edit report

This function displays the Report window in the workspace.
2. Click on Work window
3. Click on Report.
4. The Report window is displayed in the workspace.

Report
22.6 Close report work window

This function closes the report work window.
1. Activate the work window Report.
2. Activate the contextual tab Report.
22.7 Change default settings

22.7.1 Adjust report settings
This function allows you to adjust the report settings.

Report
4. Adjust the report language and print quality.
The resolution Normal (300dpi) and Draft (150dpi) are available for the print quality.
5. Select the templates.
6. Define the settings for the statistics labels and tables containing statistics data.
Depending on the defined evaluation method, either the machine capability Cm/Cmk, the process
capability Cp/Cpk or the preliminary process capability Pp/Ppk will be output in the report as capability
index.
The calculation of the capability index is based on the random sample scope.
7. Adjust the colors and warning limits.
8. Adjust the auxiliary grid settings.
9. Click on OK.

Report
22.7.2 Filter features for report
The feature filter filters features that are to be considered in the report.
Additional, you can select in the tab Measurement filter, which measurements have to consider statistical data
across the measurements fort the output.
Thus the set filters apply to different positions:
Graphics view Feature filter Measurement filter
Feature labels + -
Statistical labels - +
Element and point labels - -
Table1 Feature filter Measurement filter
Only with feature data of

the current measurement
+ -
Only with statistical data

across measurements
- +
Only with feature data of

the current measurement
and statistical data across
- +2
measurements
1
With tables, the filter effect depend on the content to be output.
2
The measurement filter only applies to the statistical data output but not on the feature data of the current measurement.

Report
3. Click on the command button Filter.
4. In the tab Feature filter, you can decide if the features to be filtered are limited via a manual selection.
Only selected elements from the list are evaluated.
5. Select if the features to be filtered are limited via feature deviation.
Features with deviation out of

Only features with a deviation out of the defined range are displayed.
Features with deviation within

Only features with a deviation within the defined range are displayed.
6. Select if features without tolerance zone (all features with no tolerance zone are not evaluated in the report) are
ignored.

Report
7. Switch to the tab Measurement filter.
There are three criteria's for the filtering of the actual values available. These filters can be combined in such
a way, that a measurement respectively it's actual values have to meet the defined conditions in order to be
considered for the evaluation.
8. Select if the Measurement filter is activated. The measurement filter is deactivated by default. This means
all measuring values are evaluated.
9. Select if the single values are filtered based on their affiliation with a measurement. Optional a measurement
selection (the sequence of the measurement selection is taken into consideration in the trend diagram), a
measurement range (from ... to) (when the dialog is called for the first time or after a work piece change, the
suggested measurement range reaches over all measurements existing in the work piece, extended by the measurement
range that contains actual values for the first feature) or a selection of the last measurement (N) (the last actual
value (K = largest measurement number) of each individual feature is used as basis. Therefore the range reaches from
the measurement (K-N+1) to K) can be selected.
10. Select if single values are to be filtered over a defined time interval (the range is initialized with the
measurements existing in the work piece. As actual values of features remain even without the original measurement
and are useable, it might be necessary to extend the range manually) .
11. Select if single values are to be filtered over a quality range. The percentage value refers to the total
utilization of the tolerance.
12. Click on OK.

Report
22.7.3 Create or edit layout for tables, data or statistics labels
The layout for tables, data or statistics labels can be edited via this function. It is also possible to load already
saved layouts.
3. Click on the command button Layouts.

Report
4. Select the desired type (table, point, element, feature, statistics).
5. The default layout, defined in the report settings is displayed.
Edit the table according to your needs. The layout editor offers a wide range of possibilities.
6. By double clicking on a field value, it is adopted into the selected cell.
For feature and statistics labels, the contents have to be selected individually for each component.
7. Click on OK.
8. Confirm the displayed dialog in order to save the new layout.
In order to insert a trend diagram into the layout of a feature or statistics label, all fields of a row
have to be merged and subsequently the field content Diagram has to be inserted.
The row height of the diagram is displayed in the layout exactly as the other rows, however, in the
final report it is displayed with a relation of Width : Length = 2 : 1.
For table layouts, you can select statistics data (across multiple measurements) as well as values
from the current measurement within the same row.
In doing so, you have to pay attention that when applying the feature and measurement filter, the
feature filter only applies to the feature data of the current measurement and the measurement
filter applies only to statistical data across all measurements.
Layout editor
The layout editor offers these functions to edit the layout of a table or data label:
Layout Editor
Creates a new layout template.
Opens an existing layout template.
Saves the current layout template.
Inserts a column left to the selection. If the column is to be inserted right to the selection,
push down the Ctrl key when calling this function.
Inserts a row above the selection. If the row is to be inserted below the selection push down
the Ctrl key while calling this function.
Merges the selected cells.
Splits the selected cells.
Cuts the selection.
Copies the selection.

Report
Inserts the contents of the clipboard.
Deletes the selected row.
Deletes the selected column.
Switches the display in the cells from expression to value.
Defines a header row.
Only available for tables, feature and statistics label.
The header row is output at the beginning of a table and on each new report page.
With feature and statistics label, the header row is only output once per data label, even if
features belonging to each other are combined in a label.
Defines an element row.
Only available for tables.
The element row is only output when the tolerated element of a feature to be output is
identical with the tolerated element of the feature output before. For features refering to
more than one element the element row is always output.
When the element row is defined it is not checked which data is output in these rows.
Incorrect use of this function can sometimes suppress the features data output.
Defines a separator (empty row).
Only available for tables, feature and statics labels.
When element rows are defined, the output of separator rows is linked to the output of
element rows.
Changes the font.
Changes the font size.
Changes the font color.
Formats the selected text bold.
Formats the selected text italic
Underlines the selected text.
Aligns the selected text/current row to the left.
Centers the selected text/current row.
Aligns the selected text/current row to the right.
Changes the filling color.
Changes the border color.
Changes the column width of the selected columns.
Changes the row height of the selected row. The height of the rows is set by the font size.
However, it can be additionally changed via this field. Changing the font size resets the row
height to the value corresponding to the font size.

Report
22.7.4 Set object properties as standard
The formats of the different report and drawing objects can be set as standard with this function. Thus objects
inserted later are already inserted with the corresponding format
1. Select the report object whose object properties are to be set as standard for this type of object.
2. Click on Set standard in the contextual menu (right mouse button).
The function Set standard is not available if multiple objects are selected.
3. The settings displayed in the table below can be set for objects of the selected object type as standard for
newly inserted objects of this type.
Group in
ribbon Graphics Data label Text field Image Line /Arro Ellipse /
Rectangle Table
(tab A) B) w Circle
Object/Effect)
Align
Format c)
Anchor
Image
Colors and
lines
Corners
Arrows
Frame
Shadow

Report
A) If a graphics view is selected and the function Set standard is called, all settings from the settings tab in
the selection dialog Insert graphics view are also adopted additionally to the defined format in the
ribbon (see above table).
B) When setting a standard for a text field, the formats defined within the text field as well as the field
contents is set as standard additionally to the defined format in the ribbon (see above table).
C) Only the transparency setting is set as standard from the group format.
22.8 Insert report objects

22.8.1 Insert graphics view
This function inserts a graphics into the report.
3. Click on the command button Graphics.
4. Select the area where the graphics is to be inserted. As soon as the left mouse button is released, the dialog
Content is opened.

Report
5. Select the data label type feature, element, point or statistic (under Statistics you can select those features that
are to be output in a statistics label) that are to be inserted together with the graphics into the report.
Depending on the feature type, you can select related feature labels element; to do so select Feature (via
element selection).
With / you can select features/elements/points or remove them from the selection. The selection can
also be carried out by double clicking.
Data labels are created according to the selection in this dialog.

Report
6. Switch to the tab Layout, and select the type of data label you want to output.
7. If needed you can adjust the layouts.

Report
8. Switch to the tab Settings.
9. Select the desired label arrangement.
10. Select if elements without data label are to be hidden.
This option only displays elements in the graphics that are relevant for the displayed data labels (element,
feature or statistical label). If one of the data labels contains a feature that requires additional elements as
reference to be evaluated, those reference elements are also displayed.
11. Select if features belonging to each other are to be combined in one label.
Features that tolerate the same element can be displayed in a single feature label. To do so,
activate the check box for the function Combine features belonging to each other in one label.
This will reduce the amount of feature labels in the graphical evaluation, which leads to a well
arranged overview.

Report
In this case, the trend diagram is only displayed for the feature displayed in the first row in the
statistics label.
12. Select if the line ends of the data labels point towards the actual or nominal values of the corresponding
element.
This setting has an effect on all inserted statistics, feature and element labels.
13. Select the type of connection lines (this is the line that connects the data label with the elements) to be used
when the content of a feature or statistical label refers to two elements.
Connection lines to reference elements are displayed dashed, if a feature is evaluated using more than one
reference element, no connection line is displayed to the reference element.
14. Select the diagram type to be used for the statistical labels and if the deviations or actual values are to be
displayed in the trend diagram.
15. Select the diagram type feature label in which statistical data about probe points of a curve or surface are
to be displayed and if the trend diagram is to display the probe point deviation values.
If the graphics view contains a feature label that includes the probe point statistics of a surface
profile, it is important that the output of the graphics view is done in the same coordinate system
in which the surface form was determined.
16. If the option Save coordinate system with report object is deactivated, the report object always output all
nominal and actual values in relation to the currently loaded coordinate system.
Activate the option Save coordinate system with report object if you want to insert different tables and
graphics view with different coordinate systems into the report.
When the check box is activated, the corresponding pallet and/or work piece coordinate system can be
selected.
If a report is created with different coordinate systems, the coordinate system should be saved
with each report object.
It is not recommended to create a report including some report objects with and some report
objects without coordinate system.
17. Click on OK in order to insert the graphics.
The display and view of the graphics can now be adjusted with the functions of the graphics ribbon. You can
define, among other things, if an element graphics (element details from left element window) or the model
graphics (CAD model with all elements) is to be reported as graphics.

Report
18. Click on the command button Adopt view.
The graphics is now inserted, including the corresponding data labels.
If a report template is created a place holder for the graphics will be inserted into the report.

Report
22.8.2 Select features using element selection
This function allows to select features depending on the tolerated elements.
This simplifies the selection in cases where, for example, many features are automatically evaluated during the
measurement but only certain individual features are needed for the report.
1. Select Feature (via element selection) in the tab Selection during the insertion of a graphics view.
2. Now select the feature types to be inserted (e.g. position deviation in x, y and z).
3. The command button select all/deselect all allows to select or deselect all feature types.
4. All elements determined for these features are displayed in the left dialog window. If no feature type has
been selected, the left dialog window remains empty.
5. Select those elements that you want to be inserted for the selected feature types.
6. Click on the button to add the features corresponding with your selection to the right dialog window.
Feature can also be selected by double clicking on them.
A click on removes the feature from the selection.
7. Select - if needed - additional data labels of the type Element/Feature/Point or Statistics to be displayed in
the graphics view and finish the graphics view insertion as described in the topic Insert graphics view.
Examples
The following features have been evaluated during the measurement of the elements below.

Report
Element Feature type
x y z d A B Ø R
CIR_1 CIR_1_x CIR_1_y CIR_1_z CIR_1_d CIR_1_A CIR_1_B CIR_1_M CIR_1_R
CIR_2 CIR_2_x CIR_2_y CIR_2_z CIR_2_d CIR_2_A
CIR_3 CIR_3_x CIR_3_y CIR_3_z
PLN_1 PLN_1_R
PT_1 PT_1_x
Only the deviations d and the diameter are relevant for the current report; therefore only those types have been
selected in step 2.
CIR_1 and CIR_2 are displayed in the left dialog window. As for CIR_3 neither d, A or the diameter had been
evaluated, it is not displayed in step 4 as an selectable element.
22.8.3 Information about data labels

Depending on the selection during the insertion of a graphics view, the following data labels are displayed in the
report graphic:
Data labels
Point label Displays information about the points of the element in the left element window.
Depending on the layout, it is also possible to display information about the assigned
element within the point label.
Min/Max point label
In addition to and independent of the selected points, the Min/Max point labels (points
with the largest positive and negative deviation) of the element in the left element window can
be displayed.
These are created with the layout assigned for point labels if the check box Min/Max
points is activated. This check box is only available for the selection of points in the
dialog Content.
Independent from the point label layout, the two Min/Max point labels are marked with
an asterisk in the top right corner of the frame. The size of the asterisk depends on the
line weight of the point label frame.
Element label Displays information about the selected elements of the current measurement.
When inserting an element graphic, the selection of the elements is filtered, only the
element in the left element window can be selected.
Feature label Displays information about the selected features of the current measurement.

Report
In addition to the selection during the insertion of a graphic view, the feature filter is
applied. Therefore it is possible that different features are not displayed.
The measurement filter does not affect the feature label.
The selection of the features is filtered during the insertion of an element graphic. Only
features that tolerate the element in the left element window can be selected.
For the features surface profile and line profile, you can output statistical data about the
probe points of the tolerated element in the feature label. The corresponding values can
also be displayed graphically within the feature label via a trend diagram. To do so, you
can enter the settings in the tab Settings and in the feature label layout.
Statistics label Displays statistical information about the selected features of all measurements of the
active work piece.
In addition to the selection during the insertion of a graphic view, the measurement filter
is applied and therefore it is possible to limit the measurement to be considered.
The feature filter does not affect the statistics label
Statistical values within the statistics label can also be displayed graphically in a trend
diagram. They can be selected in the tab Settings and in the layout of the statistics label.
If the function Combine features belonging to each other in one label is activated in
the tab Settings, the trend diagram is only displayed for the feature in the first row.
22.8.4 Insert table
This function inserts a table into the report.
3. Click on the command button Table.

Report
4. Select the area where the table is to be inserted. As soon as the left mouse button is released, the table is
inserted.
5. Select the features to be inserted into the table.
Features can be added or removed from the selection with / . The selection can also be done by
double clicking.
6. With the function Insert text field ( ) you can insert comments between features in the table. The text
fields can be deleted with the function Delete text field ( ).
The text field can be edited by double clicking on the corresponding text line or by using the function Edit
text field ( ).
7. If you want to filter features and only output text if the corresponding features are output, you can group
the corresponding features with the text field ( ). Groups can be ungrouped at any time by using the
corresponding command button ( ).

Report
8. Switch the tab Layout.
9. Adjust, if needed, the table layout.

Report
10. Switch to the tab Settings.
11. If the option Save coordinate system with report object is deactivated, the report object always output all
nominal and actual values in relation to the currently loaded coordinate system.
Activate the option Save coordinate system with report object if you want to insert different tables and
graphics view with different coordinate systems into the report.
When the check box is activated, the corresponding pallet and/or work piece coordinate system can be
selected.
If a report is created with different coordinate systems, the coordinate system should be saved
with each report object.
It is not recommended to create a report including some report objects with and some report
objects without coordinate system.
12. Click on OK.
The table, including the features to be output, is now inserted into the report.
In case you create a report template, a table placeholder is inserted into the report template.

Report
22.9 Insert drawing objects

22.9.1 Insert new page
This function inserts a new page into the report.
3. Click on New Page.
4. Select the desired page layout.

Report
22.9.2 Delete selected pages
This function deletes the current page of the report.
3. Click on Delete Page.
Confirm the dialog.
22.9.3 Insert text field
This function inserts a text box into the report.
3. Click on Text field.

Report
4. Select the area where the text box is to be inserted with the mouse. As soon as the left mouse button is
released, the dialog Edit text field is displayed and the text can be entered.
With the function Edit text box you can edit the contents of the text box.
The text field can be adjusted using the functions in the contextual tabs Object and Effect.
22.9.4 Insert line/arrow
This function inserts a line/arrow into the report.
Insert line
3. Click on Line/Arrow.

Report
4. Select a start point by clicking and holding down the left mouse button and draw the line to the desired
end point. As soon as the left mouse button is released, the line is inserted.
The line can be adjusted using the functions in the contextual tabs Object and Effect.
Insert arrow
1. Insert a line as described above and selected it.
2. Change to the contextual tab Object.
3. Move to the catalog Arrows.
4. Select end and start symbol for the arrow in the corresponding drop down list.
The arrow can be adjusted using the functions in the contextual tabs Object and Effect.

Report
22.9.5 Insert rectangle
This function inserts a rectangle into the report.
3. Click on Rectangle.
4. Select the area where the rectangle is to be inserted with the mouse. As soon as the left mouse button is
released, the rectangle is inserted.
The rectangle can be adjusted using the functions in the contextual tabs Object and Effect.

Report
22.9.6 Insert ellipse/circle
This function inserts an ellipse/circle into the report.
3. Click on Ellipse/Circle.
4. Select the area where the ellipse/circle is to be inserted with the mouse. As soon as the left mouse
button is released, the ellipse/circle is inserted.
The ellipse/circle can be adjusted using the functions in the contextual tabs Object and Effect.

Report
22.9.7 Insert image
This function inserts an image into the report.
Images require quite some memory in the report. In order to keep the report size small, only
images in JPEG format and graphics in PNG format should be inserted into the report.
3. Click on Image.
4. Select the area where the image is to be inserted with the mouse. As soon as the left mouse button is
released, the image selection dialog is opened.
5. Select a file or enter the name of the image files to be inserted and click on Open.
The file name can be automatically composed out of information saved in the database using
expressions.

Report
The input of a file name using an expression makes sense when an image is to be inserted as a
link into the report.
Further information can be found in the topic Adjust images.
Examples for expressions in file names can be found here.
The Image can be adjusted using the functions in the contextual tabs Object and Effect.
22.10 Customize report view in work window

The view of the report work window can be adjusted in the catalog View in the tab Report.
View
Fit view to page width (page is zoomed to page width)
Fit view to page (whole page is displayed in the work window)
Refresh report view
Zoom in
Zoom out
Activate/deactivate display of mini pages on the left side of the work window
Display previous page
Display next page
Display paper layers
Close work window

Report
22.11 Customize objects

22.11.1 Edit
These functions can be used to edit the report objects.
Report objects can be edited in the group Edit in the contextual tab Object.
Edit
Cuts the selected report object.
Copies the selected report object into the clipboard.
Inserts the content from the clipboard.
Deletes the selected report object.
Jumps one work step back.
Activates the edit mode for the selected report object (only available for table and
graphics).
Redo's the last work step.

Report
22.11.2 Align objects
These functions allow the alignment of several report and drawing objects.
The alignment functions can be activated in the group Align in the contextual tab Object.
Some functions are only available if at least two objects are selected. Multiple objects can be
selected by using the shift button.
Align objects
Brings the selected object to the front.
Sends the selected object to the back.
Groups the selected objects.
Brings the selected objet on layer up.
Sends the selected object one layer down.
Ungroups a group.
Align left edges of selected objects.
Align horizontal centers of selected objects.
Align right edges of selected objects.
Align top edges of selected objects.
Align vertical centers of selected objects.
Align bottom edges of selected objects.

Report
22.11.3 Adjust format
These functions allow you to position and format a selected report object.
The selected report object can be adjusted in the group Format in the contextual tab Object.
Adjust format
Adjusts the position in reference to the left page margin.
Adjusts the position in reference to the top page margin.
Adjust the rotation in reference to the page horizontal.
Adjusts the width of the report object.
Adjusts the height of the report object.
Adjusts the transparency of the report object.
22.11.4 Adjust margins
These functions allow you to adjust the margins of the current report page.
The margins of the current report page can be adjusted in the group Margin in the contextual tab Object.
Adjust margins
Adjusts the left margin.
Adjusts the top margin.
Adjusts the bottom margin.
Adjusts the right margin.

Report
22.11.5 Adjust paper format
These functions allow you to adjust the paper format of the current report page.
The paper format of the current report page can be adjusted in the group Format in the contextual tab Object.
Adjust paper format
Adjusts the paper format of the current report page.
Sets the paper format of the current report page to portrait format.
Sets the paper format of the current report page to landscape format.
Adjusts the paper format width of the of the current report page.
Adjusts the paper format height of the of the current report page.
22.11.6 Adjust paper
These functions allow to select a previously created report paper.
The pages of this report paper can then be assigned to the active page, the intermediate page of a table and the
page with the table end of the report.

Report
1. Select the report paper in the ribbon of the contextual tab Object.
2. Select the paper for the active page.

Assigns a report paper page to the active page.
3. Select the paper for the table intermediate pages.

Assigns a report paper page to the intermediate pages of the table.
4. Select the paper for the table end.

Assigns a report paper page to the page with the table end.
The settings for the paper in-between tables and paper for table end are only active if the
currently displayed page includes the start of a table
The paper assignment for the in-between table pages and table end pages is done on the page
with the start of the table.
22.11.7 Set anchor
These functions allow you to anchor a drawing object at a defined position.
The anchored drawing object can be adjusted in the group Anchor in the contextual tab Object.
Set anchor
Standard.
Fix distance to top margin.
Fix distance to left margin.
Scale width proportionally to higher object.
Fix distance to right margin.
Fix distance to bottom margin.
Scale height proportionally to higher object.

Report
22.11.8 Adjust table contents, graphics contents, table and data label layout
These functions allow you to adjust tables and graphics directly in the report.
Table
The selected report object can be adjusted in the group Customize in the contextual tab Object.
Table
Adjusts the contents of the selected table.
Allows selecting the layout of the current table using a drop down field. Via the
option user defined you can also create a new layout.
It is also possible to edit the format and content of the selected layout. Is this the
case, the layout has to be saved before the changes take effect.
Graphics
Graphics
Adjust the selection and alignment of data labels. To do so, a graphics object has
to be selected beforehand.
Allows selecting the layout for the selected data labels using a drop down field.
Via the option user defined you can also create a new layout.
It is also possible to edit the format and content of the selected layout.
In contrast to editing individual data labels, the layout has to be saved before the
changes take effect.

Report
22.11.9 Align data labels
These functions allow you to align feature and element labels around the graphics.
The functions are available in the group Boxes in the contextual tab Object.
These functions are only available for the report objects feature and element labels.
Align data labels
Aligns labels on top of the graphics.
Aligns labels to the left of the graphics.
Aligns labels to the right of the graphics.
Aligns labels on bottom of the graphics.
Re-aligns data labels.
22.11.10 Edit text field
This function opens the text editor in order to edit the text of the selected text box.
The text editor can be opened in the group Text Box in the contextual tab Object.
The text editor is only available for the drawing object Text Box.
Edit text field
Opens the text editor.

Report
Text Editor
Text Editor
Changes the font type of the selected text.
Changes the font size of the selected text.
Changes the font color of the selected text.
Formats the selected text bold.
Formats the selected text italic.
Underlines the selected text.
Aligns the selected text to the left.
Centers the selected text.
Aligns the selected text to the right.
Bullets.
Increases indent.
Decreases indent.
Insert/edit expression.
Switch between expression and result view.
With Ctrl+Tab tabulators are inserted into the text box.
The expression editor allows inserting field contents (for example the current date as well as the
results of functions, into text fields. For example, it is possible to import and display the contents
of text files vie the file function IncludeText.
When using the expression editor, it is important that the result of the expression is of the type
test, else it will not be possible to close the dialog.

Report
22.11.11 Adjust color and line settings
These functions allow the adjustment of the display of a line in the report.
The functions are available in the group Colors and Lines in the contextual tab Object.
These functions are only available for the drawing objects Line/Arrow, Rectangle and
Ellipse/Circle as well as for the data label border lines.
Adjust color and line settings
Adjusts the line color.
Adjusts the line width
Adjusts the fill color.
Adjust the transparency of the fill color.
22.11.12 Adjust corners
These functions allow you to adjust the display of the corner of a rectangle.
The corner settings can be adjusted in the group Corners in the contextual tab Objects.
These functions are only available for the drawing object Rectangle.
Adjust corners
Adjusts the width of the corner curve.
Adjusts the height of the corner curve.

Report
22.11.13 Adjust arrows
These functions allow you to adjust the display of an arrow in the report.
The arrow settings can be adjusted in the group Arrows in the contextual tab Object.
These functions are only available for the drawing object Line/Arrow.
Adjust arrows
Adjusts the start or end symbol of the line/arrow.
Adjusts the symbol width of a start or end point.
Adjusts the symbol length of a start or end point.
22.11.14 Adjust image
These functions adjust the display of a picture image in the report.
The picture settings can be adjusted in the group Picture of the contextual tab Object.
The functions are only available for the drawing object picture.
Adjust image
Loads a picture file as described under Insert image. The selected image will be
replaced.
If this option is not activated, the image is copied into the Quartis report. If
Link
corresponding image is later changed, renamed or deleted outside of WM | Quartis, it

Report
will not have an influence on the previously into Quartis inserted images.
If the option is activated, the image is inserted as a link into the report. Whenever the
report is updated, the linked image is also updated. This is especially useful when
images than frequently change are to be used in reports.
In case the file name of the linked image changes, you can also enter
the file name as an expression when inserting the image.
Displays the picture in original size in the available object frame.
Fits image as large as possible in available object frame. The aspect ratio remains.
Scales picture to the available object frame. The aspect ratio might not remain the
same.
22.12 Customize effects

22.12.1 Adjust frame
These functions are used to assign a border to a drawing object in the frame.
The border properties can be adjusted in the group Border of the contextual tab Effect.
These functions are only available for the drawing objects text field, rectangle, ellipse/circle and
image.
Adjust frame
Adjusts the border color.
Adjusts the line weight.
Adjusts the distance from the border to the drawing object.
Adjusts the fill color of the frame.
Adjusts the transparency of the background fill color of the border.

Report
Adjusts the corner radius of the frame.
22.12.2 Adjust shadow
These functions add a shadow to drawing objects in the report.
The shadow properties can be adjusted in the group Shadow in the contextual tab Effect.
These functions are only available for the drawing objects text field, line/arrow, rectangle,
ellipse/circle and image.
Adjust shadow
Adjusts the shadow color.
Adjusts the vertical shadow offset.
Adjusts the horizontal shadow offset.
Adjusts the shadow blur.
Adjusts the shadow transparency.

Graphics
23 Graphics
23.1 Information about the graphics
As central element, the graphics is arranged in the middle of the visual field.
The machine, probe system, CAD model as well as all measured elements can be displayed in the graphics.
The graphics can be customized to the needs of any user due to the large amount of display and viewing options.
The operation of the graphics window (rotate, move, zoom in/zoom out) with a 3D mouse is supported. The button
functions have to be configured in the control panel of the 3D mouse. Additional commands, as for example zoom
CAD model, insert intermediate point and so forth, can be assigned to the 3D mouse buttons in the control panel.
23.2 Change graphics display

23.2.1 Change graphics settings
This function allows you to define the graphics display settings.
1. Activate the work window Graphics.
2. Activate the contextual tab Display.
WM | Quartis ® R2018-2 Graphics 698

Graphics
4. Adjust the settings to your needs.
5. The dialog can be scrolled using the scrollbar.
6. Click on OK.
Overview graphics settings
General
Display network grid * Displays/hides the network grid either as grid lines
or axis intercepts.
Scale grid size manually The screen width of the network grid can be
entered manually.
Intercept position If the network grid is displayed as axis intercepts,

the position of the coordinate system can be
X-Position
entered in work piece coordinates.
Y-Position
Z-Position
Color of network grid Selection of the color of the network grid.
Display info labels of hidden elements Displays element and feature labels even if the
element is hidden in the graphics by another
component (e.g. CAD model).
Display label symbol Displays/hides the symbols for the corresponding

element/feature in the labels.
Display label description Displays the description of the corresponding

element/feature in the labels.
Display deviation label Displays the deviations of the corresponding

elements in the element labels.

Graphics
Only components that were evaluated and are

listed in the element window under tolerances and
deviations are displayed.
Label font size Adjusts the font size of the element or feature
labels.
Adjust background color to color scheme Adjusts the background color of the work window
to the color scheme selected in the Quartis options
under Personalize.
Color background Selection of the background color.
Perspective The representation of the model can be switched

between central and parallel. The central
perspective representation the model the way a
user sees it, this means space parallel edges unite
in a vanishing point.
* Function is also available on the contextual tab Graphics.
Model
Display CAD points enlarged with factor Point elements in the CAD model are displayed as
stars. The size of these stars can be enlarged with
the entered value. This simplifies the finding of
points in the CAD model.
Facets For the facets (triangle nets, which approximate

model surface) three different qualities
(fine/medium/rough) are available. Thus enabling
the user, for example, to use a fine model
representation in the report, though it needs a
longer time to be displayed; at the same time he
can use a coarse but faster view for measurement.
The quality of the display does not have influence
on the measuring results.
Save facets in facet file (*.saf) The calculated facets which are required for
graphical representation, can be saved in facet
files (*.SAF) and be available for subsequent
recalls. This reduces the loading time of the model.
Display CAD model coordinate system with axis Displays the coordinate system of the CAD model
length in the graphics. Further, the lengths of the
coordinate system axes can also be configured.
The coordinate system is always displayed in this

size on the screen regardless of the zoom factor.
Color of the CAD model coordinate system Adjusts the color of the CAD model coordinate
system.
Default color CAD model Adjust the default color of the CAD model.
Surface backside Color of surface backsides of CD models that were

converted with the option Convert surface

Graphics
orientation.
Default color boundaries in solid representation Adjust the default color of edges in the solid body
representation.
Color of selected elements Adjust the color of the selected element.
Color of auxiliary elements Adjusts the color of auxiliary elements.
Elements
Display probe point symbols * Displays/hides the probe points in the graphics.
Probe points can either be displayed as spheres,
cubes or planes.
Display probe points with fixed dimensions If the option is not active, the points are drawn in a
way that they always have the same size on the
screen. This size does not change when zooming.
The size is fix in pixel (about 10 pixel).
Display deviation of probe points (residues) * Displays/hides the deviation vectors of the
individual probe points in relation to the calculated
compensating element in the graphics.
Only display probe points and residues for left Only displays the probe points and residues for
element window the element in the left element window. Probe
points and residues of all other elements are not
displayed.
Probe points and residues of the element in the

left element window are only displayed if the
function Display probe point symbols and/or
Display deviation of probe points (residues) is
activated.
Color of probe points, residues and connection Adjusts the color of probe points, residues and
lines connection lines.
Color of point numbers Adjusts the color of the point numbers.
Connect probe points * Connects the probe points of the element in the
left element window.
Display position deviations of elements Displays the position deviation of elements with
arrows.
Fill tolerance zone with brightness [%] Defines the color brightness in % for the display of
the tolerance zones.
Magnification of deviation vectors * Input of the magnification of the deviation vectors

of the probe points.
Display min. / max. deviation When this option is active, the elements through
the min. respectively the max. probe point are
displayed in addition to the compensation element

Graphics
for the element in the left element window. Further

the min. / max. points are drawn in as stars.
Color of the element in the left element window Adjusts the color of the element in the left element
window.
Color of the element in the right element window Adjusts the color of the element in the right
element window.
Color for construction preview Adjusts the color of the element in the construction
preview.
Define color spectrum manually The color spectrum shows the change in colors
that have been defined for the upper and lower
limits. The color spectrum corresponds to a
flowing transition of color tones defined for the
upper and lower limit. The color spectrum is used
for the flowing coloring of the points.
The color spectrum limits can be manually defined

when the option is active.
If the option is deactivated, the limits are

automatically determined with the maximal
deviation of the element. The maximal deviation
corresponds to the deviation of the min or max
point to the corresponding compensation element.
Upper color spectrum limit Adjust the upper color spectrum limit.
Lower color spectrum limit Adjust the lower color spectrum limit.
Color of the upper color spectrum limit Adjust the color of the upper color spectrum limit.
Color of the lower color spectrum limit Adjust the color of the lower color spectrum limit.
Invert color gradient of the color spectrum Inverts the color spectrum.
Display size of element from type point Defines the size of point elements.
Display size of non dimensional elements Defines the size for elements that are not limited
by probe points (e.g. theoretical elements).
Display work piece coordinate system with axis Displays/hides the work piece coordinate system
length with the defined axis length.

Display element coordinate system with axis length Displays/hides the element coordinate system with
the defined axis length.

Motion paths

Graphics
Display motion path directions * Displays/hides the motion paths.
Color of motion paths Adjusts the color of the motion paths.
Color of transfer paths Adjusts the color of transfer paths.
Color of probe points / scan paths Adjusts the color of probe points / scan paths.
Color of intermediate points Adjusts the color of intermediate points.
Color of probe head swivel range Adjusts the color of the probe head swivel range.
Display positioning movements in motion paths Displays/hides positioning movements in the

motion path.
Display measurement movements in motion paths Displays/hides measurement movements in the

motion path.
Display probe system change in motion paths Display/hides probe system changes in the motion
path.
Limit motion path display The number of displayed motion paths is limited
to this number. As soon as this number is
exceeded, the oldest motion path is continuously
deleted and replaced with the new one
Color of collision surfaces Adjusts the color of collision surfaces.
23.2.2 Display element graphics
This function displays the element in the left element window in the graphics work window.
3. Click on the command button Element graphics.

Graphics
Elements can be rotated and therefore be displayed in different views. If the element is reloaded
in the element window it is displayed in a meaningful view. A circle, for example, is displayed in
axis direction again.
The display functions of the ribbon offer a wide range of possibilities to customize the display to
one's needs. Further settings which can be useful for the element graphics can be found in the
settings dialog
23.2.3 Adjust model representation
This function adjusts the model display.
Model display
Solid (Surfaces are shaded from the inside as well as outside. The color depends on the graphics settings or
the imported data.)
Transparent (Shaded areas are painted transparently over one another. One thus can see through the model
and even recognize the parts that are located inside.)
Wire frame (Only the edges of the model are displayed. This mode is useful for viewing elements that are
normally hidden behind the front surfaces in display in real scale.)
Polygon (This mode is sometimes also called faceted. The polygons (facets) are displayed in addition to the
wire frame model and show the approximate flow of the surfaces.)
3. Click on the drop down Model and select the desired display.

Graphics
23.2.4 Adjust element representation
This function adjusts the element display.
Element display
Solid (Surfaces are shaded from the inside as well as outside. The color depends on the graphics settings or
the imported data.)
Wire frame (Only the edges of the model are displayed. This mode is useful for viewing elements that are
normally hidden behind the front surfaces in display in real scale.)
Polygon (This mode is sometimes also called faceted. The polygons (facets) are displayed in addition to the
wire frame model and show the approximate flow of the surfaces.)
3. Click on the drop down Element and select the desired display.

Graphics
23.2.5 Display probe points
This function displays/hides the probe points in the graphics
3. Click on the command button Display probe points.
23.2.6 Display probe point numbers
This function activates/deactivates the display of the probe point numbering. The number corresponds with the
point number in the database.
The numbers are drawn into the graphics according to their probing direction. Therefore you can recognize in which
direction they have been probed.

Graphics
3. Click on the command button Display probe point numbers.
23.2.7 Display network grid
This function displays a network grid parallel to the axis.
The network grid can only be displayed when the element graphics is displayed parallel to a
coordinate axis.
The grid size and display mode can be set in the graphics settings.
3. Click on the command button Display network grid.
23.2.8 Display element label
This function displays a label for each individual geometry element in the graphics. This label contains ID,
description, symbol and deviation of the element.
The content, font size of a label and if info labels of hidden elements are to be displayed can be defined in the
graphics settings.
By clicking on an element label, the corresponding element is loaded into the left element window.

Graphics
3. Click on the command button Display element label.
Info labels can be freely moved with the mouse. A double click on an info label moves the label
back to its original position.
Ctrl-key + double clicking on one info label moves all displayed labels back to their original
positions.
If you want to move back only element labels, you must activate the icon and deactivate the
icon .
If a label hides another label, it is displayed with "+". Click the mouse and press the shift key
simultaneously to move a visible label to the background bringing the hidden one to front.
23.2.9 Display feature label
This function displays a feature label for each individual geometry element in the graphics. This feature label
contains the features defined for this element.
If a feature is defined by two elements, they are connected with a line and the feature label is displayed in its middle.
The feature label contains ID, description and symbol of the feature.
The content, font size of a label and if info labels of hidden elements are to be displayed can be defined in the
graphics settings.

Graphics
3. Click on the command button Display feature label.
Info labels can be freely moved with the mouse. A double click on an info label moves the label
back to its original position.
Ctrl-key + double clicking on one info label moves all displayed labels back to their original
positions.
If you want to move back only feature labels, you must activate the icon and deactivate the
icon .
If a label hides another label, it is displayed with "+". Click the mouse and press the shift key
simultaneously to move a visible label to the background bringing the hidden one to front.
23.2.10 Colorize element in left element window with color spectrum
This function colorizes the element in the left element window with a defined color spectrum.
The lower and upper color spectrum limit can be set in the graphics settings.

Graphics
3. Click on the command button Colorize element in left element window with color spectrum.
Whenever Connect probe points is activated and the value for the Magnification of deviation
vectors is set to 0, the CAD surface is colored instead of the element.
23.2.11 Display machine components

This function displays or hides the machine components (defined in the Quartis configuration program) in the
graphics.
The selection of which components are to be displayed is done in the display options.
3. Click on the command button Display machine components.
23.2.12 Show display options
With the display options one can display / hide different components (machine components, CAD models, elements)
in the graphics.
It is also possible to position the work piece, manage CAD model layers, create graphics views and manage
intersections in the same dialog.

Graphics
3. Click on the command button Show display options.
The CAD display options are displayed in the graphics.
With a right click on the line Element types you can display or hide all element types with the
functions All on or All off with one click.
23.2.13 Position work piece
This function positions the work piece on the virtual CMM in the graphics window.

Graphics
It is only available when WM | Quartis is disconnected from the machine.
1. Display the display options.
2. Click on CAD Models with the right mouse button and select Position work piece.
Delete any loaded pallet or work piece coordinate systems, otherwise the work piece cannot be
positioned.
If this function is used for the first time, the coordinate system of the model is congruent with the
machine coordinate system.
In order to place the work piece in the center of the measuring volume the AUTO button can be
used.
3. Define which CMM axis is set as primary direction.
Then select the axis of the CAD model is to be set parallel to the CMM axis.
This can either be carried out using the drop down or the mouse tool. The mouse tool is activated by
clicking on the mouse button. Then click a point or a surface on the CAD model. The clicked direction will
be set parallel to the corresponding CMM axis.

Graphics
If a point or a surface is clicked with the mouse, a ">>>" is displayed in the CAD combo box. This
way the user knows that the direction was defined with a mouse click and is not a CAD axis.
4. Define the secondary direction the same way the primary direction was set.
5. By clicking on the X, Y or Z button next to Rotation, the work piece is rotated around the corresponding
CMM axis with the defined angle. The predefined angles can be selected in the drop down field or the
required angle can be entered directly into the field.
6. The Translation displays the displacement of the CAD model in relation to the CMM origin. The CAD
model can be displaced further by changing the X, Y and Z values in the measuring volume.
Basically there are two different ways to position a work piece on the measuring plate:
Position whole work piece

Using the big mouse tool a point on a surface of the CAD model and subsequently a point on the
measuring plate can be clicked. The CAD model is now moved to the measuring plate and the clicked
points are aligned with each other.
Position single axis

In order to position single axis on the measuring plate, the mouse tool which is located directly next to
the corresponding field of the axis is used. The procedure to position a single or two axes on the
measuring plate is the same as if you place the whole work piece on the measuring plate.
7. By clicking the AUTO button the CAD model is moved to the center of the CMM measuring volume.
By clicking on Delete the entered information is deleted and the CAD model is moved to the
origin of the reference sphere.
By clicking on Reset the rotation and translation is reset. All values are reset to the last saved
values.
8. Click on OK.
23.2.14 Manage CAD model layer
All available layers of the CAD model are displayed in the display options.
Layers group certain elements of the CAD model.
The layer information is saved in the CAD model and is converted by the CAD converter into the ACIS format used
by WM | Quartis.

Graphics
Each model contains a standard layer. All elements that are not assigned to another layer are grouped in the
standard layer.
The layer functions are displayed below the main tree CAD Model.

Graphics
Layer functions
Function name Functions Available in
New Layer Adds a new layer to the selected CAD model CAD Model
On / Off The selected model or layer is activated or deactivated. CAD Model
Deactivated models or layers are not visible in the graphics Standard layer
and are con taken into consideration while measuring
Layer
Activate all layers All layers of the selected CAD model are activated. CAD Model
Activate only this layer The selected layer is activated while all other layers in the same Standard layer
model are deactivated.
Layer
The action can be canceled with Activate all layers.
Assign elements The elements selected in the graphics are assigned to the Standard layer
selected layer.
Layer
Mark elements The elements assigned to the selected layer are marked in the Standard layer
graphics.
Layer
Change colors The colors of all elements assigned to the layer can be edited Standard layer
through a color selection window.
Layer
Standard color The layer loses its color and the elements assigned to it are Standard layer
displayed in the standard color .
Layer
The standard color of the standard layer corresponds to the
model color defined in the graphics display settings.
With all other layers, the standard colors correspond to the

color of the standard layer.
Delete The layer is deleted and its elements are assigned to the Layer
standard layer
Rename Change the name of a layer. Layer

Graphics
23.2.15 Display probe swivel range
This function displays the complete rotate and swivel range of the current articulating probe system.
3. Click on Display probe swivel range.
23.2.16 Connect probe points
This function connects the probe points of the element in the left element window.
3. Click on Connect probe points.

Graphics
23.2.17 Display deviation of probe points (residues)
This function displays the deviation vectors of individual probe points in relation to the calculated regression
The magnification of these deviation vectors can also be entered.
3. Click on Display deviation of probe points (residues).
Change, if needed, the magnification of the deviation vectors.
23.2.18 Display position deviations of elements
This function displays the position deviation of elements with arrows. The arrows always point from target to actual
element.
The position deviations in x, y, z, d, A and B are displayed as long as the components were evaluated and are
displayed in the element window under Tolerances and Deviations.
The magnification of the deviation vectors can also be entered.

Graphics
3. Click on the command button Display position deviations of elements.
Adjust the magnification of the deviation vectors if needed.
23.2.19 Display tolerance zone
This function allows displaying different tolerance zones for the elements circle and curve in the graphics.
The width of the tolerance zone (within tolerance) is controlled via the tolerances and deviation. The zones outside
upper tolerance and outside lower tolerance are displayed with half of the tolerance width.
A circle, respectively a curve with the color outside upper tolerance or outside lower tolerance (without
brightening) is drawn in at the tolerance limits. This line is completely positioned in the zone outside upper/lower
tolerance.
In the center of the tolerance zone (target value) a circle, respectively a curve with the color within upper tolerance
is drawn in.
For the circle the tolerance zones of the following feature types can be displayed graphically:
· Size
· Half Size
· Form
· Roundness.
For a curve the tolerance zone of a line profile can be displayed graphically.
The tolerance zones are only displayed for elements where the corresponding features have been
evaluated.

Graphics
3. Click on Display tolerance zone.
4. Select the desired feature for which the tolerance zone should be displayed.
In case more than one feature exists for the selected element:
5. Click on Select feature.
6. Select the desired feature.
The colors of the tolerance zones can be adjusted in the report settings in the Quartis options.
The selected colors are displayed with 60 % brightness by default. The brightness can be
adjusted in the graphics settings under Elements.
23.2.20 Show mouse pointer coordinates
This function displays the coordinates of the mouse pointer on the CAD model.
The position of the display is defined by a mouse click.

Graphics
3. Click on the command button Show mouse pointer coordinates.
4. Click on a position in the graphics where the display window is to be displayed. Move the mouse pointer
over the CAD model. The coordinates of the mouse pointer in relation to the CAD origin are displayed in
the window.
It is also possible to display the distance to a clicked point. Thus a distance measurement is
possible. With a click on the display window the coordinates are reset. With a second click on the
CAD model the starting point is drawn in. If the mouse pointer is now moved away from this point
the distance from the start point to the current position of the mouse pointer is displayed. With a
third click on the graphic a new start point is set. A right click terminates the distance
measurement but not the display of the mouse pointer coordinates. The coordinate system values
in the current PCS are displayed again.
23.2.21 Display coordinate axes
This function displays an additional coordinate cross in the graphics.
The position is set by a mouse click.
3. Click on the command button Display coordinate axes.
4. Click on the position in the graphics where the coordinate cross is to be displayed.

Graphics
23.2.22 Display color spectrum
This function displays the color spectrum with legend in the graphics.
The lower and upper color spectrum limit can be configured in the graphics settings
The position of the color spectrum is set by a mouse click.
3. Click on the command button Display color spectrum.
4. The position of the color spectrum in the graphics is defined by a mouse click
23.2.23 Display recorded motion paths
This function displays or hides the recorded motion paths. Motion paths can be recorded with the function Record
motion paths.

Graphics
3. Click on Connect probe points.
23.2.24 Record motion paths
This function records the motion path of the machine.
3. Click on Record motion paths.
23.2.25 Delete recorded motion paths
This function deletes all recorded motion paths of the machine.
3. Click on the command button Delete recorded motion paths.

Graphics
23.3 Change graphics view

23.3.1 Zoom all
This function fits all graphical elements into the graphics window.
After calling up this function all loaded graphics elements lie within the visible area.
3. Click on the command button Zoom all.
23.3.2 Enlarge window area
This function zooms in on a selection which is defined by 2 screen positions (zoom window).
The selected are defines a new window area. The view is centered on the middle of the selected
area.

Graphics
3. Click on the command button Zoom Window.
4. The first position is set by clicking on the left hand mouse button.
5. Bring the zoom rectangle to the desired size (pressing the left mouse key)
On releasing the left mouse key the second position is set and the selected area is enlarged.
23.3.3 Zoom out
With this function the zoom is reduced by a determined factor.

Graphics
3. Click on the command button Zoom out.
23.3.4 Zoom in
With this function the zoom is enlarged by a determined factor.
3. Click on the command button Zoom in.
23.3.5 Display CAD model and elements
This function fits the whole CAD model in the graphics work window.

Graphics
3. Click on the command button Zoom CAD model and elements.
23.3.6 Rotate, pan and zoom view
This function rotates (hold left mouse button down and move mouse in desired direction), moves (hold Ctrl key down and
move mouse in desired direction) , reduces or enlarges (using the mouse wheel (if available) or pressed Ctrl key and moving
the mouse in desired direction) the graphics using the mouse.
3. Click on the command button Rotate, pan and zoom view.
You can interrupt the function of an active mouse tool with the space bar to activate the graphics
tool Rotate, pan and zoom view. After adjusting the view, you can reactivate the previously
used mouse tool with the right mouse button.
23.3.7 Move view
This function moves, reduces or enlarges (using the mouse wheel (if available) or pressed Ctrl key and moving the mouse in
desired direction) the graphics using the mouse wheel (if available) or by pressing the Ctrl key and moving the mouse
in desired direction.

Graphics
3. Click on the command button Move view.
Position the graphics on the desired position.
23.3.8 Back to the last view
This function recalls the last used graphics views.
3. Click on the command button Back to the last view.
23.3.9 Continue to next view
This function sequential undo's the changes made with Back to the last view.

Graphics
3. Click on the command button Continue to next view.
23.3.10 Display view perpendicular to element
By clicking on a CAD surface or an element, the view is rotated perpendicular to the normal of the selected point.
3. Click on the command button View perpendicular to element.

Graphics
4. Click on the desired position on the CAD model.
23.3.11 Split graphics view
This function splits the graphic window in 4 separated windows. It is possible to define and customize these 4 views
independently.
3. Click on the command button Split graphics view.

Graphics
23.3.12 Define rotation angle
This function defines a rotation angle with which the graphics view can be rotated around the screen axes.
3. Click on the command button Rotation angle.
Select the desired rotation angle or enter the value directly into the field.

Graphics
23.3.13 Rotate view around horizontal screen axis
This function rotates the graphics around the monitor horizontal (monitor X axis).
The rotation angle can be defined.
3. Click on the command button Rotate view around horizontal screen axis.
If the Ctrl key is pressed down at the same time, the graphics view is rotated in reversed direction.
23.3.14 Rotate view around vertical screen axis
This function rotates the graphics around the monitor vertical (monitor Y axis).

Graphics
3. Click on the command button Rotate view around vertical screen axis.
23.3.15 Rotate view around screen normal
This function rotates the graphics around the monitor normal (monitor Z axis).
3. Click on the command button Rotate view around vertical screen axis.
23.3.16 Load standard views
This function loads a standard view into the graphics window.

Graphics
3. Click on the command button Load standard views.
The following standard views are available:
23.3.17 Create user view
This function allows you to create user defined graphics views.
1. Display the display options window.
2. Open the context menu with a right click on Views and select New and enter a name for the graphics
views

Graphics
23.3.18 Delete user view
This function deletes user defined graphics views.
2. Select the view to be deleted.
3. Open the context menu with a right click and select the menu entry Delete.
23.3.19 Rename user view
This function renames user views.
2. Select the view to be renamed.
3. Open the context menu with a right click and select the menu entry Rename.
Enter the new name for the user view.

Graphics
23.3.20 Load user view
This function allows you to load user defined graphics view.
A user graphics view can also be loaded using the contextual menu in the CAD display options,
analog to the functions create, delete, rename and save graphics view .
2. Activate the contextual tab Graphics.
3. Click on the command button Load user view.
Select the user view.
In order to load a different user view, open the drop down list by clicking on and select the desired
view.
23.3.21 Save user view
This function allows you to save your own graphics views.

Graphics
2. Select the view to be saved.
3. Open the context menu with the right click and select the entry Save.

Graphics
23.4 Create and manage intersections

23.4.1 Create and load intersections
These functions create and load intersections in the CAD model.
They are not displayed in the element graphics mode.
3. Create or load intersections with these functions.
Intersections can be managed in the display options.
Create and load intersections
Click intersection on model.
The mouse tool allows you to click a point on the CAD model with the left mouse button
and then to confirm this point with the right mouse button. The model is intersected at the
section plane that runs through the clicked point and has the same normal direction as the
clicked point
If an edge is selected, the direction of the edge is relevant for the direction of the section
plane and not the normal direction of the point. Thus you can easily display the cross
section of a curved profile without constructing any additional planes.
Parts of the model that are positioned in front of the section plane from the user's point of
view are removed.
Select intersection plane.
Coordinate planes and measure or constructed planes from the current measurement can
be selected. The model is intersected at the selected plane.
Activate intersection.
This function activates or deactivates an intersection. The function is automatically activated

when an intersection is selected with the mouse tool or via the drop down.

Graphics
Invert intersection.
This function inverts the intersection.
Enter offset.
This function moves the intersection plane with the entered offset.
Load Load intersection.
This function loads saved intersections. The intersections can be saved in the intersection
management.
23.4.2 Manage intersections
This function allows you to manage intersections.
1. Display the display options.
2. The current intersection can be saved by clicking on Intersections with the right mouse button.
3. By clicking on an existing intersection with the right mouse button, it can be deleted, renamed, loaded or
saved (in doing so, the selected intersection is overwritten with the currently active intersection).
Intersections can be created and loaded in the graphics ribbon.

Graphics
23.5 Select elements

23.5.1 Select elements
This function selects elements on the CAD model.
Multiple selection is possible using the Ctrl key.
3. Click on Select elements.
4. Select the desired elements by clicking on the corresponding surface.
23.5.2 Cancel selection
This function cancels the selection of elements that have been selected using the function Select elements.

Graphics
3. Click on Cancel selection.
The selection of the elements is canceled.
23.5.3 Fade selected elements out
This function hides all elements that have been selected using the function Select elements.
Execute the function Select elements before using this function. The hidden elements are not
deleted.
They can be displayed again using the function Show all elements.

Graphics
3. Click on Fade selected elements out.
The selected elements are hidden.
23.5.4 Show all elements
This function displays all hidden elements again.
3. Click on Show all elements.
All hidden elements are displayed again.
23.5.5 Invert selection
This function inverts the selection made using the function Select elements.
Thus all previously not selected elements will be selected.
Execute the function Select elements prior to this function.

Graphics
3. Click on Invert selection.
All not selected elements are selected.
23.6 Insert auxiliary elements

23.6.1 Insert point
This function allows you to create points (without direction).
The auxiliary element Point can then be used as nominal position for the measurement of points. The underlying
CAD model determines the nominal direction.
The inserted auxiliary elements are saved in a standard auxiliary file with the file extension .sax and linked with the
work piece. The link is displayed in the work window Database under Graphics / Models.
2. Activate the contextual tab Edit.
3. Click on the command button Point.

Graphics
4. Select whether the point should be created with the method Input or 1-Click Standard.
Select Input, if you want to take coordinate values for the point from a list or drawing.
Select 1-Click Standard, if you want to click the coordinate values for the point on an imported
CAD model.
5. Using the element selection tool the desired element can be clicked directly on the CAD model
when selecting a click method.
6. When you have selected the method Input enter the coordinate values for the auxiliary element Point
or edit the coordinate values.
The position can either be entered as Cartesian value or using the button via position dialog.
7. Using the element selection tool the desired element can be clicked directly on the CAD model or on
an element of the actual measurement.
The nominal values of this element are entered by clicking on the element in the actual measurement.
For elements without nominal values, the actual values are used.
8. Enter a name for the element in the group Attributes.
If the element selection tool is activated you can enter the Name by clicking points on the CAD
model.
The Name is optional and is used as ID, when using the inserted element for the measurement.
9. Click on Insert.
23.6.2 Insert point-vector
This function allows you to create the auxiliary element Point-Vector (point with direction).
The auxiliary element Point-Vector can be used as nominal value during the measurement.

Graphics
3. Click on the command button Point-Vector.
4. Select whether the point-vector should be created with the method Input, 1-Click Standard, 1-Click
Circle or Intersection.
Select Input, if you want to take coordinate values for the point-vector from a list or drawing.
Select 1-Click Standard, if you want to click the coordinate values for the point-vector on an
imported CAD model.
Select 1-Click Circle, if you want to identify the coordinate values for the point-vector on an
imported CAD model by clicking a circular edge. The calculated center of the circle results in the
coordinate values.
Application: Measuring point with probing mode Centered.
Select Intersection, if you want to identify the coordinate values for the point-vector on an
imported CAD model by intersecting the CAD model in preset direction.

Graphics
6. Is the method Intersection selected, the group Method parameters is shown.
Select the coordinate axis, in which direction the intersection is to be calculated.
The axis of the intersection direction will be deactivated and you can enter axis values for the two other
axes.
7. Enter coordinate values for the two other axes.
The position can either be entered as Cartesian value or using the button via position dialog.
8. Using the element selection tool the desired axis can be clicked directly on the CAD model or
on an element of the current measurement.
9. Click to calculate the intersection with the model on the basis of the given parameters.
The value of the third axis and the direction of the point vector are determined by the intersection point
with the CAD model along the intersection direction.
10. Enter coordinate values for the auxiliary element Point-Vector, if you have selected the method Input,
1-Click Standard or 1-Click Circle or edit existing coordinate values.
The position and direction can be entered directly as Cartesian value or using the button via position
dialog respective the direction dialog.
an element of the current measurement.
Clicking on an element of the current measurement will adopt the nominal values of this element. For
elements without nominal values, the actual values will be adopted.
model.
13. Click on Insert.
23.6.3 Insert circle
This function allows you to create circles as auxiliary elements.
The auxiliary element Circle can be used as nominal value during the measurement.

Graphics
3. Click on the command button Circle.
4. Select whether the circle should be created with the method Input, 1-Click Standard, 2-Click Reference
— Circle or 1-Click Point.
Select Input, if you want to take coordinate values for the circle from a list or drawing.
Select 1-Click Standard, if you want to click the coordinate values for the circle on an imported
CAD model.
Select 2-Click Reference — Circle, if the 1-Click Standard method does not work because the
transition between the reference surface and the circle is rounded or the reference surface does
not enclose the complete circle.
Proceeding: Click on a CAD surface or a given CAD point vector and then click a point on the
circle.
Application: Circles with rounded edges or bended reference surfaces.
Select 1-Click Point, if you want to enter the coordinate values for the circle by clicking a given
auxiliary element, point or point vector.
Application: Measuring welding points with a PHOENIX sensor.
6. When you have selected the method Input enter the coordinate values for the auxiliary element Circle
or edit existing coordinate values.

Graphics
model.
9. Click on Insert.
23.6.4 Insert cylinder
This function allows you to create cylinders as auxiliary elements.
The auxiliary element Cylinder can be used as nominal value during the measurement.
3. Click on the command button Cylinder.
4. Select whether the cylinder should be created with the method Input or 2-Click Circle — Length.

Graphics
Select Input, if you want to take coordinate values for the cylinder from a list or drawing.
Select 2-Click Circle — Length, if you want to click the coordinate values for the cylinder on an
imported CAD model.
Proceeding: Click a point on the circle followed by a click for the length.
Application: Using cylindrical measuring accessories.
6. When you have selected the method Input enter the coordinate values for the auxiliary element
Cylinder or edit existing coordinate values.
model.
9. Click on Insert.
23.6.5 Insert sphere
This function allows you to create spheres as auxiliary elements.
The auxiliary element Sphere can be used as nominal value during the measurement.

Graphics
3. Click on the command button Sphere.
4. Select whether the sphere should be created with the method Input or 1-Click Circle.
Select Input, if you want to take coordinate values for the sphere from a list or drawing.
Select 1-Click Circle, if you want to identify the coordinate values for the sphere on an imported
CAD model by clicking a circle (border in CAD model or auxiliary element circle). You can enter a
value for the diameter.
6. When you have selected the method Input enter the coordinate values for the auxiliary element Sphere
or edit existing coordinate values.
model.
9. Click on Insert.

Graphics
23.6.6 Insert rectangle
This function allows you to create rectangles.
The auxiliary element Rectangle can be used as nominal value for the measurement of rectangles.
3. Click on the command button Rectangle.
4. Select whether the rectangle should be created with the method Input, 1-Click Standard or 5-Click
Reference — Lines.
Select Input, if you want to take coordinate values for the rectangle from a list or drawing.
Select 1-Click Standard, if you want to click the coordinate values for the rectangle on an
imported CAD model.
Select 5-Click Reference — Lines, if the 1-Click Standard method does not work because the
transition from the reference surface to the rectangle is rounded or the reference surface does
not enclose the complete rectangle.
Proceeding: Click a point on the reference surface or an existing CAD point vector then click a
point on the first / second / third / fourth line.
Application: Rectangles, which lie in a reference plane consisting of several CAD surfaces.

Graphics
6. When you have selected the method Input enter the coordinate values for the auxiliary element
Rectangle or edit existing coordinate values.
model.
9. Click on Insert.
23.6.7 Insert slot
This function allows you to create slots.
The auxiliary element Slot can be used as nominal position for the measurement of slots.
3. Click on the command button Slot.

Graphics
4. Select whether the slot should be created with the method Input, 1-Click Standard or 3-Click Reference
— Circles.
Select Input, if you want to take coordinate values for the slot from a list or drawing.
Select 1-Click Standard, if you want to click the coordinate values for the slot on an imported
CAD model.
Select 3-Click Reference-Circles, if the 1-Click Standard method does not work because the
transition from the reference surface to the slot is rounded or the reference surface does not
enclose the complete slot.
Proceeding: Click a point on the reference surface or an existing CAD point vector then click a
point on the first and second semicircle of the slot.
6. When you have selected the method Input enter the coordinate values for the auxiliary element Slot or
correct still existing coordinate values.
The position and direction can be entered directly Cartesian or using the button via position dialog
respective the direction dialog.
model.
9. Click on Insert.
23.6.8 Insert edge point
This function allows you to create edge points as auxiliary elements.
The auxiliary element Edge point can be used as nominal value during the measurement.

Graphics
3. Click on the command button Edge point.
4. Select whether the edge point should be created with the method Input or 1-Click Standard.
Select Input, if you want to take coordinate values for the edge point from a list or drawing.
Select 1-Click Standard, if you want to click the coordinate values for the edge point on an
imported CAD model.
6. When you have selected the method Input enter the coordinate values for the auxiliary element Edge
point or edit existing coordinate values.

Graphics
model.
9. Click on Insert.
23.6.9 Insert curve
This function allows you to create a curve. These curves can then be used as nominal curves for the curve
measurement.
Curves are created with an intersection between a previously imported CAD model and a plane or a cylinder.
Created curves are saved in an auxiliary file with the file extension .sax and linked with the work piece. The link is
displayed in the database work window under Graphics / Models.
3. Click on Curve.
4. Select if you want to create the curve via Intersection with plane or via Intersection with cylinder.

Graphics
Select Intersection with plane if you want to measure an element of the type Curve on the
created curve.
Intersection curves created via Intersection with plane as well via Intersection with cylinder can
be used for the measurement of elements of the type Point with repetition.
5. Define the element (depending on the previous selection: plane or cylinder) to be intersected with the
CAD model.
The intersection element can be clicked using the mouse tool on the model. Alternatively, it can be
selected via the selection field.
The element can also be defined manually using the input fields x, y, z, i, j, k and when using
Intersection with cylinder also Ø can be entered or edited after the selection.
6. It is possible to enter an offset for the defined intersection plane.
7. Select the desired number of intersection planes.
8. Enter the distance between the individual intersection planes in case you entered more than one
intersection plane.
9. Click on Insert.
Curves can be limited to certain surfaces of the model:
· Hide surfaces – curves are created only on the displayed model surfaces
· Select surfaces – curves are only created on the selected surfaces if a selection is active
23.7 Mirror CAD model

This function allows mirroring CAD models.

Graphics
3. Click on Mirror CAD model.
4. Define a mirror plane on which the CAD model is to be mirrored on.
5. Define the storage location where the mirrored models are to be saved to.
6. Define a name for the assembly group file (an assembly file receives the file extension *.sag). An assembly group
file receives the file extension ".sag. If an assembly file with the same name already exists at the chosen
storage location, the file will be marked in red.
If the assembly group file (.sag) is imported into the current or another work piece subsequently
to mirroring, all mirrored CAD models are imported at the same time. Thus the mirrored models
do not have to be selected and imported individually.
By importing the assembly file, you also ensures that the CAD models have the same reference
IDs as in the non-mirrored assembly. This is important for running mirrored programs because
certain program sentences reference to the CAD model.
7. Define the names for the mirrored CAD models by clicking directly on it on the list. The suggested name is
combines the name of the un-mirrored CAD model and the selected mirror plane. If a file with the same
name already exists in the defined storage location, the corresponding file is marked in the list. If a file with
the same name already exists at the chosen storage location, the file will be marked in red.
8. Click on Mirror.
The assembly file and the mirrored CAD models are saved in the defined storage location. They are not
automatically imported and therefore not yet visible in the graphics. The CAD models can be imported into
any work piece.
The mirrored CAD model can be read and edited in older versions of WM | Quartis and
Metrosoft CM by activating the option Save data in downwards compatible format in Converter
options for CAD files.
23.8 Edit graphics

23.8.1 Select elements
This function selects elements on the CAD model.
Multiple selection is possible using the CTRL button.

Graphics
3. Click on Select elements.
4. Select the desired elements by clicking on the corresponding surface.
23.8.2 Cancel selection
This function cancels the selection of elements that have been selected using the function Select elements..

Graphics
3. Click on Cancel selection.
The selection of the elements is canceled.

Graphics
23.8.3 Invert selection
This function inverts the selection made using the function Select elements.
Thus all previously not selected elements will be selected.
3. Click on Invert selection.
All not selected elements are selected.
23.8.4 Delete selected elements
This function deletes all elements that have been selected using the function Select elements.
If CAD models were selected, the selected elements are deleted from the CAD model. The CAD model can then be
saved.
If geometry elements were selected, the selected elements are deleted from the database.

Graphics
3. Click on Delete selected elements.
All selected elements are deleted.

24 Quick Selection Table

24.1 Information about the quick selection table
Programs can be started fast and easily with one button click on the quick selection table. This can be done across
several databases, i.e. the required database/program does not have to be loaded previously.
Using the batch processing several programs can selected, which are then executed automatically one after the
other, without having the user start each program individually.
24.2 Create new quick selection table

This function creates a new quick selection table.
2. Click on New.
WM | Quartis ® R2018-2 Quick Selection Table 761

4. Enter a short description for the quick selection table.
5. Select if the quick selection table should contain 4, 9 or 12 buttons.
6. If a Homepage is created, check the corresponding check box.
The homepage can be directly opened using the function Call homepage.
Only one table can be configured as homepage.
If a new table is selected as homepage, the old table loses this status.
7. Click on OK.

24.3 Open quick selection table

This function opens an existing quick selection table from the active system database.
2. Click on Open.
4. Select the desired quick selection table.
The selected quick selection table can be defined as homepage in the dialog.
Only one table can be defined as homepage; thus an already existing homepage loses its status.

24.4 Show quick access for program start

This function displays the Quick Selection Table window in the workspace.
4. The Quick Selection Table window is now displayed in the workspace.
In case no quick selection table has been defined yet, an empty work window is opened.

24.5 Edit buttons

24.5.1 Configure button
With this function a button on the quick selection table is configured.
1. Activate the work window Quick Selection Table.
2. Activate the contextual tab Quick Selection Table.
3. Select the desired button on the quick selection table.
4. Click on the command button Configure.
This function can also be called by a right mouse click on a button.

5. Select the function to be executed by the button.
· Execute program (a program is executed by clicking on the button)
· Call homepage (the quick selection table that is defined as homepage is displayed by clicking on the button)
· Jump to previous page (the previous quick selection table is displayed by clicking on the button)
· Open quick selection table (a quick selection table is loaded by clicking on the button) .
6. Define if a text or image is to be displayed on the button.
7. Change to the tab Parameter.

The tab Parameter is only available for the functions Execute program and Open quick
selection table. If the function Open quick selection table is selected, you can select the desired
quick selection table in the tab Parameter.
8. When configuring a new button, the currently active measurement database is displayed.
Only programs from the current measurement database can be assigned to the button. If you
want to assign a program from a different measurement database to this button, the
corresponding measurement database has to be loaded first.
9. Select an existing work piece in the drop down menu ( ) or in the selection dialog ( ).
10. Select the program to be executed (or the quick selection table to be opened) in the drop down menu ( )
or in the selection dialog ( )
11. Define a quick selection code if desired. By doing this, the action assigned to the button can also be started
by entering this code (e.g. via a barcode reader).
If barcodes are used to start a program, you need to consider that often only certain digits of the
read code determine the program to be executed.
The first digits of the code could, for example, represent the batch number and have no influence
on the program to be started. For these cases, a filter function is available that allows you to
determine which digits are to be considered.
When configuring a button, the unfiltered code can be defined.
The information about the starting program must be contained in the first 254 characters of the
read text, since while inserting the content into the field all characters after the 254th character will
be cut and ignored.
The filter is only used at the time of execution
12. Select the execution mode.
· New measurement (the program is executed in a new measurement, otherwise the current measurement is
always overwritten)
· Query user defined properties (before the program is started, the user defined properties are queried. If
several program are executed one after the other using batch processing, the user defined properties are queried
directly on after the other when activating the quick selection button in order to subsequently allow an automatic
execution of the programs)

11. Change to the tab Text.
12. Enter the text you want to be displayed.
The text can be centered by activating the corresponding check box.
It is also possible to change the font size.
13. Change to the tab Image.
14. Select the image file.
It is also possible to select an audio or video file which will be played on the quick selection table.
The following formats are supported:
· Graphics: *.bmp, *.gif *.ico, *.jpg, *.jpeg, *.wmf, *.png

· Audio: *.wma, *.mid *.mp3, *.mi, *.wav

· Video: *.avi, *.wmv, *.mpeg, *.mpg
15. Select if the image should be stretched (image is stretched to button size) or scaled (the proportions of the image
are kept) .
16. Click on OK.
24.5.2 Delete button
This function deletes the configuration of the current active button.
3. Select the button to be deleted.

24.6 Use quick selection code

24.6.1 Enter quick selection code
Quick selection codes allow selecting quick selection buttons via the input (e.g. a barcode reader). Thereby it is not
important if this button is on the currently opened quick selection table or not.
With confirming the input, respectively reading of a code, the action (execute program or open quick selection table)
assigned to the corresponding button is executed.
A quick selection code is assigned to a button when configuring or changing buttons on the quick selection tables.
3. Enter or read the desired quick selection code.
The quick selection code can contain up to 2335 characters. The first 254 characters must contain
the information about the program to be started.
4. Input via the keyboard is confirmed either by clicking on the command button Start or by pressing the
enter key.
If the quick selection code was read using a code reader, this step might - depending on the code
reader configuration - not apply.

5. Confirm the action called via the quick selection button with OK or abort the call with ESC.
24.6.2 Limit barcode
Barcodes often contain more information than is required for the use of quick selection readers.
In order to filter out the required information to call the quick selection table from the entered quick selection code,
the function limit barcode can be used.
3. Click on Filter.
4. Define the function that will limit the entered quick selection code in the expression editor. For example
by using the function SUBSTR.
You can also copy and insert the expressions from the topic filter expression examples for the
expression editor into the expression editor.

The filter for the barcode limitation has also an effect on the defined quick selection code entered
during the quick selection button configuration.
24.7 Use the batch mode

24.7.1 Activate/Deactivate batch mode recording
The batch mode enables several programs, which are configured on different buttons, to be executed in succession
automatically.
Therefore the sequence of key strokes is recorded.
4. Click on the desired buttons while the batch mode is activated.

The sequence of these key strokes is automatically recorded.
The batch mode is deactivated by clicking once more on the command button Record. However,
the sequence of the key strokes is kept.
24.7.2 Execute batch mode
This function executes the saved key strokes as a batch.
Before the batch is executed, a window appears with a list of the stored programs.
The user can use this either to confirm the execution or to abort the batch processing.

4. Before the batch is executed, a dialog is displayed that contains a list of all saved programs that are
going to be executed.
Click on OK.
The batch is executed.
If during a batch processing a new work piece is loaded, then Measurement 1 is automatically
selected. In certain circumstances it can be overwritten.
To avoid this, the option New measurement has to be activated under Parameter while
configuring the button. In doing so a new measurement is created when a new work piece is
loaded
24.7.3 Delete batch mode
This function deletes the saved sequence of key strokes (batch).

24.8 Change view

24.8.1 Call homepage
This function calls the quick selection that has been defined as homepage.
An existing quick selection table can be defined as homepage with the function Load quick selection table.
3. Click on the command button Homepage.

24.8.2 Jump to previous page
This function calls the previous (if available) quick selection table.
It is possible to go back through several quick selection tables.
3. Click on the command button Back.
24.8.3 Activate/Deactivate text display
This function switches all buttons of the quick selection table to text display (if text is available).

3. Click on the command button Text display.
By clicking once again on the button Text Display, the configured display is restored.
24.8.4 Close quick selection table window
This function closes the work window Quick Selection Table.

Statistics
25 Statistics
25.1 Information about the statistics
WM | Quartis offers a wide range of functions for the statistical evaluation of characteristics.
The trend diagram displays the actual values over all measurements and allows an evaluation of the production
processes. All actual values are classified into a selectable amount of classes and displayed in the histogram. The
data page displays all statistical relevant data in one view.
Statistical functions for process controlling are integrated with the SPC ruling charts for mean value, range and
standard deviation as well as with the flexible random sampling scope.
In connection with a superior quality system WM | Quartis additionally offers the possibility to export the statistics
data into the Q-DAS format.
25.2 Mathematical fundamentals of statistics

The statistical evaluation integrated in Quartis is based on M4 according to DIN 55319 [N5].
The formulas used are defined as follows.
· Concept definitions
· Capability indices
· Sample size
25.2.1 Concept definitions
Symbol Description Formula
OSG Upper specification limit OSG = nominal value + upper tolerance
USG Lower specification limit USG = nominal value + lower tolerance
Current measured value
n Sample size (population if m=1)
m Amount of samples
Arithmetic population mean value
Standard population deviation
Process mean value

(mean value of mean values of individual samples)
WM | Quartis ® R2018-2 Statistics 778

Statistics
Variances of individual samples
Estimated value of standard deviation

(mean value of the individual sample variances)
25.2.2 Capability indices
Cm Machine capability (machine performance)
Cmk Machine capability taking into account the position of the mean value
Pp Temporary process performance (process performance)
Ppk Temporary process performance taking into account the position of the mean value
Cp Process capability (process capacity)
Cpk Process capability taking into account the position of the mean value
Process capability [Cp/ Cpk] and process performance [Pp / Ppk] (depending on samples)
Machine capability (independent from samples)

Statistics
Capability indexes of unilateral upwards tolerated features
Estimators of position and scattering
The scattering range limits are dependent on the model distribution.
For features with a "natural boundary" at zero, the folded normal distribution or Rayleigh distribution is used.
The classification which distribution method is used depends on the physical properties of the feature.
The formulas used to estimate the scattering range limits (Quantile) Q99.865 % and Q0.135 % for the folded normal
distribution/Rayleigh distribution are derived from the group standard VW 10130.
Model distribution: Normal distribution
Machine capability [Cm / Cmk]
Calculation
method:

Statistics
Process capability [Cp / Cpk] and temporary process capability [Pp / Ppk]
Calculation
method:
Model distribution: Folded normal distribution
applies to the following features: Straightness, Flatness, Roundness, Cylindricity, Line profile, Surface profile,
Parallelism, Perpendicularity, Angularity, Symmetry and Form deviation.
Calculation
method:

Statistics
Calculation
method:

Statistics
Model distribution: Rayleigh distribution
applies to the following features: Position, Coaxiality / Concentricity, Runout, Axial runout, Position d
and Position B (unilateral)
Calculation
method:

Statistics
Calculation
method:

Statistics
25.2.3 Sample size

This field defines how many single values are to be combined into a sample. A machine capability evaluation
automatically leads to a sample size of 1. A process capability required a sample size of 2 or more.
The assignment of an actual value to a sample is carried out due to the measurement number.
Measurement 1 is always taken as start value. If an actual value is missing or it was removed by
the actual value filter, the corresponding sample contains less values. Samples with less than two
values are ignored.
Example:
Sample size = 5 Actual values of measurement 1..5 = sample 1
Actual values of measurement 6..10 = sample 2
etc.
25.3 Statistical evaluation of features

This function displays the Statistics window in the workspace.
4. The Statistics window is displayed in the workspace.

Statistics
25.4 Adjust the statistical evaluation

25.4.1 Adjust filter settings
This function selects which features and which measurements, respectively which actual values are to be considered
to the statistical evaluation.
1. Activate the work window Statistics.
2. Activate the contextual tab Statistics.

Statistics
4. The features to be filtered can be selected in the tab Feature Filter.
5. Select if the features to be filtered are limited via a manual selection. All selected features are displayed in
the statistics.
6. Select if the features to be filtered is limited via a feature deviation.
Features with a deviation out of

Only features are displayed that have a deviation out of the defined range.
Features with deviation within

Only features are displayed that have a deviation within the defined range.
7. Select if the features without tolerance zone are ignored (all features with no tolerance zone are not displayed in
the statistics) .
8. Switch to the tab Measurement filter.
There are three criteria's for the filtering of the actual values available. These filters can be combined in such
a way, that a measurement respectively it's actual values have to meet the defined conditions in order to be
considered for the evaluation
9. Select if the Measurement filter is activated. The measurement filter is deactivated by default. This means
all measuring values are evaluated.
10. Select if the single values are filtered based on their affiliation with a measurement. Optional a measurement
selection (the sequence of the measurement selection is taken into consideration in the trend diagram), a
measurement range (from ... to) (when the dialog is called for the first time or after a work piece change, the
suggested measurement range reaches over all measurements existing in the work piece, extended by the measurement
range that contains actual values for the first feature) or a selection of the last measurement (N) (the last actual
value (K = largest measurement number) of each individual feature is used as basis. Therefore the range reaches from
the measurement (K-N+1) to K) can be selected.

Statistics
11. Select if single values are to be filtered over a defined time interval (the range is initialized with the
measurements existing in the work piece. As actual values of features remain even without the original measurement
and are useable, it might be necessary to extend the range manually) .
12. Select if single values are to be filtered over a quality range. The percentage value refers to the total
utilization of the tolerance.
13. Click on OK.
25.4.2 Select evaluation method
With this function the evaluation method for the statistics can be selected.
Statistical evaluations can be done for various capability indices.
The following methods are available:
Evaluation method
Machine capability Cm/Cm
Preliminary process capability Pp/PpK
Process capability Cp/Cpk
3. Click below Evaluation method on and select the desired method of evaluation.

Statistics
25.4.3 Change random sample scope
This function defines how many individual values are to be grouped for a random sample scope.
A machine capability evaluation (Cm\Cmk) automatically leads to a random sample scope of 1, a

process capability evaluation requires a random scope sample of at least 2.
3. Click on the command button Random sample scope and adjust the default values using .

Statistics
25.5 Display diagrams

25.5.1 Adjust diagram settings
This function allows you to adjust the settings of the statistical diagrams.
4. Set the desired settings.
5. Click on OK.

Statistics
The following settings are available:
Overview
Select which diagrams are to be displayed on what position on the overall view.
View
The trend diagram can be displayed as bar or line diagram. Furthermore the histogram classes and the action limits
for the view can be defined.
Auxiliary lines
Select which auxiliary lines are to be drawn into the statistical diagrams.
Text output
Select what additional text is to be displayed above the statistical diagrams.
Minimum and maximum values, as well as the number of features outside the tolerance are always displayed.
Statistics overview
Settings for the statistics overview can be set here.
It is possible to select the number of features which are to be displayed in the window as well as the maximum
range of values. Furthermore the network grid can also be displayed.
25.5.2 Change limits
Depending on the evaluation method, the limits for the corresponding capability index can be entered with this
function.
A feature within these limits (larger or equal limit) is displayed in green in the feature overview. If the feature is
outside of these limits (smaller than limit) it is displayed in red.
The outside bar represents the capability index Cm, Pp or Cp, the inner bar represents the capability index Cmk, Ppk
or Cpk.

Statistics
3. Enter the desired values for the limits directly into the input fields below Limits.
25.5.3 Change diagram limits
This function allows you to adjust the diagram range of the perpendicular axis (ordinate) for the trend diagram,
histogram and x bar chart.
Diagram options
Dispersion of the process The diagram covers the range from Q99.865 % - Q0.135 %.
Min..Max The diagram covers the range between the minimum and maximum feature.
Band The diagram covers the same range for all features around the entered
target value.
The range can be defined in the input fields below.
Tolerance zone The diagram covers the whole tolerance zone.
Action limits The diagram covers the action limits.
The action limits can be defined in the statistics settings.

Statistics
3. Select the desired option using and adjust the values of the field below if needed.
25.5.4 Display overview
On the tab Overall view 3 diagrams can be displayed. Thus the most important diagrams can be displayed directly
in one tab.
The diagrams to be displayed in the overall view can be defined in the diagram settings.

Statistics
25.5.5 Display data page
On the data page information for the selected feature such as part data, feature data and statistic data is displayed.
The output of the capability index depends on the selected evaluation method.

Statistics
25.5.6 Display trend diagram
The trend chart is displayed for the selected feature.
This chart is based on individual values; sampling schemes are not taken into account.
The trend diagram displays the sequence of the actual values over the evaluated measurements
You can choose between a linear regression or a bar chart as presentation format in the diagram settings
Line diagram

Statistics
Bar diagram

Statistics
25.5.7 Display histogram
The histogram is displayed for the selected feature.
This diagram is based on individual values; sampling schemes are not taken into account.
The histogram shows the distribution of the actual values around a mean value. The individual values are grouped in
a configurable number of classes which can be defined in the statistics settings.
The length of the bar is an indicator of the frequency of the values within this class.
In a normal distribution of values, the theoretical distribution function is drawn in red (Gaussian curve).
The theoretical distribution functions Folded normal distribution or Rayleigh distribution are displayed for
features with "natural limits" at zero.

Statistics
25.5.8 Display X bar chart
The x-bar process control chart is displayed for the selected feature as long process capability (Cp/Cpk) or
preliminary process capability (Pp/Ppk) is selected as evaluation method.
This control chart is based on the sampling scheme.
This diagram is mainly examined along with the R or S process control chart.
The amount of values which were selected in the random sampling scope is located within a bar. The length of the
bar indicates where the minimal and maximal value of this random sample is located. Furthermore a blue square
displays the mean value of the random sampling scope.

Statistics
25.5.9 Display R card
The R process control card is displayed for the selected feature as long process capability (Cp/Cpk) or preliminary
process capability (Pp/Ppk) is selected as evaluation method.
This control chart is based on the sampling scheme.
Each value indicates the range (R) from a random sampling scope.

Statistics
25.5.10 Display s card
The S process control chart is displayed for the selected feature as long process capability (Cp/Cpk) or preliminary
process capability (Pp/Ppk) is selected as evaluation method.
This control card is based on the sampling scheme. Each value indicates the standard deviation of a random sample
scope.

Statistics
25.5.11 Export diagram
This function exports a diagram as *.wmf file (image).
2. Select the desired diagram.
3. Open the context menu with the right mouse button and select the entry Export diagram.
Select saving position and file name in the displayed dialog.

Statistics
25.5.12 Copy diagram
This function copies a diagram into the Windows clipboard.
3. Open the context menu with the right mouse button and select the entry Copy diagram.
The diagram can only be copied from the Windows clipboard into an external program (e.g.
Word).

Statistics
25.5.13 Print diagram
This function prints the diagram.
3. Open the context menu with the right mouse button and select the entry Print overview.

Statistics
25.6 Change view

25.6.1 Refresh statistics
This function refreshes the whole statistics. This is needed when new features were added or features were deleted.
3. Click on the command button Refresh.
25.6.2 Close statistics window
This function closes the work window Statistics.

Statistics
25.7 Export features in Q-DAS format

This function exports features from the database into a Q-DAS file.
The data then can be imported and evaluated with the statistics package QS-STAT from the company Q-DAS
2. Click on Export.
3. Click on Q-DAS data..

Statistics
4. Select the features to be exported. If all features are to be exported, the check box Always all features can
be activated.
5. Select the Q-DAS key file (in this file the Q-DAS fields to be exported are configured).
This key file (Q-DAS field configuration) can be customized with the button.
6. Adjust, if needed, the storage position and file name of the Q-DAS file.
database.

Statistics
You can choose between *.dfq format (description and values in one file) or *.dfd, *.dfx format (description
and values in two files) for the export.
7. Define if all measurements or only the current measurement are exported.
If only the current measurement is exported, the following additional options can be selected: attach to file
(the data is attached to the selected Q-DAS file) , new file (a new file with the same name and next measurement
number is created) or overwrite file (the selected Q-DAS file is overwritten with the new values) .
8. Select the export format (compressed/uncompressed) and the K0002 attribute with missing measurement
values. If the attribute 255 (measurement allocation remains) is selected, the gaps with missing measurement
values are not filled. If the attribute 256 (Measurement allocation does not remain) is selected, the gaps with
missing measurement values are filed with the next following measurement values.
9. Click on OK.

Feature Data
26 Feature Data
26.1 Display Feature Data
With this function the feature data window is displayed in the work window.
3. Click on Feature Data.
4. The Feature Data window is displayed in the workspace.
26.2 Record feature data
With this function features, which are created subsequently, can be displayed directly in the work window.
Thus a control of the features is possible without creating a report.
Make sure that the work window Feature Data is displayed in the workspace.
1. Activate the work window Feature Data.
WM | Quartis ® R2018-2 Feature Data 808

Feature Data
2. Activate the contextual tab Feature Data.
As long as this command button is activated all features, which are evaluated by using the tab Evaluate, are
now recorded.
As soon as the command button is deactivated, no more features will be recorded.
26.3 Delete feature data

This function deletes recorded feature data in the feature data window.
All recorded feature data is deleted from the feature data window.
26.4 Check feature data

This display gives a fast overview about the status of the recorded feature data in form of a signal light.

Feature Data
All features are within a defined warning limit.
At least one feature is outside a defined warning limit.
At least one feature is outside a defined tolerance.
Below the light color are displayed the associated numbers of feature data in the actual work window Feature data.
In the actual work window Feature data the feature data lying outside the tolerance limit is marked in red, those
lying outside the warning limit are marked in yellow.

Feature Data
26.5 Filter feature data

With this function only feature data is displayed, which lie outside its tolerance.
As long as this button is active, only those features are displayed, which lie outside a defined tolerance.
Is the button deactivated all features are displayed again.
26.6 Close feature data window

This function closes the work window Feature Data.

Feature Data
The work window is closed but the recorded features will not be deleted.
The recorded features are displayed again as soon as the work window is opened again.
26.7 Display feature data during program execution (Signal light)

WM | Quartis provides the option to display the recorded features data when a program is executed. The program
sequence stops at sentences of type Check feature data and expects a user action.
When the mode Recording is active for writing a program, you can record the following functions by clicking the
corresponding icon on the context sensitive tab Feature data:
Start recording feature data
Stop recording feature data

Feature Data
Delete feature data
Check feature data (outside tolerance)
If at least one feature lies outside its tolerance limit, the program sequence stops and the
work window Feature data opens.
Check feature data (outside warning limit)
If at least one feature lies outside the defined warning limit, the program sequence stops
and the work window Feature data opens.
Check feature data
Program sequence always stops and the work window Feature data opens.

Offline
27 Offline
27.1 Virtual joystick, click probe point on CAD model and simulation speed
The machine can be operated in offline mode using the virtual joystick.
These functions are only displayed if WM | Quartis is in offline mode(not connected to the
machine) .
1. Virtual joystick
2. Click probe point on CAD model
3. Simulation speed
Virtual joystick
The virtual joystick can be operated in several different ways.
Clicking in axis direction
The clicked axis direction (arrow) is colorized yellow.
One click moves the machine 1 mm.
If the Ctrl key is pressed at the same time, the machine is moved 0.1 mm.
If the Shift key is pressed at the same time, the machine moves 10 mm.
If the Alt key is pressed at the same time in multiple machine mode, all configured machines are moved
simultaneously.
WM | Quartis ® R2018-2 Offline 814

Offline
Positioning in X, Y or Z direction
Position the mouse pointer on the middle button of the virtual joystick.
Depending on the position of the mouse pointer on the button, the X and Y or the Z direction is blended out. Now
draw the virtual joystick in the desired direction by holding down the left mouse button and moving the mouse in
the corresponding direction.
The speed can be set with the slider on the right side.
The current position of the machine is displayed in the coordinate display below the virtual
joystick.
Click probe point on CAD model
If this command button is activated you can adopt a measuring point directly from the CAD model by clicking on it.
Simulation speed
The speed of the machine can be set with the slider.
27.2 Simulation of a program process

In order to simulate a running program, a scattering distribution for the element probe points can be entered.
If the machine should be operated in real-time, the slide control next to the joystick has to be set to 1.0.
WM | Quartis ® R2018-2 Offline 815

General dialogs
28 General dialogs
28.1 Expression Editor
The expression editor can be called in different locations (e.g. during the input of user specific features or element
IDs, in report text fields or when defining file paths) in WM | Quartis.
Using the editor, expressions (variables) predefined in WM | Quartis or system information can be output.
Furthermore it is possible to output and calculate element data with the help of functions.
28.1.1 Output system information
System information can be output in WM | Quartis using the expression editor.
The corresponding parent variables can be found on tab Fields of the expression editor.
In addition to the field value you can output the name and a description of the field.
This is particularly useful for user defined properties that are output in the report. For example, if the name of a
user defined property is embedded in a report template, you can change the name if necessary without having to
modify the report template.
The field information (meta data) is accessed using the following notation:
{Field}.<Field info>
You can output the following information via <Field info>:
name Name of the field (localised title)
description Description of the field
value Value of the field (corresponds to the field content without extension <Field info>)
WM | Quartis ® R2018-2 General dialogs 816

General dialogs
1. The variable can be inserted into the field on the top right with a double click.

General dialogs
2. If multiple expressions should be inserted each after the other, a + has to be inserted in between them.
If regular text should be entered, it has to be set between apostrophes '.....'.
3. Define which meta data should be output.
4. The field Result displays how the expression (e.g. in a text field) will be output.
5. In the field Description a description of the variable marked in the left part of the editor is displayed.
6. Click on OK.
The result must be of a defined data type. If this is not the case, a corresponding hint is displayed
in the result field. The required data type depends on where the expression is used. In a report
text field for example, the result can contain letters. However, if a nominal value is calculated in an
expression, the result can only contain numbers.
28.1.2 Output element and feature values
The output of previously measured element and feature values can be defined in the expression editor.
1. Switch to the tab Data.
Depending on where the editor is opened, this tab may not be available.
2. Select if you want to output element or feature data.
3. Select the element or feature you want to use to output a value.
4. Select the desired element or feature component with a double click.
5. The expression is now inserted on the right side.

General dialogs
6. The value of the expression is displayed in the result field.
7. Confirm your input with OK.
Feature information is, depending on the feature type, saved in the components 1, 2 or 3.
28.1.3 Offset element and feature values against each other
1. Switch to the tab Data.
2. Select if you want to use an element or feature component.
3. Select an element component.
4. Enter an arithmetic operation sign.
5. Select another element component according to step 1 - 2.
6. Click on OK.
Feature information is, depending on the feature type, saved in the components 1, 2 or 3.

General dialogs
28.1.4 Assignment of feature components

Feature information is, depending on the feature type, saved in the components 1,2, or 3.
The following tables show which information is stored in what component.
If a component that has no value is selected in the expression editor, a corresponding error message is displayed in
the result field.
Component assignment for AUTO features:
AUTO feature x y z d A B M M2 M3 R
Ælβ b li
Component 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1
Component assignment for features with more than 1 component
Component 1 Component 2 Component 3
Position Cartesian x y z
Position polar R ax Bxy
Position dAB d A B
Angle 2D XY YZ ZX
Size Length Width Length 2
Straightness Straightness across the Straightness with limited -

entire length of the line evaluation range
Flatness Flatness across the entire Flatness with limited -

plane evaluation range

General dialogs
28.1.5 Using functions
A summary of the available functions, can be found in the topic available functions in the expression editor,
examples for the usage of function in the topic expression editor application examples.
1. Switch to the tab Functions.
2. Select the function category.
3. Select the desired function with a double click. The expression is inserted into the input field.
If a function is selected on the left side, a description of this function is displayed in the
description field.
4. Enter the function values in the input field. This can either be done manually or via the selection of
element components according to step 2 to 4. The function values have to be separated with a comma.
After the last function value a closing parenthesis has to be entered in order to complete the function.
The code completion supports the user with the manual input of functions. Type the first letter of
the desired function and then the command and space key (Ctrl+Space). Now a list of relevant
functions including parameter list is displayed.
5. Click on OK.

General dialogs
28.1.6 Available functions in the expression editor

The following table shows all functions available in the expression editor.
Arithmetical Functions
Function Description
ABS ABS(x): Returns the absolute value of the numeric expression (x)
EXP EXP(x): Potentiates the base e (= 2.7182818 ...) with a numeric expression (x)
LN LN(x): Returns the natural logarithm of a positive number (x). Natural logarithms have the
constant e (= 2.7182818 ...) as basis.
LOG LOG(x): Returns the common (base 10) logarithm of the numeric expression (x)
MOD MOD(x, y): Returns the remainder of the numerical expression (x) divided by the numerical
expression (y). The result has the same algebraic sign as the number (x)
NINT NINT(x): Rounds the numeric expression (x) to the nearest whole number
ORD ORD(chr): Returns the ordinal value of an ASCII character (chr)
SIGN SIGN(x, y): Returns the numeric expression (x) if the numeric expression (y) is positive or zero
and returns the inverted value of the numeric expression (x) if the numeric value (y) is negative
SQRT SQRT(x): Returns the square root of the numeric expression (x)
Conversion functions
CHR CHR(x): Returns the ASCII character of a numeric expression (x)
DateToString DateToString(datetime, str): Converts the number (datetime) into a date/time text, which is
formatted according to the formatting string (str)
DBLE DBLE(x): Returns a numeric expression (x) as floating point number
DTOR DTOR(x): Converts the angle in degrees (x) into the angle in radians
INT INT(x): Converts a floating point number (x) into an integer, whereby the decimal places are
truncated
RL RL(x): Converts an integer (x) into a floating point number
RTOD RTOD(x): Converts the angle in radians (x) into the angle in degrees
STR STR(x, [a, b]): Returns a character representation of the numeric expression(x). Optionally, the
width (a) and the number of decimal places (b) can be set
VAL VAL(str): Converts a string into a number
VCART VCART(x, y, z): Returns the vector defined by the Cartesian coordinates x, y and z
VECX VECX(v): Returns the X component of a vector (v)

General dialogs
VECY VECY(v): Returns the Y component of a vector (v)
VECZ VECZ(v): Returns the z component of a vector (v)
Trigonometrical functions
ACOS ACOS(x): Returns the arccosine of the numeric expression (x) in the range from 0 to Pi
ASIN ASIN(x): Returns the arcsine of the numeric expression (x) in the range from -Pi/2 to Pi/2
ATAN ATAN(x): Returns the arctangent of the numeric expression (x) in the range from -Pi/2 to Pi/2
ATAN2 ATAN2(y, x): Returns the smaller angle between the positive x-axis of a Cartesian coordinate
system and a line from the origin (0/0) to (x y) in the range from -Pi to Pi
COS COS(x): Returns the cosine of the angle (x). The angle (x) has to be entered as radiant
SIN SIN(x): Returns the sine of the angle (x). The angle (x) has to be entered as radiant
TAN TAN(x): Returns the tangent of the angle (x). The angle (x) has to be entered as radiant
Vector functions
VADD VADD(v1, v2): Adds two vectors (v1, v2))
VCROSS VCROSS(v1, v2): Returns the vector cross product of two vectors (v1, v2)
VDOT VDOT(v1, v2): Returns the vector dot product of two vectors (v1, v2).
VMAG VMAG(v): Returns the length of a vector (v)
VSUB VSUB(v1, v2): Subtracts two vectors (v1, v2)
VUNIT VUNIT(v): Returns the unit vector of a vector (v)
String functions
CONCAT CONCAT(str1, ...): Concatenates multiple strings (str) to one string
EXTRACT EXTRACT(str, delim, n): Extracts a string from a string (str), starting at the n-th separator
(delim) and ending before the next separator or the end of the string
INDX INDX(str, sstr): Returns the first position of a string (sstr) within a string (str)
LEN LEN(str): Returns the amount of characters in a string (str)
LWC LWC(str): Converts a string (str) in lower case

General dialogs
RPT RPT(str, n): Repeats a string (str) (n) times
SUBSTR SUBSTR(str, x, y): Returns a string from a string (str), starting at position (x) and ending at
position (y)
TRIM TRIM(str): Deletes the spaces at the beginning and end of a string (str)
UPC UPC(str): Converts a string (str) in uppercase
Logical operators
> x > y: Returns TRUE if the value of the number (x) is greater than the value of the number (y)
< x < y: Returns TRUE if the value of the number (x) is less than the value of the number (y)
>= x >= y: Returns TRUE if the value of the number (x) is greater than or equal to the number (y)
<= x <= y: Returns TRUE if the value of the number (x) is less than or equal to the value of the
number (y)
= x = y: Returns TRUE if the value of the number (x) is equal to the value of the number (y)
<> x <> y: Returns TRUE if the value of the number (x) is not equal to the value of the number (y)
AND x AND y: Returns TRUE if x and y are TRUE
OR x OR y: Returns TRUE if x or y is TRUE
NOT NOT x: Returns TRUE if x is FALSE
Statistical functions
COUNTIF COUNTIF(b; b1, b2...): Returns the number of arguments from the argument list that match the
search criteria (b)
MEAN MEAN(x1, ...): Returns the arithmetic mean value of the argument list
MN MN(x1, ...): Returns the smallest value of an argument list
MX MX(x1, ...): Returns the largest value of an argument list
SUM SUM(x1, ...): SUM(x1, ...): Returns the sum of the argument list
Feature functions
AllFeatInTol AllFeatInTol(x): Returns TRUE if all features are within x % of the tolerance.

General dialogs
Accordingly, NOT AllFeatInTol(x) returns TRUE if one or more features are outside of x % of
the tolerance

General dialogs
File functions
IncludeText IncludeText(filename): Inserts the contents of a text file
IncludeText('name.xxx'): Inserts the contents of a text file 'name.xxx', that is saved in the
defined report directory
IncludeText('C:\\name.txt'): Inserts the contents of a text file 'C:\Name.txt.
28.1.7 Expression editor application examples

Calculate features
The following expressions can be copied and inserted into the Quartis expression editor.
The IDs of the elements may have to still be adjusted.
Diameter difference of two circles
Expression for nominal value:

ELEMENT('CIR_1').NOM.DIM1-ELEMENT('CIR_2').NOM.DIM1
Expression for actual value:
ELEMENT('CIR_1').ACT.DIM1-ELEMENT('CIR_2').ACT.DIM1
Pipe wall thickness

(ELEMENT('CIR_outside').NOM.DIM1-ELEMENT('CIR_inside').NOM.DIM1)/2
(ELEMENT('CIR_outside').ACT.DIM1-ELEMENT('CIR_inside').ACT.DIM1)/2
Smallest distance between two circles

VMAG(VSUB(ELEMENT('CIR_1').NOM.POS,ELEMENT('CIR_2').NOM.POS)) -
(ELEMENT('CIR_1').NOM.DIM1/2)-(ELEMENT('CIR_2').NOM.DIM1/2)
VMAG(VSUB(ELEMENT('CIR_1').ACT.POS,ELEMENT('CIR_2').ACT.POS)) -
(ELEMENT('CIR_1').ACT.DIM1/2)-(ELEMENT('CIR_2').ACT.DIM1/2)

General dialogs
Largest distance between two circles

VMAG(VSUB(ELEMENT('CIR_1').NOM.POS,ELEMENT('CIR_2').NOM.POS)) +
(ELEMENT('CIR_1').NOM.DIM1/2)+(ELEMENT('CIR_2').NOM.DIM1/2)
VMAG(VSUB(ELEMENT('CIR_1').ACT.POS,ELEMENT('CIR_2').ACT.POS)) +
(ELEMENT('CIR_1').ACT.DIM1/2)+(ELEMENT('CIR_2').ACT.DIM1/2)
Circumference

ELEMENT('CIR_1').NOM.DIM1*DTOR(180)
ELEMENT('CIR_1').ACT.DIM1*DTOR(180)
Angle between slot and line

(RTOD(ACOS(VDOT(ELEMENT('SLT_1').NOM.DIR2,ELEMENT('LIN_1').NOM.DIR)
/(VMAG(ELEMENT('SLT_1').NOM.DIR2)*VMAG(ELEMENT('LIN_1').NOM.DIR)))))
(RTOD(ACOS(VDOT(ELEMENT('SLT_1').ACT.DIR2,ELEMENT('LIN_1').ACT.DIR)
/(VMAG(ELEMENT('SLT_1').ACT.DIR2)*VMAG(ELEMENT('LIN_1').ACT.DIR)))))

General dialogs
Filter expression examples for the expression editor

The following expressions can be copied and inserted into the Quartis expression editor.
The filter expressions may have to be adjusted.
Use case 1
Requirement
The information relevant for the quick selection code is always at the same position in the string:
Example
· The job number 4711 and the inspection program number 9876 are represented in the same barcode.
· Thus the string 47119876 is read.
· In order to call the measurement program, only the inspection program number (digits 5 to 9)is decisive.
The job number (digits 1 to 4) changes for each job and therefore should have no influence in the program to
be executed.
Filter expression
SUBSTR({System.QuickSelNumber},5,9)
· 5 - the first digits of the quick selection code is the 5th digit of the read barcode
· 9 - the last digit of the quick selection code is 9th digit of the read barcode.
The result for the entered quick selection code string 47119876 is in this case 9876.
Use case 2
Requirement
Same situation as in application 1, but the information relevant for the quick selection code is always in a different
position within the string
However, start and end are defined by a constant string (in our case 999 respectively 000).
Example
· The job number is 4711 but can also be 104711.

· The inspection plan number does not have the same amount of characters, depending on the article to be
inspected.
· Again, we want the inspection program number to be relevant for the quick selection code. The string 999 is
always in front of the inspection plan number, the string 000 is always behind the inspection plan number.
· Thus the barcode can be displayed in different ways, e.g.
Barcode example a) 47119999876000

General dialogs
Barcode example b) 104711999123456000
Filter expression
SUBSTR({System.QuickSelCode},(3+INDX({System.QuickSelCode},'999')),((INDX({System.QuickSel
The result of this expression would be 9876 for barcode example a) and 123456 for barcode example b).
ID's in program loops

When using loops in a program, it is especially useful when element or feature ID can be defined variably using the
loop index.
By doing so, you can avoid overwriting elements or features when a loop is executed again within the same
measurement.
The following examples describe the procedure for the element ID definition.
The feature ID definition follows the same pattern as long as the evaluation is executed in the Quartis ribbon and
not in a separate dialog.
The following expressions can be copied and inserted into the Quartis input field of the ribbon.
Expressions are inserted into the expression editor without the "=" in the beginning.
Use case 1 - Definition using a program loop
The element ID is to be defined as a variable as the element is - for example - measured multiple times using a
program loop.
Requirement
The program is in recording mode.
The program contains at least one loop with the loop index i (only then the variable can be used for the loop index
in the expression).
Expression
For the output of CIR_1, CIR_2, CIR_3 etc., you have to insert the following expression into the ID input field.
='CIR_'+STR(i)
It is important that the loop index (here "i") defined within the loop is inserted between then brackets.
Use case 2 - Definition with two program loops
The element ID is to be defined as a variable as the element is - for example -measured several times using two
program loops (e.g. with a perforated plate).
Requirement

General dialogs
The program is in recording mode.
The program contains at least two loops (with the loop indices i and j).
Expression
='CIR_'+STR(i)+'_'+STR(j)
This expressions leads, depending in the start and end values of the two loops, to the following output:
CIR_1_1
CIR_1_2
CIR_1_3
CIR_2_1
CIR_2_2
CIR_2_3 etc.
Input of an expression and a description into an ID field
If an ID is inserted without a space, the part before the space is used as ID and the text after the space as
description of the element or feature.
If an expression is used as ID, a description can be entered as well. However, you then have to set a semicolon ( ; )
after entering the ID:
="Circle_'+STR(i); Description
Input inf ID field * created ID created description

first run through second run first run through second run
loop i through loop i loop i through loop i
CIR_1 new CIR_1 CIR_1 new new

='CIR_'+STR(i) CIR_1 CIR_2
='CIR_'+STR(i); new CIR_1 CIR_2 new new
='CIR_'+STR(i); ='Loop '+STR(i) CIR_1 CIR_2 Loop 1 Loop 2
*Requirement for the usage of variable i and j: As described in usea case 1 and 2 described.
IDs of source elements for the construction function

When using loops in a program, it is useful when element or feature ID can be defined variably using the loop
index.
If you want to construct in the same loop a new element using these elements you must note that the used
expression encloses the commas (,), which separate the different source elements.
Example
In a loop with counter "i" are three circles measured:
· 'CIR_A_'+str(i)

General dialogs
· 'CIR_B_'+str(i)
· 'CIR_C_'+str(i))
A new circle should be constructed using these three circles in the same loop.
The result of the expression in the group Source must be the following for loop index 1:
CIR_A_1,CIR_B_1,CIR_C_1
This will be achieved with the following expression (the expression can be copied and pasted directly in the
corresponding Quartis input field in the ribbon):
='CIR_A_'+str(i)+',CIR_B_'+str(i)+',CIR_C_'+str(i)
File names using expressions

Using expressions for the definition of file names makes sense when a program is recorded that is to be executed
again under various conditions.
The required file names often depend on these conditions (e.g. different work piece numbers or measurement IDs;
however you can also use user defined properties in expressions).
The following expressions can be copied and inserted into the input field when saving or opening a file. Expressions
are inserted into the expression editor without the "=" in the beginning.
Directories or element IDs might have to be selected or adjusted.
Expressions for saving a report
Use case
The file name should contain the current program ID, work piece and measurement number:
Expression
='Report_'+{Program.Id}+'_'+{Workpiece.Id}+'_'+{Job.Id}.QrtReport
Use case
The file name should contain the first four characters of the quick selection code and the measurement ID:
Expression
='Report_'+SUBSTR({System.QuickSelCode},1,4)+'_M'+{Job.ID}.QrtReport
Expression for inserting an image
Use case
An image in png format is to be inserted into the report. The image file name depends on the current work piece
number, the current measurement number and the element ID. The information is separated by an underscore.

General dialogs
The image is inserted as a link into the report so that the adequate image for each situation can be inserted during
the program execution.
Expression
={Workpiece.Id}+'_'+{Job.Id}+'_[Element_ID].png'
Expression to insert the content of a text file
Use case
The report should contain content of a text file. The text file's name is composed out of the work piece number, the
measurement ID and the element ID.
To do so, a text file is inserted into the report and the expression editor is opened from the dialog Edit text field.
Expression
INCLUDETEXT('[directory]\'+{Workpiece.Id}+'_'+{Job.Id}+'[Element ID].TXT')

General dialogs
Examples of date formatting in DateToString

You can use the following formatting string in the formatting string (str):
String Meaning Example
y last two digits of the year 18
yy last two digits of the year 18
yyyy year as 4 digits 2018
m number of month without leading 0 3
mm number of month as two digits number 03
mmm short name of month (Jan-Dec) Mar
mmmm long name of month (January-December) March
d day number without leading 0 9
dd day number as two digits 09
ddd short name of day (Mon-Sun) Fri
dddd long name of day (Monday - Sunday) Friday
ddddd day in short date format 03.09.2018
dddddd day in long date format Friday, 9. March 2018
c short date format + long date format 03.09.2018 08:03:02
h number of hours without leading 0 8
hh number of hours as two digits number 08
n number of minutes without leading 0 3
nn number of minutes as two digits number 03
s number of seconds without leading 0 2
ss number of seconds as two digits number 02
t time in short date format 08:03
tt time in long date format 08:03:02
am/pm use after h or hh : reults 12 hours + am/pm 8 am
a/p use after h or hh : reults 12 hours + a/p 8a
ampm as a/p but without a or p 8
/ substituted by date separator
: substituted by time separator

General dialogs
'' '' Characters enclosed in double quotation marks are displayed

as such, and do not affect formatting
28.2 Direction dialog

The direction dialog is an auxiliary dialog box which allows you to enter directions in different ways
Direction dialog
Selects the direction of the element in the left element window
Selects the direction of the element in the right element window.
Selects the XY, YZ or ZKX plane as direction.
Selects the attitude from 2 respectively 3 points. Those coordinates are taken
over in the following dialog.
Manual input in a Cartesian coordinate system (direction in x, y and z).
Manual input of the direction in a spherical coordinate system (polar) by

specifying the angle of rotation (ax) and the inclination angle (bxy).
Manual input of the direction in a cylindrical coordinate system (polar) by

specifying the angle of rotation (ax) and the height (h).
Direction selection from the element data in the database
Manual input of values. Entered values can be inverted by clicking on .

General dialogs
28.3 Position dialog

The position dialog is an auxiliary dialog which allows you to enter a position in many different ways.
Position dialog
Selects the position of the element in the left element window.
Selects the position of the element in the right element window.
Selection of the position of an element in the database.
Manual input in a Cartesian coordinate system (x, y, and z position).
Manual input of the position in a spherical coordinate system (polar) by

specifying the angle of rotation (ax) and the inclination angle (bxy).
Manual input of the position in a cylindrical coordinate system (polar) by

specifying the angle of rotation (ax) and the height (h).
Manual input of values

Keyboard shortcuts
29 Keyboard shortcuts
The following table shows all shortcuts in WM | Quartis.
For keyboard shortcuts in which you press two or more keys simultaneously, the keys to press are separated by a
plus sign (+).
General
Shortcut HT 400 function key Quartis function
F1 Open Quartis help
Ctrl+A Select all
Ctrl+C Copy
Ctrl+V Insert
Ctrl+X Cut
Ctrl+Y Redo
Ctrl+Z Undo
Del Delete
F1 Confirm dialog / ribbon (next or abort)
Start measuring sequence
F10 Abort dialog / ribbon
Graphics
Ctrl+Alt+A Zoom all
Ctrl+Alt+C Display machine components
Ctrl+Alt+E Display element label
Ctrl+Alt+H Display feature label
Ctrl+Alt+L Back to the last view
Ctrl+Alt+N Continue to next view
Ctrl+Alt+O Show display options
Ctrl+Alt+P Display probe points
Ctrl+Alt+R Display probe swivel range
Ctrl+Alt+W Zoom Window
Shift+Ctrl+A Zoom CAD model and elements
Space bar Activate the graphics tools Rotate, pan and

zoom view (but only when the graphics window
WM | Quartis ® R2018-2 Keyboard shortcuts 836

Keyboard shortcuts
is active)

Keyboard shortcuts
Machine
Shift+Ctrl+P Position machine
Probe system
Shift+Ctrl+C Calibrate probe system
Shift+Ctrl+L Load probe system
Shift+Ctrl+S Save probe system
Shift+Ctrl+1 Switch to stylus 1
Shift+Ctrl+H Swivel and rotate articulating probing system
F9 Swivel with joystick (only PHS)
Measure
F2 F2 Accept measuring point from current machine

position
F3 F3 Delete last measuring or intermediate point
F4 F4 Accept intermediate point from current machine

position
F5 F5 Terminate measurement and save element

Keyboard shortcuts
Program
F7, F12 F12 Stop program
F8 Execute program in single step mode
F12 F12 Pause program
Ctrl+E Export programs
Ctrl + F Focus on field Search for
Ctrl+I Import or link programs
Ctrl+O Open program
Ctrl+S Save active program
Ctrl+F4 Close program
Ctrl+F5 F6 Execute program
Continue program
Backspace Delete backwards

Index
Save - 43, 173

Index CAD coordinate system -
Edit - 172
-A- Select - 53, 178
ACIS - CAD Model - 169

Export - 88 ACIS Converter - 181
CATIA V4 Converter - 182
Additional field definitions - 81
Adjust DIN 16742 tolerances - 577
Change - 174
Converter - 181
Adjust ISO 2768 tolerances - 575 Converter options for CAD files - 53, 178
Adjust the quick access toolbar - 105 Delete - 176
Align objects - 482 DXF Converter - 184
Align/Coordinate system - 482 IGES Converter - 185
Arithmetical functions - 822 Import - 49, 169
Articulating probing system - 342 INS Converter - 186
Calibrate articulating probing system PH10 - 345 Inventor Converter - 186
Calibrate articulating probing system PH10-iQ - 348 Load - 52, 177
Calibrate articulating probing system PHS - 350 Parasolid Converter - 187
Change articulating probing system settings - 342 ProEngineer Converter - 188
Information - 342 Save - 43, 173
Rotate - 343 Siemens NX Converter - 189
Assignment of feature components - 820 Solid Edge converter - 190
Auxiliary element - SolidWorks Converter - 191
Circle - 745 STEP Converter - 192
Curve - 754 User format Converter - 194
Cylinder - 747 VDA Converter - 193
Edge point - 752 Calculate user specific feature - 610
Point - 742 Calculation method -
Point-Vector - 743 Axial, direct - 388, 400
Rectangle - 750 Chebyshev - 388, 394, 611
Slot - 751 Element - 388, 611
Sphere - 748 Envelope requirement - 388, 611, 613
Available functions in the expression editor - 822 Least squares (Gauss) - 388, 393, 611
Average machine/work piece temperature display - Maximum inscribed - 388, 396, 611
146 Minimum circumscribed - 388, 395, 611
Axial, direct - 400 Move to nominal point - 388, 392
Perpendicular - 388, 398
-B- Planar, direct - 388, 400
Batch - Planar, Spline - 388
Delete - 774 Planar, transformed - 388, 400
Execute - 773 Rounded - 388, 399
Off - 772 Spline - 402
On - 772 Standard - 388, 390
Use the batch mode - 772 Tangential inside - 388, 397
Bestfit - 491 Tangential outside - 388, 397
BMWIpp Format - 204, 207 Two-point size - 388, 611, 612
X-, Y-, X-axis - 388, 392
-C- Calculation options - 389
CAD - Calibrate -
WM | Quartis ® R2018-2 Index 840

Index
Calibrate - Display CAD model and elements - 725

Articulating probing system - 345, 348, 350 Display view perpendicular to element - 728
Calibrate articulating probing system PH10 - 345 Enlarge window area - 723
Calibrate articulating probing system PH10-iQ - 348 Load standard views - 732
Calibrate articulating probing system PHS - 350 Load user view - 735
Probe system - 309 Move view - 726
Reference sphere - 339 Rename user view - 734
Rotary table - 302 Rotate view around horizontal screen axis - 731
Calibrate probe system for PHS - 318 Rotate view around screen normal - 732
Calibrate stylus changing system - 357 Rotate view around vertical screen axis - 731
Calibration list - Rotate, pan and zoom view - 726
Create calibration list for PH10-iQ - 317 Save user view - 735
Split graphics view - 729
Call -
Expression Editor - 816 Zoom all - 723
Homepage - 775 Zoom CAD model and elements - 725
Quick Selection Table - 775 Zoom in - 725
Subprogram - 262 Zoom out - 724
Zoom Window - 723
Capability - 306, 332
Capability indices - 779 Change personal settings - 104
Change graphics display - 698 Circle -
Adjust element representation - 705 Calculation method - 611, 612, 613
Adjust model representation - 704 Distribution method - 409, 413, 417, 418, 427
Change graphics settings - 698 Element - 611
Colorize element in left element window with color Envelope requirement - 613
spectrum - 709 Insert - 745
Connect probe points - 716 Two-point size - 612
Delete recorded motion paths - 722 Click probe point on CAD model - 147, 814
Display color spectrum - 721 Close -
Display coordinate axes - 720 Database - 166
Display deviation of probe points (residues) - 717 Feature Data - 811
Display element graphics - 703 Report - 657
Display element label - 707 Statistics - 804
Display feature label - 708 Collision - 107
Display machine components - 710 Collision control -
Display network grid - 707 Settings - 110
Display position deviations of elements - 717
Collision control settings - 110
Display probe point numbers - 706
Collision detection - 107
Display probe points - 706
Cone -
Display probe swivel range - 716
Distribution method - 409, 413, 417, 418
Display recorded motion paths - 721
Configure external programs - 100
Manage CAD model layer - 713
Construct - 439
Position work piece - 711
Connection - 446
Record motion paths - 722
Construct - 447
Show display options - 710
Construction Tables - 470
Show mouse pointer coordinates - 719
Create element out of existing elements - 442
Change graphics view - 723 Create element with input - 439, 441
Back to the last view - 727
Create intersection element out of two elements - 442
Continue to next view - 727
Extract - 451
Create user view - 733
Information - 439
Define rotation angle - 730
Intersection - 442
Delete user view - 734
Min/Max Element - 453

Index
Construct - 439 Delete - 485

Offset Line - 456 Export - 66, 498
Offset Plane - 457 Information - 482
Offset Point - 454 Load - 483
Parallel - 462 Move - 494
Perpendicular - 463 Origin - 488
Projection - 465 Pallet coordinate system - 482
Symmetry - 444 PCS - 482
Tangent - 467 Primary direction - 486
Top of cone - 451 Rotate - 495
Construction Tables - 470 Save - 484
Connection - 474 Secondary direction - 487
Intersection - 470 Synchronize coordinate system and CAD model coordinate
Min/Max element - 475 system - 497
Using several points - 489
Offset Line - 477
WCS - 482
Parallel - 478
Work piece coordinate system - 482
Perpendicular - 479
Projection - 480 Copy -
Diagrams - 802
Symmetry - 472
Statistics - 802
Contextual Tab Distribution -
Define limitation - 421 Coupling - 143
Activate - 299
Thin out points - 423
Coordinate system - 148
Contextual Tab Head orientation -
Create - 299
Critical angles - 432
Database - 150
Fixed angles - 433
Deactivate - 299
Focal point - 433
Delete - 299
Contextual tabs - 131
Create and load intersections - 737
Conversion functions - 822
Create and manage intersections - 737
Converter - 181
ACIS - 181 Create element out of existing elements - 442
Connection - 446
CATIA V4 - 182
Construct - 447
CATIA V5 - 183
Extract - 451
CATIA V6 - 183
Intersection - 442
DXF - 184
Min/Max Element - 453
IGES - 185
Offset Line - 456
INS - 186
Offset Plane - 457
Inventor - 186
Offset Point - 454
Parasolid - 187
Parallel - 462
ProEngineer - 188
Perpendicular - 463
Solid Edge - 190
Projection - 465
SolidWorks - 191
Symmetry - 444
STEP - 192
Tangent - 467
Unigraphics - 189
Top of cone - 451
User format - 194
VDA-FS - 193 Create element with input - 439
Create surfaces using CAD data - 441
Converter options for CAD files - 53, 178
Create surfaces using CAD data - 441
Bestfit - 491 Critical angles - 432
Create - 486 Current coordinates display - 148
Create using Bestfit - 491 Curve -
Create using RPS - 489 Define limitation - 421

Index
Curve - Find - 163

Distribution method - 409, 413, 417, 418 Information - 150
Insert - 754 Insert - 158
Customize effects - 696 New - 25, 150
Adjust frame - 696 Open - 37, 152
Adjust shadow - 697 Paste - 158
Customize objects - 686 Paste data - 158
Adjust arrows - 695 Print - 165
Adjust color and line settings - 694 Print data - 165
Adjust corners - 694 Search data - 163
Adjust format - 688 Settings - 154, 155
Adjust image - 695 Split database view - 165
Adjust margins - 688 Date format - 833
Adjust paper - 689 Datum reference frame -
Adjust paper format - 689 ASME - 503, 529
Adjust table contents, graphics contents, table and data Coordinate planes and coordinate axes - 571
label layout - 691 ISO - 558
Align data labels - 692
Default tolerances - 576
Align objects - 687 Company specific tolerances - 579
Edit text field - 692 DIN - 575
Set anchor - 690 DIN 16742 - 577
Customize workspace - 140 DIN 1688 - 576
Cylinder - DIN 16901 - 578
Calculation method - 611, 612, 613 Fixed tolerance defaults - 572
Distribution method - 409, 413, 417, 418, 427 ISO - 575
Element - 611 ISO 2768 - 575
Envelope requirement - 613 Overview of default tolerances in WM | Quartis - 580
Insert - 747
Define a probe system component (slot content) - 355
Two-point size - 612
Define stylus form - 333
Define/Edit distribution method and parameter -
-D- Centering probe mode - 418
Daimler/Audi Format - 204, 208 Pecking probe mode - 417
Data label - Scanning probe mode - 413
Element label - 673 Triggered probe mode - 409
Feature label - 673
Define/Edit nominal values -
Point label - 673 Element description - 374
Statistics label - 673 Measure circle on cone/sphere - 376
Database - 150 Projection onto CAD - 379
Close - 166
Delete -
Close database window - 166 Coordinate system - 485
Copy - 157 Feature Data - 809
Copy data - 157
Deposit probe and retrieve from a slot - 353
Create - 25, 150
Determine roughness - 434
Customize View - 165
Diagrams - 790
Delete - 161
Change diagram limits - 792
Delete data - 161
Change limits - 791
Display - 94, 153
Copy - 802
Display data details - 168
Data page - 794
Edit - 94, 153, 162
Export - 801
Edit data - 162
Histogram - 797
Edit database - 157
Overview - 793

Index
Diagrams - 790 Edit default fix tolerances - 572

Print - 803 Edit general ISO and DIN tolerances - 575
R card - 799 Edit graphics - 756
s card - 800 Cancel selection - 739, 757
Settings - 790 Delete selected elements - 759
Trend diagram - 795 Fade selected elements out - 740
X bar chart - 798 Invert selection - 741, 759
DIN 1688 - 576 Select elements - 739, 756
DIN 16901 - 578 Show all elements - 741
Direction dialog - 834 Edit measurement properties - 268
Display - Element - 611
Database - 94, 153 Connection - 446
Feature Data - 98, 808 Construct - 442, 447
Polygon - 704, 705 Export - 88
Program - 95, 220 Extract - 451
Quick Selection Table - 97, 764 Intersection - 442
Report - 96, 656 Measure - 362, 366
Solid - 704, 705 Min/Max Element - 453
Statistics - 98, 785 Offset Line - 456
Transparent - 704 Offset Plane - 457
Wire frame - 704, 705 Offset Point - 454
Display element graphics - 703 Parallel - 462
Display general information about WM | Quartis - 127 Perpendicular - 463
Display of active measurement units - 149 Projection - 465
Display of current coordinate system - 146 Symmetry - 444
Tangent - 467
Display of current probe head position - 145
Top of cone - 451
Display of currently loaded measurement - 144
Display of currently loaded probe system - 145 Element label - 673
Display - 707
Display of currently loaded reference sphere - 145
Keyboard shortcuts - 836
Display of currently loaded stylus and probe mode -
Load element in element window (via mouse tool) - 135
145
Move - 707
Display of currently loaded work piece - 143
Reset - 707
Display of machine identification and status of
Settings - 698
collision control - 143
Display tolerance zone - 718 Element window - 133
Display next element - 134
Display previous element - 134
Mesh type - 420
Edit element - 138
Mesh type 2 - 421
Exchange contents of element window - 136
Optimize - 420
Load element in element window (via list) - 134
DMIS Results Export - 231
Load element in element window (via mouse tool) - 135
Information - 231
Lock element in right element window - 136
Pause - 236
Quartis program sentence - 232 Enter stylus offset - 335
Save - 231 Envelope requirement - 613
Stop - 236 Evaluate -
Reduction of reference elements - 503, 529
-E- Reference system according to ASME (Dialog) - 503, 529
Reference system according to ISO GPS - 558
Edge point -
Distribution method - 409, 413, 417, 418, 427 Evaluate angularity tolerance - 639
Insert - 752 Evaluate concentricity and coaxiality tolerance - 634
Evaluate form features - 613
Index
Evaluate form features - 613 BMWIpp data - 82

Cylindricity - 617 Coordinate system - 66, 498
Evaluate profile tolerance of any line - 618 Diagrams - 801
Evaluate profile tolerance of any surface - 620 Export difference of coordinate systems - 66, 498
Flatness - 615 Export feature and statistical data - 72
Roundness - 616 IGES - 88
Straightness - 613 Output of feature data - on one worksheet - 78
Evaluate parallelism tolerance - 642 Output of feature data - one worksheet per feature - 80
Evaluate perpendicularity tolerance - 644 Output of statistical data - 78
Evaluate position features - Output of user defined properties - 76
Angularity - 639 Probe systems - 91
Coaxiality - 634 Program - 64, 218
Concentricity - 634 Q-DAS - 68, 805
Evaluate position features - 626 Statistics - 801
Parallelism - 642 Template file for feature and statistical data export - 75
Perpendicularity - 644 VDA data - 88
Position - 626 Worksheets within the template file - 75
Reduction of reference elements - 503, 529 Export difference of coordinate systems - 66, 498
Reference system according to ASME (Dialog) - 503, 529 Export element data into BMWIpp format - 82
Reference system according to ISO GPS - 558 Meta data with BMWIpp data export - 87
Run-out - 646 Export elements into CAD file - 88
Symmetry - 638 Export feature and statistical data - 72
Total run-out - 648 Export probe systems in CM system database - 91
Evaluate profile tolerance of any line - Expression Editor -
Select tolerance zone - 622 Arithmetical functions - 822
Evaluate standard features - 593 Assignment of feature components - 820
Angle - 603 Available functions in the expression editor - 822
Angle 2D - 602 Calculate features - 826
Calculate user specific feature - 610 Call - 816
Contemplation for the distance evaluation of elements - Conversion functions - 822
600 Expression editor application examples - 826
Distance - 599 Feature functions - 822
Expression Editor - 610 File functions - 822
Form - 593 File names using expressions - 831
Form deviation - 593 Filter expression examples for the expression editor - 828
Half Size - 595 ID's in program loops - 829
Input - 607 IDs of source elements for the construction function - 830
Offset element and feature values against each other - 610 Logical operators - 822
Output element and feature values - 610 Offset element and feature values against each other - 610,
Position - 597 819
Position dAB - 606 Output element and feature values - 610, 818
Range - 604 Output system information - 816
Size - 594 Statistical functions - 822
Turning Point - 604 String functions - 822
Using functions - 610 Trigonometrical functions - 822
Execute programs with machine synchronization - Using functions - 610, 821
Multiple machine network - 112 Vector functions - 822
Synchronize multiple machine network - 112 Expression editor application examples -
Export - 64 Calculate features - 826
ACIS - 88 File names using expressions - 831
Additional field definitions - 75, 81 Filter expression examples for the expression editor - 828

Index
Expression editor application examples - ISO 1101 - 592

ID's in program loops - 829 Offset element and feature values against each other - 610
IDs of source elements for the construction function - 830 Output element and feature values - 610
Extras - 100 Parallelism - 642
Configure external programs - 100 Perpendicularity - 644
Start remote support with support partner - 103 Position - 592, 597, 626
Position dAB - 606
-F- Position tolerance - 592
Feature Data - 808 Range - 604
check - 809 Roundness - 616
Close - 811 Run-out - 646
Delete - 809 Size - 594
Display - 98, 808 Static and dynamic features - 501
display with program - 812 Straightness - 613
filter - 811 Symmetry - 638
Record - 808 Total run-out - 648
Signal light - 812 Turning Point - 604
Feature functions - 822
Using functions - 610
Feature label - 673
Display - 708 File functions - 822
Keyboard shortcuts - 836 Filter -
Move - 708 Actual value filter - 786
Reset - 708 Adjust the statistical evaluation - 786
Settings - 698 Feature filter - 786
Report - 659
Features - 501
Angle - 603 Fixed angles - 433
Angle 2D - 602 Fixed tolerance defaults - 572
Angularity - 639 Fluent User Interface - 20
ASME Y 14.5 - 592 Focal point - 433
Calculate user specific feature - 610
Coaxiality - 634 -G-
Concentricity - 634 General dialogs - 816
Contemplation for the distance evaluation of elements - Direction dialog - 834
600 Expression Editor - 816
Cylindricity - 617
Position dialog - 835
Distance - 599
General ISO or DIN tolerances -
Edit defaults - 572
DIN 16742 - 577
Element - 611
ISO 2768 - 575
Envelope requirement - 613
Graphics - 698
Evaluate form features - 613
Adjust element representation - 705
Evaluate position features - 626
Adjust model representation - 704
Evaluate profile tolerance of any line - 618
Back to the last view - 727
Evaluate profile tolerance of any surface - 620
Cancel selection - 739, 757
Evaluate standard features - 593
Change graphics display - 698
Expression Editor - 610
Change graphics view - 723
Flatness - 615
Collision - 698
Form - 592
Collision detection - 698
Form deviation - 593
Colorize element in left element window with color
Half Size - 595 spectrum - 709
Information - 501 Connect probe points - 716
Input - 607 Continue to next view - 727

Index
Graphics - 698 Rotate view around vertical screen axis - 731

Create and load intersections - 737 Rotate, pan and zoom view - 726
Create and manage intersections - 737 Save user view - 735
Create user view - 733 Select elements - 739, 756
Define rotation angle - 730 Settings - 698
Delete recorded motion paths - 722 Show all elements - 741
Delete selected elements - 759 Show display options - 710
Delete user view - 734 Show mouse pointer coordinates - 719
Display - 698 Solid - 705
Display CAD model and elements - 725 Split graphics view - 729
Display color spectrum - 721 Wire frame - 705
Display coordinate axes - 720 Zoom all - 723
Display deviation of probe points (residues) - 717 Zoom CAD model and elements - 725
Display element graphics - 703 Zoom in - 725
Display element label - 707 Zoom out - 724
Display feature label - 708 Zoom Window - 723
Display machine components - 710 Groups - 130
Display network grid - 707
Display position deviations of elements - 717 -I-
Display probe point numbers - 706 ID Generator - 364
Display probe points - 706 IGES -
Display probe swivel range - 716 Export - 88
Display recorded motion paths - 721 Import - 49
Display view perpendicular to element - 728 CAD Model - 49, 169
Edit graphics - 756 Probe systems - 62
Enlarge window area - 723 Program - 56, 214
Fade selected elements out - 740 Surface data - 49, 169
Information - 698 VDA data - 60
Insert circle - 745
Import probe systems from file - 62
Insert curve - 754
Information -
Insert cylinder - 747 Align objects - 482
Insert edge point - 752 Articulating probing system - 342
Insert point - 742 Construct - 439
Insert point-vector - 743 Coordinate system - 482
Insert rectangle - 750 Database - 150
Insert slot - 751 Graphics - 698
Insert sphere - 748 Machine - 280
Invert selection - 741, 759 Measure - 362
Live preview - 21 Multiple machine network - 275
Load standard views - 732 Probe system - 306
Load user view - 735 Program - 198
Manage CAD model layer - 713 Reference sphere - 337
Manage intersections - 738 Report - 650
Mirror CAD model - 755 Statistics - 778
Move view - 726 Stylus changing system - 353
Polygon - 705
Information about data labels - 673
Position work piece - 711
Information about the quick selection table - 761
Record motion paths - 722
Insert -
Rename user view - 734
Graphics - 666
Rotate view around horizontal screen axis - 731
Graphics view - 666
Rotate view around screen normal - 732
Select features using element selection - 672

Index
Insert -
Table - 674 -M-
Insert auxiliary elements - 742 Machine - 280
ISO 10360-4 - 306, 332 Activate/Deactivate axis drives - 291
ISO 14405-1 - 612 Change articulating probing system settings - 284
ISO1101/ASME Y14.5 - Change joystick direction - 288
Angularity - 639 Change measuring speed and acceleration - 283
Coaxiality - 634 Change measuring-/search-/retraction distance - 280
Concentricity - 634 Change positioning speed and acceleration - 282
Cylindricity - 617 Change scanning settings - 287
Evaluate profile tolerance of any line - 618 Couple machine - 299
Evaluate profile tolerance of any surface - 620 Information - 280
Flatness - 615 Initialize - 289
Parallelism - 642 Move to origin - 289
Perpendicularity - 644 position - 293
Position - 626 Settings - 280
Roundness - 616 Temperature - 294
Run-out - 646 Temperature compensation - 294
Straightness - 613 Machine mode display - 142
Symmetry - 638 Manage intersections - 738
Total run-out - 648 Manually pre-probe element - 379
Material thickness - 138, 387
-K- Mathematical fundamentals of statistics - 778
Keyboard shortcuts - 836 Capability indices - 779
Concept definitions - 778
-L- Sample size - 785
Label - Maximum rank-order size - 612
Element label - 707 Measure - 366
Feature label - 708 Abort - 371
Keyboard shortcuts - 836 Actions - 371
Settings - 698 Contextual Tab Distribution - 408
Layouts - Contextual Tab Edit - 425
Layout editor - 663 Contextual Tab Features - 426
Table - 662 Contextual Tab Geometry - 371
Line - Contextual Tab Head orientation - 431
Distribution method - 409, 413, 417, 418 Contextual Tab Progress - 430
Link - Contextual Tab Repeat - 409, 413, 417, 418, 427
Construct surfaces using curves - 450 Define limitation - 421
Linkage - Define/Edit material thickness - 387
Program - 56, 214 Define/Edit nominal values - 371
Define/Edit safety plane - 408, 423
List with element and features - 30, 198, 201, 204
Edit measurement properties - 268
Live preview - 21
Edit measuring sequence - 430
Load -
Element - 362
Company specific tolerances - 579
Eliminate outliers - 404
Filter elements - 405
Probe system - 324
Increase/Decrease number of points - 430
Reference sphere - 338
Information - 362
Load company specific tolerances - 579
Manually pre-probe element - 379
Logical operators - 822
Measuring with measuring aid - 381

Index
Measure - 366 Work piece - 26

Output of roughness parameter and roughness profile -
438 -O-
Projection onto CAD - 379
Offline - 814
Repeat - 371
Click probe point on CAD model - 147, 814
Roughness - 434
Simulation of a program process - 815
Safety plane - 423
Simulation speed - 147, 814
Select calculation method - 388
Virtual joystick - 147, 814
Select/Change relative reference - 384
Offset element and feature values against each other
Select/Edit reference - 382
- 610, 819
Settings - 364
Open - 37
Start - 371
Database - 37, 152
Thin out points - 423
Measurement - 38
View measurement progress - 430
Measurement database - 37, 152
Measure circle on cone/sphere - 376 Program - 39, 212
Measurement - Quick Selection Table - 42, 763
Create - 28 Report - 40, 650
New - 28 Report paper - 40, 650
Open - 38 Report template - 40, 650
Measurement database - Work piece - 38
Create - 25, 150
Output element and feature values - 610, 818
New - 25, 150
Output of feature data - on one worksheet - 78
Open - 37, 152
Output of feature data - one worksheet per feature -
Measuring with measuring aid - 381 80
Meta data with BMWIpp data export - 87 Output of roughness parameter and roughness profile
Metadata - - 438
BMWIpp Format - 82, 87 Output of statistical data - 78
Report template - 816 Output of user defined properties - 76
Minimum rank-order size - 612 Output system information - 816
Mirror CAD model - 755 Overview of default tolerances in WM | Quartis - 580
Mirror program - 210
Model - -P-
Polygon - 704 Parameter modification - 199, 223, 379
Solid - 704 PCS - 482
Transparent - 704
Personalize - 104
Wire frame - 704
Planar, direct - 400
Multiple machine network - 275 Planar, transformed - 400
Information - 275
Plane -
Receive elements / PCS - 278
Define limitation - 421
Send elements / PCS - 277
Synchronization - 276
Point -
Calculation method - 392
-N-
Distribution method - 409, 413, 417, 418, 427
New - 25 Insert - 742
Database - 25, 150
Point label - 673
Measurement - 28
Point-Vector -
Measurement database - 25, 150
Insert - 743
Program - 30, 201
Polygon - 704, 705
Quick Selection Table - 35, 761
Reference sphere - 339 Position dialog - 835
Report - 33, 651 Print - 47

Index
Print - 47 Execute program in current measurement - 225

Diagrams - 803 Execute program in new measurement - 223
Program - 272 Execute program in single step mode - 225
Report - 47, 655 Execute program with parameter or selective parameter
Report paper - 47, 655 modification - 223
Execute selection - 228
Report template - 47, 655
Execute to cursor - 230
Statistics - 803
Export - 64, 218
Template - 47, 655
Import - 56, 214
Probe system - 306
Increase / Decrease current measurement number - 267
Adjust - 328
Information - 198
Calibrate - 309, 311
Insert branch - 264
Calibrate probe system automatically - 311
Insert comment - 259
Calibrate probe system for PHS - 318
Insert dialog - 256
Calibrate probe system manually or semi-automatically -
309 Insert image, sound or video - 257
Create PH10-iQ probe system - 327 Insert intermediate point - 255
Define stylus form - 333 Insert jump to marker - 267
Determine volumetric probing deviation - 332 Insert marker - 261
Enter stylus offset - 335 Insert program loop - 263
Information - 306 Link - 56, 214
Load - 324 Mirror - 210
Optimize - 330 New - 30, 201
Save - 326 Open - 39, 212
Set up - 319 Pause - 226
set up graphically - 319 Pause program - 226
Settings - 306 Print - 272
Switch probing mode - 308 Program from list with elements and features - 204
Probe systems - Record - 237
Export - 91 Save - 44, 212
Import - 62 Set execution position - 231
Set insertion point - 239
Program - 198
Activate edit mode - 242, 244 Set/Delete breakpoint - 274
Activate/Deactivate split program view - 271 Settings - 199
BMWIpp Format - 204, 207 Simultaneously edit multiple program sentences - 244
Call subprogram - 262 Single step - 225
Change and print view - 271 Start / Finish DMIS results output - 269
Check program - 221 Stop - 227
Close program window - 272 Stop program - 227
CNC mode on/off - 254 Use program functions - 254
Create - 30, 201 Program information - 144
Daimler/Audi Format - 204, 208 Program sentence - 232
Deactivate/Activate program sentences - 253 Project rule - 199, 364, 379
Delete backwards - 239 Projection onto CAD - 379
Display - 95, 220
Display program sentence details - 273 -Q-
DMIS Results Export - 231 Q-DAS -
Edit - 95, 220, 242, 244 Export - 68, 805
Edit program - 240 Field configuration - 70
Execute - 95, 220, 221, 223 Q-DAS field configuration - 70
Execute from cursor - 229 Quartis button -
Execute program - 221 Export - 22

Index
Quartis button - Open - 42, 763

Extras - 22 Text display - 776
Import - 22 Use quick selection code - 770
New - 22 Use the batch mode - 772
Open - 22
Print - 22 -R-
Quartis Options - 22 Record -
Save - 22 Batch - 772
Work window - 22 Feature Data - 808
Quartis Options - 104 Multiple machine network - 276
Adjust machine settings - 107 Program - 237
Adjust the quick access toolbar - 105 Rectangle -
Collision - 107 Distribution method - 409, 413, 417, 418
Collision detection - 107 Insert - 750
Database - 119 Reference sphere - 337
Features - 114 Calibrate - 339
Graphical User Interface - 104 Information - 337
Graphics - 117 Load - 338
Information - 127 New - 339
Machine - 107 Save - 339
Measure - 113 Settings - 337
Personalize - 104 Reference system according to ASME (Dialog) -
Quick access - 105 Reduction of reference elements - 503, 529
Quick Access Toolbar - 105 Reference system according to ISO GPS - 558
Report - 123
Report - 650, 657
Simulation - 107 Adjust arrows - 695
Statistics - 121 Adjust color and line settings - 694
System - 124 Adjust corners - 694
User - 104 Adjust format - 688
Quick Access Toolbar - 129 Adjust frame - 696
Quick Selection Table - 761 Adjust image - 695
Activate/Deactivate batch mode recording - 772 Adjust margins - 688
Activate/Deactivate text display - 776 Adjust paper - 689
Back - 776 Adjust paper format - 689
Batch - 772 Adjust shadow - 697
Call - 775 Adjust table contents, graphics contents, table and data
Change view - 775 label layout - 691
Close - 777 Align data labels - 692
Configure button - 765 Align objects - 687
Create - 35, 761 Change default settings - 657
Delete batch mode - 774 Close report work window - 657
Delete button - 769 Create or edit layout for tables, data or statistics labels - 662
Display - 97, 764 Create template - 33, 651
Edit buttons - 765 Customize effects - 696
Enter quick selection code - 770 Customize objects - 686
Execute batch mode - 773 Customize report view in work window - 685
Homepage - 775 Data label - 673
Information - 761 Delete selected pages - 679
Jump to previous page - 776 Display - 96, 656
Limit barcode - 771 Edit - 96, 656, 686
New - 35, 761 Edit text field - 692

Index
Report - 650, 657 Settings -

Feature filter - 659 Collision control - 110
Filter - 659 Database - 119, 154, 155
Information - 650 Diagrams - 790
Insert drawing objects - 678 Features - 114
Insert ellipse/circle - 683 Filter - 786
Insert graphics view - 666 Graphics - 117, 698
Insert image - 684 Machine - 107
Insert line/arrow - 680 Measure - 113, 364
Insert new page - 678 Probe system - 306
Insert rectangle - 682 Program - 199
Insert report objects - 666 Reference sphere - 337
Insert table - 674 Report - 123, 657
Insert text field - 679 Rotary table - 301
Language - 657 Statistics - 121, 790
Layout editor - 663 System - 124
Layouts - 662 Temperature compensation - 294
New - 33, 651 Shortcut - 836
Open - 40, 650 Show quick access for program start - 97, 764
Print - 47, 655 Signal light - 812
Save - 45, 653 Simulation of a program process - 815
Simulation speed - 147, 814
Set anchor - 690
Simultaneously edit multiple program sentences -
Set object properties as standard - 665 Features automatically created during measurement - 247
Settings - 123, 657 Projection onto CAD - 249
Ribbon - 130 Replace probe systems - 251
Contextual tabs - 131
Slot -
Groups - 130 Distribution method - 409, 413, 417, 418
Rotary table - Insert - 751
Calibrate - 302
Solid - 704, 705
Settings - 301
Sphere -
-S- Insert - 748
Sample size - 785 Start / Finish DMIS results output - 269
Save - 43 Start remote support with support partner - 103
CAD - 43, 173
Static and dynamic features - 501
CAD Model - 43, 173
Statistical evaluation of features - 98, 785
Statistical functions - 822
Probe system - 326
Program - 44, 212 Statistics - 778
Actual value filter - 786
Reference sphere - 339
Adjust the statistical evaluation - 786
Report - 45, 653
Capability indices - 779
Report paper - 45, 653
Change diagram limits - 792
Report template - 45, 653
Change limits - 791
Settings - 47
Change random sample scope - 789
Template - 45, 653
Change view - 804
Save settings - 47
Close - 804
Select Cartesian/polar output for evaluation - 591 Concept definitions - 778
Select default tolerances - 591 Copy - 802
Select elements - 739 Data page - 794
Index
Statistics - 778 Adjust - 294

Display - 98, 785 Settings - 294
Display diagrams - 790 Template -
Evaluation method - 788 Print - 47, 655
Export - 801 Save - 45, 653
Feature filter - 786 Template file for feature and statistical data export -
Filter - 786 75
Histogram - 797 Additional field definitions - 81
Information - 778 Output of feature data - on one worksheet - 78
Mathematical fundamentals of statistics - 778 Output of feature data - one worksheet per feature - 80
Overview - 793 Output of statistical data - 78
Print - 803 Output of user defined properties - 76
R card - 799 Worksheets within the template file - 75
Refresh - 804 Theoretical element -
s card - 800 Calculate - 442
Sample size - 785 Create - 439
Settings - 790 Surface - 441
Trend diagram - 795 Time format - 833
X bar chart - 798 Tolerance groups -
Statistics label - 673 110 - 578
Status window - 120 - 578
Average machine/work piece temperature display - 142 130 - 578
Current coordinates display - 142 140 - 578
Display of active measurement units - 142 150 - 578
Display of current coordinate system - 142 160 - 578
Display of current probe head position - 142 FWT - 578
Display of currently loaded measurement - 142 Tolerance zone -
Display of currently loaded probe system - 142 Cylindrical - 630
Display of currently loaded reference sphere - 142 Parallel planes - 630
Display of currently loaded stylus and probe mode - 142 Select - 622
Display of currently loaded work piece - 142 Spherical - 630
Machine mode display - 142 Tolerances -
Program information - 142 Company specific tolerances - 579
Virtual joystick, click probe point on CAD model and DIN - 575
simulation speed - 142 DIN 16742 - 577
String functions - 822 DIN 1688 - 576
Stylus changing system - 353 DIN 16901 - 578
Calibrate - 357 Fixed tolerance defaults - 572
Calibrate stylus changing system - 357 ISO - 575
Define a probe system component (slot content) - 355 ISO 2768 - 575
Deposit probe and retrieve from a slot - 353 Overview of default tolerances in WM | Quartis - 580
Information - 353 Select default tolerances - 591
Surface - Transparent - 704
Trigonometrical functions - 822
Surface data -
Import - 49, 169
Synchronize coordinate system and CAD model -U-
coordinate system - 497
Use quick selection code - 770
-T- Using functions - 610, 821
Temperature compensation -

Index
-V-
VDA data -
Export - 88
Import - 60
Vector functions - 822
Virtual joystick - 147, 814
-W-
WCS - 482
Wire frame - 704, 705
Work piece -
Create - 26
New - 26
Open - 38
Work piece coordinate system - 482
Work window - 94
Database - 94, 153
Feature Data - 98, 808
Program - 95, 220
Quick Selection Table - 97, 764
Report - 96, 656
Statistics - 98, 785
Worksheets within the template file - 75
Workspace - 140
Customize workspace - 140
-X-
X-, Y-, X-axis - 392

WM Quartis User Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

WM Quartis User Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

User Manual

Subject to technical revisions during the course of further development.

Tel. +41 81 257 07 00

1 Fluent User Interface 20

WM | Quartis ® R2018-2 Table of Contents 3

Q-DAS field configuration 70

3 Quick Access Toolbar 129

WM | Quartis ® R2018-2 Table of Contents 4

4.2 Contextual tabs .......................................................................................................................................... 131

5 Element window 133

7 Status window 142

WM | Quartis ® R2018-2 Table of Contents 5

8.5 Adjust database settings

9 CAD Model 169

WM | Quartis ® R2018-2 Table of Contents 7

Simultaneously edit multiple program sentences - Projection onto CAD 249

11 Multiple machine network 275

12.4 Move machine to origin

13 Rotary table 301

14 Probe system 306

15 Reference sphere 337

WM | Quartis ® R2018-2 Table of Contents 9

15.3 Load reference sphere

16 Articulating probing system 342

17 Stylus changing system 353

WM | Quartis ® R2018-2 Table of Contents 10

Tangential outside 397

20 Align/Coordinate system 482

WM | Quartis ® R2018-2 Table of Contents 12

21.2 Static and dynamic features

WM | Quartis ® R2018-2 Table of Contents 13

WM | Quartis ® R2018-2 Table of Contents 14

WM | Quartis ® R2018-2 Table of Contents 15

WM | Quartis ® R2018-2 Table of Contents 16

24 Quick Selection Table 761

WM | Quartis ® R2018-2 Table of Contents 17

26 Feature Data 808

WM | Quartis ® R2018-2 Table of Contents 18

26.4 Check feature data .......................................................................................................................................... 809

28 General dialogs 816

29 Keyboard shortcuts 836

WM | Quartis ® R2018-2 Table of Contents 19

1 Fluent User Interface

Quartis button Element window

Quick access toolbar Workspace

Ribbon Status Window

WM | Quartis ® R2018-2 Fluent User Interface 20

1.1 Live preview

WM | Quartis ® R2018-2 Fluent User Interface 21

Overview Metrosoft Button

New Measurement database

Quick Selection Table

Quick Selection Table

WM | Quartis ® R2018-2 Quartis button 22

Feature and statistical data

Quick Selection Table

WM | Quartis ® R2018-2 Quartis button 23

Extras External Programs

WM | Quartis ® R2018-2 Quartis button 24

This function creates and activates a new measurement database.

1. Click on the Quartis button.

3. Click on Measurement database.

4. Enter a unique name for the new measurement database.